Lenze L-force 8400 Series Reference Manual Download Page 129

Page: 129 / 1590

Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23

129

Device control (DCTRL)

4.4

Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Option "Lock bFail at TroubleQSP"

The

TroubleQSP

device status gets active as soon as a monitoring function responds that has been

parameterised for the "TroubleQSP" error response. Since the

bFail

status output is not set in this

case, it is not recognisable after pulse inhibit due to e.g. automatic brake operation (as well for a

higher-level control), why the drive is standing und does not start when the setpoint is selected.

Only after an error reset, a setpoint is accepted again.

From version 11.00.00:

If the "Lock bFail at TroubleQSP" option is activated (bit 14 = "1") in

C00148

the

bFail

status output is also set to TRUE if the device status is

TroubleQSP

4.4.1

wCANControl/wMCIControl control words

The inverter is controlled by a master control (e.g. IPC) via the

wCanControl

wMCIControl

control

word, respectively.

•

wCANControl

: Control word via system bus (CAN)

• The process data word is provided at the

wCanControl

input via the upstream

LP_CanIn1

port

block.

• Display parameter:

C00136/2

•

wMCIControl

: Control word via a plugged-in communication module (e.g. PROFIBUS)

• The process data word is provided at the

wMCIControl

input via the upstream

LP_MciIn1

port

block.

• Display parameter:

C00136/1

• The bit assignment for the

wCanControl

wMCIControl

control words can be seen from the table

below.

Summary of Contents for L-force 8400 Series

Page 1: ...L Ä Vö ä 13539711 8400 Inverters Inverter Drives 8400 HighLine C_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Reference manual EN E84AVHCxxxxx ...

Page 2: ... Operating instructions MA for the communication module KHB Communication manual MA for the extension module MA Mounting instructions MA for the safety module SW Software reference manual MA for the accessories Parameter setting BA keypad SW 8400 BaseLine SW 8400 StateLine SW 8400 HighLine This documentation SW 8400 TopLine KHB for the communication module Drive commissioning SW 8400 BaseLine Stat...

Page 3: ...tion _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 50 3 Commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 51 3 1 Safety instructions with regard to commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 52 3 2 Notes on motor control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...

Page 4: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 113 4 2 2 Init _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 114 4 2 3 Ident _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 115 4 2 4 SafeTorqueOff _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 116 4 2 5 ReadyToSwitchOn _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 5: ...alog signal flow _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 193 5 7 2 Types of control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 195 5 7 2 1 Speed control with torque limitation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 195 5 7 2 2 Torque control with speed limitation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 196 5 7 3 Basic settings _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 6: ...coder inputs _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 280 5 11 2 Generation of the actual speed value _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 281 5 11 3 HTL encoder at DI1 DI2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 282 5 11 4 HTL encoder at DI6 DI7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 284 5 12 Position control addit...

Page 7: ...eption handling of the output terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 364 6 6 User defined terminal assignment _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 365 6 6 1 Source destination principle _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 366 6 6 2 Changing the terminal assignment with the keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 8: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ 454 7 4 3 6 PC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 455 7 4 3 7 CAN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 456 7 4 3 8 MCI _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 457 7 4 4 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 458 7 ...

Page 9: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 530 8 4 1 2 Feed constant _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 531 8 4 1 3 Activation of the modulo measuring system _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 532 8 4 2 Min Max speed _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 535 8 4 3 Limit position monitoring _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 10: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 597 8 9 2 Requesting the operating mode _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 597 8 10 Position follower _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 598 8 10 1 Parameter setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 599 8 10 1 1 Functional settings _ ...

Page 11: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 680 9 11 LS_SetError_2 system block _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 681 10 Oscilloscope function _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 682 10 1 Technical data _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 683 10 2 Operation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 12: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ 734 11 9 Parameter data transfer _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 736 11 9 1 Identifiers of the parameter data objects _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 737 11 9 2 User data _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 737 11 9 2 1 Command _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 13: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1159 15 5 Selection list digital signals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1165 15 6 Selection list angle signals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1172 15 7 Table of attributes _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1174 16 Working with t...

Page 14: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1248 17 1 2 L_Absolut_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1248 17 1 3 L_AddSub_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1249 17 1 4 L_AnalogSwitch_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...

Page 15: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1295 17 1 38 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1296 17 1 39 L_ConvDIntToWords_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1297 17 1 40 L_ConvDIntToWords_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1298 17 1 41 L_ConvDIntToWords...

Page 16: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1370 17 1 78 L_DigitalLogic_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1372 17 1 79 L_DigitalLogic_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1374 17 1 80 L_DigitalLogic5_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1376 ...

Page 17: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1432 17 1 116 L_Not_6 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1432 17 1 117 L_Not_7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1433 17 1 118 L_NSet_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1...

Page 18: ... _ _ _ 1495 17 1 148 L_RSFlipFlop_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1496 17 1 149 L_RSFlipFlop_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1497 17 1 150 L_SampleHold_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1498 17 1 151 L_SampleHold_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...

Page 19: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1544 17 2 22 LS_ParFree_p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1545 17 2 23 LS_ParFree_v _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1546 17 2 24 LS_ParFree_v_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1547 17 2 25 LS_Pa...

Page 20: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Index _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1563 Your opinion is important to us _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1589 ...

Page 21: ... provided in this documentation are application examples Depending on the software version of the inverter and the version of the Engineer software installed the screenshots in this documentation may differ from the representation in the Engineer Tip Information and tools regarding the Lenze products can be found on the Internet http www lenze com Download Danger The inverter is a source of danger...

Page 22: ...new functions for 8400 HighLine C V16 00 00 10 0 06 2014 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 HighLine C V15 00 00 9 0 11 2013 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 HighLine C V14 00 00 8 0 11 2012 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 HighLine C V13 00 00 and converted to new layout 7 1 09 2012 TD05 Error corrections supplements 7 0 08 2012 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 HighLine ...

Page 23: ...plies to or from a certain software version of the inverter is marked accordingly in this documentation Example This function extension is available from software version V3 0 Program name The Lenze Engineer PC software Window italics The message window The Options dialog box Variable names By setting bEnable to TRUE Control element Bold The OK button The Copy command The Properties tab The Name i...

Page 24: ... rotary or translatory masses in motion in a controlled manner The energy to be dissipated in this process is produced in the form of friction energy Unlike emergency braking this process is a regular and recurring operating mode CAN Abbreviation for Controller Area Network CAN is an asynchronous serial fieldbus system CANopen is a CAN based communication protocol The Lenze system bus CAN on board...

Page 25: ...efore take part in the data transfer of an existing fieldbus system Fieldbus interface MCI Emergency brake The emergency brake serves to shutdown rotary or translatory masses in motion in emergency situations Emergency situations are exceptional situations that only occur sporadically Port block Block for implementing the process data transfer via a fieldbus PROFIBUS Process Field Bus is fieldbus ...

Page 26: ...es the danger and gives information about how to prevent dangerous situations Pictograph Signal word Meaning Danger Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not taken Danger Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger Reference to an imminent ...

Page 27: ... EASY Starter or by the Engineer Access is also possible by a master control via fieldbus communication For this purpose the CAN on board CAN interface and the MCI interface for using a communication module e g PROFIBUS are available Danger In general changing a parameter causes an immediate response in the inverter An enabled inverter can cause an unwanted behaviour at the motor shaft For instanc...

Page 28: ...e solution via parameter setting Signal inputs for control and setpoint signals Signal flow of the integrated technology application see the following subchapter Signal outputs for status and actual value signals M M n t è ç 0 2 1 Switch off positioning Actuating drive speed Setpoint generator Process controller Motion Control Kernel Device control Motor control Signal inputs Signal outputs Parame...

Page 29: ...and torque control by means of AC Drive Profile The fieldbuses EtherNet IP and system bus CANopen are supported Technology application Table positioning This technology application serves to solve position controlled drive tasks which are normally controlled by a higher level control via a fieldbus e g transport facilities rotary tables storage and retrieval units feed drives metering units hoists...

Page 30: ...Engineer Commissioning via few operating and diagnosing parameters local keypad operation Achieving a transparency as high as possible via the integrated functionality of the device by representing signal flow diagrams Provision of a basic functionality suitable and often sufficient for many applications 2 1 2 Application cases for a technology application You should use a technology application i...

Page 31: ...ons integrated in the inverter can be reconfigured and extended by individual functions Moreover experienced users are offered the opportunity to implement their own drive solutions independent of the predefined technology applications by using so called free interconnections In case of StateLine C free interconnection is only possible from version 12 00 00 and Engineer V2 17 Motion control kernel...

Page 32: ...nd inverter the USB diagnostic adapter can be used for instance see the following subchapter Commissioning via keypad X400 or diagnosis terminal X400 The keypad is an alternative to the PC for the local operation parameterisation and diagnostics in a simple manner The keypad is especially suited for test and demonstration purposes and for the case that only few parameters have to be adapted Commis...

Page 33: ...rminal X400 Keypad X400 in a robust housing also suitable for installation into the control cabinet door Supports hot plugging Graphic display with plain texts Backlighting Easy user guidance 4 navigation keys 2 context sensitive keys Adjustable RUN STOP function Incl 2 5 m cable Enclosure IP20 in case of front installation in control cabinet IP65 Can be used for L force Inverter Drives 8400 and S...

Page 34: ...has a name and specific attributes as for example access type reading writing data type limit values and default setting Lenze setting For the sake of clarity some codes contain subcodes for saving parameters This Manual uses a slash as a separator between code and subcode e g C00118 3 According to their functionality the parameters are divided into three groups Setting parameters For specifying s...

Page 35: ...n LCD display Headline In the menu level Menu name In the parameter level Parameter name Three part display In the menu level List of available menus In the parameter level Code subcode and setting or actual value Device status Inverter is switched on Pulse inhibit active Inverter is enabled System fault active Inverter is inhibited Fault device status is active Quick stop active Trouble device st...

Page 36: ...ed in the keypad Service user level Only for the purpose of service Lenze Service After changing the user level the menus in the keypad are restructured according to the selected user level The parameters of plugged in communication module are always shown completely independent of the set user level Function left function key Function right function key Change parameter setting change to editing ...

Page 37: ...ation keys to select the parameter to be set within a submenu 3 In order to select another subcode in case of a parameter with subcodes Press the navigation key to change to the editing mode for the subcode Use the navigation keys to set the desired subcode 4 Use the function key to switch over to the editing mode 5 Use the navigation keys to set the desired value 6 Use the function key to accept ...

Page 38: ...iagnostic adapter is the connection between the PC free USB port and the inverter X6 diagnostic interface 2 3 Exemplary constellation for parameterising the inverter The All parameters tab in the EASY Starter and the Engineer provides a quick access to all parameters of the inverter The given categories and subcategories correspond 1 1 to the menus and submenus of the keypad 2 4 All parameters tab...

Page 39: ...oaded from the memory module into the main memory of the inverter Full functionality of the memory module is evenprovided if the power supply has been switched off and only the electronic components of the inverter are externally supplied by a 24 V DC voltage e g via the X4 24E terminal The memory module can be preconfigured with customised data The memory module is available as a spare part witho...

Page 40: ...lies Example of parameter set compatibilities Parameter sets of old devices can only be processed on new devices with the same or higher device version downward compatibility Parameter sets of devices with versions that have less functions e g 8400 StateLine can be loaded into and executed on devices with versions that have more functions e g 8400 HighLine The reverse is not possible If the parame...

Page 41: ...password protection serves to restrict the access to parameters of the user menu Then all other parameters cannot be accessed without knowing the password and are thus protected against unwanted changes Parameters Name Lenze setting C00051 MCTRL Actual speed value C00053 DC bus voltage C00054 Motor current C00061 Heatsink temperature C00137 Device status C00166 3 Mess status det error C00011 Appl ...

Page 42: ...eters of the inverter Non authorised persons without password knowledge can only access the max 32 parameters of the user menu Device personalisation Only inverters and memory modules personalised with a specific binding ID can be used in the system Note If password protection device personalisation is used Inform the end customer that Lenze can only provide restricted service for the devices with...

Page 43: ...vice The access to parameters of a plugged in communication module is not concerned Parameters Info Lenze setting C00505 3 Password The password must have a length of 4 16 characters The password may consist of any character However this is not sensible Recommended characters are lower case letters a z upper case letters A Z and digits 0 9 Note After the execution of one of the device commands lis...

Page 44: ... to temporarily deactivate the password protection in order to execute password protected functions The password protection remains deactivated until an invalid password will be entered and checked or the external 24 V supply of the control electronics is switched off 19 V How to temporarily deactivate the active password protection 1 Enter the set password in C00505 3 2 Execute Check password dev...

Page 45: ...els Internally via system blocks LS_ParReadWrite1 6 and LS_WriteParamList externally via Diagnostics interface X6 DIAG CANopen interface X1 CAN on board Fieldbus interface MCI As in some applications only certain communication channels have to be protected the parameters described in the following serve to configure individual access restrictions for each communication channel In the Lenze setting...

Page 46: ...ers Bit 1 Parameter write protection System blocks cannot be used to write into write read parameters Bit 2 Parameter read protection System blocks cannot be used to read write read parameters Bit 3 15 Reserved C00508 1 PW protection config X6 DIAG 0x0006 Bit 0 Reserved Bit 1 Parameter write protection The diagnostics interface X6 cannot be used to write into write read parameters Bit 2 Parameter ...

Page 47: ...initialisation the Fault error response is returned The PS10 Invalid memory module binding error message is entered into the logbook If a differing binding ID is detected while a device command for loading saving the parameter set is executed Loading saving is not executed A corresponding status for the device command is output in C00003 Short overview of the relevant parameters for device persona...

Page 48: ...D If you want to change the set binding ID first delete the set binding ID as well Then set the new binding ID How to delete the binding ID 1 Enter the set binding ID in C00505 2 If inverter and memory module do not have the same binding ID enter the binding ID of the memory module to delete the binding ID of both components 2 Execute Delete binding ID device command C00002 30 1 On start After a s...

Page 49: ... can be reset to the delivery status How to restore the delivery status 1 Inhibit the inverter if it is enabled e g via the C00002 16 device command 2 Enter the MasterPin in C00505 1 The MasterPin comprises the last 6 digits of the serial number of the memory module 3 Execute Check MasterPin device command C00002 28 1 On start Stop When the MasterPin is used the parameter set is reset to the Lenze...

Page 50: ...er in the Engineer is added to the project via the Insert Insert device detected online function the device name stored in C00199 1 here wheel drive is used as device designation in the Project view instead of the type 8400 HighLine This mechanism also functions in reverse direction If you rename the inverter in the project view via F2 you will be asked afterwards if you want to take over the chan...

Page 51: ...l parameter settings of the device to the Lenze setting This leaves you with a defined device configuration Load Lenze setting 103 Danger Unexpected motor movements can occur Under certain conditions the motor may rotate after mains connection Possible consequences Persons in the vicinity of the machine or plant risk getting hurt Unexpected starting action may damage the machine or plant Protectiv...

Page 52: ... the setting of the most important drive parameters before enabling the controller the V f rated frequency must be adapted to the motor circuit configuration the drive parameters relevant for your application must be set correctly the configuration of the I O terminals must be adapted to the wiring ensure that there are no active speed setpoints before enabling the controller Safety instructions w...

Page 53: ...works adequately without further parameterisation if an inverter and a 50 Hz asynchronous machine with matching performances are assigned to each other Recommendations for the following application cases If the inverter and motor differ greatly in terms of performance Set the Imax limit in motor mode in C00022 to 2x rated motor current If a high starting torque is required When the motor is idling...

Page 54: ...perating system from service pack 2 onwards or Windows XP the Lenze Engineer PC software a connection to the inverter e g via a USB diagnostic adapter connect the USB diagnostic adapter to the X6 diagnostic interface establish a connection between the USB diagnostic adapter and the PC via a free USB port Tip How to obtain update the Engineer software Download from the internet The full version of ...

Page 55: ...assignment tab displays the current input output signals Check the signal flow of the application For this purpose click the Signal flow button on the Application parameter tab The displayed signal flow shows active setpoints and their further processing Related topics Diagnostics error management 623 LED status displays 624 Error messages of the operating system 647 3 5 Commissioning wizard 8400 ...

Page 56: ...ine inverter 2 Going online After a connection to the inverter has been established the following status is displayed in the Status line 3 Click the icon to open the commissioning wizard 8400 dialog box Now the commissioning wizard guides you step by step through the setting of the important parameters for a quick commissioning The Next button can only be activated again after all parameter settin...

Page 57: ...er has been established the following status is displayed in the Status line 3 Click the symbol to inhibit the inverter via device command 4 Ensure that the following conditions are met The mains voltage is switched on No trouble is active Safe torque off STO is not active 5 Enable inverter via terminal Set terminal X5 RFR to HIGH level 6 Click the icon to open the Manual motor rotation indication...

Page 58: ...ission your inverter quickly and as safely as possible Prepare inverter for commissioning 59 Creating an Engineer project going online 60 Parameterising the motor control 61 Parameterise application 62 Save parameter settings safe against mains failure 64 Enable inverter and test application 64 Note Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following commissioning steps an...

Page 59: ... USB diagnostic adapter 5 Switch on voltage supply of the inverter Without motor operation Connect external 24 V supply With motor operation Connect mains voltage If the green DRV RDY LED is blinking and the red DRV ERR LED is off the inverter is ready for operation and commissioning can proceed Related topics Automatic restart after mains connection fault 123 LED status displays 624 Assignment of...

Page 60: ...ect the 8400 HighLine inverter In the Device modules step select the available communication module In the Application step select the Actuating drive speed application The application can also be selected any time afterwards via the Application parameter tab or C00005 Select the other components motor gearbox to be added to the project in the Other components dialog step 3 Going online After a co...

Page 61: ...the Application parameters tab from the Workspace The motor control parameters among other things can be found on the left 2 In the Motor control list field C00006 select the desired motor control 3 Adapt the motor control parameters Related topics Notes on motor control 53 Motor control MCTRL 134 Parameters Lenze setting Info Value Unit V f base frequency C00015 50 0 Hz Adapting the V f base freq...

Page 62: ... diagram is displayed in a pop up window if you click the button right to the list field For a detailed description see the chapter Terminal assignment of the control modes 385 2 Optional Use process controller For this purpose select the desired operating mode in the L_PCTRL_1 Operating mode list field C00242 For a detailed description see the L_PCTRL_1 function block 1461 Go to the parameterisat...

Page 63: ...rs short overview 396 Configuration parameters 398 Parameters Lenze setting Info Value Unit Accel time main setpoint C00012 2 000 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic The ramp function generator converts setpoint step changes at the input into a ramp L_NSet_1 1434 Decel time main setpoint C00013 2 000 s Reference speed C00011 1500 rpm All speed setpoint se...

Page 64: ... In the Terminal 0 control mode by selecting a voltage at the analog input via the setpoint potentiometer or by selecting a fixed setpoint via the digital DI1 DI2 inputs Stop Before stipulating a speed setpoint check whether the brake in the form of a holding brake on the motor shaft has been released Note If the controller is enabled at mains connection and C00142 has activated the Inhibit at pow...

Page 65: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tip Other control functions in the Terminal 0 control mode DI3 HIGH level Request DC injection braking DI4 HIGH level Request a change of direction of rotation Related topics Inhibit at power on auto start option 123 Trouble shooting during commissioning 55 Diagnostics error management 623 ...

Page 66: ...RFR Controller enable X5 DI1 Position encoder connection track A X5 DI2 Position encoder connection track B X5 DI3 Hardware limit switch connection in positive direction X5 DI4 Hardware limit switch connection in negative direction X5 DI5 DI6 Profile selection and change of operating mode at the same time 0 0 Profile selection 0 and request for Speed follower operating mode 0 1 Profile selection 1...

Page 67: ...tion of the commissioning steps of the Table positioning application shown in illustration 3 2 Please observe the sequence of the steps in the following chapters and follow them through carefully This will help you to commission your inverter quickly and as safely as possible Prepare inverter for commissioning 68 Creating an Engineer project going online 69 Parameterising the motor control 70 Para...

Page 68: ...on encoder and hardware limit switches shown in illustration 3 2 requires wiring according to control mode Terminals 0 3 Inhibit inverter Set terminal X5 RFR to LOW level or open contact 4 Connect USB diagnostic adapter 5 Switch on voltage supply of the inverter Without motor operation Connect external 24 V supply With motor operation Connect mains voltage If the green DRV RDY LED is blinking and ...

Page 69: ...ect the 8400 HighLine inverter In the Device modules step select the available communication module In the Application step select the Table positioning application The application can also be selected any time afterwards via the Application parameter tab or C00005 Select the other components motor gearbox to be added to the project in the Other components dialog step 3 Going online After a connec...

Page 70: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 8 3 Parameterising the motor control 1 Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace The motor control parameters among other things can be found on the left 2 In the Motor control list field C00006 select the desired motor control Related topics Notes on motor control 53 Motor control MCTRL 134 ...

Page 71: ...g in the Application list field C00005 if you have not already done so while creating the project After the Table positioning application is selected the contents of the tab change e g the Machine parameters and Profile entry buttons are shown now 2 In the Control mode list field C00007 the preset Terminals 0 control mode is already suitable for the system constellation shown in illustration 3 2 a...

Page 72: ...parameters 1 Go to the right side of the Application parameter tab and click the Machine parameter button to change to the Overview Machine parameter dialog level Note Setting the machine parameters is a basic prerequisite for the operating modes Homing Manual jog and Positioning The more precisely the machine parameters are set the better the results of positioning Detailed information on the mac...

Page 73: ... if motor mounting is mirrored Counter C01202 1 1 Gearbox factor motor Entry of the gearbox factor as numerator denominator ratio numerator motor speed and denominator output speed of gearbox or from the number of teeth of the gearbox arrangement Denominator C01202 2 1 Mounting direction Position encoder C01206 2 not inverted Inversion if position encoder mounting is mirrored Counter C01203 1 1 Ge...

Page 74: ...4 Set the number of position encoder increments in the Number of encoder increments at FreqIn12 input field C00420 1 5 In the Fct DI 1 2 100kHz list field C00115 1 select DI1 6 DI2 7 FreqIn 2 track This selection ensures that the digital DI1 and DI2 input terminals are configured as frequency inputs 6 Adapt the proportional gain Kp position controller C00115 1 if necessary This parameter can be fo...

Page 75: ...ming mode and hence the type of homing via the Homing mode button or directly in the Homing mode list field C01221 A graphic display of all possible homing modes can be seen via the Homing mode button In this system constellation without touch probe the preset _Lp mode can be used movement in positive direction positive edge of the limit switch sets reference 3 Set the position to be used for load...

Page 76: ...can also leave the travel range limit switch There follows a return to the home position that was set with the positive edge of the travel range limit switch 5 Set suitable profile parameters for the homing 6 After setting the parameters for the homing click the Back button to change back to the Overview Signal flow dialog level Parameters Lenze setting Info Value Unit S ramp time C01226 1 0 000 s...

Page 77: ...umber 3 in the Profile number list field to enter a positioning profile which can be selected via digital inputs DI5 and DI6 You can find detailed information on entering profiles in the chapter entitled Basic drive functions subchapter Profile entry 586 Note In the Lenze setting the profiles are assigned to certain operating modes i e the selection of a profile also results in a change of operati...

Page 78: ... unit s2 Specification of the velocity variation which is to be used for maximum deceleration to standstill Profile x S ramp time C01306 x 0 000 s Due to stipulation of an S ramp time for a profile the profile is executed with S shaped ramps i e acceleration and braking processes are initiated smoothly in order to reduce jerk and thus the stress on the drive components Profile x Final speed C01305...

Page 79: ...n the device Save parameter set 3 8 6 Enable inverter and test application If the inverter is in the SwitchedOn state 1 Enable inverter Set terminal X5 RFR to HIGH level or close contact If there is no other active source for the controller inhibit the inverter changes from the SwitchedOn status to the OperationEnabled status The Diagnostics tab and C00158 display all active sources for the contro...

Page 80: ...sExecute 3 Complete homing when home position has been reached Reset digital input DI7 to LOW level Positioning 1 Request positioning mode Set both digital inputs DI5 and DI6 to HIGH level to select the profile 3 and request the positioning mode at the same time 2 Start positioning Set digital input DI7 to HIGH level alternative function PosExecute 3 Complete positioning if target position has bee...

Page 81: ...autions before you carry out the following commissioning steps and switch the device on Safety instructions with regard to commissioning 52 System constellation X4 RFR Controller enable X5 DI1 Initiator connection for stop function 1 X5 DI2 Initiator connection for stop function 2 X5 DI3 Quick stop for CW rotation selection of switch off position 1 X5 DI4 Quick stop for CCW rotation selection of s...

Page 82: ...itioning inaccuracy due to signal propagation delays the initiators can be directly evaluated by the inverter Limit switch evaluation can be configured in the inverter In code C00488 x you can change the method of detecting position signals from level evaluation to edge evaluation In order to prevent unintended movements of the load in the target position the use of a holding brake is recommended ...

Page 83: ...itch off positioning without pre switch off wiring according to the Terminals 2 control mode makes sense 3 Inhibit inverter Set terminal X5 RFR to LOW level or open contact 4 Connect USB diagnostic adapter 5 Switch on voltage supply of the inverter Without motor operation Connect external 24 V supply With motor operation Connect mains voltage If the green DRV RDY LED is blinking and the red DRV ER...

Page 84: ...ect the 8400 HighLine inverter In the Device modules step select the available communication module In the Application step select the Switch off positioning application The application can also be selected any time afterwards via the Application parameter tab or C00005 Select the other components motor gearbox to be added to the project in the Other components dialog step 3 Going online After a c...

Page 85: ...the Application parameters tab from the Workspace The motor control parameters among other things can be found on the left 2 In the Motor control list field C00006 select the desired motor control 3 Adapt the motor control parameters Related topics Notes on motor control 53 Motor control MCTRL 134 Parameters Lenze setting Info Value Unit V f base frequency C00015 50 0 Hz Adapting the V f base freq...

Page 86: ...t the Switch off positioning application if you have not already done so while creating the project After the Switch off positioning application is selected the contents of the tab change e g the Process controller and Motor potentiometer buttons are not shown any more 2 In the Control mode list field C00007 and in case of illustration 3 3 for the shown switch off positioning without pre switch of...

Page 87: ...ces application block LA_SwitchPos 467 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication 484 Terminal assignment of the control modes 475 Setting parameters short overview 486 Configuration parameters 488 Parameters Lenze setting Info Value Unit Accel time main setpoint C00012 2 000 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic The ramp function generator converts...

Page 88: ... source for the controller inhibit the inverter changes from the SwitchedOn status to the OperationEnabled status The Diagnostics tab and C00158 display all active sources for the controller inhibit 2 Select the respective control signals via the digital inputs Related topics Inhibit at power on auto start option 123 Trouble shooting during commissioning 55 Diagnostics error management 623 Stop Be...

Page 89: ...ol of various drive functions from the Engineer Supported drive functions Speed control follow speed setpoint Activate deactivate quick stop Set reset home position Manual jog Positioning relative or absolute More control functions Reset error message Set digital analog outputs in preparation Diagnostic functions Display of the actual speed value and motor current as time characteristic Display of...

Page 90: ... the note and activate PC manual control Click the Activate PC manual control button The inverter is inhibited via device command C00002 16 The PC manual control operator dialog is displayed Note With active PC manual control The online connection between PC and controller is monitored by the inverter If the online connection is interrupted longer than the timeout time set Lenze setting 2 s The er...

Page 91: ...ntrol operator dialog contains several tabs for selecting the various control functions and the right side contains setpoint and status displays for diagnostic purposes The different versions are described in the following chapters Note PC manual control can be exited any time by clicking the Close button If you exit PC manual control or change to another tab the inverter is inhibited via device c...

Page 92: ...rently set speed setpoint can be reduced increased in steps of 10 percent or set to zero Via the Set setpoint A B buttons the speed setpoint can be set to a previously set constant value A B 2 To start the speed follower Enable the inverter via the Enable controller button Please observe that the inverter will not be enabled if other sources of controller inhibit e g RFR terminal are active The en...

Page 93: ..._ _ _ _ _ Further functions If the Set quick stop QSP button is clicked the motor is braked to a standstill within the deceleration time parameterised in C00105 Via the Deactivate quick stop QSP button the quick stop can be deactivated Via the CCW and CW buttons the direction of rotation can be changed The speed follower operating mode can be activated via the second Positioning tab without the fu...

Page 94: ...rence manually with standing drive Click the Set reference button The current actual position in the machine measuring system now corresponds to the home position set in C01227 2 Lenze setting 0 0000 units Detailed information on the Homing operating mode is provided in chapter Basic drive functions in subchapter Homing 553 Stop If you set the reference with PC manual control the drive is referenc...

Page 95: ...se observe that the inverter will not be enabled if other sources of controller inhibit e g RFR terminal are active If the inverter is in the OperationEnabled device status 2 Press the Left or Right button and keep it pressed to traverse the drive with the corresponding direction of rotation You can find detailed information on the Manual jog mode in the chapter entitled Basic drive functions in t...

Page 96: ...arameters Lenze setting Info Value Unit Position C01301 1 15 360 0000 units Target position or distance to be traversed With Relative positioning Distance to starting position current position With Absolute positioning Distance to defined zero position Velocity C01302 1 15 360 0000 units s Maximum velocity at which the target is to be approached Acceleration C01303 1 15 720 0000 units s2 Specifica...

Page 97: ...tioning 1 Select the profile to be executed 1 15 in the Profile number list field 2 If the inverter is still inhibited enable the inverter via the Enable controller button Please observe that the inverter will not be enabled if other sources of controller inhibit e g RFR terminal are active If the inverter is in the OperationEnabled device status 3 Press the Run POS button to start positioning The...

Page 98: ...control causes the inverter to take defined device statuses The device control provides a multitude of status information in many ways Visually via the LED status displays on the front of the inverter 625 As text messages in the Logbook 632 As process signals via the outputs of the LS_DriveInterface system block 126 Via diagnostic display parameters which are included in the Engineer parameter lis...

Page 99: ... Drive interface button Parameterisation dialog in the Engineer The parameterisation dialog shows the input output signals and the internal signal flow of the LS_DriveInterface system block which displays the device control in the function block editor Range Meaning Display parameter Display of the control word via system bus CAN C00136 2 Display of the control word via communication module e g PR...

Page 100: ...fter being called in C00002 x these device commands provide dynamic status information Work in progress 20 Work in progress 40 etc The execution of the device command has not finished successfully until the Off ready status information is provided in C00002 x In the event of an error the Action cancelled status information is provided in C00002 x In this case further details can be obtained from t...

Page 101: ... C00002 x Some of the frequently used device commands such as Save parameter set can also be executed via the Toolbar icons of the Engineer when an online connection has been established Symbol Function Enable inverter Inhibit inverter Save parameter set for 8400 Save all parameter sets Note Device commands that can be executed via the Toolbar of the Engineer always affect the element currently se...

Page 102: ...ctivate deactivate quick stop static 19 Reset error static 21 Delete logbook static 27 Device search function from version 06 00 00 static C00002 Subcode Device command Controller inhibit required Status information 23 Identify motor parameters Automatic motor data identification dynamic 26 CAN reset node Reinitialising the CANopen interface static 28 Check MasterPin from version 06 00 00 Unlockin...

Page 103: ... on the settings of the parameters of the operating system application and module How to load the Lenze setting 1 If the inverter is enabled it must be inhibited e g by executing the Enable Inhibit inverter device command C00002 16 0 Off ready 2 Execute the Load Lenze setting device command C00002 1 1 On start The loading process may take a couple of seconds After the device command has been calle...

Page 104: ...art The loading process may take a couple of seconds After the device command has been called C00002 6 returns dynamic status information Work in progress 20 Work in progress 40 Work in progress 60 etc Notes on execution time The execution time of this device command depends on the communication module used If in addition to the device internal time monitoring a monitoring of the execution time is...

Page 105: ... 1 1 On start resets the parameter settings to the delivery status of the device Notes on execution time The execution time of this device command depends on the communication module used If in addition to the device internal time monitoring a monitoring of the execution time is to be implemented for this device command in a higher level control the monitoring time has to be 2 3 times higher than ...

Page 106: ... the flying restart circuit is activated in C00990 the flying restart function parameterised in C00991 is used for the synchronisation to the rotary or standing drive Flying restart function 264 In the case of an operation with feedback the actual speed is read out by the encoder system In the case of a sensorless vector control SLVC the actual speed from the motor model of the motor control is us...

Page 107: ...urther options for the quick stop function can be activated in C00104 1 Optional settings 108 C00159 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources triggers of a quick stop Deactivate quick stop again The C00002 17 0 Off ready device command deactivates the quick stop again provided that no other source of a quick stop is active Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00105 Decel time...

Page 108: ...ntrol is activated while ramping down The basic conditions are shown in the Flow diagram for the quick stop function More conditions for a proper function The inputs nPosCtrlOutLimit_a and nPosCtrlPAdapt_a at the LS_MotorInterface system block have to be set to 100 default setting for all technology applications Continue following error from version 15 00 00 If bit 2 is set in C00104 1 the current...

Page 109: ...00490 Position encoder is running no open circuit Although the use of 2 track HTL encoders is possible the error detection system of the encoder always returns OK as error status Speed encoder signal ok Quick stop or TroubleQSP requested Position encoder signal ok No Use position encoder C00104 1 Bit 4 Motor rotates Motor rotates Scaling limitation C01247 Bit 9 Ramp position controlled C00104 1 Bi...

Page 110: ...ges an existing error message if the error cause has been eliminated and thus the error is no longer pending After the reset acknowledgement of the current error further errors may be pending which must also be reset The status determining error is displayed in C00168 The current error is displayed in C00170 Tip An error message can also be acknowledged by activating the Reset error button in the ...

Page 111: ...tension is available from version 06 00 00 In some applications where inverters are installed in control cabinets or are positioned in a spacious plant it is often difficult to locate a device connected online for e g maintenance work There is an established online connection with the device but you do not know where the inverter is located physically The C00002 27 1 On start device command serves...

Page 112: ...next depends on certain control signals e g for controller inhibit and quick stop and status parameters The arrows between the device states mark possible state changes The digits stand for the status ID see table below Device state machine Grey field Pulse inhibit Can be reached from all statuses Warning contradicts the definition of a device status In fact it is a message which is to call attent...

Page 113: ... table below 4 1 Device statuses priorities and meaning of the status bits in the status word 4 2 1 FirmwareUpdate ID Device status Display in C00137 Priority Status bits Display in C00150 Meaning Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 0 FirmwareUpdate 0 0 0 0 Firmware update function is active 1 Init 0 0 0 1 Initialisation active 2 Ident 0 0 1 0 Identification active 3 ReadyToSwitchOn Prio 5 0 0 1 1 Device is...

Page 114: ...ly The inverter is inhibited i e the motor terminals U V W of the inverter are deenergised The digital and analog inputs are not yet evaluated at this time The bus systems CAN PROFIBUS etc do not work yet i e communication is not possible The application is not yet processed The monitoring functions are not active yet The inverter cannot be parameterised yet and no device commands can be carried o...

Page 115: ... be inhibited first so that identification can be started afterwards via the corresponding device command After the motor parameter identification is completed the status changes back to SwitchedOn DRV RDY LED LED DRV ERR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 C00150 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 OFF Ident 0 0 1 0 Device command Function Detailed information C00002 23 Identify motor parameters Aut...

Page 116: ... state If the inverter is switched off by the safety system the device changes to the SafeTorqueOff status If the safety system deactivates the Safe torque off STO request the device changes to the ReadyToSwitchOn status DRV RDY LED LED DRV ERR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 C00150 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 OFF SafeTorqueOff 1 0 1 0 Note Up to and including version 13 xx xx the followi...

Page 117: ...eadyToSwitchOn 0 0 1 1 Note The ReadyToSwitchOn state is not only activated after the mains connection but also after the deactivation of Trouble Fault or SafeTorqueOff If C00142 activates the autostart option Inhibit at power on Lenze setting explicit deactivation of the controller inhibit after mains connection is always required for the inverter to change from the ReadyToSwitchOn status to the ...

Page 118: ...lows the setpoint defined by the active application Tip C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources triggers of a controller inhibit Depending on certain conditions a status change takes place based on the SwitchedOn device status Related topics wCANControl wMCIControl control words 129 DRV RDY LED LED DRV ERR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 C00150 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit...

Page 119: ...d the motor follows the setpoint determined by the active application Depending on certain conditions a status change takes place based on the OperationEnabled device status Related topics wCANControl wMCIControl control words 129 DRV RDY LED LED DRV ERR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 C00150 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 OFF OperationEnabled 0 1 0 1 Change condition Changeover to the devic...

Page 120: ...ong as the error is pending and has not been acknowledged the status is changed back to the TroubleQSP status when the controller is enabled afterwards Depending on certain conditions a status change takes place based on the TroubleQSP device status Related topics wCANControl wMCIControl control words 129 Basics on error handling in the inverter 623 Error messages of the operating system 647 DRV R...

Page 121: ...MCIControl control words 129 Basics on error handling in the inverter 623 Error messages of the operating system 647 DRV RDY LED LED DRV ERR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 C00150 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 OFF Trouble 0 1 1 1 Note If in C00142 the Inhibit at trouble is activated explicit deactivation of the controller inhibit is required before this status can be abandoned Change condit...

Page 122: ...em 647 4 2 11 SystemFault This device state is not used since the inverter lacks the activating event This device status becomes active if a system fault occurs The device status can only be abandoned by mains switching or a system restart DRV RDY LED LED DRV ERR Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 C00150 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 OFF Fault 1 0 0 0 Note If an undervoltage in the DC bus of t...

Page 123: ...hree cases describe the behaviour of the inverter after mains connection depending on whether the controller is enabled and the set auto start option Here it is assumed that after mains connection no errors and trouble occur in the inverter and the EnableOperation control bit in the wDriveControl is set to 1 Auto start option C00142 Lenze setting Bit 0 Inhibit at power on auto start option 1 Inhib...

Page 124: ...ctivated If the controller is enabled at mains connection and the auto start option Inhibit at power on is activated the inverter remains in the ReadyToSwitchOn status For changing to the SwitchedOn status the controller enable must first be deactivated Only when the controller is enabled again afterwards the status changes to OperationEnabled Case 3 Controller enable at mains connection and Inhib...

Page 125: ... Behaviour with activated auto start option Inhibit at Lenze setting C00142 Bit 4 1 4 2 Example 2 Behaviour with deactivated auto start option Inhibit at Lenze setting C00142 Bit 4 0 Loading of the Lenze setting not possible since controller inhibit not set Controller inhibit via signal change by the user Loading of the Lenze setting via device command C00002 1 1 Controller enable via signal chang...

Page 126: ... E DLO E ROOHFWHG DLO E6DIHW V FWLYH E PS V FWLYH E QK V FWLYH E Z FZ E1DFW RPSDUH Z HYLFH6WDWXV RUG E QK E DLO5HVHW LW 21752 25 6ZLWFK2Q LVDEOH9ROWDJH 6HW4XLFNVWRS QDEOH2SHUDWLRQ 0RGH6SHFLILFB 0RGH6SHFLILFB 0RGH6SHFLILFB 5HVHW DLO 6HW DOW UHVHUYHGB UHVHUYHGB HQ H6SHFLILFB HQ H6SHFLILFB HQ H6SHFLILFB 6HW DLO HQ H6SHFLILFB LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW LW 67 786 25 UHH6WDWXV LW 3RZHU...

Page 127: ... its control word by a plugged in communication module The process data word is provided at this input by the upstream port block LP_MciIn1 For a detailed description of the individual control bits see chapter wCANControl wMCIControl control words 129 bCInh C00833 36 BOOL Enable inhibit inverter 106 FALSE Enable inverter The inverter switches to the OperationEnabled device status if no other sourc...

Page 128: ...The bus transfer of the error numbers is possible via a data word without changing the interconnection of the technology application wStateDetermFailNoHigh WORD Display of the status determining error 32 bit error number High Word wStateDetermFailNoShort WORD from version 06 00 00 Display of the status determining error 16 bit error number bInit BOOL TRUE Init device state is active bSafeTorqueOff...

Page 129: ...setpoint is selected Only after an error reset a setpoint is accepted again From version 11 00 00 If the Lock bFail at TroubleQSP option is activated bit 14 1 in C00148 the bFail status output is also set to TRUE if the device status is TroubleQSP 4 4 1 wCANControl wMCIControl control words The inverter is controlled by a master control e g IPC via the wCanControl or wMCIControl control word respe...

Page 130: ...t is sufficient to set the bit to 0 in one of the two control words Up to and including version 05 00 00 the following applies This bit must be set in the CAN OR MCI control word in order that the drive changes to the SwitchedOn state after mains connection Bit 1 DisableVoltage 1 Inhibit inverter control pulse inhibit Bit 2 SetQuickStop Activate quick stop QSP Activate deactivate quick stop 107 Bi...

Page 131: ...sabled 1 Inverter control inhibited pulse inhibit is active Bit 2 FreeStatusBit2 Free status bit 2 not assigned freely assignable Bit 3 FreeStatusBit3 Free status bit 3 not assigned freely assignable Bit 4 FreeStatusBit4 Free status bit 4 not assigned freely assignable Bit 5 FreeStatusBit5 Free status bit 5 not assigned freely assignable Bit 6 ActSpeedIsZero During open loop operation 1 Speed setp...

Page 132: ...ications Via C1704 various functions can be utilised in a user defined fashion bringing the energy consumption of the inverter down to a minimum value inhibiting the power output stages controller inhibit entering the energy saving mode using quick stop switching off the LEDs switching off all outputs If the use of the energy saving mode is not desired C1704 provides the possibility of inhibiting ...

Page 133: ...d with the command 2 If the sum of the times set in C1701 1 C1702 1 and C1703 1 is smaller than the dead time requested the inverter starts entering the energy saving mode 3 Via a Pause End command this operating status can be exited again To transfer the information to the FB application the operating system requires a delay time of 5 ms TtP Time to pause C01702 1 Time required for entering the e...

Page 134: ...plus V f characteristic control energy saving VFCplusEco V f control VFCplus encoder Sensorless vector control SLVC Sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM Servo control SC Parameterisable additional functions Selection of switching frequency Operation with increased rated power Flying restart function DC injection braking Slip compensation Oscillation damping Phase sequence reversal for c...

Page 135: ...elect the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace 3 Go to the Overview dialog level and click the following button Parameterisation dialog in the Engineer Via the From Motor Catalogue button the motor catalogue can be opened to select another motor Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the Engineer 139 Via the From inverter button the motor data se...

Page 136: ... rated motor frequency with a decimal position e g motor nameplate data 23 7 Hz Up to and including version 11 xx xx the following motor nameplate data must be increased by a factor of 10 C00089 Rated motor frequency a value of 23 7 Hz for instance must be increased to 237 Hz C00081 Rated motor power C00087 Rated motor speed C00090 Rated motor voltage From version 12 00 00 the rated motor frequenc...

Page 137: ...ntry from the Motor selection dialog box afterwards For this purpose the data of the motor nameplate and the equivalent circuit diagram must be available Tip For a better concentricity factor we recommend to perform motor parameter identification of the third party manufacturer s motor first The motor parameters can be manually adapted afterwards Improving the concentricity factor includes the adj...

Page 138: ...ance C00082 Motor rotor resistance C00095 Motor magnetising current C00092 Motor magnetising inductance C00015 VFC V f base frequency C00021 Slip compensation C00070 1 SLVC Vp speed controller C00071 1 SLVC Ti speed controller C00075 Vp current controller C00076 Ti current controller C00273 Moment of inertia C00016 VFC Vmin boost C00070 2 SC Vp speed controller C00071 2 SC Ti speed controller C000...

Page 139: ...control mode e g V f base frequency thus also have an according influence on synchronous motors 5 1 1 Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the Engineer If you when inserting the inverter into the project in the dialog step Other components put a checkmark in the control field Motor you can select as a further dialog step the motor for the inverter from the motor catalogue Alternatively th...

Page 140: ...e inverter The listed motor parameters are already optimally preset for the selected Lenze motor An adaptation is not required The plant parameter term comprises all parameters that result from the combination of motor and load These characterise the transfer behaviour of the entire controlled system The plant parameters depend on the application in which the inverter and motor are used When a Len...

Page 141: ...essful motor parameter identification the current controller and field controller parameters listed in the below table are calculated as well If these parameters are not to be calculated bit 4 of C02865 1 must be set to 1 Note We strongly recommend motor parameter identification before the initial commissioning of the sensorless vector control SLVC and the sensorless control for synchronous motors...

Page 142: ...in C00919 1 If the mass inertia set in C00273 is too low the speed controller parameters are calculated less dynamically If the mass inertia set in C00273 is too high speed controller operation is unstable If the mass inertia in C00273 is set to 0 the setting of bit 5 in C02865 has no effect on the speed controller parameter calculation In this case the speed controller parameters will not be calc...

Page 143: ...ynchronous motors The motor magnetising inductance C00092 and the motor rotor resistance C00082 are measured The motor magnetising current C00095 is measured From version 12 00 00 8 If C02865 1 bit 4 0 Lenze setting The current controller and field controller parameters are calculated See table 9 If C02865 1 bit 5 1 The speed controller parameters are calculated See table 10 If C02865 1 bit 6 1 Ot...

Page 144: ... is selected in C02867 1 This setting ensures that the inverter automatically selects the optimum procedure for motor parameter identification Preconditions for executing the motor parameter identification The motor parameter identification must be carried out when the motor is cold The load machine may remain connected Holding brakes if present may remain in the braking position In case of a sync...

Page 145: ...stability and accuracy of the drive behaviour because the rated speed specified on the motor nameplate often is rather inaccurate The available motor cable must be specified in terms of length and cross section The motor cable resistance resulting from these settings is displayed in C00917 For the measurement of the required variables the motor is energised via the inverter terminals U V and W dur...

Page 146: ... frequency of 4 kHz is recommended for the motor parameter identification as it serves to obtain the most accurate results Premature abort of the motor parameter identification The motor parameter identification can be aborted in the following cases If a special motor e g mid frequency motor or a servo motor is used If there is a large deviation between inverter and motor power In case of a simple...

Page 147: ... The inverter changes to the Ident device status Motor parameter identification starts The progress of the identification run can be seen in C00002 23 The identification is completed if the 0 Off ready message is displayed in C00002 23 After successful identification it changes back to the SwitchedOn device status 3 Inhibit inverter again Danger During motor parameter identification the motor is e...

Page 148: ...set for an asynchronous motor ASM in C00087 which corresponds to a very high slip speed the number of motor pole pairs is identified incorrectly Moreover a synchronous motor is PSM is detected instead of an asynchronous motor ASM In this case the Id7 error message can occur since motor and motor control type do not match Examples possible impacts and remedies are described in the following section...

Page 149: ...chronous motors is preset The control mode can be selected in the Engineer on the Application parameter tab via the Motor control C00006 list field A click on the Motor control button leads you to the parameterisation dialog of the selected motor control The button is labelled according to the selected motor control Tip In order to make the selection of the motor control easier we provide a select...

Page 150: ... characteristic control mode VFCplus this motor control mode uses a cosϕ control in partial load operational range to automatically reduce the power loss in the asynchronous motor energy optimisation The motor data required for the cosϕ control and the V min boost C00016 and slip compensation C00021 required for optimising the drive behaviour are dimensioned for asynchronous motors with power adap...

Page 151: ...de for speed actuated operation Tip If a high torque without feedback is to be provided at small speeds we recommend the Sensorless vector control motor control mode Sensorless vector control SLVC 192 Sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM From version 10 00 00 This sensorless control enables an encoderless control of synchronous motors The process is based on field oriented control withi...

Page 152: ...vec093 Operation in motor mode CW rotation Operation in generator mode CCW rotation Operation in motor mode CCW rotation Operation in generator mode CW rotation Sensorless vector control SLVC Sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM 9300vec095 Operation in motor mode CW rotation Operation in generator mode CCW rotation Operation in motor mode CCW rotation Operation in generator mode CW rota...

Page 153: ...aracteristic VFCplus V f linear Pump and fan drives with quadratic load characteristic VFCplus U f square law From version 10 00 00 onwards VFCplusEco SLVC or SLPSM Simple hoists VFCplus V f linear Group drives several motors connected to inverter Identical motors and loads VFCplus V f linear Different motors and or alternating loads VFCplus V f linear Application recommended Alternatively Single ...

Page 154: ...ctive application Lenze recommendation Reference speed C00011 1500 3000 rpm Irrespective of the selected motor control there are more limitation options Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00909 1 Max positive speed 120 C00909 2 Max negative speed 120 C00910 1 Max positive output frequency 1000 Hz C00910 2 Max negative output frequency 1000 Hz Note In the torque controlled operation bTorquem...

Page 155: ...y changing loads The overcurrent disconnection may respond fault message oC1 or oC11 if the setting of the maximum current in motor mode in C00022 approximately corresponds to the maximum permissible value of the respective inverter Remedies Increase of the acceleration and deceleration ramp times Reduction of the maximum current in motor mode C00022 Reduction of the maximum current in generator m...

Page 156: ...ontrol VFCplus encoder Reduce the slip limitation to twice the rated motor slip with C00971 Reduce the Vmin boost in C00016 Sensorless vector control SLVC Reduce the slip compensation with C00021 Reduce the limitation of the torque in motor mode via nTorqueMotLimit_a C00728 1 and the limitation of the torque in generator mode via nTorqueGenLimit_a C00728 2 Servo control SC Reduce the jerk limitati...

Page 157: ... V f characteristic control VFCplusEco Alternatively you can use the V f characteristic control with linear V f characteristic or the sensorless vector control SLVC or servo control SC For adjustment observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous motor at low output frequencies Usually standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be operated for a short time with their r...

Page 158: ...uadr for square law characteristic More available V f characteristic control modes 10 VFCplus U f definable from version 04 00 00 onwards With this motor control the V f characteristic can be freely defined Defining a user defined V f characteristic 171 11 VFCplusEco V f energy saving from version 10 00 00 onwards With this motor control the motor is always operated in an optimal efficiency range ...

Page 159: ...eed value 19 C00058 Output frequency 3 C00830 28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 15 C00050 Speed setpoint 20 C00006 Motor control 4 C00054 Motor current 16 C00910 1 Max pos output frequency 21 C00830 26 MCTRL nBoost_a 5 C00022 Imax in motor mode 17 C00910 2 Max neg output frequency 22 C00015 V f base frequency 6 C00023 Imax in generator mode 23 C00016 Vmin boost 7 C00074 Ti Imax controller ...

Page 160: ...w are sufficient for a simple characteristic control Detailed information on the individual steps can be found in the following subchapters Tip Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real application is provided in chapter Optimising the control mode 163 Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter Parameterisable addition...

Page 161: ...Principle of a linear V f characteristic on the left and a quadratic V f characteristic on the right 4 Linear V f characteristic with voltage reduction from version 10 00 00 onwards For drives which often work in partial load operation the energy saving V f characteristic control VFCplusEco offers the opportunity to reduce the voltage at low load in order to save energy At higher loads the voltage...

Page 162: ...leration The inverter prolongs the acceleration ramp to keep the current on or below the current limit Generator overload during deceleration The inverter prolongs the acceleration ramp to keep the current on or below the current limit Increasing load with constant speed If the motor current limit value is reached The inverter reduces the effective speed setpoint until a stable working point is se...

Page 163: ...cteristic 171 Adapting drive behaviour Limitation of the maximum current by a current limitation controller e g to prevent the motor from stalling or to limit to the maximally permissible motor current Optimising the Imax controller 167 Adaptation of the field frequency by a load dependent slip compensation improved speed accuracy for systems without feedback Adaptation of the controller parameter...

Page 164: ...tage compensation of the device Depending on the setting in C00015 it may be required to adapt the reference speed C00011 to traverse the entire speed range of the motor The V f base frequency is automatically calculated from the stored motor nameplate data by the motor parameter identification 5 4 Calculation of the V f base frequency Typical values of the V f base frequency VFI Mains voltage 400...

Page 165: ...are designed for a rated frequency of f 50 Hz in star connection can be operated in delta connection when being constantly excited up to f 87 Hz Advantages Higher speed setting range 73 higher power output in case of standard motors Motor current and motor power increase by the factor The field weakening range starts above 87 Hz Generally this process can also be used with motors which have differ...

Page 166: ... 5 Representation of the linear V f characteristic on the left and quadratic V f characteristic on the right Designator DIS code data type Information possible settings nBoost_a C00830 26 INT Process signal for the Vmin boost This signal is added to C00016 and has thus an increasing or decreasing effect This signal serves to implement a load dependent Vmin boost to improve the torque behaviour in ...

Page 167: ...st be adapted if power control including great moments of inertia is performed Recommendation Increase of the reset time Ti C00074 1 of the Imax controller vibrations occur in the V f control VFCplus encoder mode during the intervention of the current limitation controller Recommendation Increase of the reset time Ti C00074 1 of the Imax controller overcurrent errors e g OC3 occur due to load impu...

Page 168: ...ase frequency the DC bus voltage and the maximum current C00022 Generally it applies that a higher field frequency causes a stronger limitation of the maximum current The behaviour in the field weakening range can be adapted via the override point of field weakening C00080 This parameter serves to shift the frequency dependent maximum current characteristic C00080 0 Hz The maximum current characte...

Page 169: ...ignator DIS code data type Information possible settings nTorqueMotLimit_a C00830 29 INT Torque limitation in motor mode Scaling 16384 100 Mmax C00057 Setting range 0 199 99 If keypad control is performed Parameterisable via C00728 1 nTorqueGenLimit_a C00830 28 INT Torque limitation in generator mode Scaling 16384 100 Mmax C00057 Setting range 199 99 0 If keypad control is performed Parameterisabl...

Page 170: ...coder The slip speed of the motor is available at the slip controller output This leads to a high accuracy for the actual torque C00056 2 and the torque limitation 5 6 Extract from the signal flow of the V f control VFC encoder Parameters Info Parameters Info 1 C00056 2 Actual torque value 9 C00830 22 MCTRL nSpeedSetValue_a 2 C00830 29 Limitation of torque in motor mode 10 C00909 1 Max pos speed 3...

Page 171: ... be achieved indirectly by ascribing the same voltage and frequency values to consecutive grid points Example C00967 3 C00967 4 and C00968 3 C00968 4 The grid points can be specified in any sequence Internally they are automatically ordered from the minimum to the maximum frequency value Above the maximum and below the minimum frequency the previous rise is continued until the maximum output volta...

Page 172: ...for the motor depending on specific load conditions Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control 1 Engineer Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace 3 Select the motor control 10 VFCplus V f definable from the Overview dialog box in the Motor control list field 4 Click the Motor control V f...

Page 173: ... 14 C00051 Actual speed value 19 C00968 x Voltage interpol points 3 C00830 28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 15 C00050 Speed setpoint 20 C00056 2 Actual torque value 4 C00054 Motor current 16 C00910 1 Max pos output frequency 21 C00058 Output frequency 5 C00022 Imax in motor mode 17 C00910 2 Max neg output frequency 22 C00018 Switching frequency 6 C00023 Imax in generator mode 23 C00830 32...

Page 174: ... to 0 1 0 2 s Increase the maximally permissible current C00022 Imax in motor mode C00023 Imax in generator mode For operation without speed feedback C00006 6 Insufficient speed constancy at high load setpoint and motor speed are not proportional anymore Increase slip compensation C00021 Important Unstable drive due to overcompensation With cyclic load impulses e g centrifugal pump a smooth motor ...

Page 175: ...Same speed accuracy and maximum torques as with VFCplus Less noise generation of the motor with active voltage reduction Predestinated application areas of this motor control mode are materials handling technology and pump and fan systems This motor control mode serves to improve efficiency of standard asynchronous motors with efficiency class IE1 standard IEC 60034 30 2008 in the range 0 Mefficie...

Page 176: ...r control V f dialog box This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters When you click the More details button in the left most position a signal flow with more details parameters is displayed Stop For adjustment observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous motor at low output frequencies Usually standard asynchronous motors with insulatio...

Page 177: ...speed value 30 C00982 VFC ECO Voltage reduction ramp 5 C00022 Imax in motor mode 18 C00050 Speed setpoint 31 C00978 VFC ECO Voltage reduction 6 C00023 Imax in generator mode 19 C00056 2 Actual torque value 32 C00018 Switching frequency 7 C00074 Ti Imax controller 20 C00058 Output frequency 33 C00830 32 MCTRL nPWMAngleOffset_a 8 C00073 Vp Imax controller 21 C00830 26 MCTRL nBoost_a 34 C00830 31 MCT...

Page 178: ... _ _ _ _ _ 5 5 2 Comparison of VFCplusEco VFCplus The following characteristics show the impact of the energy saving V f characteristic control VFCplusEco compared to the standard V f characteristic control VFCplus The characteristics were recorded with a standard asynchronous motor 2 2 kW with energy efficiency class IE1 at speed 600 rpm 5 8 Comparison of VFCplusEco VFCplus scaled torque in effic...

Page 179: ...termine the motor control C00006 11 VFCplusEco V f energy saving 2 The required motor data are pre initialised depending on the device and thus they do not need to be entered directly In order to achieve a high energy optimisation these motor data can be entered see the following section Set the motor selection motor data When selecting and parameterising the motor the motor nameplate data and the...

Page 180: ...on controller e g to prevent the motor from stalling or to limit to the maximally permissible motor current Optimising the Imax controller 167 Adaptation of the field frequency by a load dependent slip compensation improved speed accuracy for systems without feedback Improving the behaviour at high dynamic load changes 181 Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function 182 Optimising ...

Page 181: ...or the highest energy optimisation This setting serves to respond to load torques if these amount to approx 25 of the rated torque or occur with low dynamics An increase of the minimum voltage V f to 70 permits to apply a dynamic load impulse from 0 to 100 rated motor torque without the motor stalling This reduces the energy optimisation to be achieved by approx 75 A further increase of the stabil...

Page 182: ... high dynamic performance is required but with a low current overshoot and a small torque jump Thus the Lenze setting of C00982 is a compromise regarding the switch off of the Eco function voltage reduction 0 To increase the dynamics when switching off the Eco function Reduce setting in C00982 Current compensation actions increase when the Eco function is switched off In order to reduce current co...

Page 183: ...roving the behaviour at high dynamic load changes 181 Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function 182 Optimising the cos phi controller 182 Insufficient speed constancy at high load setpoint and motor speed are not proportional anymore Increase slip compensation C00021 Important Unstable drive due to overcompensation With cyclic load impulses e g centrifugal pump a smooth motor cha...

Page 184: ... oscillations with increasing the oscillation damping field weakening C00236 Caution If C00236 is increased the maximum output voltage of the device is reduced Output voltage is too low There is a too low maximum torque in the high field weakening range Reduction of the oscillation damping field weakening C00236 Caution When C00236 0 oscillation damping field weakening is inactive Thus a maximum o...

Page 185: ...se set in C00571 2 Lenze setting Fault takes place if in case of controller enable it is detected that a motor control type with feedback is set in C00006 but no speed encoder is set in C00495 Stop V f emergency operation From version 15 00 00 it is internally switched to the encoderless V f characteristic control in case of an encoder open circuit in order to avoid impermissible motor movements I...

Page 186: ...rom the Overview dialog level in the Motor control C00006 list field 7 VFCplus V f linear encoder for linear characteristic or 9 VFCplus V f quadr encoder for quadratic characteristic 4 Click the Motor control V f encoder button to change to the Overview Motor control V f dialog box This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters When you click the More det...

Page 187: ...der 33 C00016 Vmin boost 6 C00023 Imax in generator mode 21 C00056 2 Actual torque value 34 C00018 Switching frequency 7 C00074 Ti Imax controller 22 C00830 24 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlI_a 35 C00830 32 MCTRL nPWMAngleOffset_a 8 C00073 Vp Imax controller 23 C00830 25 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a 36 C00830 31 MCTRL nVoltageAdd_a 9 C00830 22 Speed setpoint 24 C00833 31 MCTRL bSpeedCtrlIOn 37 C00052 Motor voltage ...

Page 188: ...rise encoder feedback system Encoder feedback system 276 4 If special motors with a rated frequency other than 50 Hz or with a number of pole pairs 2 are used set the motor parameters according to the motor nameplate Motor selection Motor data 135 5th Define speed setpoint e g 20 of the rated speed and enable inverter 6 Check whether the actual speed value C00051 speed setpoint C00050 and then inh...

Page 189: ...regulator gain Vp C00972 which leads to a stable operational performance mainly depends on the resolution of the speed sensor There is a direct relationship between encoder resolution and gain The higher the encoder resolution the higher the gain can be set The following table provides maximum and recommended slip regulator gains for encoder with standard encoder increments 5 1 Slip regulator gain...

Page 190: ...in C00972 to approx half the value With low encoder resolutions another reduction of the slip regulator gain for low speeds may be necessary speed setpoint 0 We recommend to finally check the behaviour at setpoint speed 0 and to further reduce the slip regulator gain if irregular running occurs 8 Increase controller limitation C00971 1 again e g to twice the slip frequency Slip regulator time cons...

Page 191: ...slip Slip limitation In addition to limiting the slip regulator the field frequency to be injected can also be limited by another limiting element the slip limitation C00971 2 If the slip is e g limited to twice the rated slip of the motor a stalling of the motor during very dynamic processes can be avoided Motor stalling is caused by a high overcurrent at very steep speed ramps very fast speed ch...

Page 192: ...o the inverter Operation of the sensorless vector control SLVC is only permissible for one single drive Operation of the sensorless vector control SLVC is not permissible for hoists The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power adapted motor Optimal operation is only possible if either the motor is selected via the Engineer motor catalogue the motor nameplate data are entered and motor parame...

Page 193: ...o to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace 3 Select the motor control 4 SLVC Vector control from the Overview dialog level in the Motor control list field C00006 4 Click the Motor control vector button to change to the Overview Motor control vector dialog box This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the m...

Page 194: ...controller 20 C00074 2 SLVC Ti torque controller 28 C00092 Motor magnetising inductance 6 C00074 2 SLVC Ti torque controller 21 C00833 69 MCTRL bSpeedCtrlPAdaptOn 29 C00830 88 MCTRL nSpeedHighLimit_a 7 C00071 1 SLVC Ti speed controller 22 C00074 2 SLVC Ti torque controller 30 C00830 23 MCTRL nSpeedLowLimit_a 8 C00070 1 SLVC Vp speed controller 23 C00074 2 SLVC Ti torque controller 31 C00910 1 Max ...

Page 195: ...e output of the speed controller nOutputSpeedCtrl To avoid overload in the drive train the torque in motor mode can be limited via the nTorqueMotLimit_a process input signal and the torque in generator mode can be limited via the nTorqueGenLimit_a process input signal Note From version 13 00 00 the torque setpoint nSpeedSetValue_a is set to 0 by quick stop QSP device internally and the torque limi...

Page 196: ...how that the speed limitation is active The speed is defined by the process The torque setpoint is calculated directly from nTorqueSetValue_a From version 12 00 00 onwards the torque limitation is active via nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a in this control mode too for the torque setpoint to be limited The torque limitation can be deactivated in C2865 1 via bit 0 to obtain the previous func...

Page 197: ...in generator mode Scaling 16384 100 Mmax C00057 Setting range 199 99 0 If keypad control is performed Parameterisable via C00728 2 Designator DIS code data type Information possible settings Initial commissioning steps 1 Determine the motor control C00006 4 SLVC Vector control 2 Set the motor selection motor data When selecting and parameterising the motor the motor nameplate data and the equivale...

Page 198: ...ntroller inhibit Instead stop the drive by selecting a setpoint of 0 or by activating the quick stop function Procedure with setting a controller inhibit due to application requirements 1 Deactivate the auto DCB function with C00019 0 2 Enter a greater value for the motor rotor resistance max factor 2 to reduce the magnetisation time in C00082 Note From version 12 00 00 Following successful motor ...

Page 199: ...he rated motor torque A gain of 10 means that a speed difference of 1 is gained through the P component with 10 torque If the rated data of the motor and the mass inertia of the drive system are known we recommend the following setting 5 10 Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the speed controller Tip Values recommended by Lenze for the setting of the proportional gain For drive systems w...

Page 200: ...C00074 2 A greater dynamic performance of the field weakening function can be achieved by setting a time constant 15 ms This means for actual speeds above rated speed a better torque speed characteristic in the field weakening range 5 11 Speed torque characteristic diagram in the field weakening range For Ti 15 ms see the actual speed value slightly drops in the field weakening range if the load t...

Page 201: ...parameter serves to shift the frequency dependent maximum current characteristic C00080 0 Hz The maximum current characteristic is shifted by the entered frequency to higher field frequencies The maximally permissible current and the maximum torque increase in the field weakening range The risk of motor stalling increases C00080 0 Hz The maximum current characteristic is shifted by the entered fre...

Page 202: ...r control variables to be recorded nSpeedSetValue_a speed setpoint nMotorSpeedAct_a actual speed value nOutputSpeedCtrl_a speed controller output 2 Estimate the moment of inertia and set it in C00273 in relation to the motor end i e with account being taken of the gearbox factors 3 Repeat the data logger recording see step 1 Now the data logger should show that part of the required torque is gener...

Page 203: ...lue of 100 is applied at this input 3 In C00919 1 set the known maximum value of the variable moment of inertia or determine the value according to previous instructions How to optimise The determinationrequires travelling the typical speed profile including variable mass inertia e g maximum reels 4 The nInertiaAdapt_a process signal can be used during the process to dynamically control the percen...

Page 204: ...d to the torque setpoint nTorqueSetValue_a In this way feedforward control of torque is also possible for torque controlled operation e g for winder applications Stop In the Lenze setting of C00654 1 the speed setpoint of the speed controller nSpeedSetValue_a is used for the torque feedforward control which is why it is also called differential setpoint feedforward control A very sharp change of t...

Page 205: ...ulation from motor nameplate data Lenze setting 1 Slip calculation from motor equivalent circuit diagram data Bit 1 SC_ASM In case of servo control for asynchronous motors 0 Slip calculation from motor nameplate data 1 Slip calculation from motor equivalent circuit diagram data Lenze setting Bit 2 7 Reserved Note In order that the slip can be calculated from the motor equivalent circuit diagram da...

Page 206: ... setpoint or speed drops during acceleration Oscillating can be reduced by increasing the gain of the field current controller in C00985 A small increase of the cross current controller gain in C00986 can further improve the starting performance for small acceleration ramps In the field weakening range the cross current nEffCurrentIq_a may oscillate when an acceleration process starts or a deceler...

Page 207: ...nact nslip reduce the value in C00021 If nact nslip increase the value in C00021 Unstable control with higher speeds Check the setting of the magnetising inductance C00092 by comparing the current consumption in no loadoperationwiththeratedmagnetisingcurrent C00095 Optimise oscillation damping C00234 Short circuit oC1 or Clamp operation active oC11 error messages at short acceleration time C00012 ...

Page 208: ...z We recommend to select a power adapted combination of inverter and motor The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power adapted motor Optimal operation is only possible if either the motor is selected via the Engineer motor catalogue the motor nameplate data are entered and motor parameter identification is carried out afterwards or the nameplate data and equivalent circuit data of the motor...

Page 209: ... 5 13 Operating ranges of the sensorless control for synchronous motors The sensorless control for synchronous motors has similar advantages for the closed loop controlled operating range and the servo control SC for synchronous motors Compared to asynchronous motors there are the following advantages Higher power density of the motor Higher efficiency Limitation of the maximum torque in motor mod...

Page 210: ...ified signal flow with the most important parameters When you click the More details button in the left most position a signal flow with more details parameters is displayed Note In the open loop controlled operation for synchronous motors usually less maximum torque is created than in the closed loop controlled operation Thus the dynamics of this control is limited and a high acceleration of the ...

Page 211: ...ode 2 C00998 1 SLPSM Filter time rotor position 6 C00909 2 Max neg speed 13 C00830 28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 3 C00833 68 MCTRL bMotorRefOffsetOn 7 C00050 Speed setpoint 14 C00830 24 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlI_a 4 C00834 6 MCTRL dnMotorRefOffset_p 8 C00105 Decel time quick stop 15 C00833 31 MCTRL bSpeedCtrlIOn 9 C00104 1 Quick stop setting 16 C00830 25 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a 10 C00998 2 SL...

Page 212: ...op controlled standstill current 19 C00076 Ti current controller 3 C00830 28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 13 C00996 1 SLPSM Closed loop controlled switching speed 20 C00018 Switching frequency 4 C00274 SC Max change in acceleration 14 C00996 2 SLPSM Open loop controlled switching speed 21 C00830 32 MCTRL nPWMAngleOffset_a 5 C00270 SC Freq current setpoint filter 15 C00050 Speed setpoint ...

Page 213: ...putSpeedCtrl To avoid overload in the drive train the torque in motor mode can be limited via the nTorqueMotLimit_a process input signal and the torque in generator mode can be limited via the nTorqueGenLimit_a process input signal Designator DIS code data type Information possible settings nTorqueMotLimit_a C00830 29 INT Torque limitation in motor mode Scaling 16384 100 Mmax C00057 Setting range ...

Page 214: ...on in C00996 2 in with regard to the rated motor speed C00087 Tip With voltage adjusted motors a speed switching threshold of 10 is recommended As a rule of thumb the speed switching threshold should be selected as follows 4 Set open loop accelerating current in C00995 1 in with regard to the rated motor current C00088 This value defines the height of the current that is injected during the accele...

Page 215: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Tip Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real application is provided in the Optimising the control mode chapter Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter Parameterisable additional functions 258 ...

Page 216: ...e Ppp I 224 If the motor is operated with very low and very high currents during the process e g in Pick and place applications the stator leakage inductance and current controller parameters can be tracked by means of an adjustable saturation characteristic Note From version 12 00 00 Following successful motor parameter identification the current controller parameters C00075 C00076 are calculated...

Page 217: ...ed maximum current and the set switching frequency Gain and reset time can be calculated as per the following formulae Note An optimisation of the current controller should generally be carried out unless a power adapted standard motor is used or the motor has been selected from the motor catalogue of the Engineer Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00075 Vp current controller 7 00 V A C0007...

Page 218: ... enables a comparable parameterisation almost independent of the power of the motor or inverter Here the speed input difference of the controller is scaled to the rated motor speed whereas the output torque refers to the rated motor torque A gain of 10 means that a speed difference of 1 is gained through the P component with 10 torque If the rated data of the motor and the mass inertia of the driv...

Page 219: ...thout feedback Vp 2 8 For drive systems with a good disturbance behaviour Vp 6 Speed controller reset time Ti Apart from setting the P component C00071 3 provides the possibility to take influence on the I component of the PI controller If the mass inertia of the drive is unknown the optimisation can be achieved as follows 1 Specify speed setpoint 2 Reduce Ti C00071 3 until the drive starts to osc...

Page 220: ... the data logger Motor control variables to be recorded nSpeedSetValue_a speed setpoint nMotorSpeedAct_a actual speed value 2 Evaluate the ramp response Solid line ramp response actual speed value Dash line speed setpoint 3 Change gain Vp in C00070 3 and reset time Tn in C00071 3 4 Repeat steps 1 3 until the optimum ramp response is reached Note For an optimal setting we recommend to determine the...

Page 221: ...gger Motor control variables to be recorded nSpeedSetValue_a speed setpoint nMotorSpeedAct_a actual speed value nOutputSpeedCtrl_a speed controller output 2 Estimate the moment of inertia and set it in C00273 in relation to the motor end i e with account being taken of the gearbox factors 3 Repeat the data logger recording see step 1 Now the data logger should show that part of the required torque...

Page 222: ...that a value of 100 is applied at this input 3 In C00919 1 set the known maximum value of the variable moment of inertia or determine the value according to previous instructions How to optimise The determinationrequires travelling the typical speed profile including variable mass inertia e g maximum reels 4 The nInertiaAdapt_a process signal can be used during the process to dynamically control t...

Page 223: ...ol is added to the torque setpoint nTorqueSetValue_a In this way feedforward control of torque is also possible for torque controlled operation e g for winder applications Stop In the Lenze setting of C00654 1 the speed setpoint of the speed controller nSpeedSetValue_a is used for the torque feedforward control which is why it is also called differential setpoint feedforward control A very sharp c...

Page 224: ... leakage inductance and current controller parameters is now possible via an adjustable saturation characteristic 17 interpolation points Short overview of the relevant parameters Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02853 1 17 PSM Ppp saturation characteristic 17 interpolation points 100 C02855 PSM Imax Lss saturation characteristic 3000 0 A C02859 PSM Activate Ppp saturation char 0 Off Note...

Page 225: ...rly distributed on the X axis C02853 1 17 Interpolation point 17 represents 100 of the maximum motor current in the process C02855 The following diagram shows the saturation characteristic stored in the Engineer motor catalogue for the Lenze motor MCS12H15 as an example 5 16 Saturation characteristic Inductance referring to the inductance for rated current 0 6 25 12 5 18 75 25 31 25 37 5 43 75 50 ...

Page 226: ...n the majority of cases In order to get the same behaviour as before the function can be deactivated in C02874 Short overview of the relevant parameters The stator time constants can be calculated based on the following formula Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02874 Pole position identification 1 On C02872 PLI Adaptation of time period PLI in operation 0 C02875 PLI Adaptation of ident ang...

Page 227: ...us rotor displacement angles until an optimisation degree 130 is displayed 4 When the optimisation degree is 70 Increase setting in C02872 step by step and execute controller enable for various rotor displacement angles until an optimisation degree 70 is displayed 5 Optionally C02875 serves to increase or reduce the identified electrical rotor displacement angle This can prevent e g a reversing of...

Page 228: ...energy efficiency is required keep the field weakening switched off or restrict the field weakening operation via C00938 Stop In the field weakening operation a current is injected into the synchronous motor even in idle state which can rise to maximum current C00022 Ensure that this no load current does not cause the motor to be heated impermissibly We recommend using a temperature feedback via P...

Page 229: ...rrent is limited via C00938 to 30 of the rated motor current C00088 Hence the maximum speed is limited during field weakening operation and at the same time the temperature rise of the motor during field weakening operation and no load operation is also limited If a higher speed for the field weakening operation is required or the current in the field weakening operation is to be limited e g since...

Page 230: ...operates optimally and the maximally permissible speed is monitored Stop If an OEM motor is used If pulse inhibit is set in the inverter the DC bus is loaded with the voltage that corresponds to the current speed of the machine Since with switched on field weakening higher speeds can be achieved at a correspondingly higher rotor voltage of the motor the DC bus can be loaded to a voltage higher tha...

Page 231: ... select a power adapted combination of inverter and motor The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power adapted motor Optimal operation is only possible if either the motor is selected via the Engineer motor catalogue the motor nameplate data are entered and motor parameter identification is carried out afterwards or the nameplate data and equivalent circuit data of the motor motor leakage in...

Page 232: ...n motor and generator mode for speed controlled operation 5 9 1 Parameterisation dialog signal flow Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control 1 Engineer Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace 3 Go to the Overview dialog level and the Motor control list field C00006 to select the 2 SC S...

Page 233: ...7 C00830 28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 5 C00833 35 MCTRL bDeltaPosOn 20 C00830 88 MCTRL nSpeedHighLimit_a 28 C00830 24 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlI_a 6 C00254 Kp position controller 21 C00830 23 MCTRL nSpeedLowLimit_a 29 C00833 31 MCTRL bSpeedCtrlIOn 7 C00830 20 MCTRL nPosCtrlPAdapt_a 22 C00497 1 Encoder filter time FreqIn12 30 C00830 25 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a 8 C00830 21 MCTRL nPosCtrlOutLimit...

Page 234: ...ontroller feedforward control 4 C00274 SC Max change in acceleration 14 C00056 2 Actual torque value 27 C00018 Switching frequency 5 C00833 30 MCTRL bTorqueModeOn 15 C00056 1 Torque demand 28 C00830 32 MCTRL nPWMAngleOffset_a 6 C00280 SC Filter time const DC detection 16 C00022 Imax in motor mode 29 C00830 31 MCTRL nVoltageAdd_a 7 C00052 Motor voltage 17 C00023 Imax in generator mode 30 C00058 Out...

Page 235: ...is limited via the torque setpoint The torque setpoint is identical to the value at the output of the speed controller nOutputSpeedCtrl To avoid overload in the drive train the torque in motor mode can be limited via the nTorqueMotLimit_a process input signal and the torque in generator mode can be limited via the nTorqueGenLimit_a process input signal Note From version 13 00 00 the torque setpoin...

Page 236: ...or mode and in generator mode Note To avoid instabilities during operation the torque limit values are internally processed as absolute values Note For synchronous motors the Lenze setting of the torque limits nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a to 100 can result in the activation of the torque limitation for motor temperature max motor temperature before the set current limit values C00022 C0...

Page 237: ...peed 0 rpm nSpeedLowLimit_a or nSpeedHighLimit_a 0 is only possible from version 12 00 00 Quick stop QSP is used to switch over to Speed control with torque limitation From version 13 00 00 the torque setpoint nSpeedSetValue_a is set to 0 by quick stop QSP device internally and the two torque limit values nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a are set to 100 to stop the drive quickly and safely a...

Page 238: ...omatic motor data identification Third party manufacturer s motor 1 Set the motor nameplate data 2 Automatic motor data identificationor setknown equivalent circuit diagram data manually C00082 Motor rotor resistance C00084 Motor stator resistance C00085 Motor stator leakage inductance C00092 Motor magnetising inductance C00095 Motor magnetising current 3 Define the type of control bTorquemodeOn F...

Page 239: ...3 1 Parameterising the encoder feedback system Required settings 1 Parameterise the function of the digital inputs 1 and 2 as the encoder input in C00115 2 Set the encoder increments in C00420 1 3 Select the speed sensor in C00495 4 Adapt the filter time of the actual speed filter in C00497 5 In the case of encoders with a very low resolution number of increments 120 increments Change the encoder ...

Page 240: ...tor parameter identification the current controller parameters C00075 C00076 and field controller parameters C00077 C00078 are calculated automatically If these parameters are not to be calculated bit 4 of C02865 1 must be set to 1 Following successful motorparameter identification the speed controller parameters C00070 2 C00071 2 C00072 can be calculated automatically If these parameters are to b...

Page 241: ...timisation steps 1 Setting the current setpoint filter band stop filter 248 In order to suppress or damp mechanical resonant frequencies a current setpoint filter is integrated in the speed control loop which is switched off in the default setting but can be parameterised accordingly if required Then readjust the speed controller Optimise speed controller 242 2 Adapting the max acceleration change...

Page 242: ...input difference of the controller is scaled to the rated motor speed whereas the output torque refers to the rated motor torque A gain of 10 means that a speed difference of 1 is gained through the P component with 10 torque If the rated data of the motor and the mass inertia of the drive system are known we recommend the following setting 5 21 Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the sp...

Page 243: ...ve is unknown the optimisation can be achieved as follows 1 Specify speed setpoint 2 Reduce Ti C00071 2 until the drive is unstable observe motor noise 3 Increase Ti C00071 2 until the drive runs stable again 4 Increase Ti C00071 2 to approx twice the value Tip Value range recommended by Lenze for the setting of the reset time Ti 20 ms 150 ms Differential time constant Tdn rate time The differenti...

Page 244: ...r Motor control variables to be recorded nSpeedSetValue_a speed setpoint nMotorSpeedAct_a actual speed value 2 Evaluate the ramp response Solid line ramp response actual speed value Dash line speed setpoint 3 Change gain Vp in C00070 2 and reset time Tn in C00071 2 4 Repeat steps 1 3 until the optimum ramp response is reached Note For an optimal setting we recommend to determine the mass inertia o...

Page 245: ...ol variables to be recorded nSpeedSetValue_a speed setpoint nMotorSpeedAct_a actual speed value nOutputSpeedCtrl_a speed controller output 2 Estimate the moment of inertia and set it in C00273 in relation to the motor end i e with account being taken of the gearbox factors 3 Repeat the data logger recording see step 1 Now the data logger should show that part of the required torque is generated by...

Page 246: ...100 is applied at this input 3 In C00919 1 set the known maximum value of the variable moment of inertia or determine the value according to previous instructions How to optimise The determinationrequires travelling the typical speed profile including variable mass inertia e g maximum reels 4 The nInertiaAdapt_a process signal can be used during the process to dynamically control the percentage of...

Page 247: ...the torque setpoint nTorqueSetValue_a In this way feedforward control of torque is also possible for torque controlled operation e g for winder applications Stop In the Lenze setting of C00654 1 the speed setpoint of the speed controller nSpeedSetValue_a is used for the torque feedforward control which is why it is also called differential setpoint feedforward control A very sharp change of the sp...

Page 248: ...describes how to set the current setpoint filter How to set the current setpoint filter 1 Optimise current controller 241 2 Optimise speed controller 242 3 Measure the oscillation frequency observe current or speed 4 Set the measured oscillation frequency in C00270 as filter frequency 5 Set 25 of the filter frequency in C00271 as filter width Example Filter frequency 200 Hz filter width 50 Hz 6 Se...

Page 249: ...motor torque Via the max acceleration change that can be set in C00274 the change of the setpoint torque can be limited for jerk limitation Hence sudden torque step changes can be avoided The entire speed characteristic is smoothed Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00274 SC Max change in acceleration 400 0 ms Note Only activate this jerk limitation for speed controlled applications If tabl...

Page 250: ...m motor equivalent circuit diagram data Lenze setting Bit 2 7 Reserved Note In order that the slip can be calculated from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data the equivalent circuit data stator resistance rotor resistance etc must be known as exactly as possible Selecting a motor in the Engineer motor catalogue loads the exact motor equivalent circuit diagram data When the motor nameplate dat...

Page 251: ...ors are exchanged problems regarding the control quality may occur if motor parameters set for a device lower than version 11 00 00 are transferred to a replacement device of a higher version In this case we recommend to load the very precise motor data available from Engineer V2 17 or to execute the advanced motor parameter identification C02867 1 2 Automatic motor data identification 141 As an a...

Page 252: ...e field weakening range in a 500 μs cycle For this purpose bit 5 has to be set to 1 int in C02864 1 With this setting C00015 and C00576 do not have any influence anymore on the field feedforward control We recommend this setting for new applications In existing applications this setting may require an increase of the reset times of the field weakening controller C00578 and the field controller C00...

Page 253: ...stance the magnetising inductance and the leakage inductance For an optimal calculation we recommend to select the motor from the motor catalogue of the Engineer first if a Lenze motor is used Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the Engineer 139 If a third party manufacturer s motor is used motor parameter identification must be carried out previously Automatic motor data identification ...

Page 254: ... twice the value and reduce the setting in C00578 according to the formula mentioned above If the field weakening controller is set too fast vibrations occur in the magnetising current in the direct axis current and in the cross current in the torque and in the speed in the field weakening range This is also audible by an increased motor noise humming The vibrations can be dampened by a decrease o...

Page 255: ...ol requires a correct setting of the V f base frequency C00015 The selection of the motor from the Engineer motor catalogue and the motor parameter identification serve to set the V f base frequency correctly When third party motors are entered either the V f base frequency C00015 has to be calculated manually or a motor parameter identification has to be carried out Adapting the V f base frequenc...

Page 256: ...tion processes in the field weakening range the acceleration torque is limited due to the limitation of the maximum output voltage of the inverter Acceleration ramps that are set too high C00012 may lead to undesired charging of the integrator of the speed controller which result in very strong overshoots of the actual speed value when the setpoint is reached The so called anti wind up function se...

Page 257: ... the data of the motor equivalent circuit motor magnetising inductance motor stator leakage inductance motor stator resistance motor rotor resistance are not known the feedforward control of the current controller must not be switched on as otherwise it might cause instabilities in the control loop Up to and including version 13 xx xx the following applies The feedforward control of the current co...

Page 258: ...a section of the hardware manual Note Operate mid frequency motors only at a switching frequency of 8 kHz or 16 kHz var drive opt If operated at a switching frequency of 16 kHz the Ixt evaluation C00064 is considered including the required derating to 67 of the rated device current at switching frequencies of 2 4 and 8 kHz Ensure that the value does not fall below the permissible switching frequen...

Page 259: ...ter is available only a drive optimised switching frequency drive opt is permissible Example A sinusoidal filter is connected between the output of the inverter and the motor which only is to be operated with a minimum switching frequency of 8 kHz In this case only the following settings in C00018 are permissible Selection in C00018 1 4 kHz var drive optimised 21 8 kHz var drive opt 4 kHz min 2 8 ...

Page 260: ...the inverter output current The modulation mode will not be changed When a fixed switching frequency is selected no switching frequency changeover takes place In case of fixed frequencies the inverter output current is limited to the permissible value of the corresponding switching frequency In case of larger load impulses the overcurrent interruption may be activated to which the inverter respond...

Page 261: ...d not be exceeded Carry out further measures If required deactivate the switching frequency changeover by the heatsink temperature via C00144 If required ensure that the changeover threshold of the inverter output current to the next switching frequency below will not be exceeded If required select a constant switching frequency in C00018 Operation at an ambient temperature of 45 C The inverter is...

Page 262: ...so for all other types of control The inverters which can be operated at an increased rated power are listed in the 8400 hardware manual in the rated data The hardware manual is stored in electronic form on the data carrier which is supplied with the 8400 inverter Stop Operation at increased rated power is only permitted with the inverters listed in the 8400 hardware manual for this type of operat...

Page 263: ..._ _ All other types of control require the following settings in addition Parameters Info Required setting C00022 Imax in motor mode higher than rated motor current max 160 rated motor current C00081 Rated motor power adapt motor data see motor nameplate then carry out identification run Automatic motor data identification 141 C00087 Rated motor speed C00088 Rated motor current C00089 Rated motor ...

Page 264: ...ith great centrifugal masses Do not use the flying restart function if several motors with different centrifugal masses are connected to an inverter After the controller is enabled the motor can start for a short time or reverse when machines with low friction and low mass inertia are used The flying restart function serves to identify max field frequencies up to 200 Hz When power adapted standard...

Page 265: ...ost applications do not require additional inverter settings If additional settings are necessary proceed as follows 2 Define the process and hence the speed range rotational frequency range in C00991 which is to be examined by the flying restart circuit positive speed range n 0 rpm negative speed range n 0 rpm entire speed range 3 Define the starting frequency The starting frequency which defines...

Page 266: ...current if motors with higher rated frequencies are used Optimisation of the flying restart time From version 05 00 00 onwards the duration of the flying restart process can be influenced via the setting of the integration time C00993 A reduction of the integration time causes the flying restart function to accelerate and thus a reduced flying restart time We recommend not to change the Lenze sett...

Page 267: ...antage that it is possible to influence the braking time by changing the motor current or the braking torque The automatic DC injection braking Auto DCB improves the starting performance of the motor in case of V f operation without speed feedback Short overview of the relevant parameters Note The DC injection braking function manually or automatically is only possible for the following motor cont...

Page 268: ...peration the speed setpoint falls below the auto DCB threshold In case of V f operation without speed feedback a braking current C00036 is injected After the auto DCB hold time C00106 has expired the motor is deenergised via the auto DCB function i e pulse inhibit is set In case of V f operation with speed feedback the motor is deenergised via the auto DCB function after the auto DCB hold time C00...

Page 269: ...ng of C00019 0 Auto DCB function during V f operation with speed feedback If you want to use the auto DCB function contrary to our recommendation see above the auto DCB threshold must not fall below the following values depending on the number of encoder increments Setting the auto DCB function How to set the automatic DC injection braking 1 Set a hold time in C00106 0 s Automatic DC injection bra...

Page 270: ...tes at a specified speed The current adjusts itself to the load see The DC braking current set in C00036 is injected After the hold time C00106 has expired a pulse inhibit is set Speed setpoint Actual speed value of the motor Controller output current Pulse inhibit DC injection braking is active 0 1 2 3 4 C00106 C00036 C00019 The motor rotates at a specified speed The current adjusts itself to the...

Page 271: ...ng in C00021 while the drive is running until the load dependent speed drop does not occur anymore between idling and maximum load of the motor in the desired speed range Tip The following guide value applies to a correctly set slip compensation Deviation from the rated motor speed 1 for the speed range of 10 100 of the rated motor speed and loads rated motor torque Greater deviations are possible...

Page 272: ...no load operation Here speeds of 40 80 of the rated speed are typical See subchapter Oscillation damping voltage range 273 In the field weakening range output voltage has reached maximum voltage Here the oscillations occur in no load operation and with load Here speeds higher than the rated speed are typical especially when the output frequency is close to the mains frequency See subchapter Oscill...

Page 273: ...cy of approx 20 40 Hz some asynchronous motors can show resonance which causes current and speed variations and thus destabilise the running operation How to eliminate speed oscillations in no load operation at speeds with 40 80 of the rated speed 1 Approach the area where the speed oscillations occur 2 Reduce the speed oscillations by changing C00234 step by step increment 1 The filter time oscil...

Page 274: ...s may be expected Thus an adaptation of C00236 is not required in the majority of cases Maximum output voltage to be reached with Lenze setting of C00236 Single phase devices 98 2 Three phase devices 99 7 How to eliminate speed oscillations in the field weakening range 1 Approach the area where the speed oscillations occur 2 Reduce the speed oscillations by changing C00236 step by step increment 1...

Page 275: ...ect on setpoints and actual values i e the polarity of the speed setpoint actual speed value actual torque output frequency and AngleOffset do not change Tip Cases of application for this function Phase sequence reversal in case of misconnected motor phases Setting of the correctly signed direction of rotation for inversely mounted motors Note Up to and including version 11 00 00 this function may...

Page 276: ...sing the value Increments 2 are at least required for encoder signals that are exclusively processed in the FB interconnection Note In the Lenze setting e g when the device is delivered the open circuit monitoring of the encoder is activated Encoder open circuit monitoring 311 Note The encoder position can be saved safe against mains failure in the inverter For this purpose bit 0 must be set in C0...

Page 277: ...e Application parameters tab from the Workspace 3 Go to the Overview dialog level and click the following button 4 Go to the Overview Motor data dialog level and click the Encoder Feedback system button 1 0 2 C00495 FreqIn12 C00497 1 C00497 2 1 0 2 C00490 FreqIn67 C00051 C00254 C00420 1 C00425 1 C00420 2 C00425 2 200 kHz 10 kHz C00496 Speed encoder selection Encoder filter time FreqIn12 FreqIn67 E...

Page 278: ... Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit Encoder selection General settings C00495 Speed sensor selection Source of feedback signal for speed control 0 No sensor C00490 Position encoder selection Source of feedback signal for position control 0 no sensor nSpeedSetValue_a C00254 Kp position controller 5 00 1 s C01206 1 MCK Mounting direction Motor 0 Not inverted C01206 2 MCK Mounting direction Pos...

Page 279: ...er inputs 128 Incr rev C00425 1 FreqIn12 Encoder scanning time If the digital inputs DI1 and DI2 are used as encoder inputs 10 ms C00497 1 FreqIn12 Encoder filter time If the digital inputs DI1 and DI2 are used as encoder inputs 1 0 ms C00496 Encoder evaluation method DigIn12 282 2 Comb encoder method C00055 1 Actual value HTL encoder FreqIn12 rpm Settings for HTL encoder at DI6 DI7 C00115 2 Fct D...

Page 280: ...2 Function 2 DI1 6 DI2 7 FreqIn 2 track DI1 6 and DI2 7 2 track frequency input Permits a two track evaluation of the encoder including correct detection of the direction of rotation 3 DI1 6 FreqIn DI2 7 Direction DI1 6 1 track frequency input DI2 7 specification of direction 4 DI1 6 CountIn DI2 7 In DI1 6 counter input DI2 7 digital input Danger For single track evaluation make sure that the sign...

Page 281: ...nchronous or reluctance motors without feedback are used in the motor control types V f characteristic control VFCplus and Sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM the nMotorSpeedAct_v speed signal can be used to create an error free position signal via a control if the nMotorSpeedAct_v signal is read out by the control in a 1 ms cycle If no position encoder is available C00490 0 No encoder...

Page 282: ...d measurement with automatic scanning time setting 0 5 500 ms for low resolution encoders in the range of 4 128 increments Evaluation with automatic scanning time minimisation for an optimum dynamic performance Method is also suited for encoders with poor signal quality e g for encoders with high error rate in scanning ratio and phase offset This method requires an equidistant period length per en...

Page 283: ...e minimally required value of the scanning time in order to achieve maximum dynamics Low speeds with edge counting The minimum speed that can be measured and the quantisation error of speed measurement in the edge counting procedure C00496 3 depend on the scanning time that can be set in C00425 1 and the encoder resolution Depending on accuracy and the requirements with regard to the dynamic perfo...

Page 284: ...h edge counting Due to the lower input frequency max 10 kHz compared to the terminals DI1 DI2 operation with maximum speed at the terminals DI6 DI7 is limited Digital input terminals 323 Note Single track evaluation of the digital DI6 DI7 terminals as speed feedback C0115 2 1 or 3 is not possible Hence a single track encoder cannot be used for speed control at the digital DI6 terminal Encoder reso...

Page 285: ... and click the Motor control button to change to the Overview motor control dialog level 4 Click the Position control button in the displayed signal flow Parameters Info 1 C00830 22 MCTRL nSpeedSetValue_a Speed setpoint 2 C00834 4 MCTRL dnDeltaPos_p Position difference following error input 3 C00834 5 MCTRL dnPosSetValue_p Absolute position setpoint 4 C00833 35 MCTRL bDeltaPosOn TRUE Position diff...

Page 286: ...of the ramp function generator if brake chopper threshold exceeded RFG_Stop Use of the inverter motor brake function from version 04 00 00 Combination of the above named options In the case of inverters with a 3 phase supply the following is also possible Coupling of the inverters in a DC bus connection Recovery of regenerative energy with a regenerative module Stop If the connected brake resistor...

Page 287: ...nterruption This protective function is used to prevent the brake chopper from being switched on permanently due to e g too high voltages at all times or incorrect interconnection of the bBrakeChopperOn signal from version V12 00 00 From version 14 00 00 the limitation of the operating time can be deactivated to max 4 seconds For this purpose set bit 1 to 1 in C02864 1 The integrated brake chopper...

Page 288: ...ctions button 4 Go to the Overview basic functions dialog box and click the Brake energy management button Short overview of the relevant parameters Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00173 Mains voltage 3ph 400 V 1ph 230 V C00175 Brake energy management R_Brake brake resistance Brake resistor C00133 Brake resistor utilisation C00129 Brake resistance value 39 0 Ohm C00130 Rated brake resist...

Page 289: ...n 0 for 400 V AC mains This means that C00174 can be set to a maximum of 131 V DC 725 V DC 594 V DC 5 13 2 Selecting the response to an increase of the DC bus voltage If the brake chopper threshold resulting from C00173 and C00174 is exceeded in the DC bus the reaction selected in C00175 takes place use of the brake resistor and or stop of the ramp function generator and or inverter motor brake Op...

Page 290: ...e avoidance of having to use a brake resistor With the inverter motor brake function an effective braking torque of 10 20 of the rated motor torque can be achieved A combination of all three braking procedures is also possible e g for emergency braking if the brake resistor fails C00175 4 Brake resistor FI_MotBrk RfgStop Stop The two braking procedures Stopping of the ramp function generator and I...

Page 291: ...ction brake provides for an oscillation minimised braking The braking process generally takes more time than the inverter motor brake function with an optimised setting Moreover the function is only recommended for braking to a standstill In the following cases we recommend the inverter motor brake function With servo control SC For all applications that do not require braking to a standstill e g ...

Page 292: ...ed again and the ramp function generator is activated again The energy is converted into heat in the motor due to alternating instances of acceleration and deceleration as a result of this switching operation 5 31 Signal flow of the Inverter motor brake function In case of an asynchronous motor the additive speed setpoint C00987 should be 1 4 times the slip of the machine 5 32 Formula for calculat...

Page 293: ...n time that can be realised with the inverter motor brake Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00173 Mains voltage 3ph 400V 1ph 230V C00174 Reduced brake chopper threshold 0 V C00175 Resp to brake resistor control Brake resistor C00987 Inverter motor brake nAdd Speed lift which is connected in pulses to the brake ramp when the motor is braked 80 rpm C00988 Inverter motor brake PT1 filter time...

Page 294: ...tion or within the machine control system See chapter entitled Brake resistor monitoring I2xt 303 External interconnection using the thermal contact on the brake resistor e g supply interruption via the mains contactor and activation of the mechanical brakes 5 13 4 Control of multiple internal brake choppers in the DC bus system This function extension is available from version 12 00 00 If an addi...

Page 295: ...rake chopper master to one of the inverters of the DC bus system 2 Adapt the function block interconnection for the brake chopper master so that the bBrakeChopperActive status signal of the LS_MotorInterface SB is provided to the other inverters for controlling the internal brake chopper The bBrakeChopperActive signal can e g be output via port block to the fieldbus or via digital output A free ou...

Page 296: ...ster slave operation is activated plausibility monitoring is carried out in the brake chopper slaves The brake transistor can only be switched on via the bBrakeChopperOn control signal if the DC bus voltage is greater than the brake chopper threshold minus 40 VDC Exception From a mains voltage of 513 VAC or 725 VDC and a mains voltage of 480 V or 500 V set in C00173 the plausibility monitoring is ...

Page 297: ...the inverter remains unchanged Only a message is entered into the Logbook of the inverter Related topics Device state machine and device states 112 Diagnostics error management 623 Basics on error handling in the inverter 623 Error messages of the operating system 647 Monitoring Response Error message with activated monitoring Lenze setting Configuration Device overload monitoring Ixt Warning C006...

Page 298: ...ror response set in C00604 will be carried out Lenze setting Warning The oC5 Ixt overload error message will be entered into the Logbook The bMctrlIxtOverload status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to TRUE A setting of C00604 0 No Reaction deactivates the monitoring Parameters Info C00064 1 Device utilisation Ixt Maximum value of pulse utilisation C00064 2 and permanent uti...

Page 299: ... not provide full motor protection As the motor utilisation calculated in the thermal motor model is lost after mains switching for instance the following operating states cannot be detected correctly Restarting after mains switching of a motor that is already very hot Change of the cooling conditions e g cooling air flow interrupted or too warm Full motor protection requires additional measures s...

Page 300: ...rom the calculated value the motor utilisation meter will not be counted up until the rated overload threshold is reached 5 34 Tripping characteristic of the I2xt monitoring Example in Figure 5 34 C00120 Ir Irated x 100 C00088 C00098 x 100 C00054 150 rated motor current After approx 60 seconds C00066 has reached the final value 100 at output frequencies f 40 Hz The inverter outputs the oC6 I2xt ov...

Page 301: ...nt monitoring The ultimate motor current to be parameterised in C00939 is a limit value to protect the motor from destruction influence of the rated data and demagnetisation This limit value must not be travelled cyclically in the drive process If the instantaneous value of the motor current exceeds the limit value set in C00939 the error response Fault occurs to protect the motor and the error me...

Page 302: ...ceMonitor system block is set to TRUE A setting of C00585 0 No Reaction deactivates the monitoring Tip We recommend to always activate the PTC input when using motors which are equipped with PTC thermistors or thermostats This prevents the motor from being destroyed by overheating Functional test Connect a fixed resistor to the PTC input R 4 kΩ Fault message must be activated R 1 kΩ Fault message ...

Page 303: ...ted brake resistor are not known they have to be identified If the DC bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage threshold due to a braking energy that is too high the monitoring for overvoltage in the DC bus is activated OU DC bus overvoltage error message Apart from the threshold of the I2 xt utilisation that can be set in C00572 there is the switching threshold of the brake transistor which results fr...

Page 304: ...g parameters Resistance value C00129 Continuous power C00130 Thermal capacity C00131 In the Lenze setting these parameters are preset with the corresponding power adapted Lenze brake resistor C00133 indicates the calculated utilisation of the brake resistor in A utilisation of 100 corresponds to the continuous power of the brake resistor depending on the maximally permissible temperature limit Rel...

Page 305: ...motor phase failure detection is tripped The response set in C00597 will take place The error message LP1 Motor phase failure is entered into the logbook The bMctrlMotorPhaseFault status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block is set to TRUE The motor phase failure detection is inactive if a controller inhibit is set connection to a rotating machine is carried out flying restart circuit or con...

Page 306: ...ilure C00561 3 Motor phase U C00561 4 Motor phase V C00561 5 Motor phase W Note The motor phase error monitoring before operation must not be connected to a rotating or coasting machine high compensation currents and effect of the DC injection braking In case of motor control with feedback no motor phase error monitoring is executed if the actual speed value is 10 rpm In case of motor control with...

Page 307: ...ore The user himself must ensure that the brake will only be opened if all of the following conditions are met Motor phase failure monitoring C00597 and motor phase error monitoring before operation C2866 2 are active The inverter is enabled controller enable The bMctrlMotorPhaseFault status output of the SB LS_DeviceMonitor is set to FALSE Bit 10 of the MCTRL_Status3 status word must be set to 0 ...

Page 308: ...message will be entered into the logbook The bMctrlMainsFault status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to TRUE 5 14 9 Maximum current monitoring If the parameterised maximum current is reached the response set in C00609 is triggered Lenze setting 0 No Reaction If the activated monitoring is tripped The oC10 Maximum current reached error message is entered in the logbook Relat...

Page 309: ...aken place Monitoring responds as follows The bCurrentMonitoringOverload signal is set to TRUE see selection list digital signals The response set in C00584 1 is activated Lenze setting No response The OC18 error message current monitoring overload is entered into the logbook The bCurrentMonitoringOverload status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor FB is set to TRUE If the overload decreases the appare...

Page 310: ...0 No Reaction If the activated monitoring is tripped The oT1 Maximum torque reached error message is entered into the logbook The bMctrlTorqueMax status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to TRUE 5 14 12 Motor speed monitoring This function extension is available from version 11 00 00 If the drive reaches the maximally permissible motor speed C00965 The error response Fault oc...

Page 311: ...y lead to an actuation of the open circuit monitoring system 1 If the total deviation between actual speed and setpoint speed is higher than f 40 Hz for a time 0 1 s 2 If the actual speed detected is f 0 Hz or n 0 rpm and the Imax controller or the torque limitation for servo control SC is active for t 0 1 s 3 If the sign of the injected frequency and the actual speed is not the same the Imax cont...

Page 312: ...ion controller gain Scaling 16384 100 Vp C00254 nSpeedHighLimit_a C00830 88 INT Upper speed limit for the speed limitation During torque controlled operation only bTorquemodeOn TRUE Scaling 16384 100 reference speed C00011 Note For a correct function of the speed limitation in both direction the following applies The speed limitation operates with a internal hysteresis of 50 rpm The upper or lower...

Page 313: ...interpolation FALSE Deactivate interpolation TRUE Activate interpolation nVoltageAdd_a C00830 31 INT Additive voltage impression An additional setpoint for the motor voltage can be specified via this process input If there are for instance different loads at the motor output end it is possible to apply a voltage boost at the starting time If the value is negative the voltage is reduced Scaling 163...

Page 314: ...erence dnDeltaPos_p dnDeltaPos_p C00834 4 DINT Position difference following error input Difference between setpoint position and actual position in increments Is used for position control if bDeltaPosOn TRUE Scaling 65535 1 revolution dnPosSetValue_p C00834 5 DINT Absolute position setpoint in increments Is used for position control if bDeltaPosOn FALSE Scaling 65535 1 revolution bPosDerivativeOn...

Page 315: ...moment of inertia This process signal can be used during the process to dynamically control the percentage of the variable moment of inertia e g a reel set in C00919 1 which is to be considered for setpoint feedforward control Scaling 16384 100 moment of inertia process C00919 1 bBrakeChopperOn C00833 130 BOOL from version 12 00 00 Switch on the internal brake chopper as brake chopper slave C02866...

Page 316: ...the setpoint speed by the Imax controller is active wMaxMotorSpeed C00011 BOOL Reference speed C00011 nOutputSpeedCtrl_a INT Speed controller output Scaling 16384 100 Mmax C00057 In case of the VFC encoder motor control this output is the output of the slip regulator In this case the scaling depends on the reference frequency display in C00059 C00059 650 Hz 16384 327 68 Hz 24000 480 00 Hz C00059 6...

Page 317: ... injection braking active status signal DC injection braking 267 TRUE Automatic DC injection braking is active bIdentificationActive BOOL Motor parameter identification active status signal Automatic motor data identification 141 TRUE Motor parameter identification is active bFlyingSyncActive BOOL Flying restart function active status signal Flying restart function 264 TRUE Flying restart function...

Page 318: ...2017 TD23 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ bLimSpeedTorquemodeOn BOOL from version 13 00 00 Status signal of torque control with speed limitation TRUE Speed limitation for torque control is active Designator DIS code data type Value meaning ...

Page 319: ... On the I O level you can then establish the logical link to the digital output terminals 6B HYLFH0RQLWRU E0FWUO PS FWLYH E0FWUO ODPS FWLYH E0FWUO0RWRU3KDVH DXOW E0FWUO QFRGHU RP DXOW E0FWUO1PD E0FWUO7RUTXH0D E0FWUO KRS5HGXFHG E0FWUO W2YHUORDG Q0FWUO W5DWHBD HYLFH PRQLWRU Designator Data type Value meaning bMctrlImpActive BOOL TRUE Pulse inhibit is active bMctrlClampActive BOOL TRUE Clamp current ...

Page 320: ...age can be set in C00582 In the Lenze setting no response will be effected bMctrlMainsFault BOOL Status of the Mains phase failure monitoring TRUE Mains phase failure Mains failure bMctrlFanFault BOOL TRUE Fan monitoring An error has been detected bMctrlNmaxForFChop BOOL TRUE The maximum field frequency for the respective switching frequency has been exceeded bMctrlShortCircuit BOOL TRUE Motor sho...

Page 321: ...864 1 TRUE Due to an encoder open circuit it is internally switched to the encoderlessV f characteristic control in order toavoid impermissible motor movements This does not influence the setting in C00006 bSlpsmSpeedopen LoopControl BOOL from version 17 00 00 Implementation of an own flat ramp in the open loop controlled operation of the SLPSM Setting a flat ramp in the open loop controlled opera...

Page 322: ...ls 347 Touch probe detection 357 Tip How you can alter the preconfigured assignment of the input and output terminals is described in the chapter entitled User defined terminal assignment 365 Note The input and output terminals of the inverter have already been functionally assigned in the default setting Lenze setting The preconfigured assignment depends on the technology application selected in ...

Page 323: ...FR control input for enabling the inverter is permanently connected to the device control unit Parameterisation dialog in the Engineer Button Function Indicates the polarity of the input is HIGH active The polarity can be changed from HIGH active to LOW active by clicking this button Indicates that the polarity of the input is LOW active The polarity can be changed from LOW active to HIGH active b...

Page 324: ...digital input terminals Related topics Touch probe detection 357 User defined terminal assignment 365 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00115 1 Fct DI 1 2 200kHz Change function assignment 325 0 DI1 6 In DI2 7 In C00115 2 Fct DI 6 7 10kHz Change function assignment 325 0 DI1 6 In DI2 7 In Digital inputs DI1 DI7 C00114 DigInX Inversion Bit coded C02830 1 7 DI1 DI7 Debounce time 1 0 25 C0044...

Page 325: ...in the following subchapters Using DI1 6 and DI2 7 as digital inputs 326 Using DI1 6 and DI2 7 as frequency inputs 327 Using DI1 6 as counting input 332 C00115 1 Function assignment DI1 and DI2 C00115 2 Function assignment of DI6 and DI7 Function assignment DI1 DI6 DI2 DI7 0 DI1 6 In DI2 7 In Digital input Digital input 1 DI1 6 FreqIn DI2 7 In Frequency input Digital input 2 DI1 6 DI2 7 FreqIn 2 t...

Page 326: ...e time C02830 1 7 and the terminal polarity C00114 can be set individually The current terminal level at the input of the internal processing function is shown in C00443 1 in bit coded form The output level for the application is shown in C00443 2 in bit coded form Internal interfaces to the application Relevant outputs at the LS_DigitalInput system block Related topics Using DI1 6 and DI2 7 as fr...

Page 327: ... the preceding note Encoder increment 512 pulses motor revolution Reference speed C00011 1500 rpm Speed setpoint 100 Result The speed or the number of increments is too high Tip From version 06 00 00 onwards the LS_DigitalInput system block can also provide the encoder position Detailed information on this topic is provided in chapter Output of the encoder position of the DI1 DI2 frequency input 3...

Page 328: ... input terminal DI2 or DI7 remains configured as normal digital input Function assignment 2 DI1 6 DI2 7 FreqIn 2 track This setting in C00115 can be used to connect a two track encoder to the DI1 DI2 or DI6 DI7 terminals Q UHT Q BD 2IIVHW DLQ Q UHT Q BY Q UHT Q BD 2IIVHW DLQ Q UHT Q BY N N LW LW GQ3RV Q BS RPSDUH YDOXH XQFWLRQ E3RV Q B6WDWH E3RV Q B RDG GQ3RV Q B6HWBS Q UHT Q BD 2IIVHW DLQ Q UHT Q...

Page 329: ...ction This setting in C00115 can be used to connect a single track encoder to terminals DI1 DI2 or DI6 DI7 For this purpose the rotation speed is evaluated via terminal DI1 6 and the direction of rotation of the encoder LOW level CW direction of rotation is evaluated via the DI 7 terminal Q UHT Q BD 2IIVHW DLQ Q UHT Q BY Q UHT Q BD 2IIVHW DLQ Q UHT Q BY 0 75 B6SHHGIHHGEDFN 0 75 B6SHHGIHHGEDFN N N ...

Page 330: ...0 DI1 6 In DI2 7 In C00420 1 Encoder increments at FreqIn12 128 Incr rev C02842 1 FreqIn12 Offset 0 00 C02843 1 FreqIn12 Gain 100 00 C02844 1 PosIn12 Function Loading with level C02845 PosIn12 Comparison value 0 C00443 1 DIx Terminal level C00445 1 FreqIn12_nOut_v Incr ms C00446 1 FreqIn12_nOut_a C00449 1 FreqIn12_dnOut_p Incr Frequency input DI6 DI7 C00115 2 Fct DI 6 7 10kHz 0 DI1 6 In DI2 7 In C...

Page 331: ...integrator with starting value and reset status signal TRUE Angle integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and bPosIn12_State is reset to FALSE dnPosIn12_Set_p DINT from version 06 00 00 Starting value for angle integrator Output Data type Value meaning Frequency input DI1 DI2 nFreqIn12_a C00446 1 INT Output frequency as scaled analog signal in nFreqIn12_v C00445 1 INT Output frequen...

Page 332: ...147483647 Function assignment 4 DI1 6 CountIn DI2 7 In This setting in C00115 configures the input terminal DI1 or DI6 as counting input The input terminal DI2 or DI7 remains configured as normal digital input Note The starting value must be have been set so that it is smaller than the comparison value Otherwise the counter will be kept at the starting value because the condition Count value Compa...

Page 333: ... bCountIn1_Reset 0 Not connected C00621 4 LS_DigitalInput bCountIn1_LoadStartValue 0 Not connected C02840 1 CountIn1 Starting value 0 incr C02840 2 CountIn1 Comparison value 65535 incr C02841 1 CountIn1 Counter content incr C00443 1 DIx Terminal level Counting input DI6 C00115 2 Fct DI 6 7 10kHz 0 DI1 6 In DI2 7 In C00621 97 LS_DigitalInput bCountIn6_Reset 0 Not connected C00621 98 LS_DigitalInput...

Page 334: ...6 bCountIn6_ResetCompare BOOL Reset status signal Comparison value reached FALSE TRUE The output bCountIn6_Compare is reset to FALSE bCountIn6_LoadStartValue BOOL Load starting value into counter FALSE TRUE The starting value set in C02840 3 is accepted as the current count value Designator DIS code data type Value meaning Counting input DI1 bCountIn1_Compare BOOL Status signal Comparison value re...

Page 335: ...lue If the comparison value is reached or exceeded The counter jumps back to its starting value The output bCount1 6 _Compare is set to TRUE If there is a FALSE TRUE edge is at the input bCountIn1 6 _ResetCompare the output bCountIn1 6 _Compare can be reset to FALSE If there is a FALSE TRUE edge at the input bCountIn1 6 _LoadStartValue the current counter content can be reset to the parameterised ...

Page 336: ...gured in C00115 if necessary These input terminals can then be alternatively used as frequency inputs or counting inputs The DI3 DI5 input terminals are basically designed as normal digital inputs 6B LJLWDO QSXW N N 5 5 N N LW E QK E Q E Q E Q E Q E Q E Q E Q E RXQW Q B RPSDUH Z RXQW Q B Z RXQW Q B Q UHT Q BD W 2IIVHW DLQ Q UHT Q BY E RXQW Q B5HVHW RPSDUH E RXQW Q B RDG6WDUW9DOXH N N N N E RXQW Q ...

Page 337: ...mparison value reached FALSE TRUE The output bCountIn6_Compare is reset to FALSE bCountIn6_LoadStartValue BOOL Load starting value into counter FALSE TRUE The starting value set in C02840 3 is accepted as the current count value Designator DIS code data type Value meaning bCInh C00443 2 BOOL RFR digital input controller enable Digital inputs DI1 DI7 Using DI1 6 and DI2 7 as digital inputs bIn1 bIn...

Page 338: ...cy inputs nFreqIn67_a C00446 2 INT Output frequency as scaled analog signal in nFreqIn67_v C00445 2 INT Output frequency as speed signal in inc ms High current output Switching status of the motor holding brake at the high current output bOutHC_BrakeApplied BOOL from version 15 00 00 Switching status of a motor holding brake connected to the high current output The inverted signal logic of this st...

Page 339: ...ion to the encoder position the Overflow occurred distance processed status signal is provided Inputs Outputs Designator DIS code data type Information possible settings bPosIn12_Load BOOL Load angle integrator with starting value and reset status signal TRUE Angle integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and bPosIn12_State is reset to FALSE dnPosIn12_Set_p DINT Starting value for an...

Page 340: ...tegrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and then immediately continues to integrate the bPosIn12_State output is set to FALSE A positive nFreqIn12_v signal is incremented the counter content is increased with every cycle A negative nFreqIn12_v signal is decremented the counter content is reduced with every cycle Parameters Possible settings Info C02844 1 Function 0 Loading with level ...

Page 341: ...rmance if the input signal changes signs If 2 Loading with level reset is selected in C02844 1 the bPosIn12_Load input is status controlled In case of a TRUE signal the integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and the bPosIn12_State output is set to FALSE A positive nFreqIn12_v signal is incremented the counter content is increased with every cycle A negative nFreqIn12_v signal is de...

Page 342: ...the formula below Example You want to determine the counter content of the integrator at a certain speed at the input and a certain integration time t Given values nFreqIn12_v 1000 rpm integer value 1092 Integration time t 10 s Starting value of the integrator 0 Solution Conversion of the nFreqIn12_v input signal Calculation of the output value t integration time 16384 15000 rpm 1 1 incr dnPosIn12...

Page 343: ... two options for feedback monitoring 6 4 Connection principle motor holding brake Designator Data type Value meaning bOutHC_BrakeApplied BOOL Switching status of a motor holding brake connected to the high current output The inverted signal logic of this status signal corresponds to the evaluation of a real brake contact which provides the FALSE state in case of a released holding brake and the TR...

Page 344: ...After mains switching up to the start of the application the digital outputs remain set to FALSE Exception handling In case of a critical exception in the application e g reset the digital outputs are set to FALSE considering the terminal polarity parameterised in C00118 Switching cycle diagnostics of the relay A reference for evaluating the wear limit can be obtained via the number of switching c...

Page 345: ...1 OFF delay 0 000 s C00423 5 DO2 ON delay 0 000 s C00423 6 DO2 OFF delay 0 000 s C00423 7 DO3 ON delay 0 000 s C00423 8 DO3 OFF delay 0 000 s C00444 1 DOx Input level C00444 2 DOx Terminal level High current output C00423 9 DO High Current ON delay 0 000 s C00423 10 DO High Current OFF delay 0 000 s C00117 Status of brake output BD Relay output C00423 1 Relay ON delay 0 000 s C00423 2 Relay OFF de...

Page 346: ...block LS_DigitalOutput The LS_DigitalOutput system block maps the digital output terminals in the FB editor Input DIS code data type Information possible settings bRelay C00444 1 BOOL Relay output potential free two way switch bOut1 bOut3 C00444 1 BOOL Digital output DO1 DO3 bOutHC C00444 1 BOOL Output for brake control 6B LJLWDO2XWSXW LW E2XW LW LW Q 2XW LW E2XW LW LW Q 2XW LW E2XW LW LW Q 2XW LW...

Page 347: ...nsor temperature pressure etc Current signals in the 0 4 20 mA range For open circuit monitoring the current signal can be evaluated with regard to Life Zero or Dead Zero 0 20 mA without open circuit monitoring 4 20 mA with open circuit monitoring Analog output terminals The inverter has four analog output terminals Two output terminals output an analog current signal O1I O2I Two output terminals ...

Page 348: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Parameterisation dialog in the Engineer Button Function Parameterising analog input 350 Parameterising analog output 354 Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the analog input Changing the terminal assignment with the Engineer 369 ...

Page 349: ...1 Output value to application Analog input 2 C00028 2 AIN2 Input voltage V C00029 2 AIN2 Input current mA C00033 2 AIN2 Output value to application Analog output 1 C00439 1 O1U Input value from application C00439 3 O1I Input value from application C00436 1 O1U Voltage V C00437 1 O1I Current mA Analog output 2 C00439 2 O2U Input value from application C00439 4 O2I Input value from application C0043...

Page 350: ...eters Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog input 1 C00034 1 AIN1 Config 0 10V 10V C00026 1 AIN1 Offset 0 00 C00027 1 AIN1 Gain 1 0000 C00028 1 AIN1 Input voltage V C00029 1 AIN1 Input current mA C00033 1 AIN1 Output value to application C00440 1 PT1 rounding AnalogIn1 10 ms C00598 1 Resp to open circuit AIN1 3 TroubleQuickStop Analog input 2 C00034 2 AIN2 Config 0 10V 10V C00026 2 AIN2 Offset 0 00...

Page 351: ...n the range of 10 V are evaluated via the A1U and A2U input terminals If current signals are detected via the A1I or A2I input terminals instead the selection 1 0 20mA or 2 4 20mA is to be set in C00034 Tip By selecting 2 4 20mA you can implement a 4 20 mA current loop e g for stipulation of the speed setpoint Open circuit monitoring In the case of configuration as a 4 20 mA current loop the fault...

Page 352: ...the X axis and the output signal corresponds to the Y axis 6 5 Characteristic for analog inputs In the Engineer there is a parameterising dialog for entering the characteristic This dialog also displays the set characteristic graphically 199 99 ymax ymax xmax xmax ymin ymin 199 99 199 99 199 99 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00010 1 AIN1 y0 min 0 00 C00010 2 AIN1 x0 Dead band 1 00 C0001...

Page 353: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the characteristic 1 Go to the Terminal assignment tab and select the Analog terminals entry in the Control connections list field 2 Click on the button for the analog input in order to open the Analog input dialog 3 Click on the Settings button in order to open the Analog input Characteristic dialog box ...

Page 354: ...g for the corresponding analog output here O1U Short overview of parameters for the analog outputs Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit Analog output 1 C00434 1 O1U Gain 100 00 C00435 1 O1U Offset 0 00 C00439 1 O1U Input value from application C00439 3 O1I Input value from application C00436 1 O1U Voltage V C00437 1 O1I Current mA Analog output 2 C00434 2 O2U Gain 100 00 C00435 2 O2U Offset 0 ...

Page 355: ... input 214 20 mA for use as current input bCurrentErrorIn1 BOOL Status signal Current input error Only when analog input 1 is used as current input Application Cable breakage monitoring of the 4 20 mA circuit TRUE IAIN1 4 mA nIn2_a C00033 2 INT Analog input 2 Scaling 214 10 V for use as voltage input 214 20 mA for use as current input bCurrentErrorIn2 BOOL Status signal Current input error Only wh...

Page 356: ...nput system block maps the analog outputs in the FB editor Input DIS code data type Information possible settings nOut1V_a C00439 1 INT Analog output 1 voltage Scaling 214 16384 10 V nOut1I_a C00439 3 INT Analog output 1 current Scaling 214 16384 20 mA nOut2V_a C00439 2 INT Analog output 2 voltage Scaling 214 16384 10 V nOut2I_a C00439 4 INT Analog output 2 current Scaling 214 16384 20 mA 6B QDORJ...

Page 357: ...se approach of a position at a previously detected signal mark High precision traversing of a section starting at a previously detected signal mark Safe detection of signal marks with very short signal edges Measurement of a high precision position at a previously detected signal mark Homing to touch probe homing signal Relative residual path positioning traversing of a section starting at signal ...

Page 358: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Parameterisation dialog in the Engineer Button Function Open the parameterisation dialog for the selected TP signal source Parameter setting 359 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02810 3 7 TPDigIn3 TPDigIn7 Edge selection 0 Off ...

Page 359: ...dialog for setting a TP signal source 1 Go to the Terminal Assignment tab and select Digital input terminals TouchProbe in the Control connections list field 2 Click the button for the digital input that is to be set for the touch probe detection Tip If the Table positioning technology application is used the following parameterisation dialog can be opened for the selected TP signal source in the ...

Page 360: ...dvantageous position on the machine By adding an offset the touch probe sensor can be moved to a position which is more convenient to the application The offset value given in units is added to the TP position value which depends on the position source selected in C02815 x The offset value influences the display of the TP position C02817 x home position values internally derived from the touch pro...

Page 361: ..._TouchProbe SB If the actual position is outside the acceptance window touch probe is automatically deactivated If both window limits are set to 214748 3647 the acceptance window does not have any effect To properly use this function the drive needs to know the home position zero position Position source Selection of the position signal source to be measured with touch probe This usually is the ac...

Page 362: ...L DI3 DI5 Activate acceptance window TRUE Acceptance window function is active If the actual position is outside the acceptance window whose starting position is set in C02813 x and whose end position is set in C02814 x touch probe is automatically deactivated Output Data type Value meaning bTPDigIn3 7Received BOOL TRUE DI3 DI7 Touch probe received The signal is only pending for one task cycle 1 m...

Page 363: ...tect differences between two position signals In the wiring below digital input DI3 is used to connect the touch probe sensor For the sake of clarity irrelevant inputs and outputs of the LS_TouchProbe SB are masked out 6 6 Wiring for position measurement Delta position between two touch probes B2GRPHWHUB GQ Q3RVLWLRQBS GQ Q6SHHGBY E7ULJJHU3XOVH E5HVHW 0HPRU GHSWK 0HPRU W SH QSXW VHOHFWLRQ GJH VHOH...

Page 364: ...ll trigger decoupling Bit coded selection is carried out in C00447 for the digital output terminals defining the events that will trigger decoupling Finally the following parameters define the value status that the output terminals are to have when they are decoupled Related topics Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs 734 Bit Event Bit 0 SafeTorqueOff Bit 1 ReadyToSwitchOn Bit 2 Switched...

Page 365: ...Signal flow Change the interconnections in the FB editor on the I O level B In the Engineer or with the keypad Change the parameters for signal configuration in the parameters list Tip First of all select a Lenze configuration useful for the purpose at hand by going to C00005 and selecting a technology application that matches your drive task and then going to C00007 and selecting an appropriate c...

Page 366: ...to the outputs of system blocks which represent the device input terminals The inputs of system blocks that represent the device output terminals are logically linked to output signals of the technology application The following graphic illustrates the source destination principle 6 7 Source destination principle Note the following An equipment input terminal can be logically linked to several inp...

Page 367: ...is logically linked to the status signal Drive ready LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady output signal Configuration parameters for the analog and digital output terminals The preconfigured assignment of the analog and digital output terminals can be altered by means of the subcodes of C00620 and C00621 Other subcodes not shown here allow the configuration of input signals of different system blocks and port blo...

Page 368: ...configuration parameters of the Actuating drive speed technology application Configuration parameters 398 2 Navigate to the configuration parameter LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 C00701 10 which represents the logical signal link of the application input bJogSpeed2 3 Change the setting of C00701 10 Change selection 16001 DigIn_bIn2 in selection 0 Not interconnected 4 Navigate to the configuration parameter L...

Page 369: ...sing an alternative acceleration deceleration time for the main setpoint instead of for choosing the fixed setpoint 2 3 To do this the DI2 digital input is not to be linked to the bJogSpeed2 input but to the bJogRamp1 input of the application module Possibility 1 Change terminal assignment by means of the Terminal Assignment tab Procedure 1 Go to the Terminal Assignment tab and select Digital inpu...

Page 370: ...ocedure 1 Go to the Application parameters tab 2 Go to the Application Parameters tab and click on the Signal flow button in order to change to the dialog level Overview Signal flow 3 On the dialog level Overview Signal flow click on the Digital control signals button in order to open the Digital control signals dialog box 4 In the bJogSpeed2 list field set the selection 0 Not interconnected 5 In ...

Page 371: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Possibility 3 Change terminal assignment with the FB editor Procedure 1 Go to the FB Editor tab 2 Delete the existing interconnection from LS_DigitalInput bIn2 to LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 3 Establish a new interconnection from LS_DigitalInput bIn2 to LA_NCtrl bJogRamp1 Tip You can find detailed information on how to use the FB editor of the Engineer in the main chapter entitled Wor...

Page 372: ...ve speed AC Drive profile This technology application available from version 13 00 00 provides a speed and torque control by means of AC Drive Profile The fieldbuses EtherNet IP and system bus CANopen are supported TA actuating drive speed AC Drive Profile 401 Technology application Table positioning This technology application serves to solve position controlled drive tasks which are normally con...

Page 373: ... application should be controlled e g via terminals or via a fieldbus The interconnection of the input output terminals and ports shown in the FB editor in the I O level changes accordingly You can select the control mode in the Engineer on the Application parameter tab via the Control mode list field Tip You can infer the pre configured assignment of the input output terminals and ports for each ...

Page 374: ...nd negation of main setpoint additional setpoint actual process controller value Up to 15 fixed setpoints for speed and ramp time Adjustable setpoint ramp times Freely selectable variable ramp shape Automatic holding brake control Quick stop QSP with adjustable ramp time Motor potentiometer function Process controller Load monitoring in preparation Integrated freely available GeneralPurpose functi...

Page 375: ...speed Main speed setpoint offset and gain L_OffsetGainP_1 Motor potentiometer function L_MPot_1 Setpoint generator L_NSet_1 Speed setpoint input limitation Additional speed setpoint offset and gain L_OffsetGainP_2 Actual speed sensor value offset and gain L_OffsetGainP_3 Process controller L_PCTRL_1 Holding brake control Terminal assignment display of digital control signals Integrated disposable ...

Page 376: ...the Lenze setting the motor potentiometer function is deactivated Activation is possible via C00806 or via the bMPotEnable input The behaviour of the motor potentiometer during switch on of the drive system can be selected in C00805 For a detailed functional description see the L_MPot FB Optional selection of an additional speed setpoint You can optionally select an additional speed setpoint e g a...

Page 377: ...e the subchapter Interface to safety system of the chapter on basic drive functions for a detailed description of the individual control bits bCInh BOOL Enable inhibit inverter FALSE Enable inverter The inverter switches to the OperationEnabled device status if no other source for controller inhibit is active C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources triggers of a controller...

Page 378: ... deceleration jumps to the value 0 For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is held bRFG_0 BOOL Ramp function generator Lead the main setpoint integrator to 0 within the current Ti times For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is led to 0 within the Ti time s...

Page 379: ...tation For instance if a motor or gearbox is fixed laterally reversed to a machine part but the setpoint selection should still be executed for the positive direction of rotation FALSE Clockwise rotation Cw TRUE Direction of rotation to the left Ccw bRLQCw BOOL Activate clockwise rotation fail safe For a detailed functional description see the L_RLQ FB FALSE Quick stop TRUE CW rotation bRLQCcw BOO...

Page 380: ...on deceleration times for the main setpoint The four selection inputs are binary coded therefore 15 alternative acceleration deceleration times can be selected For main setpoint nMainSetValue_a the set acceleration time C00012 and deceleration time C00013 are active in the case of the binary coded selection 0 all inputs FALSE or not assigned Alternative acceleration times are selected in C00101 1 ...

Page 381: ... INT Sensor and process setpoint for operating modes 2 4 and 5 Scaling 16384 100 Internal limitation to 199 99 nPIDActValue_a INT Speed or actual sensor value actual process value Offset and gain for this input signal can be set in C00698 and C00672 Scaling 16384 100 Internal limitation to 199 99 nPIDInfluence_a INT Limitation of the influencing factor in percent The influence factor of the PID co...

Page 382: ...etikOut_a nGPMulDivIn_a INT Multiplication Division Input signal The factor for the multiplication can be set in C00699 1 numerator and C00699 2 denominator The result is output at output nGPMulDivOut_a bGPDigitalDelayIn BOOL Binary delay element Input signal The on delay can be set in C00720 1 The off delay can be set in C00720 2 The time delayed input signal is output at output bGPDigitalDelayOu...

Page 383: ...rent direction of rotation FALSE Clockwise rotation Cw TRUE Direction of rotation to the left Ccw bSpeedActCompare BOOL Result of the speed comparison detection of speed 0 TRUE During open loop operation Speed setpoint Comparison value C00024 During closed loop operation Actual speed value Comparison value C00024 bOverLoadActive BOOL In preparation output is not interconnected on the application l...

Page 384: ...nctions on application level for free usage GeneralPurpose functions nGPAnalogSwitchInOut_a INT Analog switch Output signal nGPArithmetikOut_a INT Arithmetic Output signal nGPMulDivOut_a INT Multiplication Division Output signal bGPDigitalDelayOut BOOL Binary delay element Output signal bGPLogicOut BOOL Binary logic Output signal bGPCompareOut BOOL Analog comparison Output signal bGPSignalOut1 bGP...

Page 385: ...e of direction of rotation bSetSpeedCcw Fixed setpoint 1 3 bJogSpeed1 Quick stop bSetQuickstop X5 DI2 Fixed setpoint 2 3 bJogSpeed2 Activate manual DC injection braking DCB bSetDCBrake Fixed setpoint 2 3 bJogSpeed2 X5 DI3 Activate manual DC injection braking DCB bSetDCBrake Quick stop bSetQuickstop Motor potentiometer Increase speed bMPotUp CW rotation quick stop bRLQCw X5 DI4 Change of direction ...

Page 386: ...peed1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bSetDCBrake X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X5 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X107 X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA O1U...

Page 387: ...JogSpeed1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bSetQuickstop X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA O1U O...

Page 388: ...SpeedCcw X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bSetDCBrake X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bMPotUp X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bMPotDown X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2...

Page 389: ...JogSpeed1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bRLQCw X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bRLQCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X...

Page 390: ...I5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E Quick commissioning SAVE Par1 Quick commissioning Terminals Keypad SAVE Par1 8400 HighLineC User Menu Logbook Go to param Quick commis...

Page 391: ...A_NCtrl bDriveFail X5 RFR LA_NCtrl bFailReset X3 A1U X5 DI1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 X3 A2I X5 DI4 X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101...

Page 392: ... DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 Note You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to 1 NOut NSet NAdd so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect The manual jog function via digital terminals is being prepared X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U...

Page 393: ...DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 Note You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to 1 NOut NSet NAdd so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect The manual jog function via digital terminals is being prepared X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U ...

Page 394: ...t must be set in the CAN MCI control word to ensure that the device changes to the SwitchedOn device status after mains connection without the need for a master control specifying this bit via fieldbus If control via a bus system is not wanted e g in the case of control via terminals the wDriveCtrl output signal of the LS_ParFix system block can be connected to the control word inputs Bit 1 Disabl...

Page 395: ...d 1 Inverter control inhibited pulse inhibit is active Bit 2 FreeStatusBit2 Free status bit 2 not assigned freely assignable Bit 3 FreeStatusBit3 Free status bit 3 not assigned freely assignable Bit 4 FreeStatusBit4 Free status bit 4 not assigned freely assignable Bit 5 FreeStatusBit5 Free status bit 5 not assigned freely assignable Bit 6 ActSpeedIsZero During open loop operation 1 Speed setpoint ...

Page 396: ...00182 L_NSet_1 S ramp time PT1 20 00 s C00190 L_NSet_1 Setpoint arithmetic 0 Out Set C00220 L_NSet_1 Acceleration time add setpoint 0 000 s C00221 L_NSet_1 Deceleration time add setpoint 0 000 s C00222 L_PCTRL_1 Vp 1 0 C00223 L_PCTRL_1 Tn 400 ms C00224 L_PCTRL_1 Kd 0 0 C00225 L_PCTRL_1 MaxLimit 199 99 C00226 L_PCTRL_1 MinLimit 199 99 C00227 L_PCTRL_1 Acceleration time 0 010 s C00228 L_PCTRL_1 Dece...

Page 397: ...topics GeneralPurpose functions 491 C00696 L_OffsetGainP_1 Offset 0 00 C00697 L_OffsetGainP_2 Offset 0 00 C00698 L_OffsetGainP_3 Offset 0 00 C00800 L_MPot_1 Upper limit 100 00 C00801 L_MPot_1 Lower limit 100 00 C00802 L_MPot_1 Acceleration time 10 0 s C00803 L_MPot_1 Deceleration time 10 0 s C00804 L_MPot_1 Inactive fct 0 Retain value C00805 L_MPot_1 Init fct 0 Load last value C00806 Use of motor ...

Page 398: ...lStatus wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoHigh bFailReset bCInh wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoHigh bFail wDeviceStatusWord bReady bCInhIsActive bNactCompare bCwCcw bDriveReady bSpeedCcw bSpeedActCompare LS_DriveInterface C701 1 C701 2 wMCIControl wMCIDriveControl C700 2 bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease C701 20 nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a bQSPIsActive bQSP...

Page 399: ... 1 C00699 2 C00720 1 C00720 2 C00821 2 C00821 1 C00821 3 C00821 8 bGPLogicIn2 bGPLogicIn3 C00820 C00680 C00682 C00681 C00830 82 C00833 66 C00833 63 C00833 64 C00833 65 C00830 16 C00830 17 C00830 14 C00830 15 C00833 13 In Out 32767 199 99 LA_NCtrl Configuration parameters Entry in select list C700 9 C700 10 C701 23 C700 13 C701 24 C701 25 C701 26 C701 27 C700 14 C700 15 1006 1008 1008 1009 1017 Gen...

Page 400: ...DFlipFlop_InClr C1 Q Q 1D R C00833 4 C00833 5 C00833 6 LA_NCtrl Configuration parameters Entry in select list C701 28 C701 29 C701 30 1022 1023 GeneralPurpose GP functions nGPSignalOut1_a C00410 1 C00413 2 C00413 1 nGPSignalOut2_a C00410 2 C00413 4 C00413 3 nGPSignalOut3_a C00410 3 C00413 6 C00413 5 nGPSignalOut4_a C00410 4 C00413 8 C00413 7 1009 1010 1011 1012 bFreeOut1 bFreeOut2 bFreeOut3 bFreeO...

Page 401: ...bus CANopen set the 30 CAN control mode instead in C00007 Product features Pre configured control modes for terminals and bus control with predefined process data connection to the fieldbus Free configuration of input and output signals adjustable offset gain and negation of the speed setpoint Up to 15 fixed setpoints for speed and ramp time Adjustable setpoint ramp times Freely selectable variabl...

Page 402: ...va org Related topics Process data assignment for fieldbus communication Run Stop event Scaling of speed and torque values Instance 23 0x17 Extended Speed and Torque Control Output Bytes Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Net Ref NetCtrl Fault Reset Run Rev Run Fwd 1 2 Speed Reference Low Byte 3 Speed Reference High Byte 4 Torque Reference Low Byte 5 Torque Reference High Byte Insta...

Page 403: ...C Drive Profile technology application Configuration of the signal source for setpoint selection via fieldbus NetRef 1 Configuration of the signal source for local setpoint selection NetRef 0 Offset and gain for speed setpoint L_OffsetGainP_1 Setpoint generator L_NSet_1 Speed setpoint input limitation Holding brake control Terminal assignment display of digital control signals Integrated disposabl...

Page 404: ...et and gain of the speed signal can be set in C00696 and C00670 for a simple signal adjustment of a setpoint encoder Ramp function generator The setpoint is transformed to a speed setpoint in the setpoint encoder via a ramp function generator with linear or S shaped ramps Upstream to the ramp function generator a blocking speed masking function and a setpoint MinMax limitation are effective For a ...

Page 405: ...ue_a is used as for the local selection of the speed setpoint In torque mode however the nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to the nTorqueGenLim_a input In this case the speed setpoint is internally permanently set to 100 The relationships are shown in the following table Fieldbus used Control mode C00007 Torque reference AC Drive Profile control word wMCIDriveControl effective input at ...

Page 406: ...eset bRFG_0 and bSetSpeedCcw which results in the AC Drive specific behaviour See the Process data assignment for fieldbus communication subchapter for a detailed description of the individual control bits Display parameter C01351 1 wSMControl WORD Interface to the optional safety system Setting control bit 0 SafeStop1 in this control word causes e g the automatic deceleration of the drive to stan...

Page 407: ...dstill by means of DC injection braking The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill After the hold time C00107 has expired the controller sets the pulse inhibit bRFG_Stop BOOL Ramp function generator Maintain the current value of the main setpoint integrator The speed for instance of a running ramp process is immediately kept constant when bRFG_Stop is activated At the same time the a...

Page 408: ...GenLim_a The nTorqueMotLim_a input is not effective More notes for both inputs These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the inverter s maximum torque in motor and generator mode The drive cannot output a higher torque in motor generator mode than set here The applied values any polarity are internally interpreted as absolute values If V f characteristic control VF...

Page 409: ...setpoint in the setpoint encoder via a ramp function generator with linear or S shaped ramps Upstream to the ramp function generator a blocking speed masking function and a setpoint MinMax limitation are effective For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB When torque mode is set the following applies The input value is interpreted as torque setpoint Input nAuxSetValue_a is internally...

Page 410: ...tained bMPotDown BOOL Decreasing the speed setpoint TRUE Approach the lower speed limit value set In C00801 with the deceleration time set in C00803 Process controller In the Lenze setting the process controller is deactivated The activation is executed by selecting the operating mode in C00242 For a detailed functional description see FB L_PCTRL bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp BOOL Activate ramp for infl...

Page 411: ... nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a INT Analog switch Input signals The input signal selected via the selection input bGPAnalogSwitchSet is output at output nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a bGPAnalogSwitchSet BOOL Analog switch Selection input FALSE nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a TRUE nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a nGPArithmetikIn1_a nGPArithmetikIn2_a INT Arithmetic Input signals The arithmetic funct...

Page 412: ...e bDriveReady BOOL TRUE Inverter is ready for operation SwitchedOn device status is active The drive is in this device status if the DC bus voltage is applied and the inverter is still inhibited by the user controller inhibit bCInhActive BOOL TRUE Controller inhibit is active bQSPIsActive BOOL TRUE Quick stop is active bSpeedCcw BOOL Current direction of rotation FALSE Clockwise rotation Cw TRUE D...

Page 413: ...pply brake TRUE Release brake bMBrakeReleased BOOL Holding brake control Brake released considering the brake release time When the holding brake is triggered to close bMBrakeReleased is immediately set to FALSE even if the brake closing time has not yet elapsed TRUE Brake released after the brake release time has expired GP GeneralPurpose The following outputs are interconnected with logic arithm...

Page 414: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Free outputs The following outputs can freely be interconnected on the application level The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I O level via these outputs bFreeOut1 bFreeOut8 BOOL Free outputs for digital signals wFreeOut1 wFreeOut4 WORD Free outputs for 16 bit signals Designator Data type Value meaning ...

Page 415: ...eed2 Activate manual DC injection braking DCB bSetDCBrake Fixed setpoint 2 3 bJogSpeed2 Only if NetCtrl 0 fixed setpoint 2 3 bJogSpeed2 X5 DI3 Activate manual DC injection braking DCB bSetDCBrake Quick stop bSetQuickstop Motor potentiometer Increase speed bMPotUp CW rotation quick stop bRLQCw Only if NetCtrl 0 Activate manual DC injection braking DCB bSetDCBrake X5 DI4 Change of direction of rotat...

Page 416: ...X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bSetDCBrake X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X5 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X107 X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA O1U O1I O...

Page 417: ... A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bSetQuickstop X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X...

Page 418: ...A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bSetDCBrake X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bMPotUp X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bMPotDown X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E C...

Page 419: ...3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_NCtrl bRLQCw X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_NCtrl bRLQCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E CG ...

Page 420: ..._a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E Quick commissioning SAVE Par1 Quick commissioning Terminals Keypad SAVE Par1 8400 User Menu Logbook Go to param Quick commissio...

Page 421: ... NC NO LA_NCtrl bDriveFail X5 RFR LA_NCtrl bFailReset X3 A1U X5 DI1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 X3 A2I X5 DI4 X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U ...

Page 422: ...DI4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl NMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E CG CL CH X1 X5 X107 LP_CanIn1 LP_CanOut1 wCtrl wIn2 wIn3 DriveControl S...

Page 423: ...4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U LA_NCtrl nMotorSpeedAct_a X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X107 BD1 X4 DO1 LA_NCtrl bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E CG CL CH X1 X5 X107 LP_MciIn wCtrl wIn2 wIn3 DriveControl SpeedReference ...

Page 424: ...Scaling of speed and torque values Word 3 TorqueReference Torque setpoint in Nm Scaling of speed and torque values Word 4 Not preconfigured Words 5 16 Not preconfigured Only available in control mode 40 MCI Control word Name Function Bit 0 Run Forward Relationships between Run1 and Run2 and trigger events can be found in the chapter Run Stop event Bit 1 Run Backward Bit 2 Fault Reset 0 1 Reset err...

Page 425: ...d reference torque 0 via local setting in the device or terminal 1 via fieldbus e g by the scanner Bit 7 At Reference 1 The drive currently runs with reference speed speed mode or reference torque Torque mode Bit 8 Drive State The Drive State is coded as follows 0 Manufacturer specific not used with 8400 1 Start up drive initialisation 2 Not_Ready mains voltage switched off 3 Ready mains voltage s...

Page 426: ...ed setpoint Parameters Name Description C00011 Appl Reference speed Reference variable for speed related signals C01353 1 ACDrive Speed scaling In the Lenze setting 0 no scaling takes place 20 1 Equation for scaling the actual speed value Parameters Name Description C00011 Appl Reference speed Reference variable for speed related signals C01353 1 ACDrive Speed scaling In the Lenze setting 0 no sca...

Page 427: ...rive Speed scaling 0 C01353 2 ACDrive Torque scaling 0 Greyed out display parameter Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00012 Accel time main setpoint 2 000 s C00013 Decel time main setpoint 2 000 s C00019 Auto DCB Threshold 3 rpm C00024 LS_DriveInterface bNActCompare 0 00 C00036 DCB braking Current 50 00 C00039 1 Fixed setpoint 1 40 00 C00039 2 Fixed setpoint 2 60 00 C00039 3 Fixed setpoint...

Page 428: ...luence 5 000 s C00632 1 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 1 max 0 00 C00632 2 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 2 max 0 00 C00632 3 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 3 max 0 00 C00633 1 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 1 min 0 00 C00633 2 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 2 min 0 00 C00633 3 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 3 min 0 00 C00635 L_NSet_1 nMaxLimit 199 99 C00636 L_NSet_1 nMinLimit 199 99 C00670 L_OffsetGainP_1 Gain 1 0000 C00671 L_OffsetGainP...

Page 429: ...Par2_a nPar3_a nPar4_a LS_ParFree_a C 2 472 C 3 472 C 4 472 C472 1 bFailReset bCInh bCInhActive bDriveFail wDriveControlStatus wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoHigh bFailReset bCInh wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoHigh bFail wDeviceStatusWord bReady bCInhIsActive bNactCompare bCwCcw bDriveReady bSpeedCcw bSpeedActCompare LS_DriveInterface C701 1 C701 2 wMCIControl wMCIDriveControl C...

Page 430: ...ailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoHigh bFailReset bCInh wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoHigh bFail wDeviceStatusWord bReady bCInhIsActive bNactCompare bCwCcw bDriveReady bSpeedCcw bSpeedActCompare LS_DriveInterface C701 1 C701 2 wMCIControl wMCIDriveControl C700 2 bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease C701 20 nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a bQSPIsActive bQSPActive bRfgStop bRFG_...

Page 431: ...eReady bSpeedCcw bSpeedActCompare LS_DriveInterface C701 1 C701 2 wMCIControl wMCIDriveControl C700 2 bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease C701 20 nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a bQSPIsActive bQSPActive bRfgStop bRFG_Stop C701 5 bJog8 bJogSpeed8 bJog4 bJogSpeed4 C701 11 C701 12 b 2 Ti bJog 2 Ramp bTi1 bJogRamp1 C701 13 C701 14 b 8 Ti bJog 8 Ramp b 4 Ti bJog 4 Ramp C701 15 C701 1...

Page 432: ...et C00699 1 C00699 2 C00720 1 C00720 2 C00821 2 C00821 1 C00821 3 C00821 8 bGPLogicIn2 bGPLogicIn3 C00820 C00680 C00682 C00681 C00830 82 C00833 66 C00833 63 C00833 64 C00833 65 C00830 16 C00830 17 C00830 14 C00830 15 C00833 13 In Out 32767 199 99 LA_NCtrl Configuration parameters Entry in select list C700 9 C700 10 C701 23 C700 13 C701 24 C701 25 C701 26 C701 27 C700 14 C700 15 1006 1008 1008 1009...

Page 433: ...InClk bGPDFlipFlop_InClr C1 Q Q 1D R C00833 4 C00833 5 C00833 6 LA_NCtrl Configuration parameters Entry in select list C701 28 C701 29 C701 30 1022 1023 GeneralPurpose GP functions nGPSignalOut1_a C00410 1 C00413 2 C00413 1 nGPSignalOut2_a C00410 2 C00413 4 C00413 3 nGPSignalOut3_a C00410 3 C00413 6 C00413 5 nGPSignalOut4_a C00410 4 C00413 8 C00413 7 1009 1010 1011 1012 bFreeOut1 bFreeOut2 bFreeOu...

Page 434: ... override Profile sequence block control Travel block restart within the profile online profile start Specification of target position via process signal interface e g via fieldbus Further functions Up to 15 travel sets can be set via parameters Parameterisation of the profile data in physical units or relative values Adjustable torque limitation Freely selectable variable ramp shape Motor potenti...

Page 435: ...s in the different operating modes can be controlled with this interface Upstream to the Motion Control Kernel there is a so called MCKInterface called which provides additional process inputs for the application in order to control the Motion Control Kernel 7 13 Signal flow of the table positioning Offset and gain L_OffsetGainP_1 MCK control word Motor potentiometer function L_MPot_1 MCK status w...

Page 436: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Basic function Manual jog Status word of the MCKInterface Operating mode changeover is executed by the MCKInterface Terminal assignment display of digital control signals Integrated disposable GeneralPurpose functions Analog switch arithmetic multiplication division binary delay element binary logic analog comparison D flipflop ...

Page 437: ...tioning operating mode A detailed explanation of all profile parameters can be found in the subchapter Profile entry 586 of the description of the Positioning basic drive function The selection of the profile to be executed can either be executed as a data word via the input wPosProfileNo or binary coded via the inputs bPosProfileNo_1 bPosProfileNo_4 The chosen profile is started via the process i...

Page 438: ...E or setting the control bit PosExecute in the MCK control word If bit 3 is set in C01297 the setpoint positions at the MCKInterface are automatically accepted into the profile with the applied profile number if a change of data is detected at the corresponding input for the setpoint position The accepted position is stored in the code C01301 x in the application unit units By reading out the code...

Page 439: ...the subchapter Interface to safety system of the chapter on basic drive functions for a detailed description of the individual control bits bCInh BOOL Enable inhibit inverter FALSE Enable inverter The inverter switches to the OperationEnabled device status if no other source for controller inhibit is active C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources triggers of a controller i...

Page 440: ...ion should still be executed for the positive direction of rotation FALSE Clockwise rotation Cw TRUE Direction of rotation to the left Ccw nMainSetValue_a INT Main speed setpoint Offset and gain of this input signal can be set in C00696 and C00670 for a simple signal adjustment of a setpoint encoder Scaling 16384 100 reference speed C00011 The main setpoint is transformed to a speed setpoint in th...

Page 441: ...otentiometer function This input and C00806 are OR d TRUE The motor potentiometer function is active the speed setpoint can be changed via the bMPotUp and bMPotDown control inputs bMPotUp BOOL Increasing the speed setpoint TRUE Approach the upper speed limit value set in C00800 with the acceleration time set in C00802 bMPotDown BOOL Decreasing the speed setpoint TRUE Approach the lower speed limit...

Page 442: ...ive FALSE Deactivate position control angle control TRUE Activate position control angle control nPosCtrlOutLimit_a INT Limitation of the position controller output Scaling 16384 100 reference speed C00011 Pre configured assignment 100 nPosCtrlPAdapt_a INT Adaptation of the position controller gain Scaling 16384 100 Vp C00254 Pre configured assignment 100 bLimitSwitchPos bLimitSwitchNeg BOOL Limit...

Page 443: ...nd is to be connected to the corresponding digital input to which the reference switch is connected bPosSetProfilePosition BOOL Position teaching MCK setpoint position TRUE Teach MCK setpoint position into the selected profile bPosSetActualPosition BOOL Position teaching Current position TRUE Teach current position into the selected profile bPosExecute BOOL Positioning Start travelling FALSE TRUE ...

Page 444: ...e mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 1 wPosProfileUnitsLW wPosProfileUnitsHW WORD Selection of the target position in units wPosProfileUnitsLW Low word wPosProfileUnitsHW High word The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 1 GP GeneralPurpose The following inputs are interconnected with logic arithmetic functions on application level for free usage GeneralPur...

Page 445: ...ter Loading input The input has the highest priority TRUE Accept the starting value wGPCounter1LdVal wGPCounter1LdVal WORD Counter Starting value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most significant bit determines the sign wGPCounter1CmpVal WORD Counter Comparison value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most sign...

Page 446: ...ing 16384 100 Imax_mot C00022 nMotorSpeedSet_a INT Speed setpoint Scaling 16384 100 reference speed C00011 nMotorSpeedAct_a INT Actual speed value Scaling 16384 100 reference speed C00011 nMotorTorqueAct_a INT Actual torque In the VFC encoder operating mode of the motor control this value is determined from the current motor current and corresponds to the actual torque only by approximation Scalin...

Page 447: ...e bInTarget BOOL TRUE Target position actual value is in the target window wActProfileNo WORD Current profile number Bit B0 B7 contain the information of the MCK status word Bits B8 B15 are fixed at 0 wActPosMode WORD Current positioning mode Bit B0 B3 contain the information of the MCK status word Bits B4 B15 are fixed at 0 dnTargetPos_p DINT Target position in increments 65535 1 revolution of th...

Page 448: ...n C00411 1 4 A bit coded inversion of the output signals can be parameterised in C00412 nGPSignalOut1_a nGPSignalOut4_a BOOL Analog signal monitor Output signals The signal sources to be output are selected in C00410 1 4 Gain and offset for each output signal can be parameterised in C00413 1 8 bGPDFlipFlop_Out BOOL D FlipFlop Output signal bGPDFlipFlop_NegOut BOOL D FlipFlop Negated output signal ...

Page 449: ...SwitchNeg Positioning profile array bit valency 4 bPosProfileNo_4 Manual jog in negative direction bManJogNeg Negative limit switch bLimitSwitchNeg X5 DI5 Positioning profile array bit valency 2 bPosProfileNo_2 Home position bHomeMark X5 DI6 Positioning profile array bit valency 1 bPosProfileNo_1 Quick stop bSetQuickstop X5 DI7 Start of profile generation bPosExecute Status word bit 7 LP_CanOut1 b...

Page 450: ... X5 DI6 LA_TabPos bPosProfileNo_1 X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 LA_TabPos bPosExecute X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable bPosProfileNo_2 DI5 bPosProfileNo_1 DI6 Selected profile Activation of operating mode FALSE FALSE 0 Speed follower FALSE TRUE 1 Homin...

Page 451: ...ProfileNo_1 X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 LA_TabPos bPosExecute X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable bPosProfileNo_4 DI4 bPosProfileNo_2 DI5 bPosProfileNo_1 DI6 Selected profile Activation of operating mode FALSE FALSE FALSE 0 Speed follower FALSE FALSE TR...

Page 452: ...s bPosProfileNo_1 X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 LA_TabPos bPosExecute X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable bPosProfileNo_4 DI4 bPosProfileNo_2 DI5 bPosProfileNo_1 DI6 Selected profile Activation of operating mode FALSE FALSE FALSE 0 Speed follower FALSE FA...

Page 453: ... X5 DI6 LA_TabPos bPosProfileNo_1 X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 LA_TabPos bPosExecute X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable bPosProfileNo_2 DI5 bPosProfileNo_1 DI6 Selected profile Activation of operating mode FALSE FALSE 0 Speed follower FALSE TRUE 1 Homin...

Page 454: ..._mot C00022 X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable CG CL CH X107 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 X1 M X5 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E Quick commissioning SAVE Par1 Quick commissioning Terminals Keypad SAVE Par1 84...

Page 455: ...eedAct_a 10 V 100 reference speed C00011 X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable CG CL CH X107 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 X1 M X5 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 R...

Page 456: ... X3 O1I X5 DI6 LA_TabPos bSetQuickstop X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 LP_CanOut1 bState_B7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bImaxActive X107 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 M X5 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2...

Page 457: ... O1I X5 DI6 LA_TabPos bSetQuickstop X3 O2U LA_TabPos nMotorCurrent_a 10V 100 of Imax_mot C00022 X5 DI7 LP_MciOut bState_B7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 LA_TabPos bDriveReady X107 BD2 X4 DO2 LA_TabPos bInTarget X4 DO3 LA_TabPos bImaxActive X107 X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 M X5 A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X1...

Page 458: ...n of the target position in increments The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 1 65535 Increments 1 motor revolution The position resolution i e how many increments form one unit is displayed in C01205 Words 5 16 Not preconfigured Only available in control mode 40 MCI Control word Name Function Bit 0 MckOperationMode_1 Binary coded selection of the operating mode of the Motion ...

Page 459: ...1 GPSignalOut1 Binary signal monitor Output signals 1 2 The signal sources to be output are selected in C00411 1 2 A bit coded inversion of the output signals can be parameterised in C00412 For a detailed functional description see FB L_SignalMonitor_b Bit 2 GPSignalOut2 Bit 3 CInhActive 1 Controller inhibit is active Bit 4 DriveReady 1 Inverter is ready for operation SwitchedOn device status is a...

Page 460: ...NSet_1 Blocking speed 2 max 0 00 C00632 3 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 3 max 0 00 C00633 1 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 1 min 0 00 C00633 2 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 2 min 0 00 C00633 3 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed 3 min 0 00 C00635 L_NSet_1 nMaxLimit 199 99 C00636 L_NSet_1 nMinLimit 199 99 C00670 L_OffsetGainP_1 Gain 1 0000 C00671 L_OffsetGainP_2 Gain 1 0000 C00696 L_OffsetGainP_1 Offset 0 00 C00697 L_OffsetGainP...

Page 461: ...nPosCtrlOutLimit_a nPosCtrlOutLimit_a C710 27 nPosCtrlPAdapt_a nPosCtrlPAdapt_a C710 28 wCANControl wCANDriveControl C710 1 LS_MotionControlKernel dnPosTarget_p dnTargetPos_p bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleased bMBrakeReleased LS_AnalogOutput nOut1V_a C 1 620 nSpeedOverride_a nSpeedOverride_a C710 21 nAccOverride_a nAccOverride_a C710 22 1107 1105 1106 1106 1103 1107 1108 1103 1100...

Page 462: ...C00699 2 C00720 1 C00720 2 C00821 2 C00821 1 C00821 3 C00821 8 bGPLogicIn2 bGPLogicIn3 C00820 C00680 C00682 C00681 C00830 82 C00833 66 C00833 63 C00833 64 C00833 65 C00830 16 C00830 17 C00830 14 C00830 15 C00833 13 In Out 32767 199 99 LA_TabPos Configuration parameters Entry in select list C710 12 C710 13 C711 30 C700 13 C711 31 C711 32 C711 33 C711 34 C710 17 C710 18 1114 1116 1119 1120 1121 Gene...

Page 463: ...ers Entry in select list C711 35 C711 36 C711 37 1126 1127 GeneralPurpose GP functions nGPSignalOut1_a C00410 1 C00413 2 C00413 1 nGPSignalOut2_a C00410 2 C00413 4 C00413 3 nGPSignalOut3_a C00410 3 C00413 6 C00413 5 nGPSignalOut4_a C00410 4 C00413 8 C00413 7 1117 1118 1119 1120 bGPCounter1Equal bGPCounter1ClkDown wGPCounter1LdVal bGPCounter1Load wGPCounter1CmpVal bGPCounter1ClkUp wGPCounter1Out C0...

Page 464: ...onfiguration of input and output signals Offset gain and negation of main setpoint additional setpoint Up to 15 fixed setpoints for speed and ramp time Adjustable setpoint ramp times Freely selectable variable ramp shape Automatic holding brake control Quick stop QSP with adjustable ramp time Integrated freely available GeneralPurpose functions Analog switch arithmetic multiplication division bina...

Page 465: ... a fault current circuit breaker A table positioning or sequential positioning control is required for highly dynamic applications and jerk free traversing profiles which is available with the HighLine device version Related topics Commissioning of the Switch off positioning technology application 81 Positioning accuracy at the motor shaft The positioning accuracy of the load depends among other t...

Page 466: ... positioning Main speed setpoint offset and gain L_OffsetGainP_1 Additional speed setpoint offset and gain L_OffsetGainP_2 Setpoint generator L_NSet_1 Speed setpoint input limitation Terminal assignment display of digital control signals Selection of edge level for tripping the ramp down and stop functions L_JogCtrlExtension_1 Holding brake control Integrated disposable GeneralPurpose functions An...

Page 467: ...See the subchapter Interface to safety system of the chapter on basic drive functions for a detailed description of the individual control bits bCInh BOOL Enable inhibit inverter FALSE Enable inverter The inverter switches to the OperationEnabled device status if no other source for controller inhibit is active C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources triggers of a controll...

Page 468: ...instance of a running ramp process is immediately kept constant when bRFG_Stop is activated At the same time the acceleration deceleration jumps to the value 0 For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is held nVoltageAdd_a INT Additive voltage impression An additional setpoint for the motor voltage can be specified via this proc...

Page 469: ... left Ccw bRLQCw BOOL Activate clockwise rotation fail safe For a detailed functional description see the L_RLQ FB FALSE Quick stop TRUE CW rotation bRLQCcw BOOL Activate counter clockwise rotation fail safe For a detailed functional description see the L_RLQ FB FALSE Quick stop TRUE Counter clockwise rotation nMainSetValue_a INT Main speed setpoint Offset and gain of this input signal can be set ...

Page 470: ...el2 see Truth table for activating the pre switch off bJogCtrlStop1 bJogCtrlStop2 bJogCtrlStop3 BOOL Ramping down of the ramp function generator in the downstream L_NSet FB These inputs only have a function if they have been previously activated via bJogCtrlInputSel1 and bJogCtrlInputSel2 see Truth table for activating the pre switch off bJogSpeed4 bJogSpeed8 BOOL Inputs for overriding fixed setpo...

Page 471: ... time delayed input signal is output at output bGPDigitalDelayOut bGPLogicIn1 bGPLogicIn2 bGPLogicIn3 BOOL Binary logic Input signals The logic operation is selected in C00820 The result is output at output bGPLogicOut nGPCompareIn1_a nGPCompareIn2_a INT Analog comparison Input signals The comparison operation is selected in C00680 Hysteresis and window size can be set in C00680 and C00682 If the ...

Page 472: ...Ccw bSpeedActCompare BOOL Result of the speed comparison detection of speed 0 TRUE During open loop operation Speed setpoint Comparison value C00024 During closed loop operation Actual speed value Comparison value C00024 bImaxActive BOOL Current setpoint inside the limitation status signal TRUE The current setpoint is internally limited the inverter operates at the maximum current limit bSpeedSetR...

Page 473: ...witch Output signal nGPArithmetikOut_a INT Arithmetic Output signal nGPMulDivOut_a INT Multiplication Division Output signal bGPDigitalDelayOut BOOL Binary delay element Output signal bGPLogicOut BOOL Binary logic Output signal bGPCompareOut BOOL Analog comparison Output signal bGPSignalOut1 bGPSignalOut4 BOOL Binary signal monitor Output signals The signal sources to be output are selected in C00...

Page 474: ...onse The input signal bJogCtrlRfgIn is output directly at output bRfgOut The input signals bJogCtrlJog1 and bJogCtrlJog2 are passed through 1 1 to the downstream FB L_NSet for the selection of fixed setpoints TRUE FALSE The bJogCtrlSlowDown1 and bJogCtrlStop1 inputs are evaluated Pre switch off can be activated If the slowdown function is activated via the selected bJogCtrlSlowDown input fixed set...

Page 475: ...etpoint 2 3 bJogCtrlJog2 Stop function 2 bJogCtrlStop2 Selection Pre switch off 1 bJogCtrlSlowDown 1 Fixed setpoint 2 3 bJogCtrlJog2 Selection Pre switch off 1 bJogCtrlSlowDown 1 X5 DI3 Reset error message bFailReset CW rotation quick stop bRLQCw Selection Switch off position 1 bJogCtrlInputSel1 CW rotation quick stop bRLQCw Stop function 2 bJogCtrlStop2 X5 DI4 Change of direction of rotation bSet...

Page 476: ...eed C00011 X5 DI1 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlJog1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlJog2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_SwitchPos bFailReset X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_SwitchPos bSetSpeedCcw X3 O1U X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X5 A2I AR COM CG A1U NC CL A2U A1I NO CH X107 X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD...

Page 477: ...op1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlStop2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_SwitchPos bRLQCw X3 A2I LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlInputSel1 X3 O1U X5 DI4 LA_SwitchPos bRLQCcw X3 O1I LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlInputSel2 X3 O2U X5 DI5 X5 DI6 X4 DO1 X5 DI7 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X107 BD2 A2I AR COM CG A1U NC CL A2U A1I NO CH X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1...

Page 478: ... DI3 LA_SwitchPos bRLQCw X3 A2I LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlInputSel1 X3 O1U X5 DI4 LA_SwitchPos bRLQCcw X3 O1I LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlInputSel2 X3 O2U X5 DI5 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlStop2 X5 DI6 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlSlowDown2 X4 DO1 X5 DI7 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X107 BD2 CG CL CH X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 X1 M A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 G...

Page 479: ...rence speed C00011 X5 DI1 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlJog1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlJog2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 LA_SwitchPos bRLQCw X3 A2I X5 DI4 LA_SwitchPos bRLQCcw X3 O1U X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 A2I AR COM CG A1U NC CL A2U A1I NO CH X4 X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 GA ...

Page 480: ...d Connection Assignment Connection Assignment X101 NC NO X5 RFR X3 A1U X5 DI1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 X3 A2I X5 DI4 X3 O1U X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 CG CL CH X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 X1 M A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E X5 X107 Con...

Page 481: ...Connection Assignment Connection Assignment X101 NC NO X5 RFR X3 A1U X5 DI1 X3 A1I X5 DI2 X3 A2U X5 DI3 X3 A2I X5 DI4 X3 O1U X5 DI5 X3 O1I X5 DI6 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 CG CL CH X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 X1 M A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X3 DI3 DI2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 GI 24I DI1 RFR GA O1U O1I O2U O2I X101 24E X5 X107 Contr...

Page 482: ...5 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlStop3 X3 O1I X5 DI6 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlSlowDown3 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 Note You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to 1 NOut NSet NAdd so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 M A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO ...

Page 483: ... LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlStop3 X3 O1I X5 DI6 LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlSlowDown3 X3 O2U X5 DI7 X3 O2I X107 BD1 LA_SwitchPos bMBrakeReleaseOut X4 DO1 X107 BD2 X4 DO2 X4 DO3 Note You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to 1 NOut NSet NAdd so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect X4 24B 24O GB DO1 BD2 DO3 GO BD1 DO2 M A2I AR COM A1U NC A2U A1I NO X...

Page 484: ...witchedOn device status after mains connection without the need for a master control specifying this bit via fieldbus If control via a bus system is not wanted e g in the case of control via terminals the wDriveCtrl output signal of the LS_ParFix system block can be connected to the control word inputs Bit 1 DisableVoltage 1 Inhibit inverter control pulse inhibit Bit 2 SetQuickStop 1 Activate quic...

Page 485: ...tailed functional description see the L_SignalMonitor_a FB Word 4 Not preconfigured Words 5 16 Not preconfigured Only available in control mode 40 MCI Status word Name Status Bit 0 DriveFail 1 Inverter in the error status Fault device status is active Bit 1 PowerDisabled 1 Inverter control inhibited pulse inhibit is active Bit 2 DriveReady 1 Inverter is ready for operation SwitchedOn device status...

Page 486: ...0 C00101 1 15 Add accel time 1 15 0 000 s C00103 1 15 Add decel time 1 15 0 000 s C00105 Decel time quick stop 2 000 s C00106 Auto DCB Hold time 0 500 s C00107 DCB braking Hold time 999 000 s C00134 L_NSet_1 Ramp smoothing 0 Off C00182 L_NSet_1 S ramp time PT1 20 00 s C00190 L_NSet_1 Setpoint arithmetic 0 Out Set C00220 L_NSet_1 Acceleration time add setpoint 0 000 s C00221 L_NSet_1 Deceleration t...

Page 487: ...00697 L_OffsetGainP_2 Offset 0 00 C00698 L_OffsetGainP_3 Offset 0 00 C00800 L_MPot_1 Upper limit 100 00 C00801 L_MPot_1 Lower limit 100 00 C00802 L_MPot_1 Acceleration time 10 0 s C00803 L_MPot_1 Deceleration time 10 0 s C00804 L_MPot_1 Inactive fct 0 Retain value C00805 L_MPot_1 Init fct 0 Load last value C00806 Use of motor potentiometer 0 No C02610 2 MCK Ramp time synchr setpoint 2 000 s C02611...

Page 488: ...wMCIControl wMCIDriveControl C760 2 bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease C761 26 nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a bQSPIsActive bQSPActive bRfgStop bRFG_Stop C761 5 1 bJog8 bJogSpeed8 bJog4 bJogSpeed4 C761 20 C761 21 b 2 Ti bJog 2 Ramp bTi1 bJogRamp1 C761 22 C761 23 b 8 Ti bJog 8 Ramp b 4 Ti bJog 4 Ramp C761 24 C761 25 nNAdd_a bRfgIEq0 bSpeedSetReached nVoltageAdd_a nVoltageAdd_a ...

Page 489: ... C00699 2 C00720 1 C00720 2 C00821 2 C00821 1 C00821 3 C00821 8 bGPLogicIn2 bGPLogicIn3 C00820 C00680 C00682 C00681 C00830 82 C00833 66 C00833 63 C00833 64 C00833 65 C00830 16 C00830 17 C00830 14 C00830 15 C00833 13 In Out 32767 199 99 LA_SwitchPos Configuration parameters Entry in select list C760 10 C760 11 C761 27 C760 14 C761 28 C761 29 C761 30 C761 31 C760 15 C760 16 1209 1211 1214 1215 1216 ...

Page 490: ...C1 Q Q 1D R C00833 4 C00833 5 C00833 6 LA_SwitchPos Configuration parameters Entry in select list C761 32 C761 33 C761 34 1217 1218 GeneralPurpose GP functions nGPSignalOut1_a C00410 1 C00413 2 C00413 1 nGPSignalOut2_a C00410 2 C00413 4 C00413 3 nGPSignalOut3_a C00410 3 C00413 6 C00413 5 nGPSignalOut4_a C00410 4 C00413 8 C00413 7 1212 1213 1214 1215 bFreeOut1 bFreeOut2 bFreeOut3 bFreeOut4 bFreeOut...

Page 491: ...the other hand the outputs of the GeneralPurpose functions can be selected in the configuration parameters of other inputs Related topics User defined terminal assignment 365 TA Actuating drive speed Configuration parameters 398 TA Table positioning Configuration parameters 461 TA Switch off positioning Configuration parameters 488 7 6 1 Analog switch This function switches between two analog inpu...

Page 492: ...nction multiplies an analog input signal with a parameterisable factor The factor must be selected in the form of a quotient numerator and denominator 7 25 GeneralPurpose function Multiplication division For a detailed functional description see FB L_MulDiv nGPArithmetikOut_a nGPArithmetikIn1_a nGPArithmetikIn2_a C00830 12 C00830 13 In1 100 5 In1 In2 3 In1 1 4 In1 In2 2 In1 In2 1 In1 0 C00338 100 ...

Page 493: ...by a logic operation of the input signals Alternatively you can also select a fixed binary value which is independent of the input signals 7 27 GeneralPurpose function Binary logic For a detailed functional description see FB L_DigitalLogic bGPDigitalDelayOut bGPDigitalDelayIn C00720 1 C00720 2 C00833 66 In Out Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00720 1 L_DigitalDelay_1 On delay 0 000 s C00...

Page 494: ...t four binary signals selected from a list of all binary output signals available in the inverter You can set an inversion of the output signals 7 29 GeneralPurpose function Binary signal monitor For a detailed functional description see FB L_SignalMonitor_b bGPCompareOut nGPCompareIn1_a nGPCompareIn2_a f C00680 C00682 C00681 C00830 16 C00830 17 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00680 L_Co...

Page 495: ...here is no active clock edge the input value is not accepted 7 31 GeneralPurpose function D FlipFlop clock edge controlled For a detailed functional description see FB L_DFlipFlop nGPSignalOut1_a C00410 1 C00413 2 C00413 1 nGPSignalOut2_a C00410 2 C00413 4 C00413 3 nGPSignalOut3_a C00410 3 C00413 6 C00413 5 nGPSignalOut4_a C00410 4 C00413 8 C00413 7 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00410 ...

Page 496: ...tal upcounter and downcounter with a comparison operation 7 32 GeneralPurpose function Counter Only available with TA Table positioning For a detailed functional description see FB L_Counter bGPCounter1Equal bGPCounter1ClkDown wGPCounter1LdVal bGPCounter1Load wGPCounter1CmpVal bGPCounter1ClkUp wGPCounter1Out C01100 1 3 4 2 Function C01101 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01100 1 L_Counter...

Page 497: ...al FB interconnections is avoided and the amount of work and complexity involved in the implementation of standard functions is minimised In the Motion Control Kernel for example an automatic holding brake control function is integrated which controls the holding brake in relation to the speed setpoint and various other internal control signals Due to integrated automatic brake operation the user ...

Page 498: ...t generator e g ramp generator PID process controller etc and the motor control function in the case of the available technology applications For problem free interaction of the Motion Control Kernel and motor control function the two associated system blocks LS_MotionControlKernel and LS_MotorInterface have interfaces with corresponding inputs outputs These are visible in the FB Editor for monito...

Page 499: ...ition difference dnDeltaPos_p FALSE Positioning with position setpoint dnPosSetValue_p TRUE Positioning with speed setpoint nSpeedSetValue_a and position difference dnDeltaPos_p Note In this case no position encoder should be set to ensure a correct function C00490 No encoder nSpeedSetValue_a dnDeltaPos_p DINT Position difference following error input Difference between setpoint position and actua...

Page 500: ..._a nSpeedCtrlI_a INT I component of the speed controller Value is adopted in the case of a FALSE TRUE edge at the input bSpeedCtrlIOn nSpeedSetValue_a INT Rotation speed velocity setpoint bTorquemodeOn BOOL TRUE Switch on torque controlled operation nTorqueSetValue_a INT Torque setpoint bDcBrakeOn BOOL Manual DC injection braking DCB For this function the bDcBrakeOn_ output signal must be connecte...

Page 501: ...ath Consideration of residual value in case of external profile calculation nSpeedAddValue_v INT Additive speed setpoint in inc ms nSpeedOverride_a INT Value for Speed override Percentage multiplier 0 199 99 for the currently active speed 16384 100 of the maximum traversing speed display in C01211 1 If the override value is 0 the drive is brought to a standstill nAccOverride_a INT Value for Accele...

Page 502: ...tive see the following figure Creation of the feedforward control value for the release process of the brake Signal path for motor control with feedback Signal path for motor control without feedback Feedforward control value C02581 1 Switching threshold C02581 2 Hysteresis for release C02581 3 Hysteresis for application C02581 4 Starting value 1 for manual feedforward control C02581 5 Starting va...

Page 503: ... Activate precontrol function of speed controller bReserved01_ BOOL Reserved dnPosRefValue_p_ DINT Home position bQspOn_ BOOL TRUE Activate quick stop nPWMAngleOffset_a_ INT Angular offset input bSpeedCtrlIOn_ BOOL TRUE Set I component of speed controller nSpeedCtrlI_a_ INT I component of the speed controller nSpeedSetValue_a_ INT Main setpoint of speed bTorqueModeOn_ BOOL TRUE Switch on torque gu...

Page 504: ...ried out bHomePosAvailable BOOL TRUE Home position is known bMBrakeReleaseOut BOOL Trigger signal for switching element holding brake control via a digital output Use bit 0 in C02582 to activate inverted switching element triggering Holding brake control FALSE Apply brake TRUE Release brake bMBrakeReleased BOOL Brake released status signal considering the brake release time When the holding brake ...

Page 505: ...eparate process inputs provided by the L_MckCtrlInterface function block The control words wOutMckPosCtrl_1 and wOutMckPosCtrl_2 output by this function block constitute the input information for the LS_MotionControlKernel system block in this case MCK control word 1 wMotionCtrl1 Bit Designation Description 0 3 OpMode_Bit0 OpMode_Bit3 Operating mode Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Speed follower 0 0 0 0 H...

Page 506: ... blocked 20 23 PosModeBit0 PosModeBit3 Positioning mode Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Positioning mode setting in C01300 1 15 0 0 0 0 Absolute shortest path 0 0 0 1 Continuous 0 0 1 0 Relative 0 0 1 1 Absolute Cw 0 1 0 0 Absolute Ccw 0 1 0 1 Absolute shortest path to TP 1 0 0 0 Continuous to TP 1 0 0 1 Relative to TP 1 0 1 0 Absolute Cw to TP 1 0 1 1 Absolute Ccw to TP 1 1 0 0 From version 06 00 00 All ...

Page 507: ...t speed active 8 DeceleratingActive 1 Profile generation phase is in the deceleration process 9 S_ShapingActive From version 12 00 00 1 Rounding during acceleration deceleration active Status bit S_ShapingActive 10 Pos HW Limit Detected 1 Positive limit switch has triggered Reset only possible via Manual jog mode Hardware limit switches 11 Neg HW Limit Detected 1 Negative limit switch has triggere...

Page 508: ...test path to TP 1 0 0 0 Continuous to TP 1 0 0 1 Relative to TP 1 0 1 0 Absolute Cw to TP 1 0 1 1 Absolute Ccw to TP 1 1 0 0 From version 06 00 00 Note The display of the active positioning mode depends on further factors See subchapter Override of the parameterised positioning mode 24 31 ActProfileNo_Bit00 ActProfileNo_Bit07 Active profile Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Profile 0...

Page 509: ...ating mode Traversing of a sequence profile with absolute measuring reference in the Homing mode after homing is completed Resetting the reference information The following events reset bit 13 HomPosAvailable in the MCK status word 1 Setting bit 10 HomResetPos in the MCK control word 1 Overtravelling the 32 bit position display area at the limit 2147483647 increments when the cycle C1201 1 0 units...

Page 510: ... 1 indicates in the operating modes Homing Manual jog Positioning Stop and Position follower when rounding is effective while S shaped profiles are being carried out Bit 9 is usually reset in case of profile restarts and after profiles have been completed The following illustration shows this by means of a real temporal characteristic 8 2 Example Display of the rounding generated via the S_ShapeAc...

Page 511: ...te provides TRUE if for instance a defined speed setpoint or a command e g manual jog positive can be directly processed by the LS_MotionControlKernel The status of this bit depends on three factors Operating mode of the MotionControlKernel bReadyToOperate FALSE if operating mode Standby or Stop Synchronisation status bReadyToOperate FALSE if LS_MotionControlKernel executes a synchronisation proce...

Page 512: ...tion Global conditions 1 Setpoint generation through Motor control MCTRL DCB DC injection braking QSP quick stop CINH controller inhibit 2 Safe stop 1 SS1 requested Interface to safety system Conditions requested by MCK control word Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 3 Manual jog requested 0 0 1 0 4 Homing requested 0 0 0 1 5 Positioning requested 0 0 1 1 6 Speed follower requested 0 0 0 0 7 Position followe...

Page 513: ...ase of synchronous motors If there is a change to a setpoint controlled operating mode of the Motion Control Kernel the current speed is transferred to the speed setpoint From version V12 00 00 onwards a sensitivity threshold can be set for preventing a drifting of the motor shaft in C2611 5 If the absolute value of the current speed is below the sensitivity threshold the value 0 is transferred to...

Page 514: ...ctive operating mode In the Speed follower operating mode direct synchronisation with the target speed takes place with the ramp time set in C02610 2 In the Homing operating mode the ramp down is continued with the deceleration for stop set in C01251 if the bit 8 HomStartStop in the MCK control word 0 If bit 8 is set the homing process starts immediately in the selected homing mode In the Manual j...

Page 515: ...on L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 converts a position value provided in the real unit of the machine into an internal 32 bit position value These FBs are available from version 12 00 00 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 provides the application with process inputs for controlling various basic functions of the Motion Control Kernel LS_ParFreeUnit LS_ParFreeUnit_2 Output of 16 param...

Page 516: ...g Selection of the operating mode Selection of the profile number Override of the positioning mode Control inputs for manual jogging homing positioning Control inputs for speed acceleration S ramp override Control and setpoint signals for the Motion Control Kernel such as Selection of speed setpoint for speed follower Selection of positioning setpoint for position follower Selection of override va...

Page 517: ... signals applied to the L_MckCtrlInterface FB are logically linked by means of an OR logic operation to the specified control word via the two control word inputs wInMckPosCtrl_1 and wInMckPosCtrl_2 and after a plausibility check are output via the two control word outputs wOutMckPosCtrl_1 and wOutMckPosCtrl_2 The profile number the operating mode and the positioning mode are checked for plausibil...

Page 518: ...LRQ0RGH E2SHUDWLRQ0RGHB OWHUQDWLYH IXQFWLRQ 0 FKDQJH LQ RSHUDWLQJ PRGH ZLWK SURILOH QR Z2XW0FN3RV WUOB Z2XW0FN3RV WUOB E2SHUDWLRQ0RGHB E2SHUDWLRQ0RGHB E2SHUDWLRQ0RGHB E0DQ RJ3RV E0DQ RJ1HJ E0DQ RJ HFXWH QG9HO E5HOHDVH LPLW6ZLWFK E RPLQJ6WDUW6WRS E RPLQJ6HW3RV E RPLQJ5HVHW3RV E QDEOH9HO2YHUULGH E QDEOH FF2YHUULGH E QDEOH65DPS2YHUULGH E3RV HFXWH E3RV HFXWH LQLVK E3RV LVDEOH ROORZ3URILOH E3RV6WRS Z3R...

Page 519: ...of the Motion Control Kernel Only bit 0 bit 3 of wOperationMode are evaluated If an invalid operating mode is selected the response set in C00595 11 is activated Lenze setting Warning The current operating mode is displayed in C01243 0 Speed follower 1 Homing 2 Manual jog 3 Positioning 4 Stop 5 Position follower 6 15 Reserved for future extensions bOperationMode_1 bOperationMode_8 BOOL Binary code...

Page 520: ...omingDone are reset Setpoints and actual positions remain untouched until a renewed reference setting or homing FALSE TRUE The internal status reference known is reset The inverter is no longer referenced The process outputs bHomePosAvailable and bHomingDone are reset to FALSE bEnableVelOverride BOOL Speed override TRUE Activate speed override bEnableAccOverride BOOL Acceleration override TRUE Act...

Page 521: ... to TP From version 06 00 00 All other possible settings are reserved for future extensions bPosTeachSetPos BOOL Position teaching MCK setpoint position FALSE TRUE Teach MCK setpoint position into the selected profile wPosUnitsLW wPosUnitsHW WORD Selection of the target position in units wPosUnitsLW LOW word wPosUnitsHW HIGH word The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 1 dnPosS...

Page 522: ... immediate setting of bPosSetDataValid Position specification is higher than or equal to the cycle length Position specification is negative For a correct positioning process the bPosSetDataValid TRUE status is required TRUE Conversion of the target position from units into increments has been completed The travel profile data are valid and the profile is ready to start dnPosSetOut_p DINT Output o...

Page 523: ... when activated SetProfilPosition with PosExecute If bit 2 has been set in C01297 and control bit PosExecute is being set the setpoint position being applied is incorporated in the currently selected profile and then the profile is started immediately If the Positioning operating mode has been set on the MCK the PosExecute control bit has the following effect when activated Signals at the input Si...

Page 524: ... position change C01245 3 If the selection is made in units so that in a first step it has to be converted into increments and if this automatic function is then activated the PosExecute will only be created automatically when the internal conversion is completed bPosSetDataValid Tip This option serves to start travel requests very easily by simply defining the new target position 8 3 1 2 Operatin...

Page 525: ...s the application with different status information of the Motion Control Kernel via process outputs Z Q0FN3RV6WDWHB B0FN6WDWH QWHUIDFHB Z Q0FN3RV6WDWHB E FFHOHUDWLQJ E HFHOHUDWLQJ GQ3RV QBS E RQVWDQW6SHHG XW E66KDSLQJ E XV E RQH E RPLQJ3RV YDLODEOH Z2SHUDWLRQ0RGH E RPLQJ RQH E ZHOO7LPH E Q7DUJHW E3RV RQH Z FW3URILOH1R Z FW3RV0RGH GQ7DUJHW3RVBS GQ HOWD3RVBS GQ FW3RVBS GQ6HW3RVBS XUUHQW IHHG GQ3RV ...

Page 526: ...PosIn_p and output at the wPosUnitsLW and wPosUnitsHW outputs The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bAccelerating BOOL TRUE Acceleration phase active bDecelerating BOOL TRUE Braking phase active bConstantSpeedDuty BOOL TRUE Constant phase active bSShaping BOOL From version 12 00 00 TRUE Profile rounding active bBusy BOOL TRUE Setpoint gene...

Page 527: ...t 0 wPosUnitsLW wPosUnitsHW WORD Output of the position selected in C01295 in units wPosUnitsLW LOW word wPosUnitsHW HIGH word The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 2 These values are not updated in a 1 ms cycle not in real time dnPosOut_p DINT Output of the position selected in C01295 in increments The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296 2 When C01296 2 0...

Page 528: ...indicated below in respect of the mechanics used For TA Table positioning you can set the machine parameters in the Engineer on the tab headed Application Parameters on the dialog level Overview Machine parameters Tip You are provided with more detailed information on the machine parameters Gearbox ratio and Feed constant in the following subchapters Note Setting the machine parameters is a basic ...

Page 529: ...Mounting direction Position encoder 0 Not inverted C01203 1 iG Numerator motor speed 1 C01203 2 iG Denominator encoder speed 1 C01201 1 Axis data Axis cycle Activation of the modulo measuring system 0 0000 units C01204 Axis data Feed constant 360 0000 units rev C00011 Appl Reference speed 1500 rpm Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01211 1 Max traversing speed 100 _C11 Is used for orientati...

Page 530: ...arbox ratio The gearbox ratio is to be defined in the form of a quotient numerator denominator the data required can be found in the technical data for the gearbox 8 9 Example Technical data relating to the gearbox from gearbox catalogue Tip In order to specify the gearbox ratio exactly use the number of teeth indicated on the data sheet or in the catalogue if possible instead of the information o...

Page 531: ...the drive roll s circumference which in the following example is calculated on the basis of the indicated diameter 8 11 Schematic diagram Feed constant for a conveyor driver In the case of a spindle drive linear axis the feed constant is derived from the leadscrew pitch The feed constant indicates the distance the slide travels during one revolution of the spindle in the following example 5 023 mm...

Page 532: ...t be known Exception Positioning modes relative TP and continuous TP Software limit positions are not effective Absolute targets can be approached by exceeding the measuring system limit e g from 10 via 0 to 350 Activating the modulo measuring system The Modulo system is activated by setting a cycle C01201 1 0 units The setting of the cycle is possible when the inverter is enabled When the cycle C...

Page 533: ... in order to prevent e g an unwanted motion by one cycle 8 14 Definition of the blocking zone Display of the target position in the positioning mode Stop With the absolute Cw and absolute Ccw positioning modes target positions that are located in the set blocking zone are always approached by the shortest possible path If the blocking zone is set too large the drive may travel in the opposite dire...

Page 534: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Case studies for modulo positioning In the following some case studies with the different positioning modes are represented The target positions are defined by the user Positioning mode absolute shortest path Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Positioning mode absolute Cw Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Positioning mode absolute Ccw Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 ...

Page 535: ... Speed setpoint generation When the speed limit values are set the Motion Control Kernel influences the setpoint generation with a synchronisation mode The synchronisation mode serves to travel the synchronisation range dynamically with the synchronisation ramp set in C02610 2 Synchronisation always starts in the zero crossing of the defined speed 8 15 Example Speed setpoint generation in the Spee...

Page 536: ...lo measuring system is set C01201 1 0 0000 units the drive knows the home position and the software limit positions for the respective operating mode have been activated see following table 8 16 Definition of the software limit position trigger limits Operating mode Software limit positions active if home position is known Speed follower Yes adjustable in C01219 bit 3 Homing Yes Manual jog No adju...

Page 537: ...ware limit positions are therefore deactivated In order to prevent the system from being damaged the software limit positions have to be corrected so that the following conditions apply 1 SW_Limit_POS incr SW_Limit_NEG incr 2 SW_Limit_POS incr SW_Limit_NEG incr 32767 From version 16 00 00 onwards overlapping of the inner hysteresis areas of the software limit positions is avoided by scaling down t...

Page 538: ...tion time set for the quick stop function and does so irrespective of the setpoint selection The error response can be parameterised in C00595 3 and C00595 4 The error message Ck03 Pos SW limit position or Ck04 Neg SW limit position is entered in the logbook of the inverter Depending on the parameterised fault response the drive cannot traverse until the error has been acknowledged Note The travel...

Page 539: ...witch is entered in the logbook of the inverter Bit 10 Pos HW Limit Detected or bit 11 Neg HW Limit Detected is set in the MCK status word Depending on the parameterised fault response the drive cannot traverse until the error has been acknowledged Stop The limit switches are only evaluated if the limit switches for the respective operating mode have been activated see the following table Operatin...

Page 540: ...ting mode Action for re activation Speed follower Limit switch is activated and setpoint in direction of the activated limit switch is pending Note If the setpoint e g is specified via an analog potentiometer potentiometer noise can mean an unintentional setpoint causing the error to be set again Homing Limit switch is activated and bHomStartStop TRUE Manual jog Limit switch is activated and manua...

Page 541: ...oning mode Operating mode Homing After approaching the starting position via start profile if start profile has been selected Operating mode Manual jog When the breakpoints and the software limit positions are approached The target position monitoring is active until the operating mode changes or a new travel command influences the setpoint Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01244 1 MCK Dwe...

Page 542: ...he dwell time has expired bit 17 is set to 1 in the MCK status word or the bInTarget output of the L_MckStateInterface FB is set to TRUE The InTarget status is reset if the motor shaft leaves the target position window a new profile or a new motion process is started bInTarget has been set via manual jog intermediate stops and the Manual jog mode is left the target position window has been left in...

Page 543: ...ntegrators when the max display area of the position is reached and the reference is set The same behaviour takes place in the Speed follower and Manual jog operating modes For this reason a monitoring mode of the maximum travel distance is implemented in the Motion Control Kernel If the maximum travel distance C01213 1 is exceeded The error response set in C00595 7 will be carried out Lenze setti...

Page 544: ...e In such a case it makes sense to activate the Fault error response to make the motor torqueless In the 8400 HighLine inverter two independent following error monitoring systems can be parameterised 8 20 Two channel following error monitoring system Tip In certain situations e g dynamic acceleration of the load higher system dependent following errors occur than while approaching the target posit...

Page 545: ...ual position in case of controller inhibit Application example In case ofa continuous relative positioning by 100 units and a setting of the controller inhibit after each positioning process e g by means of the Holding brake control in the automatically controlled mode it is expected that after 10 positioning processes an absolute target of 10 x 100 units 1000 units has been reached Without settin...

Page 546: ...y the master are transferred to the slaves The setpoints are generated in the master usually by the LS_MotionControlKernel system block The setpoints are transferred to the slaves via PDOs The output to the respective fieldbus is effected via the corresponding port blocks e g LP_CanOut1 or LP_MciOut Due to the bus cycle time e g 1 ms or 2 4 ms for buses with a higher load and the telegram runtimes...

Page 547: ...tpoint line topology Setpoints Transfer of the setpoints to the motor control Transfer of the setpoints to the slave drives via fieldbus Setpoint holdback Parameterisable runtime for the transfer of the setpoints to the motor control Runtime on the bus due to the bus cycle time and telegram runtimes Runtime in the slave inverter due to the internal cycle time 1 ms of the inverter LS_MotionControlK...

Page 548: ...point holdback Example 1 shows the behaviour without setpoint holdback Due to the runtimes there is an offset between master and slave of 2 ms 8 22 Example 1 Runtime behaviour without setpoint holdback Stop The setting while the setpoint generation is running causes a system dependent time change of the setpoint processing so that e g considerable step changes or setpoint holding processes occur I...

Page 549: ...xample 2 the setpoint holdback in the master is set to 2 ms This removes the offset between master and slave Only time differences are visible due to the telegram runtimes on the bus 8 23 Example 2 Runtime behaviour with setpoint holdback 2 ms Setpoint at the output of the Motion Control Kernel is transferred to the slaves via fieldbus Effective setpoint of the motor control in the master Effectiv...

Page 550: ... Parameterising the maximum jerk function The maximum jerk function can be individually activated for the operating modes Positioning Homing and Manual jog via the following setting parameters When the function is activated the maximum jerk is calculated from the higher value of both acceleration values and the lower value of both S ramp time values based on the acceleration and S ramp time of the...

Page 551: ...ting Bit coded C02610 2 MCK Ramp time synchr setpoint 2 000 s C02611 1 MCK Pos max speed 199 99 C02611 2 MCK Pos min speed 0 00 C02611 3 MCK Neg min speed 0 00 C02611 4 MCK Neg max speed 199 99 Function Lenze setting Bit 0 Reserved Off Bit 1 Reserved Off Bit 2 HW limit switch on In the speed follower operating mode a travel range monitoring mode via hardware limit switch is active Limit position m...

Page 552: ...he nSpeedAddValue_v process input Usually the ramp generator L_NSet and optionally the process controller L_PCTRL are upstream of the nSpeedSetValue_a process input The speed setpoint is limited internally to the speed limits set in C02611 1 4 MCK control word Bit 31 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 OpMode_Bit3 OpMode_Bit2 OpMode_Bit1 OpMode_Bit0 X X 0 0 0 0 X Status not significant Note In the Speed...

Page 553: ... it is selected manually when the drive stands still Tip A reference run is mainly used for systems with feedback via encoders resolvers or single turn absolute value encoders as in the case of these systems the home position is lost when the supply voltage is switched off Usually the reference is set only once during commissioning or in the event of service e g if drive components are replaced an...

Page 554: ...01224 1 MCK Ref initial speed 720 0000 unit s C01225 1 MCK Ref initial acceleration 720 0000 unit s2 C01224 2 MCK Ref search speed 180 0000 unit s C01225 2 MCK Ref search acceleration 720 0000 unit s2 C01226 1 MCK Ref S ramp time 0 000 s C01222 MCK Ref M limit mode 14 15 10 00 C01223 MCK Ref waiting time mode 14 15 100 ms C01227 1 MCK Ref offset reference degree 0 0000 unit C01227 2 MCK Ref home p...

Page 555: ...nctional settings From version 14 00 00 various functional settings for homing can be carried out bit coded in C01220 1 Function Lenze setting Bit 0 Reserved Off Bit 1 Reserved Off Bit 2 Reserved Off Bit 3 Reserved Off Bit 4 Start deletes bHomePosAvailable When homing is started mode 4 15 the reference information is deleted Off Bit 5 Maximum jerk Setting or activation of maximum jerk for traversi...

Page 556: ...signal Touch probe sensor Sensor reference signal Up to and including version Version 05 xx xx a signal at digital input DI3 is automatically interpreted as TP sensor signal with level sensitivity That way TP sensitive homing modes can be used even if high TP precision is not available In this case the search speed must be selected in order that the signal at DI3 will be detected From version 06 0...

Page 557: ...slower search speed Note For a reference search with touch probe detection The touch probe signal source can be selected in C01246 1 Go to C02810 x and select the edge the digital input used for the connection of the touch probe sensor is to respond In the Lenze setting of C02810 x no touch probe is detected Moreover no acceptance window must be set in C2813 x and C02814 x for accepting the touch ...

Page 558: ...ouch probe sensor sets home position Process of case 2 Axis is already on the pre stop mark bHomingMark TRUE 1 Movement in negative direction with search profile data set 2 Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection 3 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Abbreviation Meaning Movement in positive direction Set reference Movement in negative direction Lp Posi...

Page 559: ...activating the search profile data set for continued reference searching 3 Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection 4 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Process of case 2 Axis is already on the pre stop mark bHomingMark TRUE 1 Movement in positive direction with search profile data set 2 Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection 3 Fol...

Page 560: ...ive direction with start profile data set 2 Positive edge at bHomingMark activates search profile data set for further reference search 3 Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection 4 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Touch probe Pre stop mark Mode 6 Rn TP Offset path Sequence profile optional Start speed Search speed Profile speed Lp Active Active Active...

Page 561: ...with start profile data set 2 Positive edge at bHomingMark activates search profile data set for further reference search 3 Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection 4 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Touch probe Pre stop mark Mode 7 Set reference Rn Set reference TP Offset path Sequence profile optional Start speed Search speed Profile speed Lp Inacti...

Page 562: ...wing edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Mode 9 _TP Procedure 1 Movement in negative direction with start profile data set 2 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Touch probe Mode 8 TP Offset path Sequence profile optional Start speed Profile speed Lp Active Active Active Active Ln Inactive Inactive Active Active Touch probe Mode 9 Set reference TP Offset path S...

Page 563: ...f the positive travel range limit switch is positive and at the same time activation of search profile data set for continued reference searching 3 Negative edge of the travel range limit switch enables home position detection 4 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Touch probe Positive travel range limit switch Mode 10 Lp Set reference TP Offset path Sequence profile optiona...

Page 564: ...f the negative travel range limit switch is positive and at the same time activation of search profile data set for continued reference searching 3 Negative edge of the travel range limit switch enables home position detection 4 Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position Touch probe Negative travel range limit switch Mode 11 Set reference Ln TP Offset path Sequence profile optiona...

Page 565: ...erence Positive travel range limit switch Mode 12 Lp Offset path Sequence profile optional Start speed Profile speed Lp Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Ln Inactive Inactive Active Active Note The load machine can also leave the travel range limit switch There follows a return to the home position that was set with the positive edge of the travel range limit switch It is possible that as a result...

Page 566: ...Negative travel range limit switch Mode 13 Set reference Ln Offset path Sequence profile optional Start speed Profile speed Lp Inactive Inactive Active Active Ln Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Note The load machine can also leave the travel range limit switch There follows a return to the home position that was set with the positive edge of the travel range limit switch It is possible that as a...

Page 567: ...ot been set this position is the home position If a home value offset has been set correctly signed traversing by this offset takes place and the home position is set at the end of this travel distance Tip Set a home value offset in C01227 1 to avoid stopping at the positive stop 8 26 Wiring for torque limit when homing to Positive stop homing modes 14 15 Mode 14 Mlim Offset path Sequence profile ...

Page 568: ...If a home value offset has been set correctly signed traversing by this offset takes place and the home position is set at the end of this travel distance Tip Set a home value offset in C01227 1 to avoid stopping at the positive stop Mode 100 SetRef When the drive is at standstill the measuring system is set via the bit 8 HomStartStop in MCK control word The current actual position now corresponds...

Page 569: ...een pre stop mark limit switch and TP MP The measurement is executed for the homing modes 4 5 6 7 10 and 11 Note The positioning movement for the sequence profile set in C01228 is also carried out in the referencing mode If a second sequence following or subsequent profile has been defined in the sequence profile it is not automatically started Jitter of the pre switch off signal Depending on how ...

Page 570: ...le and thus remains known to the drive control after mains switching The following overview shows the actual position after mains connection depending on the setting C02652 bit 0 8 6 2 Requesting the operating mode Request for the referencing operating mode by means of the MCK control word If the MCKInterface is connected upstream to the Motion Control Kernel and if the operating mode is requested...

Page 571: ...le If homing mode 100 SetRef is selected in C01221 Setting the home position manually The home position is set manually with the drive at a standstill The current actual position now corresponds to the reference position set in C01227 2 in the machine measuring system TRUE FALSE Stop homing If the bHomingStartStop input is reset to FALSE during active referencing homing is cancelled and the drive ...

Page 572: ...nal connection is required in the application level The following illustration shows the required modification using the example of the table positioning technology application For transmitting the home position from the I O level to the application level the free input dnFreeIn1_p is used here 8 28 Modified interconnection for selecting the home position Selection of the home position Setting of ...

Page 573: ...g Retraction of operated travel range limit switches is also supported Only traversing in the corresponding retracting direction is then possible Danger During manual jog specially assigned profile parameters are effective If these parameters are not set correctly the drive may execute unexpected movements Stop In the Lenze setting travel range monitoring is switched off in C01230 by means of hard...

Page 574: ...K Manual jog setting Bit coded C01231 1 Manual jog speed 1 360 0000 units s C01231 2 Manual jog Speed 2 720 0000 units s C01232 1 Manual jog Acceleration 720 0000 units s2 C01232 2 Manual jog Deceleration 720 0000 units s2 C01233 1 Manual jog S ramp time 0 000 s C01235 1 Waiting time 2nd speed 5 000 s C01234 1 Manual jog Breakpoint 1 0 0000 unit C01234 2 Manual jog Breakpoint 2 0 0000 unit C01234 ...

Page 575: ...d the ManJogPos and or ManJogNeg control function Off Bit 1 Time based start of second speed In manual jog mode an automatic changeover to manual speed 2 takes place after a parameterisable waiting time Time based start of second speed 577 Off Bit 2 HW limit switch on In the manual jog operating mode a travel range monitoring mode via hardware limit switch is active Limit position monitoring 536 O...

Page 576: ...1 3 Second speed 8 30 Example Change over to second speed C01231 1 Manual jog Speed 1 C01232 1 Manual jog acceleration C01232 2 Manual jog deceleration C01233 1 Manual jog S ramp time For accelerating and decelerating different values can be set in C01232 1 2 so that smooth starting and quick stopping of the drive can be implemented In order to reduce jerking the two ramps can be set in such a way...

Page 577: ...d and after the waiting time has expired When the waiting time is set 0 s the automatic change over is deactivated 8 31 Time based start of second speed Tip By leaving the corresponding button for manual jog pressed down for longer than the waiting time and parameterising manual jog speed 2 so that it is higher than manual jog speed 1 you can enable longer distances to be travelled by means of man...

Page 578: ...t 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 OpMode_Bit3 OpMode_Bit2 OpMode_Bit1 OpMode_Bit0 X X 0 0 1 0 X Status not significant Manual jog MCK control word Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Release LimitSwitch ManExecute 2ndSpeed ManJogNeg ManJogPos Stop manual jog 0 X 0 0 Manual jog CW With speed 1 C01231 1 0 0 1 Manual jog CW With speed 2 C01231 2 1 Manual jog in counter clockwise direction With speed 1 C01231 1 0 1 0 M...

Page 579: ...standstill at the rate of deceleration set for manual jogging 8 7 3 1 Manual jog to limit position Manual jog to software limit position 8 32 Example Manual jog to positive software limit position Stop In the Lenze setting travel range monitoring is switched off in C01230 by means of hardware limit switches and software limit positions for the Manual jog operating mode If travel range monitoring h...

Page 580: ...l jog to hardware limit position limit switch 8 33 Example Manual jog to positive limit switch Positive limit switch Deceleration ramp of the quick stop function When monitoring of the limit switches is switched on and a limit switch is approached during manual jog the drive is braked within the deceleration time set for the quick stop function if the TroubleQuickStop error response is set in C005...

Page 581: ...he retracting direction travelling is continued even after the limit switch has been left until the corresponding control bit is reset If instead a direction preselection is made against the retracting direction the drive remains at a standstill Tip A limit switch that is in the operated state can also be moved away from again through manual jogging in the retracting direction by means of control ...

Page 582: ...ion task that can be converted to a rotary motion of the motor shaft by the Motion Control Kernel in the Positioning operating mode A positioning process can be composed of a large number of profiles that are executed in a fixed manner 15 different profiles can be parameterised for the 8400 HighLine inverter You can find a detailed explanation of all profile parameters in the subchapter entitled P...

Page 583: ...t profiles that can be travelled in the positioning mode 8 34 Examples of possible motion profiles Asymmetrical trapezoidal profile with S shaped ramps Asymmetrical trapezoidal profile with linear ramps Velocity changeover for profile with S shaped ramps here vProfile 1 vProfile 2 or vEnd1 vProfile 2 Velocity changeover for profile with S shaped ramps here vProfile 1 vProfile 2 Profile linkage Pro...

Page 584: ... 0 000 s C01307 1 15 Profiles 1 15 Sequence profile 0 C01308 1 15 Profile 1 15 TP profile from version 06 00 00 0 C01309 1 15 Profile 1 15 TP signal source from version 06 00 00 3 TP DigIn3 C00595 9 MCK Resp to invalid PosModus 4 WarningLocked C00595 10 MCK Resp to invalid profile data 4 WarningLocked C00595 12 MCK Resp to invalid profile no 4 WarningLocked C00595 14 MCK React target out of travel...

Page 585: ...ol bit has not been set the setpoint is continued Off Bit 2 Reserved Off Bit 3 Reserved Off Bit 4 ProfilStart at PosInit When it is changed to the Positioning operating mode the defined profile is executed immediately without the need to set the MCK control bit PosExecute Note If the FB L_MckCtrlInterface writes to the MCK control word due to the setting in C01297 a profile start may be prevented ...

Page 586: ... profile to be executed 593 Starting cancelling a traversing task 594 8 8 2 2 Profile entry In the Engineer the following parameterisation dialog is available for setting the profile parameters A profile is described by the following profile parameters Symbol Profile parameters Standard profile Profile data set profile numbers 1 15 in which the profile data are stored Mode C01300 1 15 Selection of...

Page 587: ... acceleration and deceleration it is possible that the drive will not even reach the maximum speed In this case the graphic representation will be a trapezium instead of a triangle Acceleration Travelling speed is not reached in this case Deceleration Target position or traversing distance Acceleration C01303 1 15 Maximum acceleration during the positioning process Two types of acceleration are di...

Page 588: ...thout the drive coming to a standstill at the first target position Target position Final speed in this case not equal to 0 Sequence profile C01307 1 15 for profile linkage following block control A special feature is automatic advancing to subsequent profiles with and without velocity changeover For this purpose the profile number of the desired subsequent profile 1 to 15 is simply set in the par...

Page 589: ...h Reference for the absolute position is the zero position 8 Absolute shortest path to TP from version 06 00 00 2 Continuous In these two modes no particular position is approached but travelling takes place at the traversing speed stipulated by means of the profile The values of the profile are used for accelerating and decelerating The direction of travel is determined by the sign of the travers...

Page 590: ... is also defined via the mode selection like in the following profile start processes If no valid TP profile is set the travel request is aborted PosStop Preconditions for touch probe positioning The mode of the current profile data set contains the setting to TP For absolute positioning the home reference position must be known In the corresponding profile data set the following profile parameter...

Page 591: ...he actual jerk time tjerk is reduced according to the actual acceleration Acc Without jerk limitation With jerk limitation 1 Standstill 2 Acceleration with set jerk limitation 6 Deceleration with set jerk limitation 3 Acceleration according to acceleration profile Acc 6 Deceleration according to deceleration profile Dec 4 Reduce acceleration jerk limitation 8 Reduce deceleration jerk limitation 5t...

Page 592: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Note If disproportionately high S ramp times are set for low acceleration times this may result in an incorrect profile generation Example v 100 mm s a 1000 mm s2 tacc 0 1 s tjerk_max 1 s For this reason you must only set plausible S ramp times this should not exceed half the value of tacc ...

Page 593: ... OpMode_Bit0 X X X 0 0 1 1 X Status not significant Bit Designation Description 24 31 ProfileNo_Bit0 ProfileNo_Bit7 Profile Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Profile 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Profile 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Profile 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Profile 15 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 All other possible settings are reserved for future extensions Designator Data type Information possible settings wProfileN...

Page 594: ... PosFinishTarget PosExecute Start travelling 0 0 0 0 1 Complete interrupted profile 0 0 0 1 0 Do not travel sequence profile 0 1 X X Cancel travelling 1 X X X From version 11 00 00 more travel requests will be inhibited PosExecute will be blocked X Status not significant Designator Data type Information possible settings bPosExecute BOOL Start travelling FALSE TRUE Execute selected profile bPosExe...

Page 595: ...ositioning mode in the MCK control word The positioning mode set in the MCK control word is used B Positioning mode in the MCK control word 0 The positioning mode set in mode profile parameter C1300 1 15 is used C Invalid positioning mode in the MCK control word Ck09Error message Ck09 Invalid positioning mode The response set in C00595 9 occurs Lenze setting WarningLocked Bit Designation Descripti...

Page 596: ...r Data type Information possible settings wPosMode WORD Override of the positioning mode set in the profile data Only bit 0 bit 3 of wPosMode are evaluated 0 Positioning mode setting in C01300 1 15 1 Absolute shortest path 2 Continuous 3 Relative 4 Absolute Cw 5 Absolute Ccw 8 Absolute shortest path to TP 9 Continuous to TP 10 Relative to TP 11 Absolute Cw to TP 12 Absolute Ccw to TP From version ...

Page 597: ... for Normal stop operating mode 8 9 2 Requesting the operating mode Request for Normal stop operating mode by means of the MCK control word If the MCKInterface is connected upstream to the Motion Control Kernel and if the operating mode is requested at the L_MckCtrlInterface FB the wOperationMode and bOperationMode_1 8 process inputs are available Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C01251 1 ...

Page 598: ... time both drives follow a position setpoint with synchronous speed Signal flow 8 35 Signal flow position follower Phase 1 assume synchronous position In this phase dnPosSetValue_p constant Phase 2 position follower operation v1 Ds v2 v v 1 2 Da Homing 1 Positioning 3 Stop 4 SafeStop 4 SpeedFollower 0 PosFollower 5 bPosCtrlOn_ C01236 1 C01237 1 C01237 2 C01238 1 C01229 1 C01245 2 1 0 FALSE C01218 ...

Page 599: ...unction has been activated by means of bit 2 in C01218 travel range monitoring by means of hardware limit switches is active in this mode Limit position monitoring 536 SW limit switch on If this function has been activated by means of bit 3 in C01218 travel range monitoring by means of parameterised software limit positions is active in this mode Limit position monitoring 536 Position controller o...

Page 600: ...FB the wOperationMode and bOperationMode_1 8 process inputs are available 8 10 3 Setpoint selection The absolute position setpoint is stipulated via the dnPosSetValue_p process input Compensating following errors If the bDeltaPosOn process input is set to TRUE a position difference following error is compensated for which is not internally generated from setpoint actual positions but must be defin...

Page 601: ...oning process In order to reach the position defined the missing area has to be attached to the profile Due to the speed reduction the positioning process takes longer Δt v m s Dt t s Note The online change of speed and acceleration is in effect from the start of the profile until the deceleration phase begins Changing the deceleration phase by means of an override is therefore not possible In the...

Page 602: ...de If control bit 11 EnableSpeedOverride is reset to 0 travelling takes place at the speeds that have been specified by means of the profile parameters Acceleration deceleration from the speed defined with override to the speed set in the profile takes places immediately in this case Deactivating the override within the braking deceleration ramp does not have any effect Designator Data type Inform...

Page 603: ...as been set for the respective operating mode referencing manual jog positioning etc in the corresponding profile parameter The acceleration override results in a deceleration override Both ramps are evaluated by multiplication by the acceleration override until the deceleration process sets in Deactivate override If control bit 12 EnableAccOverride is reset to 0 travelling takes place at the acce...

Page 604: ...verse with a linear characteristic after reaching the profile speed Deactivate override If control bit 13 EnableSRampOverride is reset to 0 the S ramp time specified by means of the profile parameters is used for profile generation Designator Data type Information possible settings bEnableSRampOverride BOOL S ramp smoothing override TRUE Activate S ramp smoothing override Note If the nSRampOverrid...

Page 605: ...r moving machine parts Danger Please note that the holding brake is an important element of the safety concept of the machine as a whole Thus proceed very carefully when commissioning this system part Stop Holding brakes on Lenze motors are not intended for braking during operation The increased wear caused by braking during operation can destroy the motor holding brake Note Deactivate automatic D...

Page 606: ...MBrakeStartValue2 BOOL from version 06 00 00 Selection of the torque feedforward control value Feedforward control of the motor before release FALSE Starting value 1 is active see the following figure TRUE Starting value 2 is active see the following figure Creation of the feedforward control value for the release process of the brake Signal path for motor control with feedback Signal path for mot...

Page 607: ...et to 1 FALSE Brake is released TRUE Brake is applied Designator Data type Value meaning bMBrakeReleaseOut BOOL Trigger signal for switching element holding brake control via a digital output Use bit 0 under C02582 to activate inverted switching element triggering Functional settings FALSE Apply brake TRUE Release brake bMBrakeReleased BOOL Brake released status signal considering the brake releas...

Page 608: ...Go to the Overview Basic functions dialog box and click the Holding brake control button Short overview of parameters for holding brake control Danger A faultless holding brake control function requires a correct setting of the different deceleration times in the following parameters A wrong setting of the delay times can cause a faulty control of the brake Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit...

Page 609: ...ic or automatic Setting pulse inhibit or controller inhibit has no influence on the bMBrakeReleaseOut trigger signal for the holding brake control switching element After the brake has been activated and the brake application time has expired the controller is inhibited automatically by the basic Holding brake control function Tip You can use mode 11 to easily check if the brake switches correctly...

Page 610: ...ivated automatically if quick stop is activated in the drive e g by a device command or as response to an error and in the event of controller inhibit or pulse inhibit After automatic brake activation and expiration of the brake application time the controller is inhibited automatically by the basic Holding brake control function Tip The 2 12 mode is the usual mode to control the brake Mode 13 Sem...

Page 611: ...control Direction of feedforward control with vertical hoist technology 0 Positive direction 1 Negative direction Note Reversal Ccw is then considered Bit 3 Horizontal application Direction of movement of the axis 0 The axis performs vertical movements Gravitational acceleration causes movements 1 The direction of the axis is horizontal or rotary The gravitational acceleration does not cause any m...

Page 612: ...sis for release C02581 2 Lower speed threshold for brake application Switching threshold C02581 1 hysteresis for application C02581 3 Tip The lower speed threshold for brake application should be set to approximately 5 20 of the maximum speed to minimise the wear of the brake and provide for an optimum brake reaction by a low grinding of the brake Related topics Process when brake is released 617 ...

Page 613: ...or optimisation purposes detect in individual cases the response times by measurement Danger A wrong setting of the application and release time can cause a faulty control of the brake If the application time is set too low the controller is inhibited and the drive becomes torqueless before the brake is applied completely C02589 1 Application time C02589 2 Release time CINH controller inhibit Ever...

Page 614: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8 38 Oscillogram 1 Current characteristic for the application of a mechanical holding brake application time 10 7 ms 8 39 Oscillogram 2 Current characteristic for the release of a mechanical holding brake release time 36 8 ms Related topics Process when brake is released 617 Process when brake is closed 618 ...

Page 615: ...e the brake is only providing 3 of the setpoint via the feedforward control Since at this point a step change from 3 to 90 may cause mechanical jerks the setpoint is ramped up from 3 to 90 using the ramp time set in C02610 1 Lenze setting 2 s Our example is based on the V f characteristic control VFCplus operating mode since the servo control SC operating mode does not use the switching threshold ...

Page 616: ...d is still above this threshold see illustration 8 43 in chapter Process when brake is closed If the actual speed is still above the threshold when the monitoring time has expired the brake will be automatically applied in the automatic brake control mode mode 12 Motor magnetising time CINH controller inhibit When an asynchronous motor is used first the magnetic field required for the holding torq...

Page 617: ...er operating mode the drive synchronises to the already accelerated speed setpoint In the operating modes with setpoint request via control signal operating modes Homing Manual jog and Positioning the ramping process starts after the brake release at 0 5 After the waiting time set in C02589 3 has additionally expired the status monitoring starts again if activated via bit 5 in C02582 Time diagram ...

Page 618: ...tatus signal is reset to FALSE In the operating modes with setpoint request via control signal operating modes Homing Manual jog and Positioning the brake closes depending on the internal state bBusy setpoint generation through active profile generator of the Motion Control Kernel The brake application time starts to expire 3 After the brake application time has expired the controller is inhibited...

Page 619: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8 43 Close holding brake in automatic mode with actual value monitoring time C02593 1 0 s Feedforward control C02581 1 Switching threshold C02581 2 Hysteresis for release C02581 3 Hysteresis for application C02593 2 Application delay C02593 1 Actual value monitoring time C02589 1 Application time bMBrakeReleaseOut 0 0 bMBrakeReleased CINH t t t t nSpeedSetValue_a_ 0 nMotorS...

Page 620: ...vation If bit 1 and bit 3 are set to 1 in C02582 the brake remains released until the lower speed threshold is reached to avoid an excessive wear of the brake The braking action only takes places due to the friction in the load mechanics The brake will not be applied until the motor speed has reached the threshold for brake activation Hence the function depends on the signal of the speed encoder D...

Page 621: ... C02589 with the lower threshold value before the brake switches to the release mode Here the direction of the feedforward control depends on two conditions 1 On the settings selected under C02582 Bit 2 feedforward control inverted for vertical drives hoists Bit 3 direction of the axis 2 On the sign of the setpoint Truth table for the direction of the feedforward control Setpoint Direction Feedfor...

Page 622: ... feedforward control value can be selected via bit 4 in C02582 Bit 4 0 Automatic selection The torque saved at the last stop is used Bit 4 1 Manual selection bMBrakeStartValue2 FALSE The feedforward control value 1 set in C02581 4 is used bMBrakeStartValue2 TRUE The feedforward control value set in C02581 5 is used Additive torque If the servo control SC operating mode has been selected an additiv...

Page 623: ...or in a slower cycle e g temperature monitoring approx 100 ms All functions provided with an error detection e g the motor control supply information to a so called error handler The error handler is processed every 1 ms and evaluates all information In this evaluation the so called status determining error display in C00168 and the current error display in C00170 are generated and the inverter is...

Page 624: ...evice control DCTRL 98 Device state machine and device states 112 System bus CAN on board 700 Information on some of the operating states can be quickly obtained via the LED display on the front of the inverter Labelling Colour Description CAN RUN green CAN bus ok LED status displays for the system bus 706 CAN ERR red CAN bus error DRV RDY green Standard device ready for operation LEDstatusdisplay...

Page 625: ...37 OFF OFF OFF or initialisation active Init OFF Safe torque off is active SafeTorqueOff OFF Device is ready to start ReadyToSwitchOn OFF Device is switched on SwitchedOn OFF Motor data identification operation OperationEnabled The inverter is ready to switch on switched on or the operation is enabled and a warning is indicated Fault active quick stop TroubleQSP OFF Trouble active Trouble OFF Faul...

Page 626: ...gineer V2 19 Button Function Acknowledge error message if the error cause has been eliminated Display the Logbook of the inverter 632 Display the internal state machine including the current device status Display details of the status determining error Display details of the current error Display all active sources of a controller inhibit Display all active sources of a quick stop Monitoring Confi...

Page 627: ...e 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Click the icon or select the Online Go online command to build up an online connection with the inverter 3 Select the Diagnostics tab With an online connection the Diagnostics tab displays current status information about the inverter Tip The online connection to the inverter can be established via the following device interfaces CAN interface X1 Diagnostics via the Syst...

Page 628: ...cs tab and click the button for the status determining or current error the Error details dialog box displays further information on the error Click the Help about error button to open the online help with information on the error cause and possible remedies From version 06 00 00 Engineer V2 13 onwards The more details button serves to provide more information about the structure of the 16 bit err...

Page 629: ...nostic interface X6 thestatus ofthe inverter isshown via different icons on the LCD display in the area Symbol Meaning Notes Inverter is switched on SwitchedOn 118 Inverter is enabled Application in the inverter is stopped Quick stop active Inverter is inhibited The power outputs are inhibited Inverter is ready to start ReadyToSwitchOn 117 Speed controller 1 at the limit The drive is torque contro...

Page 630: ... C00056 2 Actual torque value C00058 Output frequency C00061 Heatsink temperature C00064 1 Device utilisation Ixt C00064 2 Device utilisation Ixt 15s C00064 3 Device utilisation Ixt 3 min C00133 Brake resistor utilisation C00136 1 MCI control word C00136 2 CAN control word C00137 Device status C00138 1 SYS control signals C00138 2 MCK control signals C00138 3 FWM control signals C00150 Status word...

Page 631: ...C00177 6 STO counter after power on C00177 7 DigIn CINH counter after power on C00177 8 IMP counter after power on C00178 Time the inverter was enabled elapsed hour meter C00179 Power up time power on time meter C00180 1 Runtime control card C00180 2 Running time heatsink fan C00180 3 Running time internal fan Parameters Display C00099 Firmware version as a string C00199 1 Device name Automatic ac...

Page 632: ...event the following information is saved in the logbook Type of response to the event e g fault warning or information Subject area that activated the event e g CAN or USER Event Value of power on time meter Selected process values analog signals binary signals Memory depth Maximum number of logbook entries 8400 StateLine 15 logbook entries 8400 HighLine TopLine 50 logbook entries 9 5 1 Functional...

Page 633: ... counter can be deactivated by resetting bit 9 in C00169 In C00169 bit 9 and bit 10 determine the logbook update in case of similar errors Meaning of bit 9 bit 10 Bit 9 Error counter Bit 10 Update of the logbook line In the Lenze setting C00169 0x067E bits 9 and 10 are active The following cases can be distinguished depending of the activation of bit 9 and bit 10 1 Bit 9 inactive bit 10 active ina...

Page 634: ... Reference manual DMS 12 0 EN 06 2017 TD23 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The analog signal to be recorded is selected in C00164 1 Scaling of the value recorded 16384 100 ...

Page 635: ... Engineer 1 Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Click the icon or select the Online Go online command to build up an online connection with the inverter 3 Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace 4 Click Logbook Example Representation of the logbook in the Engineer V2 13 Note Reading out the logbook entries is only permissible by one engineering tool at a time If th...

Page 636: ...display all available logbook entries Export Export the entries available in the logbook into a log file Exporting logbook entries to a file 636 Storing in the project File the current logbook in the Engineer project to be able to access it offline too Storing the logbook in the project 637 Delete Delete all entries available in the logbook Configuration of Open parameterisation dialog for configu...

Page 637: ...The logbook with all the entries uploaded up to now is stored in the Engineer project independent of the set filter criteria A logbook of the same device already stored before will be overwritten without querying the user The filter settings are not stored in the project When a logbook is filed in the project the logbook can also be opened in offline mode via the Logbook button on the Diagnostics ...

Page 638: ...00191 1 Then the logbook entry addressed is stored as OCTET STRING in C00192 1 Via this display parameter the logbook entry can be read out by the control The OCTET STRING has a length of 8 double words of 4 successive bytes 32 bytes starting with byte 0 in each case OCTET STRING Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 DWORD 0 Reserved Reserved Response index Reserved DWORD 1 Error activity flag Error counter...

Page 639: ...ook configured so that identical errors do not produce a new line entry but a counter is incremented for this error C00193 4 Error type bits 26 29 of the 32 bit error number C00193 5 Error subject area error ID bits 0 25 of the 32 bit error number C00193 6 Time in s during which the power was switched on power on time meter Note In the case of a simultaneous read access to the logbook entry C00192...

Page 640: ...nal device control changes according to the selected response controller inhibit is set and the DRV ERR LED on the front of the inverter goes on Related topics LED status displays of the device status 625 Device state machine and device states 112 Device overload monitoring Ixt 298 Motor load monitoring I2xt 299 Motor temperature monitoring PTC 302 Brake resistor monitoring I2xt 303 Motor phase fa...

Page 641: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 9 6 1 Monitoring configuration How to configure the monitoring functions using the Engineer 1 Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace 3 Click the Monitoring button The 8400 monitoring configuration dialog box is displayed via which the desired settings can be made Related topics Setting the error re...

Page 642: ...gered For many monitoring functions the response can be individually parameterised via parameters Tip The table in the chapter Short overview A Z contains the error messages for which the response can be set 653 Warning thresholds Some of the monitoring functions are activated if a defined warning threshold e g temperature has been exceeded The corresponding preset threshold values can be changed ...

Page 643: ...00002 19 activated by Low High edge by a Low High edge at the bResetFail input of the LS_DriveInterface the FailReset control bit in the control word must be parameterised with a value of 1 Automatic reset using the AutoFailReset function Overview of the relevant parameters Parameters Info C00184 Repetition time of the error reset processes C00185 Time left until the next error reset process C0018...

Page 644: ...point JOG frequency 0 at activated JOG setpoint Set JOG setpoint in C00039 1 15 Trouble active Clear fault With C00006 4 SLVC Vector control has been set but no motor parameter identification has been carried out Execute automatic motor parameter identification with the C00002 23 device command Assignment of several mutually exclusive functions with a signal source in C00701 Correct configuration ...

Page 645: ...matic motor parameter identification with the C00002 23 device command Torque dip in field weakening range or motor stalling when being operated in the field weakening range Motor is overloaded Check motor load Motor windings are wired incorrectly Reverse from star connection to delta connection V f reference point is set too high Correct setting with C00015 Override point of field weakening is se...

Page 646: ...e torque off STO safety system Up to and including version 13 xx xx the following applies If merely the external 24 V supply of the inverter is switched on the Safe torque off status in C00137 bit 10 will not be updated From version 14 00 00 the following applies If merely the external 24 V supply of the inverter is switched on the Safe torque off status in C00137 bit 10 will be updated Fan monito...

Page 647: ...he error number Display parameter C00168 From version 13 00 00 C00162 1 additionally displays the 32 bit error number without error type i e this error number only contains the error subject area and the error ID bit 0 bit 25 The LS_DriveInterface system block shows the 32 bit error number at the outputs wStateDetermFailNoLow Low Word and wStateDetermFailNoHigh High Word From version 06 00 00 onwa...

Page 648: ...s that are reported by the extension module and communication errors to the plugged in extension module Yes if it is a fieldbus error 131 CAN integrated general Errors related to general CAN functions Yes 135 CAN process data object PDO Errors that are explicitly only related to the CAN PDO process data objects Yes 140 Device configuration Errors that occur due to incompatibilities of the plugged ...

Page 649: ...er C00168 displays the internal error number 142278671 This decimal value corresponds to the following bit sequence Thus error number 142278671 means A DC bus undervoltage has been detected in the Motor management encoder subject area The error response is a Fault Assignment Information Meaning in the example Reserved Error type 2 Trouble Error subject area 123 Motor management encoder Error ID 15...

Page 650: ...out changing the interconnection of the technology application For the sake of legibility the 16 bit error number in the logbook is displayed with the following syntax Error subject area no Error ID Error subject area The error subject area indicates the internal function unit of the inverter in which the error has occurred Reserved Error subject area Error ID 2 1 0 8 14 Bit15 0 7 Note Due to the ...

Page 651: ...N process data object PDO Errors that are explicitly only related to the CAN PDO process data objects Yes 40 Device configuration Errors that occur due to incompatibilities of the plugged in individual components fieldbus module safety module et al Yes if the error relates to a module plugged in by the user 44 Parameter set Errors that occur in connection with the parameter set or the parameter se...

Page 652: ...ghLine inverter and execute the Export error texts command 2 Define the following options in the Export error texts dialog box Output file and memory location Languages to be exported German English French Device module to be exported Separator tabulator or semicolon Font UTF8 standard font or ASCII 3 Click OK to start the export After the export a message appears indicating whether the export was...

Page 653: ... 8847361 CE1 CAN RPDO1 No Reaction C00593 1 0x8100 xx 0135 00002 0x2302 8962 8847362 CE2 CAN RPDO2 No Reaction C00593 2 0x8100 xx 0135 00003 0x2303 8963 8847363 CE3 CAN RPDO3 No Reaction C00593 3 0x8100 xx 0131 00000 0x1f00 7936 8585216 CE4 CAN Bus Off No Reaction C00592 2 0x8000 xx 0135 00004 0x2304 8964 8847364 CE5 CAN RPDO4 No Reaction C00593 4 0x8100 xx 0140 00013 0x280d 10253 9175053 CI01 Mod...

Page 654: ...ta Information C00571 1 0xF000 xx 0123 00061 0x173d 5949 8060989 Id8 Speed sensor has not been set Fault C00571 2 0x7120 xx 0123 00145 0x1791 6033 8061073 LP1 Motor phase failure No Reaction C00597 0x3000 xx 0123 00015 0x170f 5903 8060943 LU DC bus undervoltage Trouble C00600 1 0x3100 xx 0123 00016 0x1710 5904 8060944 oC1 Power section short circuit Fault 0x2000 xx 0123 00030 0x171e 5918 8060958 o...

Page 655: ... HTL 4 fold Fault C00605 1 xx 0123 00205 0x17cd 6093 8061133 Sd3 Open circuit HTL 2 fold or 4 fold Fault C00586 0x7300 xx 0111 00002 0x0b02 2818 7274498 Su02 One mains phase is missing Warning C00565 0x3000 xx 0111 00003 0x0b03 2819 7274499 Su03 Too frequent mains switching Fault 0x3000 xx 0111 00004 0x0b04 2820 7274500 Su04 CU insufficiently supplied Warning 0x3000 xx 0111 00006 0x0b06 2822 72745...

Page 656: ...kStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy One mains phase of a three phase supply has failed Check mains connection terminal X100 Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Too frequent mains switching of the power section The device recognises if the power section is switched on an...

Page 657: ...r to protect the device from overload the following device outputs have a hardware detection in the mains input 7 5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW In case of the error message Su06 this hardware detection has responded Check whether all mains phases are connected a 2 phase supply may be existent Provide for sufficient cooling of the device Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 F...

Page 658: ... Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00604 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy The Ixt overload check has tripped Operating threshold 100 Ixt adjustable in C00123 Possible causes Wrong dimensioning of the device with regard to its motor load Load cycles are not complied with Check and if required correct dim...

Page 659: ...d in generator mode Use a brake resistor Use a regenerative power supply unit Establish a DC bus connection Select a braking method in C00175 which stops the ramp function generator when reaching the brake chopper threshold HlgStop In case of servo control SC set the speed controller parameters correctly Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00600 1 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fa...

Page 660: ...devices greater or equal 3 kW are used up to version V05 00 00 Set resp to earth fault C00602 to 0 No Reaction From version V05 01 00 onwards Deactivate earth fault detection during operation by setting the filter time C01770 to 250 ms If motor cables longer than 50 m are used From version V05 01 00 onwards Increase filter time for earth fault detection during operation C01770 Response Lenze setti...

Page 661: ...shold C00124 1 Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy During the identification of motor parameters an error has occurred Possible causes Interrupted motor cable Switched off power section during the identification Implausible start parameter settings Check the motor connections and the correspo...

Page 662: ...e must be ASM SLVC or VFCplus servo control Motor nameplate data synchronous motor motor control type must be PSM SLPSM or VFCplus servo control Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00571 2 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy When being In controller enable status the device has detected that a motor...

Page 663: ...erload an error message is displayed Observe the maximum current setting depending on the set switching frequency of the inverter Reduce the required load or setting of the dynamic switching frequency if necessary Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00567 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy The outp...

Page 664: ...essary Check parameter setting of the current controller with regard to the motor controllers e g reduce Vp Motor control Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00570 3 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Actuator limitation according to speed controller Observe load requirements Correct dimensioning o...

Page 665: ...kHz Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00607 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Maximally permissible speed of the feedback system connected to DI6 DI7 reached Reduce speed of the rotation shaft feedback system nencoder fmax x 60 encoder increments for fmax 10 kHz Response Lenze setting printed in...

Page 666: ...0 mA C00034 2 2 Check wiring of the analog X3 A2I input terminal for open circuit Check minimum current values of the signal sources Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C01501 1 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Communication error with extension module in slot 1 Eliminate EMC interference Switch o...

Page 667: ...in C00345 Check wiring and bus terminating resistor Set identical baud rate for each bus node Assign different IDs to nodes Eliminate electrical interference e g EMC Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00592 4 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy CAN on board The device has received the Stop Remote N...

Page 668: ...357 2 or switch off time monitoring Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00593 3 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy CAN on board Time monitoring for RPDO3 has been triggered RPDO3 has not been received within the monitoring time set in C00357 3 or was faulty Set correct telegram length for CAN maste...

Page 669: ...oved by loading the Lenze setting with the C00002 1 1 On start device command In order to prevent the error do not switch off the voltage during the saving process If the parameter set is to be transferred from one device with a higher version to a device with a lower version use the copy parameter set function of the keypad Make sure that you do not use functions that are not available in the old...

Page 670: ... 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy The parameter set saved to the memory module is invalid The error occurs while loading the parameter set The memory module plugged in the device lacks a code or a code is incorrect Please contact Lenze Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy The parameter set...

Page 671: ...tion 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Response Lenze sett...

Page 672: ...ng 6 Information Cause Remedy Device error Please contact Lenze Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Device error Please contact Lenze Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00189 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Inform...

Page 673: ...t switch Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00595 2 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy MCK The hardware limit switch in negative traversing direction has tripped The bLimitSwitchNeg input for travel range monitoring via negative hardware limit switch has been set to FALSE fail safe Reset error mes...

Page 674: ...e Cw rotating direction is defined by the profile generation Start positioning with zero speed Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Positioning profile is started in positioning mode 4 or 11 absolute Ccw or absolute Ccw to TP however the Ccw rotating direction is defined by the profile generat...

Page 675: ...ult 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy MCK Following error limit 2 C01215 2 has been exceeded Optimise control mode Increase following error limit Deactivate following error monitoring Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00595 7 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information C...

Page 676: ...rror can be avoided with C02868 Bit02 On cause 2 The continuous profile linkage with overchange must not provide any reversing process due to the profile selection Here the profile which causes a reversing must be defined with the final speed 0 From version 16 00 00 onwards the following modes with final speed are possible via C02868 Bit02 Reversing Profiles where the final speed cannot be reached...

Page 677: ... 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy The device fan has failed Possible causes The short circuit check of the fan connection has tripped The speed monitoring of the fan has tripped Check the fan for short circuit Clean the fan Response Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy Device error Please contact L...

Page 678: ...ped via the bSetError3 input of the LS_SetError_1 system block User defined Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00581 4 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy User error 4 has been tripped via the bSetError4 input of the LS_SetError_1 system block User defined Response Lenze setting printed in bold Set...

Page 679: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ User error 8 xx 0987 00000 xx 0987 65535 Response Lenze setting printed in bold Setting C00581 8 Adjustable response 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Cause Remedy User error 8 has been tripped via the bSetError4 input of the LS_SetError_2 system block User defined ...

Page 680: ...on possible settings bSetError1 BOOL Input for tripping User error 1 Error subject number 980 Error number C00581 1 x 0x0400000 980 x 0x10000 C00161 1 bSetError2 BOOL Input for tripping User error 2 Error subject number 981 Error number C00581 2 x 0x0400000 981 x 0x10000 C00161 2 bSetError3 BOOL Input for tripping User error 3 Error subject number 982 Error number C00581 3 x 0x0400000 982 x 0x1000...

Page 681: ...on possible settings bSetError1 BOOL Input for tripping User error 5 Error subject number 984 Error number C00581 5 x 0x0400000 984 x 0x10000 C00161 5 bSetError2 BOOL Input for tripping User error 6 Error subject number 985 Error number C00581 6 x 0x0400000 985 x 0x10000 C00161 6 bSetError3 BOOL Input for tripping User error 7 Error subject number 986 Error number C00581 7 x 0x0400000 986 x 0x1000...

Page 682: ...eatures Recording and saving of measured values in the 8400 HighLine Simultaneous measuring on acht independent channels Measuring fast and slow signals by means of adjustable sample rate Triggering on a channel an application variable or system event Detecting measured values before and after the trigger event Transferring measured values to the Engineering PC for the purpose of graphic display a...

Page 683: ... shows invalid settings the oscilloscope triggers an error With an online connection the measured 8400 HighLine values are transferred to the engineering tool and graphically represented on the oscilloscope user interface as soon as the measurement has been completed 10 1 Technical data Oscilloscope function of 8400 HighLine Number of channels 1 8 Depth of the measured value memory Max 8192 measur...

Page 684: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 10 2 Operation This chapter describes step by step how to record the signal characteristics of 8400 HighLine signal sources and represent analyse document and process them in the oscilloscope Note Recording can only be started when an online connection has been established to the 8400 HighLine ...

Page 685: ...o the oscilloscope user interface 1 Go to the Project view and select the servo inverter 2 Select the Oscilloscope tab from the Workspace The oscilloscope user interface contains the following control and function elements Engineer from version 2 16 PLC Designer EASY Starter from version 1 9 Oscilloscope toolbar Import settings from a loaded oscillogram Oscillogram selection Trigger settings Chann...

Page 686: ...8400 HighLine Saving the oscillogram in a file 696 Copy to clipboard Copy as text Copy as picture Copy as table For documentation purposes it is possible to copy the measured value of an oscilloscope as a table or alternatively the oscilloscope user interface as a picture to the clipboard for use in other programs Printer settings Print view Print Show cursor Automatically scale vertically Set all...

Page 687: ...our area of the channel serves to set a user defined colour Ch Channel number On Cam visible invisible Inv Inversion yes no Name Name of the signal source yPos I y position of cursor I yPos II y position of cursor II ΔyPos Difference of the y positions of both cursors Difference yPos I yPos II Unit Unit of the signal source AS Select deselect channel for automatic scaling 1 Div Vertical scaling fa...

Page 688: ...closed and the selection is accepted How to delete a selection 1 Go to the channel list and click the signal source to be removed 2 Right click the context menu to open it 3 Select the Delete signal source command in the context menu You can add so many signal sources for recording until all acht channels are assigned 10 2 3 Selecting the recording time sample rate How to define the sampling rate ...

Page 689: ...ghLine The oscilloscope provides various trigger conditions by means of which recording of the measured values can be controlled If the Last settings tab is in the foreground click the Settings tab to show the input fields for configuring the trigger condition The Settings tab contains the button which serves to import settings from a loaded oscillogram setting Function Signal source Selection of ...

Page 690: ...ime is marked by a dashed line When triggering on occurrence of an event it is thus possible to detect the values that have caused the event Select a positive delay time to detect signals occurring a certain time after the trigger event Edge Three trigger types are available Positive edge First the selected trigger value must be fallen below and then exceeded in order that the trigger is activated...

Page 691: ...ically 1 Click the symbol in the oscilloscope toolbar to open the Oscilloscope settings dialog box 2 In order that the recording process is restarted automatically after the upload of an oscillogram set the checkmark accordingly Cyclic recording is only possible for time base values 500 ms For monitoring certain situations this serves for instance to obtain the increased view of the interesting pa...

Page 692: ...another Zoom function Procedure Zoom selection Hold down the left mouse button and draw the oscillogram section to be zoomed While being drawn the selection is shown with a frame When the left mouse button is released the selection is zoomed in the oscillogram Horizontal stretching Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse pointer on the horizontal scale to the left to stretch the shown s...

Page 693: ...er limits On the left side of the dialog the limits of the data type of the recorded value are displayed 3 Click the OK button The dialog box is closed 10 2 8 Cursor function Reading individual measured values In addition to the zoom and scaling function the oscilloscope offers a cursor function that can be used to display individual measured values of a selectable channel or the difference betwee...

Page 694: ...he inactive measuring line it automatically becomes active The value measured at the position of the active measuring line is indicated in the value group box The difference between the values measured at the two measuring lines is indicated in the Differential value group field Comparing peak values Several values displayed in the oscillogram can be compared by means of a horizontal measuring lin...

Page 695: ... device oscillogram is the only oscillogram which can be used to establish a connection to the target system to carry out an oscilloscope measurement MERGE oscillogram If two or more oscillograms are loaded in the oscilloscope a MERGE tab is available In the merge tab several characteristics from the currently loaded data records can be overlaid e g to compare signal characteristics from different...

Page 696: ...ialog box appears 2 Specify a file name in the File name input field 3 Click the Filing in the project button The dialog box is closed and the current oscillogram is filed in the project How to save an oscillogram as external file 1 Click the icon in the oscilloscope toolbar The Open oscillogram file dialog box appears 2 Press the Save as external file button A new window opens in which the direct...

Page 697: ...ed and the oscillogram file is accepted How to load an oscillogram file from an external file 1 Click the icon in the oscilloscope toolbar The Load oscillogram file dialog box appears 2 Press the Load from external file button A new window opens in which the directory and the file name for the oscillogram file to be loaded have to be selected 3 Click Open The dialog box is closed and the oscillogr...

Page 698: ...pare signal characteristics from different recordings If two or more oscillograms are loaded in the oscilloscope e g the device oscillogram and an oscillogram previously saved in the project a MERGE tab is available If the MERGE tab is selected the desired characteristics to be overload or compared can be selected from the loaded files in the channel list If a device oscillogram is used in the mer...

Page 699: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 10 3 5 Deleting an oscillogram file saved in the project How to delete an oscillogram file saved in the project 1 Click the icon in the oscilloscope toolbar The Load oscillogram file dialog box appears 2 Select one or several oscillogram files from the upper list field 3 Press the Delete selected file button The selected file s is are deleted and the dialog box...

Page 700: ...this interface such as decentralised terminals operator and input devices HMIs as well as external controls and host systems The interface transfers CAN objects following the CANopen communication profile CiA DS301 version 4 02 developed by the umbrella organisation of CiA CAN in Automation in conformity with the CAL CAN Application Layer Tip In the Engineer parameter list category CAN you can fin...

Page 701: ...on the device version for transmitting PDOs Process Data Objects All process data channels are functionally equivalent Monitoring of the receive PDOs for data reception Adjustable error response to physical CAN errors frame bit ACK error bus stop bus working absent PDOs Telegram counters for SDOs and PDOs Bus status diagnostics Boot up telegram generation Emergency telegram generation Reset node t...

Page 702: ...ata change including adjustable blocking time Time controlled 1 to x ms After the reception of 1 to 240 sync telegrams Range Values Protocols Standard PDO protocols PDO write PDO read SDO protocols SDO download SDO download initiate SDO download segment SDO upload SDO upload initiate SDO upload segment SDO abort transfer SDO block download SDO block download initiate SDO block download end SDO blo...

Page 703: ...t and the arrival of the corresponding response Tip The communication times in the CAN network depend on the processing time in the device the telegram runtime baud rate telegram length the bus load especially if the bus is charged with PDOs and SDOs at a low baud rate Processing time in the 8400 inverter There are no interdependencies between parameter data and process data Parameter data approx ...

Page 704: ... terminated between CAN low and CAN high at the first and last physical node each by a resistor 120 Ω The 8400 inverter is provided with an integrated bus terminating resistor which can be activated via the unlabelled DIP switch DIP switch position R OFF bus terminating resistor is inactive ON bus terminating resistor is active Switch position The following can be set via the front panel DIP switc...

Page 705: ...al DIP switches for determining the node address The valid address range depends on the number of SDO channels set in C00366 1 SDO Lenze setting 1 127 2 SDO 1 63 Note All DIP switches a d 1 64 OFF Lenze setting At switching on the settings under code C00350 node address and C00351 baud rate will become active Preset baud rate 500 kbps DIP switch position Baud rate d c b a OFF ON OFF ON 20 kbps OFF...

Page 706: ...16 4 2 1 23 Information about the status of the system bus can be obtained quickly via LED displays CAN RUN and CAN ERR on the front of the inverter The meaning can be seen from the tables below LED display Meaning CAN ERR is permanently lit Inverter is not active on the system bus Bus Off CAN RUN and CAN ERR flicker Automatic detection of baud rate is active LED display CANopen state CAN RUN is b...

Page 707: ... interface of the inverter Reset node which is required after e g changing the data transfer rate the node address or the identifiers respectively Communication accessories PC interface PC system bus adapter 2173 incl connection cable and voltage supply adapter for DIN keyboard connection EMF2173IB for PS 2 keyboard connection EMF2173IBV002 for PS 2 keyboard connection with electrical isolation EM...

Page 708: ...on is based on a message oriented data exchange between a transmitter and many receivers All nodes can transmit and receive quasi simultaneously The identifier also called COB ID abbr for communication object identifier is used to control which node is to receive a transmitted message In addition to the addressing the identifier contains information on the priority of the message and the type of u...

Page 709: ...according to the Predefined Connection Set of DS301 V4 02 Tip If required the identifiers of the PDOs and the identifiers for the sync telegram can be changed via parameters indices Identifiers of the process data objects 729 Synchronisation of PDOs via sync telegram 733 The active identifiers of the PDOs are displayed in C00355 x Object Basis identifier CANBaseID Direction Network management NMT ...

Page 710: ... Process data usually are unscaled scalable raw data Process data are for instance setpoints and actual values The exact meaning of the PDO file contents is determined via the function block editor FB Editor in the I O level or via the PDO mapping Parameter data SDOs service data objects Parameter data are the CANopen indexes or in case of Lenze devices the codes Parameters are set for instance wh...

Page 711: ...ent CAN status is displayed in C00359 for diagnostic purposes Status Explanation Initialisation Initialisation After switch on an initialisation run is carried out During this phase the inverter is not involved in the data exchange via the bus The standard values are re written to all CAN relevant parameters After initialisation is completed the inverter is automatically set to the Pre Operational...

Page 712: ... configured as CAN master the status is automatically changed to Operational after a waiting time has expired C00356 1 and the 0x0100 Start remote node NMT command is transmitted to all nodes Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is Operational 3 6 0x01 xx Start remote node Operational Network management sync emergency telegrams as well as process data PDO and parameter...

Page 713: ...address in the user data node ID 0 The telegram addresses all nodes broadcast telegram The status of all nodes can be changed at the same time node ID 1 127 If a node address is specified only the status of the node with the corresponding address changes Example Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is Operational If the CAN master is supposed to switch all nodes connec...

Page 714: ...he Operational communication status with the Start remote node NMT telegram Only in this communication status data can be exchanged via process data objects A delay time can be set in C00356 1 which must expire after mains switching before the inverter transmits the Start remote node NMT telegram Tip Master functionality is only required during the initialisation phase of the drive system Paramete...

Page 715: ... PDO1 PDO4 are available depending on the device version and software version Definitions Process data telegrams between the host system and the devices are distinguished in terms of direction as follows Process data telegrams to the device RPDO Process data telegrams from the device TPDO The CANopen process data objects are designated as seen from the node s view Receive PDOs RPDOx Process data o...

Page 716: ...0007 30 CAN control mode depends on the technology application selected in C00005 TA Actuating drive speed Process data assignment for fieldbus communication 394 TA Abschaltpositionierung Process data assignment for fieldbus communication 484 Transmit PDOs TPDOs The process data transmitted from the drive to the system bus are processed via the LP_CanOut1 LP_CanOut4 port blocks Every port block re...

Page 717: ...from version 11 00 00 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 1 LP_CanIn1 Inversion bCtrl1_B0 15 0x0000 C00866 1 LP_CanIn1 wCtrl C00866 2 LP_CanIn1 wIn2 C00866 3 LP_CanIn1 wIn3 C00866 4 LP_CanIn1 wIn4 PDO mapping C00408 1 LP_CanIn1 Mapping selection CanIn C00409 1 LP_CanIn1 wCtrl MapVal 0 C00409 2 LP_CanIn1 wIn2 MapVal 0 C00409 3 LP_CanIn1 wIn3 MapVal 0 C00409 4 LP_CanIn1 wIn4 MapVal 0 Greyed out dis...

Page 718: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C00407 1 LP_CanIn1 dwIn12 MapVal From version 12 00 00 The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 1 and C00409 2 0 C00407 2 LP_CanIn1 dwIn34 MapVal From version 12 00 00 The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 3 and C00409 4 0 Parameters Info Lenze setting Greyed out display paramete...

Page 719: ...utput is available from version 11 00 00 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 3 LP_CanIn2 Inversion bIn1_B0 15 0x0000 C00866 5 LP_CanIn2 wIn1 C00866 6 LP_CanIn2 wIn2 C00866 7 LP_CanIn2 wIn3 C00866 8 LP_CanIn2 wIn4 PDO mapping C00408 2 LP_CanIn2 Mapping selection CanIn C00409 5 LP_CanIn2 wIn1 MapVal 0 C00409 6 LP_CanIn2 wIn2 MapVal 0 C00409 7 LP_CanIn2 wIn3 MapVal 0 C00409 8 LP_CanIn2 wIn4 MapVal 0...

Page 720: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C00407 3 LP_CanIn2 dwIn12 MapVal From version 12 00 00 The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 5 and C00409 6 0 C00407 4 LP_CanIn2 dwIn34 MapVal From version 12 00 00 The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 7 and C00409 8 0 Parameters Info Lenze setting Greyed out display paramete...

Page 721: ...ut is available from version 11 00 00 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 5 LP_CanIn3 Inversion bIn1_B0 15 0x0000 C00866 9 LP_CanIn3 wIn1 C00866 10 LP_CanIn3 wIn2 C00866 11 LP_CanIn3 wIn3 C00866 12 LP_CanIn3 wIn4 PDO mapping C00408 3 LP_CanIn3 Mapping selection CanIn C00409 9 LP_CanIn3 wIn1 MapVal 0 C00409 10 LP_CanIn3 wIn2 MapVal 0 C00409 11 LP_CanIn3 wIn3 MapVal 0 C00409 12 LP_CanIn3 wIn4 MapVa...

Page 722: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C00407 5 LP_CanIn3 dwIn12 MapVal From version 12 00 00 The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 9 and C00409 10 0 C00407 6 LP_CanIn3 dwIn34 MapVal From version 12 00 00 The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 11 and C00409 12 0 Parameters Info Lenze setting Greyed out display paramet...

Page 723: ...overview of the parameters for LP_CanIn4 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 7 LP_CanIn4 Inversion bIn1_B0 15 0x0000 C00866 13 LP_CanIn4 wIn1 C00866 14 LP_CanIn4 wIn2 C00866 15 LP_CanIn4 wIn3 C00866 16 LP_CanIn4 wIn4 PDO mapping C00408 4 LP_CanIn4 Mapping Selection CanIn C00409 13 LP_CanIn4 wIn1 MapVal 0 C00409 14 LP_CanIn4 wIn2 MapVal 0 C00409 15 LP_CanIn4 wIn3 MapVal 0 C00409 16 LP_CanIn4 wIn4 ...

Page 724: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C00407 7 LP_CanIn4 dwIn12 MapVal The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 13 and C00409 14 0 C00407 8 LP_CanIn4 dwIn34 MapVal The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409 15 and C00409 16 0 Parameters Info Lenze setting Greyed out display parameter ...

Page 725: ...ck maps process data object TPDO1 in the FB Editor Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut1 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 2 LP_CanOut1 Inversion bState_B0 15 0x0000 C00868 1 LP_CanOut1 wState C00868 2 LP_CanOut1 wOut2 C00868 3 LP_CanOut1 wOut3 C00868 4 LP_CanOut1 wOut4 Greyed out display parameter E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB...

Page 726: ...lock maps process data object TPDO2 in the FB Editor Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut2 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 4 LP_CanOut2 Inversion bOut1_B0 15 0x0000 C00868 5 LP_CanOut2 wOut1 C00868 6 LP_CanOut2 wOut2 C00868 7 LP_CanOut2 wOut3 C00868 8 LP_CanOut2 wOut4 Greyed out display parameter E2XW B E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW ...

Page 727: ...ock maps process data object TPDO3 in the FB Editor Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut3 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 6 LP_CanOut3 Inversion bOut1_B0 15 0x0000 C00868 9 LP_CanOut3 wOut1 C00868 10 LP_CanOut3 wOut2 C00868 11 LP_CanOut3 wOut3 C00868 12 LP_CanOut3 wOut4 Greyed out display parameter E2XW B E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2X...

Page 728: ... 00 00 The LP_CanOut4 port block maps process data object TPDO4 in the FB Editor Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut4 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401 8 LP_CanOut4 Inversion bOut1_B0 15 0x0000 C00868 13 LP_CanOut4 wOut1 C00868 14 LP_CanOut4 wOut2 C00868 15 LP_CanOut4 wOut3 C00868 16 LP_CanOut4 wOut4 Greyed out display parameter E2XW B E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW E B 2XW ...

Page 729: ...350 and a basic identifier CANBaseID which corresponds to the Predefined Connection Set of DS301 V4 02 Tip The active identifiers COB ID are displayed in C00355 x OPTIONAL Use the basic identifier according to Lenze definition LenzeBaseID If the basic identifiers shall be used instead according to the Lenze definition go to C00353 x and select 0 COBID C0350 LenzeBaseID for the coresponding PDO The...

Page 730: ...f the node address can be set for specific PDOs If identifiers are assigned individually all PDOs must have basic identifier values in the range of 385 1407 Object Lenze code CANopen index Default setting PDO1 TPDO1 COB ID C00354 1 I 1400 1 0x201 RPDO1 C00354 2 I 1800 1 0x181 PDO2 TPDO2 C00354 3 I 1401 1 0x301 RPDO2 C00354 4 I 1801 1 0x281 PDO3 TPDO3 C00354 5 I 1402 1 0x401 RPDO3 C00354 6 I 1802 1...

Page 731: ...ter e g the master sends the data request telegram with the COB ID of the TPDO requested to be sent The receiver recognises the RTR and transmits the corresponding PDO Transmission type PDO transmission Logic combination of different transmission types cyclic synchronous event controlled 0 AND 1 240 254 255 OR Transmission type Description 0 Synchronous and acyclic The PDO is transmitted on an eve...

Page 732: ...en activated in an event controlled way In the case of a sporadic data change 500 ms due to the cycle time set transmission takes place every 500 ms cyclic transmission Tip The communication parameters can also be set via the following CANopen objects I 1400 I 1403 Communication parameters for RPDO1 RPDO4 I 1800 I 1803 Communication parameters for TPDO1 TPDO4 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Un...

Page 733: ...gram A After the sync telegram has been received the slaves transmit the synchronous process data to the master TPDOs The master reads them as process input data B When the transmission process is completed the slaves receive RPDOs the process output data of the master All other telegrams e g parametersor event controlled process data are accepted acyclically by the slaves after the transmission i...

Page 734: ...available from version 04 00 00 Exception handling for the CAN PDOs in the event of an error can be set via decoupling configuration and decoupling values Bit coded selection is carried out in C00342 1 for the process data words read by the bus defining the events that will trigger decoupling Bit coded selection is carried out in C00342 2 for the process data words output by the application defini...

Page 735: ...d topics Configuring exception handling of the output terminals 364 Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00343 1 LP_CanIn1 wCtrl DiscVal 0 C00343 2 4 LP_CanIn1 wIn2 wIn4 DiscVal 0 C00343 5 8 LP_CanIn2 wIn1 wIn4 DiscVal 0 C00343 9 12 LP_CanIn3 wIn1 wIn4 DiscVal 0 C00343 13 16 LP_CanIn4 wIn1 wIn4 DiscVal 0 C00344 1 LP_CanOut1 wState DiscVal 0 C00344 2 4 LP_CanOut1 wOut2 wOut4 DiscVal 0 C00344 5...

Page 736: ...er data are transmitted via the system bus as SDOs Service Data Objects and acknowledged by the receiver The SDO enables read and write access to all device parameters and to the CANopen object directory integrated in the device Indices e g 0x1000 ensure access to device parameters and functions included in the object directory To transfer SDOs the information contained in the user data must compl...

Page 737: ...r basic identifier node address 11 9 2 User data Structure of the user data of the parameter data telegram The following subchapters provide detailed information on user data Object Direction Lenze Base ID CANopen Base ID from device to device dec hex dec hex SDO1 Parameter data channel 1 TSDO1 1408 580 1408 580 RSDO1 1536 600 1536 600 SDO2 Parameter data channel 2 TSDO2 1472 5C0 1472 5C0 RSDO2 16...

Page 738: ...o hex dec Write request 0x23 35 4 bytes Writing of a parameter to the inverter 0x2B 43 2 bytes 0x2F 47 1 byte 0x21 33 Block Write response 0x60 96 4 bytes Inverter acknowledges a write request Read request 0x40 64 4 bytes Reading of a parameter from the inverter Read response 0x43 67 4 bytes Inverter s response to a read request with the current parameter value 0x4B 75 2 bytes 0x4F 79 1 byte 0x41 ...

Page 739: ...4575 Lenze code number Example The C00011 parameter motor reference speed is to be addressed Calculation Index Decimal 24575 11 24564 Hexadecimal 0x5FFF 0xB 0x5FF4 Subindex 0x00 subindex 0 since the parameter does not have any subcodes Entries 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6 byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 LOW byte HIGH byte LOW word HIGH wo...

Page 740: ...dex Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 LOW byte HIGH byte LOW word HIGH word LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte 5th byte 6 byte 7th byte 8th byte Parameter value 1 byte 0x00 0x00 0x00 Parameter value 2 bytes 0x00 0x00 LOW byte HIGH byte Parameter value 4 bytes LOW word HIGH word LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte Note The Factor column of the Table of attributes contains a so called scalin...

Page 741: ...subindex of the code where the error occurred The error code is entered in bytes 5 8 The error codes are standardised according to DS301 V4 02 The representation of the error codes is provided in reverse read direction see example below Example Representation of error code 0x06 04 00 41 in bytes 5 8 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6 byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Error ...

Page 742: ...0604 0042 Number and length of objects to be transferred longer than PDO length 0x0604 0043 General parameter incompatibility 0x0604 0047 General internal device incompatibility 0x0606 0000 Access denied because of hardware error 0x0607 0010 Unsuitable data type unsuitable service parameter length 0x0607 0012 Unsuitable data type service parameter length exceeded 0x0607 0013 Unsuitable data type s...

Page 743: ...mand Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0x0605 0x40 0xC2 0x5F 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Explanations on the telegram to the drive Identifier 1536 node address 1536 5 1541 0x0605 1536 SDO1 basic identifier to the inverter Command 0x40 Read request read request of a parameter from the inverter Index 24575 code number 24575 61 24514 0x5FC2 Subindex 0 code C00061 does not have any subcodes Iden...

Page 744: ...a 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0x0602 0x23 0xA7 0x5F 0x00 0xFC 0x03 0x00 0x00 Explanations on the telegram to the drive Identifier 1536 node address 1536 2 1538 0x0602 1536 SDO1 basic identifier to the inverter Command 0x23 Write request write request of a parameter to the inverter Index 24575 code number 24575 88 24487 0x5FA7 Subindex 0 code C00088 does not have any subcodes Data 1 4 10 20 x 100 1020 0...

Page 745: ... 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6 byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0x060C 0x40 0x9C 0x5F 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Explanations on the telegram to the drive Identifier 1536 node address 1536 12 1548 0x060C 1536 SDO1 basic identifier to the inverter Command 0x40 Read request read request of a parameter from the inverter Index 24575 code number 24575 99 24476 0x5F...

Page 746: ...uest command The single blocks are toggled one after another i e first the request is made with the 0x60 command 0b0110 0000 then with the 0x70 command 0b0111 0000 and then again with the 0x60 command etc Toggle bit Identifier User data 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6 byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 0x058C 0x00 0x30 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30...

Page 747: ...ons on telegram 3 to the drive Command 0x70 Read segment request request read data block Bit 4 1 toggle bit Identifier User data 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6 byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 0x058C 0x17 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x00 0x00 0x00 0asc asc 0asc 0asc Explanations on telegram 3 from the drive Command 0x17 0b00010111 Bit 0 1 end ...

Page 748: ...nd interrupts the transmission if it receives a different logic value than the value transmitted With the next bit the sending node starts the transmission of an error flag In the arbitration phase the transmitter only detects a bit error if a dominantly sent bit is received as recessive bit In the ACK slot as well the dominant overwriting of a recessive bit is not indicated as a bit error Stuff b...

Page 749: ...legram structure The heartbeat telegram of the producer has the following identifier Identifier COB ID 1792 producer s node address The user data 1 byte contain the status s of the producer r Reserved always 0 s Status of the producer 0 Boot up 4 Stopped 5 Operational 127 Pre Operational U UHTXHVW LQGLFDWLRQ HDUWEHDW SURGXFHU 0 5 1 HDUWEHDW FRQVXPHUV V LQGLFDWLRQ LQGLFDWLRQ U UHTXHVW LQGLFDWLRQ V ...

Page 750: ...o be monitored depends on the device version BaseLine C 1 Heartbeat Producer can be monitored StateLine C Up to 7 Heartbeat Producers can be monitored HighLine C Up to 15 Heartbeat Producers can be monitored TopLine C Up to 15 Heartbeat Producers can be monitored The node address es of the nodes to be monitored is are set in C00385 1 n or via object I 1016 too Heartbeat event The Heartbeat event i...

Page 751: ...tbeat producer time C00381 to 10 ms Parameterising the heartbeat consumer node 2 1 Set the CAN node address of the producer in C00385 1 2 Set the heartbeat consumer time in C00386 1 Note The heartbeat consumer time must be greater than the heartbeat producer time of the node to be monitored set in C00381 3 Set the desired response in C00592 5 which is to be activated should a heartbeat event in th...

Page 752: ...error number value displayed in C00168 All other emergency error codes have a value of 0 here Emergency error codes Error register Cause 0x0000 0xXX One of several errors eliminated 0x00 One error has been eliminated error free status afterwards 0x3100 0x01 Supply voltage of standard device faulty or failed 0x8100 0x11 Communication error warning 0x8130 0x11 Life guarding error or heartbeat error ...

Page 753: ...pen indices and their relationship to Lenze codes Note Some of the terms used here derive from the CANopen protocol CANopen object Relationship to Lenze code Index Subindex Name I 1000 0 Device type I 1001 0 Error register I 1003 Predefined error field 0 Number of errors 1 10 Standard error field I 1005 0 COB ID SYNC message C00367 C00368 I 1006 0 Communication cycle period C00369 I 1014 0 COB ID ...

Page 754: ...ersion 15 00 00 0 Highest subindex supported 1 COB ID used by RPDO C00355 7 2 Transmission type C00323 4 I 1600 RPDO1 mapping parameter 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 1 4 Application object 1 4 C00409 1 4 C00866 1 4 I 1601 RPDO2 mapping parameter 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 1 4 Application object 1 4 C00409 5 8 C00866 5 8 I 1602 RPDO3 mapping parameter 0 Number of ...

Page 755: ...4 4 5 Event timer C00356 3 C00369 I 1803 TPDO4 communication parameter from version 15 00 00 0 Highest subindex supported 1 COB ID used by TPDO C00355 8 2 Transmission type C00322 4 3 Inhibit time C00324 5 5 Event timer C00356 4 C00369 I 1A00 TPDO1 mapping parameter 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 1 4 Application object 1 4 C00868 1 4 I 1A01 TPDO2 mapping parameter 0 Number of mapped...

Page 756: ...lue is 0x00 for inverters 8th byte The data content is 0x00 The data content for the 8400 inverter thus is 00 00 00 00 I 1001 Error register The error status in the data byte U8 is bit coded The following error states are coded in the data byte U8 Index I 1000 Name Device type Subindex Default setting Display range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Device type 0 0 4294967295 ro U32 8th b...

Page 757: ... code and a manufacturer specific information field comprising 16 bits Note The values in the standard error field under subindex 1 10 will be deleted if the subindex number of recorded errors is overwritten with the value 0 Emergency error codes Cause Entry in the error register I 1001 0x0000 One of several errors eliminated 0xXX Elimination of one single error afterwards no more errors 0x00 0x10...

Page 758: ... CANopen specification This means that all modules are by default set to the same sync telegram If sync telegrams are only to be received by certain communication modules their identifiers can be entered with values up to and including 0x07FF The identifier can only be changed if the communication module does not send any sync telegrams bit 30 0 How to change the identifier Deactivate identifier s...

Page 759: ...he telegram is sent once for every error This function can be activated or deactivated with bit 31 11 3 Data telegram assignment Index I 1006 Name Communication cycle period Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Communication cycle period 0 μs 0 μs 65535000 rw U32 Index I 1014 Name COB ID EMCY Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max va...

Page 760: ... heartbeat producer time of the node to be monitored 11 4 Data telegram assignment Index I 1016 Name Consumer heartbeat time Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported BaseLine C 1 StateLine C 7 HighLine C 15 TopLine C 15 read access only ro U16 1 n Consumer heartbeat time 0 0 65535 rw U16 Subindex Meaning Lenze code 0 Number of no...

Page 761: ...activated This object relates to code C00381 I 1018 Index I 1017 Name Producer heartbeat time Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Producer heartbeat time 0 0 ms 65535 rw U16 Index I 1018 Name Identity object Subindex Default setting Display range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported see below 0 4294967295 ro U32 1 Ven...

Page 762: ...erver parameter Subindex Default setting Display range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 2 2 2 ro U8 1 COB ID client server rx node ID 0x600 0 4294967295 ro U32 2 COB ID server client tx node ID 0x580 0 4294967295 ro U32 Subindex Meaning 1 Specification of receive identifier For SDO server channel 1 node address C00350 0x600 2 Specification of send identifier F...

Page 763: ...nment How to change the identifier 1 Deactivate identifier set bit 31 to 1 2 Change identifier 3 Activate identifier set bit 31 to 0 Index I 1201 Name SDO2 server parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 3 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID client server rx 0x80000000 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 COB ID server client tx 0x8000000...

Page 764: ...r 1472 0x5C0 Identifier 0x5C0 0x4 0x5C4 Resulting data data 1 data 4 11 7 Data telegram assignment for subindex 1 11 8 Data telegram assignment for subindex 2 User data assignment 11 9 User data assignment for writing to subindex 1 11 10 User data assignment for writing to subindex 2 8th byte 7th byte 6 byte 5th byte Data 4 Data 3 Data 2 Data 1 Bit 31 Bit 30 Bit 29 bit 11 Bit 10 bit 0 0 0 Extended...

Page 765: ...967295 rw U32 2 Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time not used for RPDOs rw U16 4 Compatibility entry reserved read or writeaccessleads to error message 0x06090011 rw U8 5 Event timer not used for RPDOs rw U16 Subindex Meaning Code 0 5 is permanently set Max 5 subindices are supported 1 RPDO1 identifier According to the Predefined Connection Set the basic setting is Identifier 0x200 nod...

Page 766: ...us event controlled X X n 1 240 When a value n is entered this PDO will be accepted with every nth SYNC X n 254 PDO will be accepted immediately Index I 1401 Name RPDO2 communication parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 5 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID used by RPDO 0x300 node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 Transmission t...

Page 767: ...bit 31 to 0 Index I 1402 Name RPDO3 communication parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 5 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID used by RPDO 0x400 node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time not used for RPDOs rw U16 4 Compatibility entry reserved read or writeaccessleads to error message...

Page 768: ...tifier set bit 31 to 0 Index I 1403 Name RPDO4 communication parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 5 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID used by RPDO 0x500 node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time not used for RPDOs rw U16 4 Compatibility entry reserved read or writeaccessleads to er...

Page 769: ...a telegram assignment IEC 61131 process data words are mapped Only whole bytes can be mapped 1 byte mapping entry Related topics RPDO1 Port block LP_CanIn1 717 Index I 1600 Name RPDO1 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 0 0 8 rw U8 1 4 Application object 1 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32 Subindex M...

Page 770: ...s this object relates to codes C00407 5 6 For data telegram assignment see object I 1600 Related topics RPDO3 LP_CanIn3 port block 721 Index I 1601 Name RPDO2 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 0 0 8 rw U8 1 4 Application object 1 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32 Subindex Meaning 0 Number of mapped...

Page 771: ...0409 13 16 and C00866 13 16 For 32 bit values this object relates to the codes C00407 7 8 For data telegram assignment see object I 1600 Related topics RPDO4 LP_CanIn4 port block 723 Index I 1603 Name RPDO4 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 0 0 8 rw U8 1 4 Application object 1 4 0 0 42949...

Page 772: ... 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0 1 ms 65535 rw U16 4 Reserved reserved read or writeaccessleads to errormessage 0x06090011 rw U8 5 Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16 Subindex Meaning Code 0 5 is permanently set Max 5 subindices are supported 1 TPDO1 identifier According to the Predefined Connection Set the basic setting is Identifier 0x180 node ID C00354 2 2 TPDO transmission type according to...

Page 773: ...to integers Example Entered value 26 Calculated time 26 x 0 1 ms 2 6 ms delay time 2 ms Subindex 5 event timer For cyclic operation transmission type 254 the cycle time for sending the process data object on the system bus can be set under subindex 5 The entered value corresponds to the time in ms PDO transmission Transmission type Explanation cyclic synchronous event controlled n 1 240 When a val...

Page 774: ...lt setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 5 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID used by TPDO 0x280 node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0 1 ms 65535 rw U16 4 Reserved reserved read or writeaccessleads to errormessage 0x06090011 rw U8 5 Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16 Subindex Meaning Code 0 5 is p...

Page 775: ...lt setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 5 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID used by TPDO 0x380 node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0 1 ms 65535 rw U16 4 Reserved reserved read or writeaccessleads to errormessage 0x06090011 rw U8 5 Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16 Subindex Meaning Code 0 5 is p...

Page 776: ...index Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Highest subindex supported 5 read access only ro U8 1 COB ID used by TPDO 0x480 node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32 2 Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8 3 Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0 1 ms 65535 rw U16 4 Reserved reserved read or writeaccessleads to errormessage 0x06090011 rw U8 5 Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16 Subindex Meaning Co...

Page 777: ... 726 Index I 1A00 Name TPDO1 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 0 0 8 rw U8 1 4 Application object 1 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32 Subindex Meaning 0 Number of mapped objects 1 4 Mapping entries 1 4 for TPDO1 The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping For this there is no value avai...

Page 778: ...DO4 LP_CanOut4 port block 728 Index I 1A02 Name TPDO3 mapping parameter Subindex Default setting Setting range min value unit max value Access Data type 0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO 0 0 8 rw U8 1 4 Application object 1 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32 Subindex Meaning 0 Number of mapped objects 1 4 Mapping entries 1 4 for TPDO3 The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping For th...

Page 779: ...ssible settings bResetNode BOOL Reset node TRUE Carry out reset node If the inverter is configured as CAN master in C00352 the NMT command Start Remote Node is sent to all nodes at the bus broadcast telegram Network management telegram NMT bReInitCAN BOOL Reinitialisation TRUE Reinitialise CAN on board interface Designator Data type Value meaning bFail BOOL Error TRUE An event according to the err...

Page 780: ... When using a communication module the major advantage for the user is the possibility of parameterising controlling and diagnosing the drive system via the available fieldbus The following fieldbuses are supported by the 8400 HighLine Fieldbus Communication module type designation System bus CAN on board permanently integrated in the standard device EtherCAT E84AYCET Ethernet POWERLINK E84AYCEC E...

Page 781: ...he inverters is cyclical This concerns the continuous exchange of current input and output data In the case of the 8400 inverter 16 words per direction are exchanged The master computer can directly access the process data Access to the process data takes place via the port blocks LP_MciIn and LP_MciOut see FB interconnection of the Engineer These port blocks are also called process data channels ...

Page 782: ... in out while the inverter is switched on When the module is plugged in it is automatically detected and checked for plausibility regarding the function and version Fieldbus specific device profiles and PDO mapping When specific bus systems are used the inverter is to behave according to a defined manufacturer spanning standard The following definitions have been made for this Definitions of the d...

Page 783: ...the technology applications are fundamentally different and have different requirements regarding the signals sent to them predefined assignment of the MCI PDOs depends on the technology application selected in C00005 TA Actuating drive speed Process data assignment for fieldbus communication 394 TA Table positioning Process data assignment for fieldbus communication 458 TA Abschaltpositionierung ...

Page 784: ... the FB Editor Short overview of the parameters for LP_MciIn Outputs dnIn56_p and dnIn78_p are available from version 11 00 00 Parameters Info Lenze setting C00876 1 LP_MciIn wCtrl C00876 2 16 LP_MciIn wIn2 wIn16 C00890 1 LP_MciIn Inversion bCtrl_B0 15 0x0000 C00890 3 LP_MciIn Inversion bIn2_B0 15 0x0000 Greyed out display parameter E WUOB E WUOB E WUOB E WUOB E WUOB 25 WR 7 Z WUO Z Q Z Q GQ Q BS ...

Page 785: ...t block maps the MCI PDOs to be transmitted in the FB Editor Short overview of the parameters for LP_MciOut Parameters Info Lenze setting C00877 1 LP_MciOut wState C00877 2 16 LP_MciOut wOut2 wOut16 C00890 2 LP_MciOut Inversion bState_B0 15 0x0000 C00890 4 LP_MciOut Inversion bOut2_B0 15 0x0000 Greyed out display parameter E6WDWHB 7 WR 25 LHOG EXV E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB E6WDWHB Z6WDWH 25 25 17 0 ...

Page 786: ...rd device Block services reading writing parameters of the String data type can also be executes via the CAN gateway 12 2 Functional principle of CAN gateway Activating the CAN gateway To activate the CAN gateway the CAN address 1 127 of the connected remote device must be set in C00387 1 In the Lenze setting C00387 1 0 the function is switched off If the CAN gateway is activated the own inverter ...

Page 787: ...in C01120 As a general rule only one source can be used to synchronise the internal time base Sync cycle time setpoint Time with which the internal phase locking loop PLL expects the synchronisation signals The time must be set in C01121 in accordance with the cycle of the synchronisation source selected in C01120 Example For the CAN bus 2 ms has been selected as interval between two synchronisati...

Page 788: ...ynchronisation by themselves In this case a manual change is not possible For determining C01122 the point in time where all bus nodes have valid PDOs is decisive Example If the phase position is set to 550 μs the system part of the application starts 550 μs before the arrival of the synchronisation signal Sync correction width If the cycle times of the synchronisation signal and the phase locking...

Page 789: ...data changeover is provided for applications machines which have multiple axes controlled successively but which do not require the simultaneous operation of multiple motors In this case the very same inverter can control the motors successively Advantages of this solution Fewer components inverters and hence less energy consumption 14 1 Principle of the selective control of multiple motors using ...

Page 790: ...r change over 1 Engineer Go to the Project view and select the 8400 HighLine inverter 2 Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace 3 Go to the Overview dialog level and click the Basic functions button 4 Go to the Overview Basic functions dialog box and click the Parameter change over button Note The parameter change over basic function is always processed even if the corresponding L...

Page 791: ...x entitled Configure WriteParamList is shown On the left hand side all the parameters of the inverter with write and read access are shown in the list entitled Available parameters If the option In menu groups is activated all parameters are shown assigned to their functions By clicking on the button in the Filter area you can shorten the list of available parameters If for example you enter the t...

Page 792: ...You can call the configuration dialog again at any time in order to change or expand the WriteParamList retrospectively Changing the values of the definable parameter list After the compilation of the definable parameter list the values in the columns 1st value 4th value first correspond to the Lenze setting of the respective parameter Just click one of the input fields in these columns to change ...

Page 793: ... be copied to another value set To copy values proceed as follows 1 Click on the Copy values button The Copy values dialog box is displayed 2 Define the parameter list to be copied via the two upper checkboxes 3 Select Source and Target 4 Click on button in order to copy the values from Source to target Importing exporting the list For cross device reuse of the configured WriteParamList you can cl...

Page 794: ...parameters Truth table for the selection of the value set to be used Parameters Lenze setting Info Activate writing C00621 123 0 Not connected Selection of the signal source that activates writing to the parameter list for Execute Mode 0 by Execute Selection value set 1 C00621 124 0 Not connected Selection of the two signal sources for the binary coded selection of the value set 1 4 to be used see...

Page 795: ...ors may be displayed The parameter list will always be processed from beginning to end even if errors occur in the meantime Parameters Lenze setting Info Execute Mode C01082 0 by Execute For writing the parameter list two modes are available 0 by Execute Lenze setting The writing of the parameter list is activated by a FALSE TRUE edge at the bExecute control input 1 by Input Select The parameter l...

Page 796: ...et 1 In C01086 1 n specify the values to be used to describe the selected parameters The values are entered according to the scaling format scaling factor of the respective parameter C01086 1 value for list entry 1 in our example for parameter C00012 C01086 2 value for list entry 2 in our example for parameter C00026 1 C01086 3 value for list entry 3 in our example for parameter C00027 1 These val...

Page 797: ...2 SC Ti speed controller 50 0 ms C02221 5 C02221 6 C02221 7 C02221 8 C00071 3 SLPSM Ti speed controller 100 0 ms C02221 9 C02221 10 C02221 11 C02221 12 C00072 SC Tdn speed controller 0 00 ms C02222 1 C02222 2 C02222 3 C02222 4 C00073 1 VFC Vp Imax controller 0 25 C02223 1 C02223 2 C02223 3 C02223 4 C00073 2 SLVC Vp torque controller 1 25 C02223 5 C02223 6 C02223 7 C02223 8 C00074 1 VFC Ti Imax con...

Page 798: ... 6 C02284 7 C02284 8 C00972 VFC Vp V f encoder 0 100 Hz Hz C02285 1 C02285 2 C02285 3 C02285 4 C00973 VFC Ti V f encoder 100 0 ms C02286 1 C02286 2 C02286 3 C02286 4 C00975 VFC ECO Vp CosPhi controller 0 500 Hz Hz C02287 1 C02287 2 C02287 3 C02287 4 C00976 VFC ECO Ti CosPhi controller 200 0 ms C02288 1 C02288 2 C02288 3 C02288 4 C00977 VFC ECO Minimum voltage V f 20 00 C02289 1 C02289 2 C02289 3 C...

Page 799: ... 100 C02305 41 C02305 42 C02305 43 C02305 44 C02853 12 PSM Lss saturation characteristic 100 C02305 45 C02305 46 C02305 47 C02305 48 C02853 13 PSM Lss saturation characteristic 100 C02305 49 C02305 50 C02305 51 C02305 52 C02853 14 PSM Lss saturation characteristic 100 C02305 53 C02305 54 C02305 55 C02305 56 C02853 15 PSM Lss saturation characteristic 100 C02305 57 C02305 58 C02305 59 C02305 60 C02...

Page 800: ...re this basic function anymore delete the composed parameter list in order that no unwanted parameter write operations take place Designator Data type Information possible settings bExecute BOOL FALSE TRUE For Execute Mode C01082 0 by Execute Activate writing of the parameter list bSelectWriteValue_1 bSelectWriteValue_2 BOOL Binary coded selection of the value set 1 4 to be used bSelectWrite Value...

Page 801: ...g bDone BOOL Writing of the parameter list completed status signal The output is automatically reset to FALSE if writing via bExecute is activated again TRUE Writing of the parameter list successfully completed FALSE The FALSE status can have the following meanings 1 There is no active writing of the parameter list 2 Writing of the parameter list has not been completed yet 3 An error has occurred ...

Page 802: ... certain software version onwards are marked with a corresponding note in the parameter description from version xx xx xx The parameter descriptions are based on software version V16 00 00 Tip For quick reference of a parameter with a certain name simply use the index of the online documentation The index always contains the corresponding code in parentheses behind the name General information on ...

Page 803: ...eral information Parameter number Cxxxxx Parameter name display text in the Engineer and keypad Data type Parameter index in decimal and hexadecimal notation for access via a fieldbus e g CAN system bus Tip The parameter index is calculated as follows Index dec 24575 code Index hex 0x5FFF code Example for code C00005 Index dec 24575 5 24570 Index hex 0x5FFF 0x 5 0x5FFA Table contents The table con...

Page 804: ...and not be changed by the user Description structure Representation in the Engineer The Engineer displays these parameters with a grey background or with an online connection with a pale yellow background Data type Meaning INTEGER_16 16 bit value with sign INTEGER_32 32 bit value with sign UNSIGNED_8 8 bit value without sign UNSIGNED_16 16 bit value without sign UNSIGNED_32 32 bit value without si...

Page 805: ...directly Values outside the valid setting range are represented in red in the Engineer 15 1 3 1 Parameters with setting range Description structure Parameter setting in the Engineer In the Engineer parameters are set by entering the desired value into the input field 15 1 3 2 Parameters with selection list Description structure Parameter Name Cxxxxx _____________ Data type _______ Index _______ De...

Page 806: ...neer a list field is used for parameter setting 15 1 3 3 Parameters with bit coded setting Description structure Parameter setting in the Engineer The Engineer uses a dialog box for parameter setting in which the individual bits can be set or reset Alternatively the value can be entered as a decimal or hexadecimal value Parameter Name Cxxxxx _____________ Data type _______ Index _______ Descriptio...

Page 807: ...__ Description Setting range min value unit max value Subcodes Lenze setting Cxxxxx 1 Cxxxxx 2 Cxxxxx 3 Cxxxxx 4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Attribute Meaning Read access Read access to parameter possible Write access Write access to parameter possible Please also observe the...

Page 808: ...in setpoint to the value 123 45 via a bus system the integer value 12345 must be transferred i e the value to be set must be multiplied by the corresponding scaling factor 100 15 2 Conversion formula for write access via bus system Character length In case of parameters of VISIBLE_STRING data type the character length is given in addition This is also important for the parameter access via a bus s...

Page 809: ...e will always be displayed completely Selection list Info 10 Standard Only the most important menus and codes are displayed on the keypad 20 Expert All menus and codes are displayed on the keypad 30 Service Only for servicing purposes Lenze service Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00001 1 10 Standard Keypad UserLevel Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter...

Page 810: ... All parameter sets are saved to the memory module safe against mains failure Save all parameter sets C00002 12 0 Off ready Reserved C00002 13 0 Off ready Reserved C00002 14 0 Off ready Reserved C00002 15 0 Off ready Reserved C00002 16 1 On start Enable inverter 1 Enable inverter 0 Inhibit inverter Enable inhibit inverter C00002 17 0 Off ready Activate quick stop 1 Activate quick stop 0 Deactivate...

Page 811: ...initialise CAN on board interface Required when changing the baud rate node address or identifiers CAN on board system bus C00002 27 0 Off ready Device search function From version 06 00 00 This device command serves to optically locate an inverter connected online e g for maintenance work Device search function C00002 28 0 Off ready Check MasterPin From version 06 00 00 Unlocking the inverter wit...

Page 812: ...own to the system 2 Password protection Unauthorised access for requested device command Password protection 3 Time out Device command could not be processed in the defined time timeout 4 System fault 5 Command server assigned 6 Controller inhibit required 7 unexpected controller inhibit 10 Memory module binding error Device personalisation 11 Password too short Password protection 12 Wrong passwo...

Page 813: ... Name C00005 Application Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24570d 5FFAh Parameter Name C00006 Motor control Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24569d 5FF9h Selection of the motor control mode Motor control MCTRL Select control mode Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold Info 2 SC Servo control ASM This control type is used for the servo control of an asynchronous motor The control type requires a speed fe...

Page 814: ...control of an asynchronous motor via a linear V f characteristic For setting the V f characteristic only the rated frequency C00089 and the rated voltage C00090 of the motor have to be entered Predestinated application areas of this control type are materials handling technology and pump and fan systems V f characteristic control energy saving Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM...

Page 815: ...onnection in the inverter or a change carried out by the user Selection list read only Info 0 Free Free Application Interconnection has been changed I O level Interconnection has been changed 10 Free Terminal0 Application Interconnection has been changed I O level Terminals 0 control mode 12 Free Terminal2 Application Interconnection has been changed I O level Terminal 2 control mode 14 Free Termi...

Page 816: ...rol mode 1130 SpeedACdrive CAN Application Actuating drive speed AC Drive Profile I O level CAN control mode 1140 SpeedACdrive MCI Application Actuating drive speed AC Drive Profile I O level MCI control mode 2000 TabPos Free Application Table positioning I O level Interconnection has been changed 2010 TabPos Terminal0 Application Table positioning I O level Terminals 0 control mode 2012 TabPos Te...

Page 817: ...al adaptation via characteristic Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00010 1 0 00 AIN1 y0 min C00010 2 0 00 AIN1 x0 Dead band C00010 3 0 00 AIN1 y0 min C00010 4 0 00 AIN1 x0 Dead band C00010 5 100 00 AIN1 ymax C00010 6 100 00 AIN1 xmax C00010 7 100 00 AIN1 ymax C00010 8 100 00 AIN1 xmax Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling f...

Page 818: ...NSIGNED_16 Index 24560d 5FF0h V f base frequency for V f characteristic control VFCplus and V f control VFCplus encoder The motor voltage increases linearly with the frequency until the base frequency is reached From this value on the motor voltage remains constant the speed increases and the maximum torque decreases After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue the suitabl...

Page 819: ...ar drive optimised 2 8 kHz var drive optimised 3 16 kHz var drive optimised 5 2 kHz constant drive optimised 6 4 kHz constant drive optimised 7 8 kHz constant drive optimised 8 16 kHz constant drive optimised 11 4 kHz var min Pv 12 8 kHz var min Pv 13 16 kHz var min Pv 15 2 kHz constant min Pv 16 4 kHz constant min Pv 17 8 kHz constant min Pv 18 16 kHz constant min Pv 21 8 kHz var drive opt 4 kHz ...

Page 820: ...V f characteristic control VFCplus and sensorless vector control SLVC A higher slip compensation results in a higher increase in frequency and voltage when the machine is under load After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue the suitable value can be entered automatically An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well Motor control MCTR...

Page 821: ...tching hysteresis 1 CAUTION There are errors in the evaluation if the sum of 199 98 is exceeded in case of the set value combinations Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 199 99 0 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00025 LS_DriveInterface bNActHysterese Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24550d 5FE6h From version 16 00 00 S...

Page 822: ...e analog inputs Analog terminals Display range min value unit max value 10 00 V 10 00 Subcodes Info C00028 1 AIN1 Input voltage C00028 2 AIN2 Input voltage Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00029 AINx Input current Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24546d 5FE2h Display of the input current at the analog inputs When the corresponding analog input...

Page 823: ...e current signal 0 mA 20 mA 0 mA 20 mA 0 100 2 4mA 20mA Input signal is the current signal 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 0 100 The current loop is monitored for open circuit I 4 mA by the device Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00034 1 0 10V 10V AIN1 Config C00034 2 0 10V 10V AIN2 Config Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00036 DC braking Current Data t...

Page 824: ...f the speed setpoint at the speed setpoint input of the motor control Display range min value unit max value 120000 rpm 120000 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00051 MCTRL Actual speed value Data type INTEGER_32 Index 24524d 5FCCh Display of the actual speed value of the motor shaft Note The displayed value only corresponds to the real act...

Page 825: ... Parameter Name C00055 Actual values Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24520d 5FC8h From version 10 00 00 Note When a single track feedback has been selected for the HTL encoder C00115 1 or 3 the sign of the actual speed value is created from the sign of the speed setpoint In C00055 1 und C00055 2 a positive speed is always displayed Display range min value unit max value 32767 rpm 32767 Subcodes Info C0...

Page 826: ...it max value 1300 00 Hz 1300 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00059 Appl Reference frequency C11 Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24516d 5FC4h Display of the field frequency which corresponds to the reference speed set in C00011 Display range min value unit max value 0 00 Hz 1300 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MO...

Page 827: ...NH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00065 Supply voltage 24V Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24510d 5FBEh Display of the 24V supply voltage for the supply of the control electronics Note The 24 V supply for the control electronics is either provided by an external supply or by the invter itself if it is connected to the mains voltage Display range min value unit max value...

Page 828: ...ntroller C00071 2 50 0 ms SC Ti speed controller C00071 3 50 0 ms SLPSM Ti speed controller Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00072 SC Tdn speed controller Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24503d 5FB7h Differential time constant Tdn of the speed controller for servo control SC and sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM Setting range mi...

Page 829: ...he motor catalogue the suitable value can be entered automatically Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 V A 500 00 power related see table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00076 Ti current controller Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24499d 5FB3h Reset time Ti of the current controller for servo control SC and certain inve...

Page 830: ... Selection list 0 Off 1 On Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00079 1 0 Off SC Current controller feedforward control Please observe the notes regarding this function in the chapter Feedforward control of the current controller C00079 2 1 On SC Adapt VP in the field weakening range Speed dependent adaptive field weakening controller C00079 3 0 Off SC n ctrl anti wind up Anti wind up effect of the speed ...

Page 831: ...ee table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00083 Motor rotor time constant Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24492d 5FACh Display of the rotor time constant of the motor This value is calculated from the rotor resistance and the rotor inductance leakage and magnetising inductance Display range min value unit max value 0 ms 32767 Read access Write...

Page 832: ...d from the motor catalogue the suitable value can be entered automatically Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 20 A 320 00 power related see table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00089 Rated motor frequency Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24486d 5FA6h This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate After the motor to ...

Page 833: ...setting 0 0 mH 6500 0 power related see table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00093 Power section identification Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24482d 5FA2h Display of the identification of the detected power section of the inverter Display range min value unit max value 0 65535 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Sca...

Page 834: ...OP No transfer COM MOT Character length 12 Parameter Name C00100 Firmware version Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24475d 5F9Bh Display of the firmware version of the device divided into subsections Display range min value unit max value 0 99 Subcodes Info C00100 1 Firmware version main version C00100 2 Firmware version subversion C00100 3 Firmware version release C00100 4 Firmware version build Read ac...

Page 835: ...tion controlled 1 At standstill the position control is activated The basic conditions are shown in the flow diagram for the quick stop function Bit 1 Ramp position controlled 1 During the ramp down phase the position control is activated The basic conditions are shown in the flow diagram for the quick stop function Bit 2 Continue following error From version 15 00 00 1 The current following error...

Page 836: ...s Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C00106 Auto DCB Hold time Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24469d 5F95h Hold time of the automatic DC injection brake The DC injection brake is applied for the time set here if the value falls below the speed setpoint set in C00019 DC injection braking Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 000 s 999 000...

Page 837: ...ion of digital input 7 Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 CInh inverted Inversion of digital input RFR controller enable Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00115 DI 1 2 6 7 Fct Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24460d 5F8Ch Function assignment of the digital terminals D...

Page 838: ... terminals Setting range min hex value max hex value Lenze setting 0x00 0xFF 0x00 decimal 0 Value is bit coded bit set Info Bit 0 Relay inverted Relay inversion Bit 1 DO1 inverted Inversion of digital output 1 Bit 2 DO2 inverted Inversion of digital output 2 Bit 3 DO3 inverted Inversion of digital output 3 Bit 4 High current inverted Inversion of high current output Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved B...

Page 839: ...erating threshold for the OC5 Device overload Ixt error message The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00604 The current device utilisation is displayed in C00064 Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 200 00 100 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00124 Current monitoring Breaking current Data typ...

Page 840: ...ufacturer The value to be entered can be obtained from the nameplate of the brake resistor Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 0 kWs 6553 5 power related see table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00133 Brake resistor utilisation Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24442d 5F7Ah Display of the utilisation of the connected brake ...

Page 841: ...lt Bit 8 SetHalt Bit 9 Reserved_1 Bit 10 Reserved_2 Bit 11 LenzeSpecific_1 Bit 12 LenzeSpecific_2 Bit 13 LenzeSpecific_3 Bit 14 SetFail Bit 15 LenzeSpecific_4 Subcodes Info C00136 1 MCI control word Control word of the MCI communication interface communication module C00136 2 CAN control word Control word of the CAN communication interface CAN on board Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No tra...

Page 842: ... Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00137 Device status Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24438d 5F76h Parameter Name C00138 Internal control signals Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24437d 5F75h Bit coded display of internal control signals of different sources Display area min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Bit 0 Reserved Bi...

Page 843: ...ded bit set Info Bit 0 Inhibit at power on Bit 1 Inhibit at trouble Bit 2 Inhibit at fault Bit 3 Inhibit at undervoltage Bit 4 Inhibit at Lenze setting From version 06 00 00 Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00144 Switching freq reduct Temp Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24431d 5F6Fh Activation of the automatic switc...

Page 844: ...w output of the SB LS_DriveInterface In this case the wStateDetermFailNoHigh output is 0 Advantage The bus transfer of the error numbers is possible via a data word without changing the interconnection of the technology application Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00148 LS_DriveInterface Error message config Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24427d 5F6Bh Paramet...

Page 845: ... Fail Error Bit 1 M_max Maximum torque Bit 2 I_max Maximum current Bit 3 PowerDisabled Power switched off Bit 4 Ready Controller is ready for operation Bit 5 ControllerInhibit Controller is inhibited Bit 6 Trouble Fault Bit 7 InitState Initialisation Bit 8 CwCcw CW CCW rotation Bit 9 TroubleQSP Quick stop due to fault is active Bit 10 SafeTorqueOff Safe torque off Bit 11 AplicationRunning Applicat...

Page 846: ...Bit 13 DCB IMP Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00158 Cause of controller inhibit Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24417d 5F61h Parameter Name C00159 Cause of quick stop QSP Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24416d 5F60h Bit coded display of the cause source of the quick stop Display area min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value...

Page 847: ...ser error messages Setting range min value unit max value 0 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00161 1 1 LS_SetError_1 Error no 1 C00161 2 2 LS_SetError_1 Error no 2 C00161 3 3 LS_SetError_1 Error no 3 C00161 4 4 LS_SetError_1 Error no 4 C00161 5 1 LS_SetError_2 Error no 1 C00161 6 2 LS_SetError_2 Error no 2 C00161 7 3 LS_SetError_2 Error no 3 C00161 8 4 LS_SetError_2 Error no 4 Read access Write ...

Page 848: ...nhibit signal 6 Digital counter Comparison bit 7 CAN1 input bit 0 8 CAN1 input bit 1 9 CAN1 input bit 2 10 CAN1 input bit 3 11 CAN1 input bit 4 12 CAN1 input bit 5 13 CAN1 input bit 6 14 CAN1 input bit 7 15 CAN1 input bit 8 16 CAN1 input bit 9 17 CAN1 input bit 10 18 CAN1 input bit 11 19 CAN1 input bit 12 20 CAN1 input bit 13 21 CAN1 input bit 14 22 CAN1 input bit 15 23 CAN2 input bit 0 24 CAN2 in...

Page 849: ...MCI word1 input bit1 57 MCI word1 input bit2 58 MCI word1 input bit3 59 MCI Word 1 Input bit 4 60 MCI word1 input bit5 61 MCI word1 input bit6 62 MCI word1 input bit7 63 MCI word1 input bit8 64 MCI word1 input bit9 65 MCI word1 input bit10 66 MCI word1 input bit11 67 MCI word1 input bit12 68 MCI word1 input bit13 69 MCI word1 input bit14 70 MCI word1 input bit15 71 MCI word2 input bit0 72 MCI word...

Page 850: ...00 L_DFlipFlop_1 Out 101 L_DigitalDelay_1 Out 102 L_Compare_1 Out 103 L_Compare_2 Out 104 L_NSet_1 Setpoint reached 105 L_DigitalLogic_1 Out 106 L_SignalMonitor_b Out1 107 L_SignalMonitor_b Out2 108 L_SignalMonitor_b Out3 109 L_SignalMonitor_b Out4 110 L_PCTRL_1 act set Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00163 1 0 No signal Logbook binary element 1 C00163 2 0 No signal Logbook binary element 2 Read acce...

Page 851: ...CI word 5 21 MCI word 6 22 MCI word 7 23 MCI word 8 24 MCI word 9 25 MCI word 10 26 MCI word 11 27 MCI word 12 28 MCI word 13 29 MCI word 14 30 MCI word 15 31 MCI word 16 32 Current motor speed 33 Current motor torque 34 DC bus voltage 35 Current motor current 36 Current motor voltage 37 Current motor frequency 38 Effective speed setpoint 39 Device utilisation 40 Motor utilisation 41 L_OffsetGainP...

Page 852: ...etermining error C00165 2 Current error Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Character length 14 Parameter Name C00166 Error information text Data type VISIBLE_STRING Index 24409d 5F59h Display of details on the status determining error and on the currently pending error Subcodes Info C00166 1 Resp to status det error Response to the status determining error C00166 2 Subj sta...

Page 853: ...ge min hex value max hex value Lenze setting 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x067E decimal 1662 Value is bit coded bit set Bit 0 Reserved Bit 1 Log entry Fault Bit 2 Log entry Trouble Bit 3 Log entry TroubleQuickstop Bit 4 Log entry WarningLocked Bit 5 Log entry Warning Bit 6 Log entry Information Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Activation Error counter Bit 10 Activation Log line refresh Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12...

Page 854: ...e brake chopper is controlled is reduced by the voltage value set here The brake chopper threshold must not be smaller than the stabilised DC bus voltage Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 V 150 0 V Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00175 Brake energy management Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24400d 5F50h From version 02 00 ...

Page 855: ... output relay C00177 3 Short circuit counter C00177 4 Earth fault counter C00177 5 Clamp counter C00177 6 Counter for safe torque off STO after power on From version 12 00 00 C00177 7 Counter for controller inhibit via terminal after power on From version 12 00 00 C00177 8 Counter for pulse inhibit IMP after power on From version 12 00 00 C00177 9 Service code Read access Write access CINH PLC STO...

Page 856: ...ction Setting range min value unit max value 0 s 6000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00181 1 5 s Time device search function Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00182 L_NSet_1 S ramp time PT1 Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24393d 5F49h FB L_NSet_1 PT1 S ramp time for the main setpoint ramp function generator Only effective with activated ramp round...

Page 857: ...enze setting 1 16 4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00187 Current AutoFailReset processes Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24388d 5F44h Data of the current number of AutoFailReset procedures AutoFailReset function Display range min value unit max value 0 16 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Na...

Page 858: ...e access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00190 L_NSet_1 Setpoint arithmetic Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24385d 5F41h The L_NSet_1 FB Selection of arithmetics To be able to influence the main setpoint NSet by an additional setpoint NAdd Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 Out Set 1 Out Set Add 2 NOut NSet NAdd 3 NOut NSet NAdd 100 4 NOut NSet 1 NAdd 5 Ou...

Page 859: ... 24382d 5F3Eh From version 12 00 00 Logbook read interface Display range min value unit max value 0 2147483647 Subcodes Info C00193 1 Response index C00193 2 Activity C00193 3 Counter C00193 4 Error type C00193 5 Error number C00193 6 Time stamp Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00199 Description data Data type VISIBLE_STRING Index 24376d 5...

Page 860: ...irmware type power section C00201 5 Firmware version power sect C00201 6 Firmw comp file power sect Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Character length 22 Parameter Name C00203 Product type code Data type VISIBLE_STRING Index 24372d 5F34h Display of the types of the individual device components Subcodes Info C00203 1 Type Control card C00203 2 Type Power section C00203 3 Ty...

Page 861: ...ata type VISIBLE_STRING Index 24369d 5F31h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00210 HW version Data type VISIBLE_STRING Index 24365d 5F2Dh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00219 Identity Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24356d 5F24h From version 12 00 00 Display range min value ...

Page 862: ... setting 0 1 500 0 1 0 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00223 L_PCTRL_1 Tn Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24352d 5F20h The L_PCTRL_1 FB Reset time Tn for the PID process controller Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 20 ms 6000 400 ms Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name ...

Page 863: ...Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 000 s 999 999 0 010 s Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C00228 L_PCTRL_1 Deceleration time Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24347d 5F1Bh The L_PCTRL_1 FB Deceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 000 s 999 99...

Page 864: ...g range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 250 00 5 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00235 Oscillation damping filter time Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24340d 5F14h Oscillation damping Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 2 ms 250 32 ms Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 ...

Page 865: ... values The arriving nNSet_a setpoint is additively linked to the value output by the PID element 5 nNSet nSet_PID nSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values The setpoint nNSet_a is output at the output nOut_a The PID output value is output at the output nPIDOut_a Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00243 L_PCTRL_1 Acceleration time influ...

Page 866: ... value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 100 00 2 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00249 L_PT1_1 Time constant Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24326d 5F06h FB L_PT1_1 Time constant Tn Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 ms 5000 2000 ms Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter...

Page 867: ...s Bit 0 bit 13 are evaluated 3 13 bits Bit 0 bit 12 are evaluated 4 12 bits Bit 0 bit 11 are evaluated 5 11 Bit Bit 0 bit 10 are evaluated 6 10 Bit Bit 0 bit 9 are evaluated 7 9 Bit Bit 0 bit 8 are evaluated Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00254 Kp position controller Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24321d 5F01h Gain for following error compe...

Page 868: ... MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00273 Moment of inertia motor Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24302d 5EEEh Moment of inertia for setpoint feedforward control at servo control SC and sensorless vector control SLVC Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 kg cm 2 6000000 00 0 00 kg cm 2 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C0...

Page 869: ...d weakening control at servo control SC Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 1 ms 1000 25 ms Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00290 RCOM error counter Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24285d 5EDDh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00291 Error type RCOM Data type UNSI...

Page 870: ...to by the user Parameter Name C00305 Password2 Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24270d 5ECEh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00306 Debug address Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24269d 5ECDh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00307 Debug value Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24268d 5ECC...

Page 871: ...r Name C00313 LS_DataAccess Activation Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24262d 5EC6h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00314 LS_DataAccess Address access Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24261d 5EC5h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00315 SystemFail Adr Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24...

Page 872: ...eter Name C00322 Transmission mode CAN TxPDOs Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24253d 5EBDh TPDO transmission type according to DS301 V4 02 The following transmission modes are supported 0 Synchronous and acyclic 1 240 Synchronous and cyclic 252 Synchronous RTR only 253 Asynchronous RTR only 254 Asynchronous manufacturer specific 255 Asynchronous device profile specific The basic setting for all PDOs is...

Page 873: ... 254 Transmission mode CAN4 IN From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00324 CAN transmission blocking time Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24251d 5EBBh From version 06 00 00 Blocking time for the transmission of the emergency telegram and the process data Note If the Asynchronous manufacturer specific device profile specific tr...

Page 874: ..._8 Index 24236d 5EACh The L_Arithmetik_2 FB Selection of internal arithmetics Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 nOut_a nIn1_a 1 nOut_a nIn1_a nIn2_a 2 nOut_a nIn1_a nIn2_a 3 nOut_a nIn1_a nIn2_a 100 4 nOut_a nIn1_a 1 nIn2_a 5 nOut_a nIn1_a 100 100 nIn2_a Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00341 CAN management error configuration...

Page 875: ...D_16 Index 24233d 5EA9h From version 04 00 00 Configuration defining the events that lead to a decoupling of the process data words Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs Setting range min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Info Bit 0 BusOff_MsgErr Bit 1 Warning Bit 2 NodeStopped Bit 3 HeartBeatEvent Bit 4 CAN1_In_Überw Bit 5 CAN2_In_Überw Bit 6 CAN3_In_Überw Bit 7 CA...

Page 876: ...343 9 0 LP_CanIn3 wIn1 DiscVal C00343 10 0 LP_CanIn3 wIn2 DiscVal C00343 11 0 LP_CanIn3 wIn3 DiscVal C00343 12 0 LP_CanIn3 wIn4 DiscVal C00343 13 0 LP_CanIn4 wIn1 DiscVal From version 15 00 00 C00343 14 0 LP_CanIn4 wIn2 DiscVal From version 15 00 00 C00343 15 0 LP_CanIn4 wIn3 DiscVal From version 15 00 00 C00343 16 0 LP_CanIn4 wIn4 DiscVal From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC ST...

Page 877: ...l From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00344 LP_CanOut decoupling value Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24231d 5EA7h Parameter Name C00345 CAN error status Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24230d 5EA6h CAN on board system bus Selection list read only 0 No Error 1 Warning ErrActive 2 Warning ErrPassive 3 Bus off 4 Reserved 5 Reserve...

Page 878: ...s 8 Bit 4 Node address 16 Bit 5 Node address 32 Bit 6 Node address 64 Bit 7 Baud rate 1 Bit 8 Baud rate 2 Bit 9 Baud rate 4 Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 DIP switch at 24V ON accepted Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00350 CAN node address Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24225d 5EA1h Setting of the node a...

Page 879: ...5E9Fh The drive starts as CAN master after mains switching if a value of 1 has been entered and saved here CAN on board system bus Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 slave 1 master Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00353 CAN IN OUT COBID source Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24222d 5E9Eh Identifier assignment procedure for the CANx ...

Page 880: ... C00354 2 0x00000181 COBID CAN1_OUT C00354 3 0x00000301 COBID CAN2_IN C00354 4 0x00000281 COBID CAN2_OUT C00354 5 0x00000401 COBID CAN3_IN C00354 6 0x00000381 COBID CAN3_OUT C00354 7 0x00000501 COBID CAN4_IN From version 15 00 00 C00354 8 0x00000481 COBID CAN4_OUT From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00355 Active COBID Data type UNSIGNED_...

Page 881: ...e C00356 5 0 ms CAN1_OUT cycle time C00356 6 0 ms CAN4_OUT cycle time From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00357 CAN monitoring times Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24218d 5E9Ah Mapping of the RPDO event time see DS301 V4 02 If a value unequal to 0 is entered the RPDO is not expected before the set time has expired If the RP...

Page 882: ...e C00359 CAN status Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24216d 5E98h CAN on board system bus Selection list read only 0 Operational 1 Pre Operat 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 BootUp 5 Stopped 6 Reserved 7 Reset Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00360 CAN telegram counter Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24215d 5E97h CAN on board system bus Display range min va...

Page 883: ...em bus Selection list read only 0 No Error 1 StuffError 2 FormError 3 AckError 4 Bit1Error 5 Bit0Error 6 CRCError 7 Reserved Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00366 Number of CAN SDO channels Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24209d 5E91h Functional change from version 05 01 00 onwards Selection of the number of active parameter data channels Up t...

Page 884: ... Lenze setting 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0080 decimal 128 Value is bit coded bit set Bit 0 COBID Bit0 Bit 1 COBID Bit1 Bit 2 COBID Bit2 Bit 3 COBID Bit3 Bit 4 COBID Bit4 Bit 5 COBID Bit5 Bit 6 COBID Bit6 Bit 7 COBID Bit7 Bit 8 COBID Bit8 Bit 9 COBID Bit9 Bit 10 COBID Bit10 Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM M...

Page 885: ...YNC Tx identifier Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24207d 5E8Fh Parameter Name C00369 CAN sync transmission cycle time Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24206d 5E8Eh Cycle during which the sync master is to transmit sync telegrams If 0 ms is set Lenze setting no sync telegrams are generated Mapping of the CANopen object I 1006 see DS301 V4 02 CAN on board system bus Setting range min value unit max value Len...

Page 886: ...Tx_Overflow C00372 4 CAN Rx_Overflow Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00381 CAN Heartbeat producer time Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24194d 5E82h Time interval for the transmission of the heartbeat telegram to the consumer s The heartbeat telegram is sent automatically as soon as a time 0 ms is set Mapping of the CANopen object I 1017 see D...

Page 887: ...27 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00387 1 0 CAN_Gateway Addr Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00400 LS_PulseGenerator Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24175d 5E6Fh Time setting of the pulse to be output by the SB LS_PulseGenerator Note The real length of the low or high level at the bSquareWave output is always 1 ms higher than set here in subcod...

Page 888: ...0401 5 0x0000 Inversion of LP_CanIn3 bIn1_B0 15 C00401 6 0x0000 Inversion of LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B0 15 C00401 7 0x0000 Inversion of LP_CanIn4 bIn1_B0 15 From version 15 00 00 C00401 8 0x0000 Inversion of LP_CanOut4 bOut1_B0 15 From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00407 LP_CanIn Mapping Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24168d 5E68h From version 12...

Page 889: ...ctor 1 Parameter Name C00409 LP_CanIn Mapping Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24166d 5E66h From version 02 00 00 Mapping for port blocks LP_CanIn1 4 These settings are ORed with the mapping settings for the double words in C00407 x CAN port block Setting range min value unit max value 0 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00409 1 0 LP_CanIn1 wCtrl MapVal C00409 2 0 LP_CanIn1 wIn2 MapVal C00409 3 0 LP_C...

Page 890: ...Name C00411 L_SignalMonitor_b Signal sources Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24164d 5E64h The L_SignalMonitor_b FB Selection of the signal sources Selection list See selection list digital signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00411 1 0 Not connected Signal source for output bOut1 C00411 2 0 Not connected Signal source for output bOut2 C00411 3 0 Not connected Signal source for output bOut3 C00411 4 0 ...

Page 891: ...output nOut4_a C00413 8 100 00 Gain for output nOut4_a Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00420 Number of encoder increments Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24155d 5E5Bh Indication of the encoder constant Encoder feedback system Setting range min value unit max value 1 Incr rev 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00420 1 128 incr rev FreqIn12 E...

Page 892: ...00 00 Encoder sample time for the digital input terminals when configured as frequency inputs Using DI1 6 and DI2 7 as frequency inputs Selection list 0 1 ms 1 2 ms 2 5 ms 3 10 ms 4 20 ms 5 50 ms 6 100 ms 7 200 ms 8 500 ms 9 1000 ms Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00425 1 3 10 ms FreqIn12 Encoder scanning time Only active with edge counting procedure C00496 3 C00425 2 3 10 ms FreqIn67 Encoder scannin...

Page 893: ...4 0 00 O2I Offset Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00436 OxU Voltage Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24139d 5E4Bh Display of the voltage at the analog outputs Analog terminals Display range min value unit max value 0 00 V 10 00 Subcodes Info C00436 1 O1U Voltage C00436 2 O2U Voltage Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT S...

Page 894: ...A Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00440 LS_AnalogIn1 PT1 time constant Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24135d 5E47h PT1 time constant S ramp time for the analog inputs Analog terminals Setting range min value unit max value 0 ms 1000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00440 1 10 ms PT1 rounding AnalogIn1 C00440 2 10 ms PT1 rounding AnalogIn2 Read...

Page 895: ...ing AnalogOut Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24134d 5E46h Parameter Name C00442 AOutx Decoupling value Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24133d 5E45h From version 04 00 00 Definition of the value the analog output terminals are to have in the decoupled state Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 100 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00442 1 0 00 AOu...

Page 896: ...it 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 CINH Subcodes Info C00443 1 DIx Terminal level C00443 2 DIx Output level Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00443 DIx Level Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24132d 5E44h Parameter Name C00444 DOx Level Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24131d 5E43h Bit co...

Page 897: ...vel Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00444 DOx Level Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24131d 5E43h Parameter Name C00445 FreqInxx_nOut_v Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24130d 5E42h From version 02 00 00 Display of the frequency input signals which are fed into the application Using DI1 6 and DI2 7 as frequency inputs Display range min value unit max value 32767 Inc...

Page 898: ...the digital output terminals Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range min hex value max hex value Lenze setting 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 decimal 0 Value is bit coded bit set Bit 0 SafeTorqueOff Bit 1 ReadyToSwitchOn Bit 2 SwitchedOn Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Trouble Bit 5 Fault Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Fail CAN_Management Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Energy s...

Page 899: ... COM MOT Parameter Name C00448 DigOut decoupling value Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24127d 5E3Fh Parameter Name C00449 FreqInxx_dnOut_p Data type INTEGER_32 Index 24126d 5E3Eh From version 06 00 00 Output of the encoder position of the DI1 DI2 frequency input Display range min value unit max value 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Subcodes Info C00449 1 FreqIn12_dnOut_p Read access Write access CINH PLC S...

Page 900: ...E35h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00459 SYS_Output table Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24116d 5E34h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00460 Reserved Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24115d 5E33h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user P...

Page 901: ...nze setting Info C00462 1 0 Remote Control mode C00462 2 0 Remote Monitoring counter Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00462 Remote Control Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24113d 5E31h Parameter Name C00463 Remote MCK control Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24112d 5E30h From version 06 00 00 This parameter serves to control the functions of the Mot...

Page 902: ...t 11 EnableSpeedOverride Bit 12 EnableAccOverride Bit 13 EnableSRampOverride Bit 14 PosTeachSetPos Bit 15 PosTeachActPos Bit 16 PosExecute Bit 17 PosFinishTarget Bit 18 PosDisableFollowProfile Bit 19 PosStop Bit 20 PosModeBit0 Bit 21 PosModeBit1 Bit 22 PosModeBit2 Bit 23 PosModeBit3 Bit 24 ProfileNo_Bit0 Bit 25 ProfileNo_Bit1 Bit 26 ProfileNo_Bit2 Bit 27 ProfileNo_Bit3 Bit 28 ProfileNo_Bit4 Bit 29...

Page 903: ...pad display to the welcome screen Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 Never show welcome screen 5 5 min 15 15 min 30 30 min 60 60 min Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00466 Keypad Default parameter Data type INTEGER_32 Index 24109d 5E2Dh Setting of the default parameter for the keypad Setting range min value unit max value Lenze...

Page 904: ...t at the same time 5 Activate quick stop and reset error From version 14 00 00 STOP key sets quick stop in the drive An error reset is carried out at the same time Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00470 LS_ParFree_b Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24105d 5E29h The LS_ParFree_b SB Setting of the signal level to be output Selection list 0 False 1...

Page 905: ...t nPar8_a C00472 9 0 00 Value for output nPar9_a C00472 10 0 00 Value for output nPar10_a C00472 11 0 00 Value for output nPar11_a C00472 12 0 00 Value for output nPar12_a C00472 13 0 00 Value for output nPar13_a C00472 14 0 00 Value for output nPar14_a C00472 15 0 00 Value for output nPar15_a C00472 16 0 00 Value for output nPar16_a Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scali...

Page 906: ...ccess Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10000 Parameter Name C00476 LS_ParFree_a_2 Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24099d 5E23h From version 11 00 00 SB LS_ParFree_a_2 Setting of the analog signals to be output Setting range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00476 1 0 00 Value for output nC476_1_a C00476 2 0 00 Value for output nC476_2_a C00...

Page 907: ... access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00478 LS_ParFree_v_2 Data type INTEGER_16 Index 24097d 5E21h From version 11 00 00 SB LS_ParFree_v_2 Setting of the speed signals to be output Setting range min value unit max value 32767 Incr ms 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00478 1 0 incr ms Values for output nC478_1_v nC478_8_v C00478 C00478 8 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP ...

Page 908: ...ad access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00481 LS_DisFree Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24094d 5E1Eh The LS_DisFree SB Display of the input values Display area min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Bit 0 Active Bit 15 Active Subcodes Info C00481 1 Input values wDis1 wDis8 C00481 C00481 8 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT...

Page 909: ...ternal process factors in application units Setting range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00484 1 0 00 Application unit 1 Offset C00484 2 0 00 Application unit 2 Offset C00484 3 0 00 Application unit 3 Offset C00484 4 0 00 Application unit 4 Offset Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00485 Application uni...

Page 910: ...00487 Application units Data type INTEGER_32 Index 24088d 5E18h From version 06 00 00 SB LS_DisFree_a Display of the input values in a configurable application unit Display of internal process factors in application units Display range min value unit max value 21474836 47 units 21474836 47 Subcodes Info C00487 1 Application units 1 C00487 2 Application units 2 C00487 3 Application units 3 C00487 4...

Page 911: ...SpeedSetValue_a 1 Sensor signal FreqIn12 Position encoder signal is fed via digital inputs DI1 and DI2 2 Encoder signal FreqIn67 Position encoder signal is fed via digital inputs DI6 and DI7 5 Encoder signal FreqIn1267 From version 15 00 00 Position encoder signal is fed via digital inputs DI1 DI2 and DI6 DI7 connection of 4 track HTL encoders 10 Encoder selection C495 or nVoltageAngleAct_a From v...

Page 912: ...res as a function of the speed recommended procedure 3 Edge counting procedure Simple edge counting procedure with adjustable scanning time C00425 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00497 Filter time constant Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24078d 5E0Eh From version 03 00 00 Encoder feedback system Setting range min value unit max value 0 0 ms 5...

Page 913: ..._ParReadWrite1 6 and LS_WriteParamList write read parameters cannot be read Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00506 1 0x0007 PW protection internal config Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfe...

Page 914: ...rter and memory module are only executed if both components have the same binding ID Device personalisation Subcodes Info C00507 1 Password protection all communication channels Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00507 Current password protection Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 24068d 5E04h Parameter Name C00508 PW protection config X6 DIAG Data type UNSIGNED_16...

Page 915: ...ex 24066d 5E02h From version 15 00 00 Configuration of the password protection for parameter access via CANopen interface X1 CAN on board Individual password protection for single communication channels Setting range min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Info Bit 0 Reserved Bit 1 Parameter write protection The CANopen interface X1 cannot be used to write into write read para...

Page 916: ... Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00510 1 0x0006 PW protection config MCI Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00516 Checksums Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 24059d 5DF...

Page 917: ...00016 Vmin boost C00517 15 22 000 C00022 Imax in motor mode C00517 16 120 000 C00120 Setting of motor overload I2xt C00517 17 87 000 C00087 Rated motor speed C00517 18 99 000 C00099 Display of firmware version C00517 19 200 000 C00200 Display of firmware product type C00517 20 0 000 User menu Entry 20 C00517 21 0 000 User menu Entry 21 C00517 22 0 000 User menu Entry 22 C00517 23 0 000 User menu E...

Page 918: ...re indication Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24014d 5DCEh Failure display of device fans and motor phases Selection list 0 No error 1 Error Subcodes Info C00561 1 Internal fan C00561 2 Heatsink fan C00561 3 Motor phase U From version 11 00 00 C00561 4 Motor phase V From version 11 00 00 C00561 5 Motor phase W From version 11 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling fact...

Page 919: ... of a fan failure Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00567 Resp to speed controller limited Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24008d 5DC8h Response if speed controller output is limited bLimSpeedCtrlOut TRUE Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Faul...

Page 920: ... torque at SC servo control and SLVC sensorless vector control C00570 4 0 No Reaction Response if field controller is limited Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00571 Resp to wrong controller setting Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 24004d 5DC4h From version 14 00 00 Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked...

Page 921: ... axis current setpoint precontrol for an early reduction of the field current In this way the acceleration behaviour can be improved in the field weakening range The entry refers to the slip of the asynchronous motor Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 600 200 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00577 SC Vp field weakening ...

Page 922: ...ing Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00580 1 0 No Reaction Resp to runtime exceedance Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00581 Resp to LS_SetError_x Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23994d 5DBAh Selection of the error responses for application error messages An application error message is tripped by a FALSE TRUE edge at the binary inputs bSetError1 4...

Page 923: ...verload Selection list Info 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00584 1 0 No Reaction Resp to current monitoring overload Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00585 Resp to motor overtemp PTC Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23990d 5DB6h Response to motor overtemperature The m...

Page 924: ...switching frequency C00018 Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00592 Resp to CAN bus connection Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23983d 5DAFh Configuration of monitoring of the CAN interface group 1 CAN on board system bus Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 T...

Page 925: ...ion Response if the monitoring time set in C00357 2 for the reception of the PDO CAN2_IN is exceeded C00593 3 0 No Reaction Response if the monitoring time set in C00357 3 for the reception of the PDO CAN3_IN is exceeded C00593 4 0 No Reaction Response if the monitoring time set in C00357 4 for the reception of the PDO CAN4_IN is exceeded From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STO...

Page 926: ... the position is beyond the negative software limit position C01229 2 C00595 5 5 Warning Response if following error limit 1 is exceeded C01215 1 C00595 6 5 Warning Response if following error limit 2 is exceeded C01215 2 C00595 7 3 TroubleQuickStop Response if the maximum travel distance display in C01213 1 is exceeded C00595 8 4 WarningLocked Response to start procedures with reference condition...

Page 927: ...x 23977d 5DA9h Configuration of monitoring of the analog inputs Analog terminals Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 5 Warning Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00598 1 3 TroubleQuickStop Response to open circuit at AIN1 if configured as 4 20 mA current loop C00598 2 3 TroubleQuickStop Response to open circuit at AIN2 when being configured as 4 20 mA current loop Read acce...

Page 928: ...unit max value 0 000 s 65 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00601 1 2 000 s Delay time for triggering the DC bus overvoltage error If a DC bus overvoltage occurs an error will not be triggered until the set delay time has elapsed Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C00602 Resp to earth fault Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23973d 5DA5h Response t...

Page 929: ..._8 Index 23969d 5DA1h Response when the motor load displayed in C00066 reaches the value 100 00 Motor overload monitoring I2xt Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00607 Resp to max freq feedb DIG12 67 Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23968d 5DA0h Response when the maximum ...

Page 930: ...ust not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00611 Bool connection table Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23964d 5D9Ch This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00612 32 bit connection table Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23963d 5D9Bh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00613 16 bit con...

Page 931: ...CanOut1 wOut3 CAN1 output Data word 3 C00620 5 0 Not connected LP_CanOut1 wOut4 CAN1 output Data word 4 C00620 6 0 Not connected LP_CanOut2 wOut1 CAN2 output Data word 1 C00620 7 0 Not connected LP_CanOut2 wOut2 CAN2 output Data word 2 C00620 8 0 Not connected LP_CanOut2 wOut3 CAN2 output Data word 3 C00620 9 0 Not connected LP_CanOut2 wOut4 CAN2 output Data word 4 C00620 10 0 Not connected LP_Can...

Page 932: ...ciOut wOut10 MCI output Data word 10 C00620 32 0 Not connected LP_MciOut wOut11 MCI output Data word 11 C00620 33 0 Not connected LP_MciOut wOut12 MCI output Data word 12 C00620 34 0 Not connected LP_MciOut wOut13 MCI output Data word 13 C00620 35 0 Not connected LP_MciOut wOut14 MCI output Data word 14 C00620 36 0 Not connected LP_MciOut wOut15 MCI output Data word 15 C00620 37 0 Not connected LP...

Page 933: ...quest 2 Value low word C00620 57 0 Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_3 wParIndex Read write request 3 Code C00620 58 0 Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_3 wParSubindex Read write request 3 Subcode C00620 59 0 Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_3 wInHWord Read write request 3 Value high word C00620 60 0 Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_3 wInLWord Read write request 3 Value low word C00620 61 0 Not connected LS_Par...

Page 934: ...93h Parameter Name C00621 System connection list Bool Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23954d 5D92h Connection parameters Binary inputs Selection of the binary output signals to be connected to the binary input signals The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the subcodes Non listed subcodes are reserved Selection list See selection list...

Page 935: ...bit 15 C00621 21 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_b bDis1 Display of digital signal 1 C00621 22 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_b bDis2 Display of digital signal 2 C00621 23 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_b bDis3 Display of digital signal 3 C00621 24 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_b bDis4 Display of digital signal 4 C00621 25 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_b bDis5 Display of digital signal 5 C00621 26 0 Not connected LS...

Page 936: ...connected LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B1 CAN3 output Data word 1 bit 1 C00621 47 0 Not connected LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B2 CAN3 output Data word 1 bit 2 C00621 48 0 Not connected LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B3 CAN3 output Data word 1 bit 3 C00621 49 0 Not connected LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B4 CAN3 output Data word 1 bit 4 C00621 50 0 Not connected LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B5 CAN3 output Data word 1 bit 5 C00621 51 0 Not connected LP_CanOut3...

Page 937: ... connected LP_MciOut bState_B10 MCI output Status word bit 10 C00621 72 0 Not connected LP_MciOut bState_B11 MCI output Status word bit 11 C00621 73 0 Not connected LP_MciOut bState_B12 MCI output Status word bit 12 C00621 74 0 Not connected LP_MciOut bState_B13 MCI output Status word bit 13 C00621 75 0 Not connected LP_MciOut bState_B14 MCI output Status word bit 14 C00621 76 0 Not connected LP_M...

Page 938: ...Input for tripping US04 User error 4 C00621 97 0 Not connected LS_DigitalInput bCountIn6_Reset Digital input 6 Reset counter C00621 98 0 Not connected LS_DigitalInput bCountIn6_LoadStartValue Digital input 6 Load counter starting value C00621 99 0 Not connected LS_DigitalOutput bOut2 Digital output 2 Input signal C00621 100 0 Not connected LS_DigitalOutput bOut3 Digital output 3 Input signal C0062...

Page 939: ...ting C00621 123 0 Not connected LS_WriteParamList bExecute Writing the parameter list Activate C00621 124 0 Not connected LS_WriteParamList bSelectWriteValue_1 Writing to parameter list Selection of value set 1 C00621 125 0 Not connected LS_WriteParamList bSelectWriteValue_2 Writing to parameter list Selection of value set 2 C00621 126 0 Not connected LS_CANManagement bResetNode Reset CAN node C00...

Page 940: ...input values selection 1 in retain memory C00621 166 0 Not connected LS_RetainData bSetRetain_2 Retain data Save input values selection 2 in retain memory C00621 167 0 Not connected LS_RetainData bSetRetain_3 Retain data Save input values selection 3 in retain memory C00621 168 0 Not connected LS_RetainData bLoadParams Retain data Set selected outputs retain values to parameter values C00621 169 0...

Page 941: ...fo C00622 1 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_p dnDis1_p Display of 32 bit signal 1 C00622 2 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_p dnDis2_p Display of 32 bit signal 2 C00622 3 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_p dnDis3_p Display of 32 bit signal 3 C00622 4 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_p dnDis4_p Display of 32 bit signal 4 C00622 5 0 Not connected LS_DisFree_p dnDis5_p Display of 32 bit signal 5 C00622 6 0 Not connected LS...

Page 942: ..._Limit_1 Max Limit C00630 3 199 99 L_Limit_2 Min Limit C00630 4 199 99 L_Limit_2 Max Limit Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00631 L_LimitPhi 1 3 Min Max Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23944d 5D88h Setting the limits Setting range min value unit max value 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00631 1 2147483647 incr L_LimitP...

Page 943: ...cking speed1 min C00633 2 0 00 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed2 min C00633 3 0 00 L_NSet_1 Blocking speed3 min Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00634 L_NSet_1 wState Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23941d 5D85h The L_NSet_1 FB Bit coded status display Display area min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Info Bit 0 No blocking zo...

Page 944: ...T Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00636 L_NSet_1 nMinLimit Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23939d 5D83h The L_NSet_1 FB Minimum speed setpoint for speed setpoint limitation Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 199 99 199 99 199 99 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00637 L_NSet_1 Output blocking zones Data type INTEGER_16 Ind...

Page 945: ... FB Display of the generated main speed setpoint at the output nNOut_a Display range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00643 Resp to PLI monitoring Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23932d 5D7Ch From version 11 00 00 Pole position identification without motion Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 3 TroubleQ...

Page 946: ...nfo 0 Inactive 1 15 bits Bit 0 bit 14 are evaluated 2 14 bits Bit 0 bit 13 are evaluated 3 13 bits Bit 0 bit 12 are evaluated 4 12 bits Bit 0 bit 11 are evaluated 5 11 Bit Bit 0 bit 10 are evaluated 6 10 Bit Bit 0 bit 9 are evaluated 7 9 Bit Bit 0 bit 8 are evaluated Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00653 1 0 Inactive Sensibility Setpoint feedforward control Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No t...

Page 947: ...nze setting Info C00660 1 0 00 Fixed value 0 15 C00660 C00660 16 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00661 L_FixSet_w_1 Fixed values Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23914d 5D6Ah From version 04 00 00 FB L_FixSet_w_1 Setting of the fixed values Setting range min value unit max value 0 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00661 1 0 Fixed value 0 15...

Page 948: ...rameter Name C00672 L_OffsetGainP_3 Gain Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23903d 5D5Fh The L_OffsetGainP_3 FB Gain as multiplier of the input signal offset Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 100 0000 100 0000 1 0000 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10000 Parameter Name C00673 L_OffsetGainPhiP 1 2 Offset Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23902d 5D5Eh An...

Page 949: ...Offset Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00678 L_GainOffsetPhiP 1 2 Parameter Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23897d 5D59h Gain and offset Setting range min value unit max value 2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00678 1 65536 L_GainOffsetPhiP_1 Gain C00678 2 0 L_GainOffsetPhiP_1 Offset C00678 3 65536 L_GainOffsetPhiP_2 Gain C0...

Page 950: ...23894d 5D56h The L_Compare_1 FB Hysteresis for the comparison function selected in C00680 Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 100 00 0 50 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00682 L_Compare_1 Window Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23893d 5D55h The L_Compare_1 FB Window for the comparison function selected in C00680 Setting ...

Page 951: ...transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00690 L_Compare_3 Function Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23885d 5D4Dh The L_Compare_3 FB Comparison operation If the statement of the selected comparison operation is true the binary bOut output will be set to TRUE Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 1 In1 In2 2 In1 In2 3 In1 In2 4 In1 In2 5 In1 In2 6 In1 In2 Read access Write access CINH P...

Page 952: ...Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23881d 5D49h Hysteresis for the comparison operation selected in C00693 Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 100 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00694 1 0 00 L_Compare_4 Hysteresis C00694 2 0 00 L_Compare_5 Hysteresis Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00695 L_Compare 4 5 Window Data type INTEGER_16 Index ...

Page 953: ...alue unit max value 32767 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00699 1 0 L_MulDiv_1 Numerator C00699 2 10000 L_MulDiv_1 Denominator Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00700 LA_NCtrl Analog connection list Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23875d 5D43h Connection parameters for Actuating drive speed application 16 bit inputs Selection of the 16 bit o...

Page 954: ...eration analog signal 1 C00700 15 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl nGPCompareIn2_a Input for comparison operation analog signal 2 C00700 16 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl nVoltageAdd_a Input for additive voltage boost C00700 17 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl nPIDInfluence_a Input for influence signal of PID controller correcting variable C00700 18 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl nPIDSetValue_a Input for PID controller setpo...

Page 955: ... speed ramp function generator C00701 6 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl bRFG_0 Control input for setting the speed ramp function generator to 0 C00701 7 0 Not connected Reserved C00701 8 16003 LS_DigitalInput bIn4 LA_NCtrl bSetSpeedCcw Control input for change of direction of rotation C00701 9 16000 LS_DigitalInput bIn1 LA_NCtrl bJogSpeed1 Selection input for fixed setpoints C00701 10 16001 LS_DigitalInp...

Page 956: ... 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl bGPDFlipFlopInClr Control input for DFlipFlop reset signal C00701 31 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl bMPotEnable Control input for activation of motor potentiometer C00701 32 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp Control input for activation of influence of output correcting variable of PID controller C00701 33 0 Not connected LA_NCtrl bPIDIOff Control input for deact...

Page 957: ...Pos Analog connection list Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23865d 5D39h Connection parameters for Table positioning application 16 bit inputs Selection of the 16 bit output signals to be connected to the 16 bit input signals The selection list contains all 16 bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16 bit inputs displayed by the subcodes Selection list See selection list analog signals Subcode...

Page 958: ...nalog signal 2 C00710 19 0 Not connected LA_TabPos wGPCounter1LdVal Input for load value for counter module 1 C00710 20 0 Not connected LA_TabPos wGPCounter1CmpVal Input for comparison value for counter module 1 C00710 21 0 Not connected LA_TabPos nSpeedOverride_a Input for speed override C00710 22 0 Not connected LA_TabPos nAccOverride_a Input for acceleration override C00710 23 0 Not connected L...

Page 959: ...0711 7 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bMPotEnable Control input for activation of motor potentiometer C00711 8 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bMPotUp Control input for motor potentiometer ramp up C00711 9 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bMPotDown Control input for motor potentiometer ramp down C00711 10 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bMBrakeRelease Control input for manual holding brake release request C00711 11 0 Not...

Page 960: ...ion by ramp down procedure C00711 30 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bGPAnalogSwitchSet Control input for analog value selector change over C00711 31 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bGPDigitalDelayIn Input for digital signal with time delay C00711 32 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bGPLogicIn1 Input signal 1 for digital logic C00711 33 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bGPLogicIn2 Input signal 2 for digital logic C00711 34...

Page 961: ... 52 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bFreeIn4 Input for binary user signal 4 C00711 53 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bFreeIn5 Input for binary user signal 5 C00711 54 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bFreeIn6 Input for binary user signal 6 C00711 55 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bFreeIn7 Input for binary user signal 7 C00711 56 0 Not connected LA_TabPos bFreeIn8 Input for binary user signal 8 Read access Write access C...

Page 962: ...x 23858d 5D32h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00720 L_DigitalDelay_1 Delay Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 23855d 5D2Fh Switch on off delay time Setting range min value unit max value 0 000 s 3600 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00720 1 0 000 s L_DigitalDelay_1 ON delay C00720 2 0 000 s L_DigitalDelay_1 OFF delay Read access Write acce...

Page 963: ...r drive optimised 5 2 kHz constant drive optimised 6 4 kHz constant drive optimised 7 8 kHz constant drive optimised 8 16 kHz constant drive optimised 11 4 kHz var min Pv 12 8 kHz var min Pv 13 16 kHz var min Pv 14 Reserved 15 2 kHz constant min Pv 16 4 kHz constant min Pv 17 8 kHz constant min Pv 18 16 kHz constant min Pv 21 8 kHz var drive opt 4 kHz min 22 16 kHz var drive opt 4 kHz min 23 16 kH...

Page 964: ...27h Selection of different setpoints when operating via keypad Setting range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00728 1 100 00 Torque limit in motor mode C00728 2 100 00 Torque limit in generator mode C00728 3 0 00 Setpoint speed 100 C00011 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00729 Remote Setpoint selection ...

Page 965: ...ameter Name C00736 Oscilloscope data type data width Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23839d 5D1Fh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00740 Oscilloscope offset variables Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 23835d 5D1Bh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00741 Oscilloscope trigger mode Dat...

Page 966: ...ndex 23826d 5D12h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00750 Select of MCTRL oscillos channels Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23825d 5D11h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00751 Oscilloscope data memory Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 23824d 5D10h This code is for device internal use...

Page 967: ...witchPos nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a Input for analog switch analog signal 1 C00760 11 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a Input for analog switch analog signal 2 C00760 12 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos nGPArithmetikIn1_a Input for arithmetic function analog signal 1 C00760 13 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos nGPArithmetikIn2_a Input for arithmetic function analog signal 2 C00760 14 0 Not connec...

Page 968: ...hange of direction of rotation C00761 7 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bRLQCw Control input for activation of CW rotation fail safe C00761 8 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bRLQCcw Control input for activation of CCW rotation fail safe C00761 9 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bJogCtrlInputSel1 Selection input 1 for binary coded selection of the switch off position 1 3 C00761 10 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPo...

Page 969: ...ut for digital signal with time delay C00761 29 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bGPLogicIn1 Input signal 1 for digital logic C00761 30 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bGPLogicIn2 Input signal 2 for digital logic C00761 31 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bGPLogicIn3 Input signal 3 for digital logic C00761 32 0 Not connected LA_SwitchPos bGPDFlipFlop_InD Control input for DFlipFlop setting signal C00761 33 0...

Page 970: ...GNED_16 Index 23810d 5D02h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00766 LA_SwitchPos_Out Digital signal list Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23809d 5D01h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C00767 LA_SwitchPos_Out phi signal list Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23808d 5D00h This code is fo...

Page 971: ...ccess Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00804 L_MPot_1 Inactive fct Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23771d 5CDBh The L_MPot_1 FB Selection of the response if the motor potentiometer is deactivated via input bInAct Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold Info 0 Retain value Keep output value 1 Deceleration to 0 Deceleration via ramp to 0 2 Deceleration...

Page 972: ...C00807 L_NLim_1 Max SkipFrq Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23768d 5CD8h FB L_NLim_1 Maximum blocking frequencies Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00807 1 0 00 Maximum blocking frequency for zone 1 C00807 2 0 00 Maximum blocking frequency for zone 2 C00807 3 0 00 Maximum blocking frequency for zone 3 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM M...

Page 973: ... Index 23765d 5CD5h FB L_NLim_2 Minimum skip frequencies Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00810 1 0 00 Minimum blocking frequency for zone 1 C00810 2 0 00 Minimum blocking frequency for zone 2 C00810 3 0 00 Minimum blocking frequency for zone 3 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00811 L_NLim_1...

Page 974: ...ransfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00812 L_NLim Current status Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23763d 5CD3h Parameter Name C00820 L_DigitalLogic_1 Function Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23755d 5CCBh The L_DigitalLogic_1 FB Selection of the internal logic function Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold Info 0 bOut 0 Constant value FALSE 1 bOut 1 Constant value TRUE 2 bOut bIn1 AND bIn2 AND bIn3 AND ope...

Page 975: ... bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 0 0 C00821 18 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 0 1 C00821 19 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 1 0 C00821 20 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 1 1 C00821 21 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 1 0 0 C00821 22 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 1 0 1 C00821 23 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 1 1 0 C00821 24 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1 ...

Page 976: ...ut2 bIn3 bIn1 1 1 0 C00823 16 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOut2 bIn3 bIn1 1 1 1 C00823 17 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 0 0 C00823 18 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 0 1 C00823 19 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 1 0 C00823 20 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 0 1 1 C00823 21 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOut3 bIn3 bIn1 1 0 0 C00823 22 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_2 bOu...

Page 977: ... 0 0 0 0 C00825 18 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 0 0 1 C00825 19 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 0 1 0 C00825 20 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 0 1 1 C00825 21 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 1 0 0 C00825 22 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 1 0 1 C00825 23 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 1 1 0 C00825 24 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_1 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 1 1 1...

Page 978: ... 1 0 C00827 12 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 0 1 0 1 1 C00827 13 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 0 1 1 0 0 C00827 14 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 0 1 1 0 1 C00827 15 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 0 1 1 1 0 C00827 16 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 0 1 1 1 1 C00827 17 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 0 0 0 C00827 18 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic5_2 bIn5 bIn1 1 0 0 0 1 C00...

Page 979: ...se 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00829 1 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3 bOut bIn3 bIn1 0 0 0 C00829 2 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3 bOut bIn3 bIn1 0 0 1 C00829 3 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3 bOut bIn3 bIn1 0 1 0 C00829 4 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3 bOut bIn3 bIn1 0 1 1 C00829 5 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3 bOut bIn3 bIn1 1 0 0 C00829 6 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3 bOut bIn3 bIn1 1 0 1 C00829 7 0 FALSE L_DigitalLogic_...

Page 980: ...Display range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Subcodes Info C00830 1 L_Absolut_1 nIn_a C00830 2 L_AddSub_1 nIn1_a C00830 3 L_AddSub_1 nIn2_a C00830 4 L_AddSub_1 nIn3_a C00830 5 L_OffsetGain_1 nIn_a C00830 6 L_OffsetGain_1 nOffset_a C00830 7 L_OffsetGain_1 nGain_a C00830 8 L_Negation_1 nIn_a C00830 9 L_GainOffset_1 nIn_a C00830 10 L_GainOffset_1 nGain_a C00830 11 L_GainOffset_1 nOffset_a C00...

Page 981: ...30 50 L_Arithmetik_2 nIn2_a C00830 53 L_GainOffset_2 nIn_a C00830 54 L_GainOffset_2 nGain_a C00830 55 L_GainOffset_2 nOffset_a C00830 56 L_OffsetGainP_1 nIn_a C00830 57 L_OffsetGainP_2 nIn_a C00830 58 L_OffsetGain_2 nIn_a C00830 59 L_OffsetGain_2 nOffset_a C00830 60 L_OffsetGain_2 nGain_a C00830 61 L_PCTRL_1 nAct_a C00830 62 L_PCTRL_1 nAdapt_a C00830 63 L_PCTRL_1 nSet_a C00830 64 L_PCTRL_1 nInflue...

Page 982: ...00830 97 MCTRL nSpeedSetValueInertia_a Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00830 16 bit inputs Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23745d 5CC1h Parameter Name C00831 16 bit inputs Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23744d 5CC0h Decimal hexadecimal bit coded display of 16 bit input values of various blocks Non listed subcodes are reserved Display area min h...

Page 983: ...ltageAdd_a C00831 32 MCTRL nPWMAngleOffset_a C00831 33 L_NSet_1 nCInhVal_a C00831 34 L_NSet_1 nNSet_a C00831 35 L_NSet_1 nSet_a C00831 36 L_NSet_1 nNAdd_a C00831 37 DCTRL wCANControl C00831 38 DCTRL wMCIControl C00831 39 L_NLim_1 nIn_a C00831 41 L_Compare_2 nIn1_a C00831 42 L_Compare_2 nIn2_a C00831 43 L_Compare_3 nIn1_a C00831 44 L_Compare_3 nIn2_a C00831 45 L_AnalogSwitch_2 nIn1_a C00831 46 L_An...

Page 984: ...SMCtrl C00831 80 L_OffsetGainP_3 nIn_a C00831 81 L_MPot_1 nIn_a C00831 82 L_MulDiv_1 nIn_a C00831 83 LS_DataAccess wIn1 Lenze internal C00831 84 LS_DataAccess wIn2 Lenze internal C00831 85 LS_DataAccess wIn3 Lenze internal C00831 86 LS_DataAccess wIn4 Lenze internal C00831 87 L_PT1_1 nIn_a C00831 88 MCTRL nSpeedHighLimit_a C00831 89 L_PCTRL_1 nNSet_a C00831 90 L_PCTRL_1 nISet_a C00831 91 L_Interpo...

Page 985: ... L_Compare_1 nIn2_a C00832 18 MCTRL nTorqueLimitAdapt_a C00832 20 MCTRL nPosCtrlPAdapt_a C00832 21 MCTRL nPosCtrlOutLimit_a C00832 22 MCTRL nSpeedSetValue_a C00832 23 MCTRL nSpeedLowLimit_a C00832 24 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlI_a C00832 25 MCTRL nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a C00832 26 MCTRL nBoost_a C00832 27 MCTRL nTorqueSetValue_a C00832 28 MCTRL nTorqueGenLimit_a C00832 29 MCTRL nTorqueMotLimit_a C00832 31 MCTRL nV...

Page 986: ...uence_a C00832 65 MCK nSpeedCtrlI_a C00832 66 MCK nPWMAngleOffset_a C00832 68 MCK nMBrakeAddValue_a C00832 69 MCK nTorqueSetValue_a C00832 70 MCK nTorqueLimitAdapt_a C00832 71 MCK nSRampOverride_a C00832 72 MCK nSpeedSetValue_a C00832 73 MCK wMotionCtrl2 C00832 74 MCK wMotionCtrl1 C00832 75 MCK nSpeedOverride_a C00832 76 MCK nAccOverride_a C00832 77 MCK nSpeedAdd_v C00832 78 MCK wAuxCtrl C00832 79...

Page 987: ...s Non listed subcodes are reserved Selection list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Info C00833 1 L_And_1 bIn1 C00833 2 L_And_1 bIn2 C00833 3 L_And_1 bIn3 C00833 4 L_DFlipFlop_1 bD C00833 5 L_DFlipFlop_1 bClk C00833 6 L_DFlipFlop_1 bClr C00833 7 L_Not_1 bIn C00833 8 L_Or_1 bIn1 C00833 9 L_Or_1 bIn2 C00833 10 L_Or_1 bIn3 C00833 11 L_RLQ_1 bCw C00833 12 L_RLQ_1 bCcw C00833 13 L_AnalogSwitch_1 bSet C00833 14 L...

Page 988: ...ree_1 C00833 46 DCTRL bFree_2 C00833 47 DCTRL bFree_3 C00833 48 DCTRL bFree_4 C00833 49 L_And_2 bIn1 C00833 50 L_And_2 bIn2 C00833 51 L_And_2 bIn3 C00833 52 L_And_3 bIn1 C00833 53 L_And_3 bIn2 C00833 54 L_And_3 bIn3 C00833 55 L_Or_2 bIn1 C00833 56 L_Or_2 bIn2 C00833 57 L_Or_2 bIn3 C00833 58 L_Or_3 bIn1 C00833 59 L_Or_3 bIn2 C00833 60 L_Or_3 bIn3 C00833 61 L_Not_2 bIn C00833 62 L_Not_3 bIn C00833 6...

Page 989: ...00833 93 L_Transient_1 bIn C00833 94 L_Transient_2 bIn C00833 95 L_Transient_3 bIn C00833 96 L_Transient_4 bIn C00833 98 MCTRL bTorqueLimitAdaptOn C00833 99 L_NSet_1 bNAddInv C00833 100 L_MPot_1 bEnable C00833 101 L_NLim_1 bEnable C00833 102 LS_DataAccess bEnableIn1 Lenze internal C00833 103 LS_DataAccess bEnableIn2 Lenze internal C00833 104 LS_DataAccess bEnableIn3 Lenze internal C00833 105 LS_Da...

Page 990: ... transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00833 Binary inputs Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23742d 5CBEh Parameter Name C00834 32 bit inputs incr Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23741d 5CBDh Display in increments of 32 bit input values of various blocks Non listed subcodes are reserved Display range min value unit max value 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Subcodes Info C00834 1 MCK dnPosSetValue_p C00...

Page 991: ...9 L_Counter_3 wCmpVal C00835 20 L_PhaseIntK_1 nIn_v C00835 21 L_Negation_2 nIn_a C00835 22 L_NLim_2 nIn_a C00835 23 L_OffsetGain_3 nIn_a C00835 24 L_OffsetGain_3 nOffset_a C00835 25 L_OffsetGain_3 nGain_a C00835 26 L_PT1_2 nIn_a C00835 27 L_PT1_3 nIn_a C00835 28 L_PhaseIntK_2 nIn_v C00835 29 L_SampleHold_1 nIn_a C00835 30 L_SampleHold_2 nIn_a C00835 31 L_Mux_1 wInSelect C00835 32 L_GainOffset_3 nI...

Page 992: ...t_2 wInLWord C00835 61 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2 wInHWord C00835 62 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3 wInLWord C00835 63 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3 wInHWord C00835 64 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 wInLWord C00835 65 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 wInHWord C00835 66 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 wInLWord C00835 67 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 wInHWord C00835 68 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 wInLWord C00835 69 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 wInHWord C00835 70 L_Curve_1 nIn_a C00835 71 ...

Page 993: ...nIn_v C00835 106 L_PhiIntegrator_1 wGearNum C00835 107 L_PhiIntegrator_1 wGearDenom C00835 108 L_SwitchPoint_1 nActSpeed_v C00835 109 L_PhiIntegrator_1 nSpeedAdd_v C00835 110 L_DFSET_1 nSpeedTrim_v C00835 111 L_DFSET_1 nSpeedTrim_a C00835 112 L_DFSET_1 wGearNum C00835 113 L_DFSET_1 wGainNum C00835 114 L_DFSET_1 nSet_v C00835 115 L_DFSET_1 wGainDenom C00835 116 L_DFSET_1 wGearDenom C00835 117 L_DFS...

Page 994: ...t values of various blocks Non listed subcodes are reserved Display area min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Bit 0 Active Bit 15 Active Subcodes Info C00836 1 L_Absolut_2 nIn_a C00836 2 L_AnalogSwitch_4 nIn1_a C00836 3 L_AnalogSwitch_4 nIn2_a C00836 4 L_AnalogSwitch_5 nIn1_a C00836 5 L_AnalogSwitch_5 nIn2_a C00836 6 L_Compare_4 nIn1_a C00836 7 L_Compare_4 nIn2_a C00836 8 L...

Page 995: ...de C00836 46 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 wProfileNo C00836 47 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 wInMckPosCtrl_1 C00836 48 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 wInMckPosCtrl_2 C00836 49 L_MckStateInterface_1 wInMckPosState_1 C00836 50 L_MckStateInterface_1 wInMckPosState_2 C00836 51 L_PosiShaftCtrlInterface_1 wInPosiShaftCtrl_1 C00836 52 L_PosiShaftCtrlInterface_1 wInPosiShaftCtrl_2 C00836 53 L_PosiShaftCtrlInterface_1 wInPosiShaftCt...

Page 996: ...witch_1 wIn2 C00836 88 L_SignalSwitch_2 wIn2 C00836 89 L_SignalSwitch_3 wIn2 C00836 90 L_SignalSwitch_4 wIn2 C00836 91 L_Odometer_1 nInSpeed_v C00836 92 L_CalcDiameter_1 wDMax C00836 93 L_CalcDiameter_1 wDMin C00836 94 L_CalcDiameter_1 wVMax C00836 95 L_CalcDiameter_1 nVLine_a C00836 96 L_CalcDiameter_1 nMotorSpeedAct_v C00836 97 L_CalcDiameter_1 wGearNum C00836 98 L_CalcDiameter_1 wGearDenom C008...

Page 997: ...m C00836 129 L_ConvX_2 wDenom C00836 130 L_ConvX_3 nIn_a C00836 131 L_ConvX_3 nNum C00836 132 L_ConvX_3 wDenom C00836 133 L_ConvPP_1 nNum C00836 134 L_ConvPP_1 wDenom C00836 135 L_ConvPP_2 nNum C00836 136 L_ConvPP_2 wDenom C00836 137 L_ConvPP_3 nNum C00836 138 L_ConvPP_3 wDenom C00836 139 L_Curve_2 nIn_a C00836 140 L_Curve_3 nIn_a Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Paramete...

Page 998: ...ffset_a C00837 25 L_OffsetGain_3 nGain_a C00837 26 L_PT1_2 nIn_a C00837 27 L_PT1_3 nIn_a C00837 28 L_PhaseIntK_2 nIn_v C00837 29 L_SampleHold_1 nIn_a C00837 30 L_SampleHold_2 nIn_a C00837 31 L_Mux_1 wInSelect C00837 32 L_GainOffset_3 nIn_a C00837 33 L_GainOffset_3 nGain_a C00837 34 L_GainOffset_3 nOffset_a C00837 35 L_MulDiv_2 nIn_a C00837 36 L_DT1_1 nIn_a C00837 37 L_Counter_1 wLdVal C00837 38 L_...

Page 999: ...rd C00837 65 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 wInHWord C00837 66 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 wInLWord C00837 67 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 wInHWord C00837 68 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 wInLWord C00837 69 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 wInHWord C00837 70 L_Curve_1 nIn_a C00837 71 L_ConvW_1 wIn C00837 72 L_ConvW_2 wIn C00837 73 L_ConvW_3 wIn C00837 74 L_ConvW_4 wIn C00837 75 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 wPosSetHW C00837 76 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 wPosSetL...

Page 1000: ...837 109 L_PhiIntegrator_1 nSpeedAdd_v C00837 110 L_DFSET_1 nSpeedTrim_v C00837 111 L_DFSET_1 nSpeedTrim_a C00837 112 L_DFSET_1 wGearNum C00837 113 L_DFSET_1 wGainNum C00837 114 L_DFSET_1 nSet_v C00837 115 L_DFSET_1 wGainDenom C00837 116 L_DFSET_1 wGearDenom C00837 117 L_DFSET_1 nPositionTrimming C00837 118 L_DFSET_1 nNAct_v C00837 119 L_DFRFG_1 nIn_v C00837 120 L_GearComp_1 nTorque_a C00837 121 L_...

Page 1001: ...list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Info C00838 1 L_And5_1 bIn1 C00838 2 L_And5_1 bIn2 C00838 3 L_And5_1 bIn3 C00838 4 L_And5_1 bIn4 C00838 5 L_And5_1 bIn5 C00838 6 L_And5_2 bIn1 C00838 7 L_And5_2 bIn2 C00838 8 L_And5_2 bIn3 C00838 9 L_And5_2 bIn4 C00838 10 L_And5_2 bIn5 C00838 11 L_AnalogSwitch_4 bSet C00838 12 L_AnalogSwitch_5 bSet C00838 13 L_DFlipFlop_2 bD C00838 14 L_DFlipFlop_2 bClk C00838 15 L_DFl...

Page 1002: ...9 L_RSFlipFlop_1 bReset C00838 50 L_RSFlipFlop_2 bSet C00838 51 L_RSFlipFlop_2 bReset C00838 52 L_SampleHold_1 bLoad C00838 53 L_SampleHold_2 bLoad C00838 54 L_Counter_2 bClkUp C00838 55 L_Counter_2 bClkDown C00838 56 L_Counter_2 bLoad C00838 57 L_Counter_3 bClkUp C00838 58 L_Counter_3 bClkDown C00838 59 L_Counter_3 bLoad C00838 60 L_Transient_5 bIn C00838 61 L_Transient_6 bIn C00838 62 L_Transien...

Page 1003: ...it9 C00838 93 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 bBit10 C00838 94 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 bBit11 C00838 95 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 bBit12 C00838 96 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 bBit13 C00838 97 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 bBit14 C00838 98 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 bBit15 C00838 99 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 bBit0 C00838 100 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 bBit1 C00838 101 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 bBit2 C00838 102 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 bBit3 C00838 103 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 bBit4 C...

Page 1004: ...trlInterface_1 bProfileNo_4 C00838 134 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 bProfileNo_8 C00838 135 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 bOperationMode_1 C00838 136 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 bOperationMode_2 C00838 137 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 bOperationMode_4 C00838 138 L_MckCtrlInterface_1 bOperationMode_8 C00838 139 L_PhaseDiff_1 bEnable C00838 140 L_PhaseDiff_2 bEnable C00838 141 L_PhaseDiff_1 bReset C00838 142 L_PhaseDiff_2 bReset C...

Page 1005: ...osCtrlLin_1 bPosMode C00838 178 L_PosCtrlLin_1 bEnable C00838 179 L_PosCtrlLin_2 bExecute C00838 180 L_PosCtrlLin_2 bSetPos0 C00838 181 L_PosCtrlLin_2 bPosMode C00838 182 L_PosCtrlLin_2 bEnable C00838 183 L_SwitchPoint_1 bDisable C00838 184 L_DFSET_1 bZeroPulse C00838 185 L_DFSET_1 bSetTPReceived C00838 186 L_DFSET_1 bActTPReceived C00838 187 L_DFSET_1 bSetActIntegrator C00838 188 L_DFSET_1 bReset...

Page 1006: ...ComparePhi_4 dnIn2_p C00839 9 L_ComparePhi_5 dnIn1_p C00839 10 L_ComparePhi_5 dnIn2_p C00839 11 L_ArithmetikPhi_1 dnIn1_p C00839 12 L_ArithmetikPhi_1 dnIn2_p C00839 13 L_ArithmetikPhi_2 dnIn1_p C00839 14 L_ArithmetikPhi_2 dnIn2_p C00839 15 L_ArithmetikPhi_3 dnIn1_p C00839 16 L_ArithmetikPhi_3 dnIn2_p C00839 17 L_GainOffsetPhiP_1 dnIn_p C00839 18 L_GainOffsetPhiP_2 dnIn_p C00839 19 L_LimitPhi_1 dnI...

Page 1007: ...dPoint_Size1_p C00839 54 L_SwitchPoint_1 dnSwitchPoint2_p C00839 55 L_SwitchPoint_1 dn2ndPoint_Size2_p C00839 56 L_SwitchPoint_1 dnSwitchPoint3_p C00839 57 L_SwitchPoint_1 dn2ndPoint_Size3_p C00839 58 L_SwitchPoint_1 dnSwitchPoint4_p C00839 59 L_SwitchPoint_1 dn2ndPoint_Size4_p C00839 60 L_DFSET_1 dnSetTPPos_p C00839 61 L_DFSET_1 dnActTPPos_p C00839 62 L_DFSET_1 dnPosOffset C00839 63 L_DFRFG_1 dnS...

Page 1008: ...00840 7 LP_CanOut2 wOut2 C00840 8 LP_CanOut2 wOut3 C00840 9 LP_CanOut2 wOut4 C00840 10 LP_CanOut3 wOut1 C00840 11 LP_CanOut3 wOut2 C00840 12 LP_CanOut3 wOut3 C00840 13 LP_CanOut3 wOut4 C00840 14 LS_DisFree_a nDis1_a C00840 15 LS_DisFree_a nDis2_a C00840 16 LS_DisFree_a nDis3_a C00840 17 LS_DisFree_a nDis4_a C00840 18 LS_DisFree wDis1 C00840 19 LS_DisFree wDis2 C00840 20 LS_DisFree wDis3 C00840 21 ...

Page 1009: ...arReadWrite_2 wInLWord C00840 57 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wParIndex C00840 58 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wParSubindex C00840 59 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wInHWord C00840 60 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wInLWord C00840 61 LS_ParReadWrite_4 wParIndex C00840 62 LS_ParReadWrite_4 wParSubindex C00840 63 LS_ParReadWrite_4 wInHWord C00840 64 LS_ParReadWrite_4 wInLWord C00840 65 LS_ParReadWrite_5 wParIndex C00840 66 LS_ParReadWrite_5 wParS...

Page 1010: ...CanOut1 wOut2 C00841 4 LP_CanOut1 wOut3 C00841 5 LP_CanOut1 wOut4 C00841 6 LP_CanOut2 wOut1 C00841 7 LP_CanOut2 wOut2 C00841 8 LP_CanOut2 wOut3 C00841 9 LP_CanOut2 wOut4 C00841 10 LP_CanOut3 wOut1 C00841 11 LP_CanOut3 wOut2 C00841 12 LP_CanOut3 wOut3 C00841 13 LP_CanOut3 wOut4 C00841 14 LS_DisFree_a nDis1_a C00841 15 LS_DisFree_a nDis2_a C00841 16 LS_DisFree_a nDis3_a C00841 17 LS_DisFree_a nDis4_...

Page 1011: ...1 53 LS_ParReadWrite_2 wParIndex C00841 54 LS_ParReadWrite_2 wParSubindex C00841 55 LS_ParReadWrite_2 wInHWord C00841 56 LS_ParReadWrite_2 wInLWord C00841 57 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wParIndex C00841 58 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wParSubindex C00841 59 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wInHWord C00841 60 LS_ParReadWrite_3 wInLWord C00841 61 LS_ParReadWrite_4 wParIndex C00841 62 LS_ParReadWrite_4 wParSubindex C00841 63 LS_ParRead...

Page 1012: ... LS_DigitalOutput bOut1 C00843 3 LS_DigitalInput bCountIn1_Reset C00843 4 LS_DigitalInput bCountIn1_LoadStartValue C00843 5 LP_CanOut1 bState_B0 C00843 6 LP_CanOut1 bState_B1 C00843 7 LP_CanOut1 bState_B2 C00843 8 LP_CanOut1 bState_B3 C00843 9 LP_CanOut1 bState_B4 C00843 10 LP_CanOut1 bState_B5 C00843 11 LP_CanOut1 bState_B6 C00843 12 LP_CanOut1 bState_B7 C00843 13 LP_CanOut1 bState_B8 C00843 14 L...

Page 1013: ...3 48 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B3 C00843 49 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B4 C00843 50 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B5 C00843 51 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B6 C00843 52 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B7 C00843 53 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B8 C00843 54 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B9 C00843 55 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B10 C00843 56 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B11 C00843 57 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B12 C00843 58 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B13 C00843 59 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B14 C00843 60 LP_CanOut3 bOut1_B15 C00843 61...

Page 1014: ...Error2 C00843 95 LS_SetError_1 bSetError3 C00843 96 LS_SetError_1 bSetError4 C00843 97 LS_DigitalInput bCountIn6_Reset C00843 98 LS_DigitalInput bCountIn6_LoadStartValue C00843 99 LS_DigitalOutput bOut2 C00843 100 LS_DigitalOutput bOut3 C00843 101 LS_DigitalOutput bOut HighCurrent C00843 102 LS_DisFree_b bDis9 C00843 103 LS_DisFree_b bDis10 C00843 104 LS_DisFree_b bDis11 C00843 105 LS_DisFree_b bD...

Page 1015: ...obe bDisableTPDigIn4_Rising C00843 155 LS_TouchProbe bDisableTPDigIn4_Falling C00843 156 LS_TouchProbe bDisableTPDigIn5_Rising C00843 157 LS_TouchProbe bDisableTPDigIn5_Falling C00843 158 LS_TouchProbe bDisableTPDigIn3Window C00843 159 LS_TouchProbe bDisableTPDigIn4Window C00843 160 LS_TouchProbe bDisableTPDigIn5Window C00843 164 Reserved C00843 165 LS_RetainData bSetRetain_1 C00843 166 LS_RetainD...

Page 1016: ...47483647 Incr 2147483647 Subcodes Info C00844 1 LS_DisFree_p dnDis1_p C00844 2 LS_DisFree_p dnDis2_p C00844 3 LS_DisFree_p dnDis3_p C00844 4 LS_DisFree_p dnDis4_p C00844 5 LS_DisFree_p dnDis5_p C00844 6 LS_DisFree_p dnDis6_p C00844 7 LS_DisFree_p dnDis7_p C00844 8 LS_DisFree_p dnDis8_p C00844 9 LP_CanOut1 dnOut34_p C00844 10 LP_CanOut2 dnOut34_p C00844 11 LP_CanOut3 dnOut34_p C00844 12 LP_MciOut d...

Page 1017: ...C00866 9 LP_CanIn3 wIn1 C00866 10 LP_CanIn3 wIn2 C00866 11 LP_CanIn3 wIn3 C00866 12 LP_CanIn3 wIn4 C00866 13 LP_CanIn4 wIn1 From version 15 00 00 C00866 14 LP_CanIn4 wIn2 From version 15 00 00 C00866 15 LP_CanIn4 wIn3 From version 15 00 00 C00866 16 LP_CanIn4 wIn4 From version 15 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00866 CAN input words Data type UNSIGN...

Page 1018: ...ive Subcodes Info C00868 1 LP_CanOut1 wState C00868 2 LP_CanOut1 wOut2 C00868 3 LP_CanOut1 wOut3 C00868 4 LP_CanOut1 wOut4 C00868 5 LP_CanOut2 wOut1 C00868 6 LP_CanOut2 wOut2 C00868 7 LP_CanOut2 wOut3 C00868 8 LP_CanOut2 wOut4 C00868 9 LP_CanOut3 wOut1 C00868 10 LP_CanOut3 wOut2 C00868 11 LP_CanOut3 wOut3 C00868 12 LP_CanOut3 wOut4 C00868 13 LP_CanOut4 wOut1 From version 15 00 00 C00868 14 LP_CanO...

Page 1019: ...C00876 4 LP_MciIn wIn4 C00876 5 LP_MciIn wIn5 C00876 6 LP_MciIn wIn6 C00876 7 LP_MciIn wIn7 C00876 8 LP_MciIn wIn8 C00876 9 LP_MciIn wIn9 C00876 10 LP_MciIn wIn10 C00876 11 LP_MciIn wIn11 C00876 12 LP_MciIn wIn12 C00876 13 LP_MciIn wIn13 C00876 14 LP_MciIn wIn14 C00876 15 LP_MciIn wIn15 C00876 16 LP_MciIn wIn16 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00877 MCI ou...

Page 1020: ...ad access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C00877 MCI output words Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23698d 5C92h Parameter Name C00890 MCI_InOut Inversion Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23685d 5C85h From version 02 00 00 This parameter serves to invert the control status bits of the MCI port blocks Setting range min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Info...

Page 1021: ...ol types with the exception of the ones for synchronous motor The activation of this function does not affect the control types for synchronous motor since these control types require an in phase connection of the synchronous motor Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 not inverted 1 inverted Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00909...

Page 1022: ...ax value Lenze setting 0 50 mm 2 100 00 power related see table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00917 Motor cable resistance Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23658d 5C6Ah Display of the motor cable resistance of a motor cable phase The motor cable resistance is calculated from the motor cable length set in C00915 and the motor cable cross se...

Page 1023: ...e access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00920 Rated device currents Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23655d 5C67h Display range min value unit max value 0 0 A 6000 0 Subcodes Info C00920 1 Rated current 3ph 400V 1ph 230V C00920 2 Rated current 3ph 440V C00920 3 Rated current 3ph 480V C00920 4 Rated current 3ph 500V C00920 5 Increased rated current 3ph 400V 1ph 230V...

Page 1024: ...min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 0 A 3000 0 3000 0 A Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00940 L_ConvW numerator Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23635d 5C53h From version 04 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 32767 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00940 1 1 L_ConvW_1 Numerator C00940 2 1 L_ConvW_2 Numerator C00940 3 1 L_ConvW_...

Page 1025: ...version method Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00950 L_Interpolator_1 Activation FB functions Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23625d 5C49h From version 04 00 00 The L_Interpolator_1 FB Activation of signal interpolation and signal monitoring Selection list 0 Off 1 On Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00950 1 0 Off L_Interpolator_1 Signal interpolat...

Page 1026: ...orrection increments per cycle speed up Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 100 0 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00959 L_Curve Current output value Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23616d 5C40h From version 11 00 00 FB L_Curve_1 Display of the current output value nOut_a Display range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 S...

Page 1027: ...STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00963 L_Curve_1 Table X values Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23612d 5C3Ch From version 04 00 00 FB L_Curve_1 X values for characteristic function Setting range min value unit max value 32767 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00963 1 0 X values 1 32 for characteristic function C00963 C00963 32 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transf...

Page 1028: ...back The lower the selected time constant the higher the dynamic performance of the slip compensation Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 1 ms 6000 power related see table Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C00967 VFC Frequency interpol point n Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23608d 5C38h From version 04 00 00 Selection of the int...

Page 1029: ... VFC Voltage interpol point 4 C00968 5 80 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 5 C00968 6 0 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 6 C00968 7 80 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 7 C00968 8 160 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 8 C00968 9 240 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 9 C00968 10 320 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 10 C00968 11 400 00 V VFC Voltage interpol point 11 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No...

Page 1030: ...C STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00972 VFC Vp V f encoder Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23603d 5C33h Proportional gain of the slip regulator for V f control VFCplus encoder The gain must be selected depending on the drive system and the sensor resolution range 0 005 5 A high gain requires a high number of increments Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 ...

Page 1031: ...ge V f of the Cos Phi controller for energy saving V f characteristic control VFCplusEco Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 20 00 100 00 20 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00978 VFC ECO Voltage reduction Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23597d 5C2Dh From version 10 00 00 Display of the voltage reduction with energy saving...

Page 1032: ...PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C00981 Energy display Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23594d 5C2Ah From version 10 00 00 Display parameter for an energy analysis in the prevailing application From this decisions can be deduced whether a measure for energy optimisation is economic The values are saved to the device by switching off the mains and cannot be reset Display ra...

Page 1033: ... Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00986 SLVC Gain of cross current controller Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23589d 5C25h Gain of the IQ difference for the voltage model of the sensorless vector control SLVC Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 20 00 0 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling...

Page 1034: ...g factor 1 Parameter Name C00991 Flying restart fct Process Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23584d 5C20h Selection of the starting value and the speed search range for the flying restart function Flying restart fct Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold Info 0 0 n Start 10 Hz Search positive speed range 0 n with a start frequency of 10 Hz 1 n 0 Start 10 Hz Search negative speed range n 0 with a ...

Page 1035: ...rrent should amount to 10 25 of the rated motor current Flying restart fct Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 100 00 25 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C00995 SLPSM Controlled current setpoint Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23580d 5C1Ch From version 10 00 00 Sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM Setting r...

Page 1036: ...peed value Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C00999 SLPSM PLL gain Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23576d 5C18h From version 10 00 00 Sensorless control for synchronous motors SLPSM Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 1000 400 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01000 MCT...

Page 1037: ...ss CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C01000 MCTRL Status Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23575d 5C17h Parameter Name C01001 Manual entry of motor type Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23574d 5C16h From version 14 00 00 Selection list 0 Automatic 1 ASM 2 PSM Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01001 1 0 Automatic Manual entry of motor type Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Sc...

Page 1038: ...FB L_Odometer_1 If ring buffer is selected it is started again after the measurements set in C01020 and the old values are overwritten Otherwise the measurement stops Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 No ring buffer 1 Ring buffer Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01022 L_Odometer_1 Input selection Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 235...

Page 1039: ...aling factor 1 Parameter Name C01026 L_Curve_2 Input limitation Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23549d 5BFDh From version 11 00 00 FB L_Curve_2 Upper and lower limit for input value Setting range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01026 1 199 99 L_Curve_2 Max input C01026 2 199 99 L_Curve_2 Min input Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling fac...

Page 1040: ...er COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01030 L_Curve_3 Selected curve type Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23545d 5BF9h From version 11 00 00 FB L_Curve_3 Selected curve type Selection list Info 0 Out 0 1 Out In 2 Out f In 3 Out f table 4 Out f characteristic From version 12 00 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01030 1 1 Out In L_Curve_3 Function Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer CO...

Page 1041: ...4 L_Curve_3 Table Y values Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23541d 5BF5h From version 11 00 00 FB L_Curve_3 Y value for characteristic function Setting range min value unit max value 32767 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01034 1 0 Y values 1 32 for characteristic function C01034 C01034 32 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01035 L_Curve_3 Selec...

Page 1042: ...5BEEh From version 04 00 00 S ramp time for jerk free acceleration Setting range min value unit max value 0 001 s 50 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01041 1 0 200 s L_SRFG_1 S ramp time C01041 2 0 200 s L_SRFG_2 S ramp time Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01042 L_SRFG_1 2 limitations of output values Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23533d ...

Page 1043: ...on 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 0 31 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01046 1 1 L_ConvPA_1 Division factor C01046 2 1 L_ConvPA_2 Division factor C01046 3 1 L_ConvPA_3 Division factor Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01047 L_GearComp_1 Offset Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23528d 5BE8h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min valu...

Page 1044: ...v 1000 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01050 1 1 000 rev L_CalcDiameter_1 Diameter recalculation 0 C01050 2 0 100 rev L_CalcDiameter_1 Diameter recalculation 1 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01051 L_CalcDiameter_1 Filter time constant Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23524d 5BE4h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max valu...

Page 1045: ...54 L_ProcessCtrl_1 System deviation Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23521d 5BE1h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01054 1 100 00 L_ProcessCtrl_1 Gain of system deviation C01054 2 0 00 L_ProcessCtrl_1 Area of system deviation Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C01055 L_ProcessCt...

Page 1046: ... C01058 1 0 Deactivated L_PosCtrlLin_1 Limit stop C01058 2 0 Deactivated L_PosCtrlLin_2 Limit stop Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01059 L_PosCtrlLin 1 2 Positioning behaviour Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23516d 5BDCh From version 11 00 00 Selection list 0 dnOut_p 0 1 dnOut_p nOut_v follow dnAct_p 2 dnOut_p nOut_v follow dnSet_p 3 dnOut_p n...

Page 1047: ...n C01061 2 199 rpm L_PosCtrlLin_1 Return motion C01061 3 199 rpm L_PosCtrlLin_2 Forward motion C01061 4 199 rpm L_PosCtrlLin_2 Return motion Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01062 L_SwitchPoint_1 Dead time Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23513d 5BD9h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 0 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting In...

Page 1048: ...T Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01065 L_SwitchPoint_1 Running time Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23510d 5BD6h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 0 ms 60000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01065 1 0 ms L_SwitchPoint_1 Running time 1 C01065 2 0 ms L_SwitchPoint_1 Running time 2 C01065 3 0 ms L_SwitchPoint_1 Running time 3 C01065 4 0 ms L_SwitchPoint_1 Running time 4 Read acce...

Page 1049: ...t_v C01067 3 0 Not inverted L_CalcDiameter_1 Invert gearbox nMotorSpeedAct_v Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01068 L_SwitchPoint_1 Invert Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23507d 5BD3h From version 12 00 00 Setting range min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Info Bit 0 Invert Output1 Bit set inversion active Bit 1 Invert ...

Page 1050: ...factor 1 Parameter Name C01070 L_DFSET_1 Angular trimming Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23505d 5BD1h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 134217728 Incr 134217728 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01070 1 0 incr L_DFSET_1 Speed dependent angle adjustment Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01071 L_DFSET_1 Following error limit...

Page 1051: ...downstream polynomial 1 Angle correction with downstream polynomial Bit 2 External angle correction 0 Internal angle correction 1 External angle correction From version 13 00 00 Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01073 1 0x02 L_DFSET_1 Adjustment Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C01074 L_D...

Page 1052: ...FRFG_1 Times Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 23499d 5BCBh From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 0 000 s 999 900 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01076 1 1 000 s L_DFRFG_1 Acceleration and deceleration time C01076 2 0 000 s L_DFRFG_1 Deceleration time for quick stop Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01077 L_DFRFG_1 Max spee...

Page 1053: ...set Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01081 L_DFRFG_1 Sync direction TP function Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23494d 5BC6h From version 11 00 00 Selection list 1 cw ccw without TP 2 cw without TP 3 ccw without TP 4 cw ccw with TP 5 cw with TP 6 ccw with TP Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01081 1 1 cw ccw without TP L_DFRFG_1 Sync direction TP fu...

Page 1054: ...actor 1 Parameter Name C01084 LS_WriteParamList Error line Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23491d 5BC3h From version 04 00 00 Parameter change over Display of the number of list entry where the error occurred in connection with the value set selected via bSelectWriteValue_1 and bSelectWriteValue_2 Display range min value unit max value 0 32 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Sca...

Page 1055: ...value set 2 Parameter values for the parameters defined in C01085 1 32 C01087 C01087 32 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01088 LS_WriteParamList WriteValue_3 Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23487d 5BBFh From version 04 00 00 Parameter change over Parameter values value set 3 Setting range min value unit max value 2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes ...

Page 1056: ...arReadWrite_3 Index C01090 4 0 000 LS_ParReadWrite_4 Index C01090 5 0 000 LS_ParReadWrite_5 Index C01090 6 0 000 LS_ParReadWrite_6 Index Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01091 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Cycle time Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23484d 5BBCh From version 04 00 00 Time interval for cyclic reading writing Selection list 0 0 by Execu...

Page 1057: ...1092 4 LS_ParReadWrite_4 Error status C01092 5 LS_ParReadWrite_5 Error status C01092 6 LS_ParReadWrite_6 Error status Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01093 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Arithmetic mode Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23482d 5BBAh From version 06 00 00 The integrated arithmetic function allows for easy arithmetic conversion of the proces...

Page 1058: ...ite access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01095 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Denominator Data type INTEGER_16 Index 23480d 5BB8h From version 06 00 00 Arithmetic function Factor denominator for internal conversion in arithmetic modes 1 3 Setting range min value unit max value 1 32767 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01095 1 1 LS_ParReadWrite_1 Denominator C01095 2 1 LS_ParRe...

Page 1059: ...guration C01098 6 0x0000 LS_ParReadWrite_6 Configuration Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C01098 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Configuration Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23477d 5BB5h Parameter Name C01100 Function L_Counter 1 3 Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23475d 5BB3h Selection of reset function Selection list 0 Normal counting 1 Auto reset 2 Manual reset Subcodes Lenz...

Page 1060: ...23467d 5BABh From version 14 00 00 Selection list 1 1 μs 2 10 μs 3 100 μs 4 1000 μs Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01108 1 2 10 μs L_SwitchPoint_1 Deadtime factor 1 C01108 2 2 10 μs L_SwitchPoint_1 Deadtime factor 2 C01108 3 2 10 μs L_SwitchPoint_1 Deadtime factor 3 C01108 4 2 10 μs L_SwitchPoint_1 Deadtime factor 4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Paramete...

Page 1061: ...the internal system cycle with regard to the synchronisation signal bus cycle Since PDO processing is an inherent part of the system part of the application the instant of acceptance of the PDOs is postponed as well by a changed phase position With a setting 0 the system cycle starts simultaneously with the synchronisation signal With a setting 0 the internal system cycle starts earlier by the set...

Page 1062: ...determined empirically if required Synchronisation of the internal time base Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 1 100ns 2 200ns 3 300ns 4 400ns Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01130 LS_RetainData Selection Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23445d 5B95h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value...

Page 1063: ...aling factor 1 Parameter Name C01132 LS_RetainData 32Bit data Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23443d 5B93h From version 11 00 00 Setting range min value unit max value 2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01132 1 0 LS_RetainData dnInitValue1 C01132 2 0 LS_RetainData dnInitValue2 C01132 3 0 LS_RetainData dnInitValue3 C01132 4 0 LS_RetainData dnInitValue4 Read access Write access CINH PLC S...

Page 1064: ...R_32 Index 23440d 5B90h Setting range min value unit max value 2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01135 1 0 LS_RetainData dnValue1 C01135 2 0 LS_RetainData dnValue2 C01135 3 0 LS_RetainData dnValue3 C01135 4 0 LS_RetainData dnValue4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01136 LS_RetainData Bool data Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23...

Page 1065: ...in value unit max value 0 000 s 60 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01139 1 0 000 s L_Transient_1 Pulse duration C01139 2 0 000 s L_Transient_2 Pulse duration C01139 3 0 000 s L_Transient_3 Pulse duration C01139 4 0 000 s L_Transient_4 Pulse duration Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01140 L_Transient 5 8 Function Data type UNSIGNED_8 In...

Page 1066: ...t Load integrator when the comparison value C01151 is reached or with TRUE level at the bLoad input Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01150 1 0 Loading with level L_PhaseIntK_1 Function C01150 2 0 Loading with level L_PhaseIntK_2 Function Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01151 L_PhaseIntK Compare Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23424d 5B80h Comparis...

Page 1067: ...or as numerator denominator ratio with numerator motor speed and denominator position encoder speed Machine parameter Setting range min value unit max value 1 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01203 1 1 MCK iG Numerator motor speed C01203 2 1 MCK iG Denominator encoder speed Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01204 MCK Feed constant Data ty...

Page 1068: ...ion data of the Motion Control Kernel Display range min value unit max value 214748 3647 units 214748 3647 Subcodes Info C01210 1 MCK Feed Display of the current feed for positioning profiles as a relative distance C01210 2 MCK Set position Display of the current setpoint position calculated by the MCK C01210 3 MCK Actual position Display of the current actual position calculated by an optional en...

Page 1069: ...position limits Display range min value unit max value 2147480000 units 2147480000 Subcodes Info C01213 1 MCK Max traversing distance Display of the maximum distance to be traversed referred to the 32 bit display area max 2147483647 increments Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01215 MCK Following error Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23360d 5B40...

Page 1070: ...set the MCK control bit PosExecute Bit 5 Maximum jerk 1 The maximum jerk is calculated based on the acceleration and S ramp time of the current profile and the sequence profile This is then used in an accelerated drive for reducing the acceleration to 0 or for acceleration of the sequence profile From version 14 00 00 Setting or activation of maximum jerk for traversing profiles Bit 6 Reserved Bit...

Page 1071: ...Value is bit coded bit set Info Bit 0 Reserved Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 HW limit switch on 1 Travel range monitoring via hardware limit switch is active The error response can be parameterised in C00595 1 and C00595 2 Bit 3 SW limit switch on 1 Travel range monitoring via parameterised software limit positions is active The error response can be parameterised in C00595 3 and C00595 4 Bit 4 Reserved Bi...

Page 1072: ...d access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C01220 MCK Ref setting Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23355d 5B3Bh Parameter Name C01221 MCK Ref mode Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23354d 5B3Ah Selection of the homing mode Homing Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold Info 4 _Rp_ _TP Positive direction reversing on pre stop mark pos edge to touch probe From version 14 00 00 5...

Page 1073: ...lue unit max value Lenze setting 0 00 199 99 10 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C01223 MCK Ref waiting time mode 14 15 Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23352d 5B38h Blocking time for homing modes 14 and 15 homing towards positive stop The reference is set if an excess of the torque limit set in C01222 has been deteced over a time period de...

Page 1074: ...ata type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23349d 5B35h S ramp time for reference search homing Setting 0 s no rounding Homing Setting range min value unit max value 0 000 s 10 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01226 1 0 000 s MCK Ref S ramp time S ramp time for the starting and search speed ramps Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01227 MCK Ref positions...

Page 1075: ... must be higher than the negative software limit position Limit position monitoring Setting range min value unit max value 214748 3647 units 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01229 1 0 0000 units MCK Positive SW limit position positive travel range limit C01229 2 0 0000 units MCK Negative SW limit position negative travel range limit Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MO...

Page 1076: ...Manual jog Setting Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23345d 5B31h Parameter Name C01231 MCK Manual jog speeds Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23344d 5B30h Manual jog speeds Manual jog Setting range min value unit max value 214748 3647 units s 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01231 1 360 0000 units s Manual jog speed 1 Regular manual speed C01231 2 720 0000 units s Manual jog Speed 2 Second manual spee...

Page 1077: ...he drive stops at the parameterised positions if these are located in the manual jog direction and the approaching of the breakpoints is switched on in C01230 via bit 0 Manual jog Setting range min value unit max value 214748 3647 unit 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01234 1 0 0000 unit Manual jog Breakpoint 1 C01234 2 0 0000 unit Manual jog Breakpoint 2 C01234 3 0 0000 unit Manual jog Br...

Page 1078: ...nits s2 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01237 1 720 0000 units s2 Pos follower Sync accel Acceleration for ramp up to synchronisation speed C01237 2 720 0000 units s2 Pos follower Sync decel Deceleration for synchronisation speed ramp down to standstill to the setpoint position of the master Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10000 Parameter Name C01...

Page 1079: ...tsposition setpoint and actual position value to the home position at the MCK This function is independent of the operating modes Bit 10 HomResetPos Control bit for reset of home position 0 1 resets the information bit for the status Home position known home position not known The position displays are not influenced by this Bit 11 EnableSpeedOverride Control bit for activation of speed override 1...

Page 1080: ...e positioning mode control bit 1 Bit 22 PosModeBit2 Active positioning mode control bit 2 Bit 23 PosModeBit3 Active positioning mode control bit 3 Bit 24 ProfileNo_Bit0 Active positioning profile number control bit 0 Bit 25 ProfileNo_Bit1 Active positioning profile number control bit 1 Bit 26 ProfileNo_Bit2 Active positioning profile number control bit 2 Bit 27 ProfileNo_Bit3 Active positioning pr...

Page 1081: ...and is known in the drive Bit 14 Pos SW Limit Detected Status bit positive software limit detected 1 Positive software limit position overtravelled Bit 15 Neg SW Limit Detected Status bit negative software limit detected 1 Negative software limit position overtravelled Bit 16 DwellTime Status bit transient effects in target position active 1 Dwell time after reaching the setpoint position is activ...

Page 1082: ...mode Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23332d 5B24h Display of the active operating mode of the Motion Control Kernel Basic drive functions Selection list read only Info 0 Speed follower Drive traverses according to a preselected speed setpoint 1 Homing Drive finds its reference measuring system by setting the home position or homing 2 ManualJog Drive can be traversed manually via initiators e g for clea...

Page 1083: ...ta type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23331d 5B23h Parameter Name C01245 MCK Target detection positions Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23330d 5B22h From version 02 00 00 Position settings for various MCK functions Setting range min value unit max value 0 0000 units 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01245 1 1 0000 units MCK Window target position Window around the target position for comparison with the act...

Page 1084: ...aversing range is limited The software limit positions are set The reference is known There is no modulo measuring system available C01201 1 0 Note This status does not consider whether the software limit positions are activated or deactivated by the settings in the prevailing operating mode Bit 1 Traversing range Modulo 1 A modulo measuring system is available as a cycle length has been set in C0...

Page 1085: ...real value is higher Bit 15 Modulo buffer overflow Bit 16 Ck10 position cycle length Bit 17 Ck10 invalid speed Bit 18 Ck10 invalid acceleration Bit 19 Ck10 invalid deceleration Bit 20 Ck10 invalid final speed Bit 21 Ck10 reversal at overchange Bit 22 Ck10 distance calculation error Bit 23 Reserved Bit 24 Reserved Bit 25 Reserved Bit 26 Reserved Bit 27 Reserved Bit 28 Reserved Bit 29 Reserved Bit 3...

Page 1086: ...access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01248 MCK Ref step Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23327d 5B1Fh Parameter Name C01251 MCK Acceleration stop Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23324d 5B1Ch Acceleration parameter for stop Stop Setting range min value unit max value 214748 3647 units s2 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01251 1 720 0000 units s2 MCK Stop Decel Dece...

Page 1087: ...nvUnitsToIncr_1 PosCalcMode C01294 2 0 dnOut_p ConvWordsToDInt HW_L W L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 PosCalcMode C01294 3 0 dnOut_p ConvWordsToDInt HW_L W L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 PosCalcMode Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01295 L_MCKStateInterface_1 Pos selection Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23280d 5AF0h From version 04 00 00 Selection of the position to...

Page 1088: ...F 0x03 decimal 3 Value is bit coded bit set Info Bit 0 PosStop with PosExecute FALSE 1 Abort positioning with PosExecute PosExecute 0 stops a running positioning process by ramp down to standstill Bit 1 HomingStartStop with PosExecute 1 Start stop homing with PosExecute PosExecute 1 starts homing PosExecute 0 stops homing in the Homing mode Bit 2 SetProfilPosition with PosExecute 1 Teach set posit...

Page 1089: ...perating mode at profile no 0 Selection of the operating mode for profile 0 at L_MckCtrlInterface_1 C01298 2 2 Homing MCK operating mode at profile no 1 Selection of the operating mode for profile 1 at L_MckCtrlInterface_1 C01298 3 3 Manual jog MCK operating mode at profile no 2 Selection of the operating mode for profile 2 at L_MckCtrlInterface_1 C01298 4 4 Positioning MCK operating mode at profi...

Page 1090: ...ive positioning The profile position determines the distance to be traversed 4 absolute Cw From version 06 00 00 Clockwise absolute positioning The zero position of the axis can be exceed in this direction The profile position corresponds to the target position 5 absolute Ccw From version 06 00 00 Counter clockwise absolute positioning The zero position of the axis can be exceed in this direction ...

Page 1091: ...fo C01300 1 1 absolute beeline Profiles 1 15 Positioning mode C01300 C01300 15 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01300 Profile data Positioning mode Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23275d 5AEBh Parameter Name C01301 Profile data Position Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23274d 5AEAh Selection of the positions for profiles 1 15 Profile entry Setting ra...

Page 1092: ...ng factor 10000 Parameter Name C01304 Profile data Deceleration Data type INTEGER_32 Index 23271d 5AE7h Selection of the decelerations for profiles 1 15 Profile entry Setting range min value unit max value 214748 3647 unit s2 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01304 1 720 0000 unit s2 Profiles 1 15 Deceleration C01304 C01304 15 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scali...

Page 1093: ...ss Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C01307 Profile data Sequence profile Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23268d 5AE4h Selection of the sequence profile numbers for profiles 1 15 For profile linkage Profile entry Setting range min value unit max value 0 15 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01307 1 0 Profiles 1 15 Sequence profile C01307 C01307 15 Read access W...

Page 1094: ...me C01350 ACDrive Drive mode Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 23225d 5AB9h Selection list 1 Speed mode 3 Torque mode Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01350 1 1 Speed mode ACDrive Drive mode Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01351 ACDrive Control word Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23224d 5AB8h From version 13 00 00 Display of the AC Drive Profile contro...

Page 1095: ...ion 13 00 00 Display of the AC Drive Profile status word of the inverter Detailed information on the AC Drive Profile can be found in the EtherNet IP communication manual Actuating drive speed AC Drive Profile Display area min hex value max hex value 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit coded Info Bit 0 Faulted 0 No errors 1 Errors have occurred Bit 1 Warning 0 No warnings 1 Warnings have occurred Bit 2 Run...

Page 1096: ...01352 ACDrive Status word Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 23223d 5AB7h Parameter Name C01353 ACDrive Setpoint scaling Data type INTEGER_8 Index 23222d 5AB6h From version 13 00 00 Actuating drive speed AC Drive Profil Scaling of the speed and torque values Setting range min value unit max value 128 127 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01353 1 0 ACDrive Speed scaling C01353 2 0 ACDrive Torque scaling Read a...

Page 1097: ...the attached communication module C01501 2 0 No Reaction Resp to MCI invalid module Response to an unplugged or incompatible communication module Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01670 L_ComparePhi 1 5 Function Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22905d 5979h Selection of comparison operation If the statement of the selected comparison operation is...

Page 1098: ...T Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01672 L_ComparePhi 1 5 Window Data type INTEGER_32 Index 22903d 5977h Window for the comparison operation Setting range min value unit max value 0 Incr 1073741824 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C01672 1 0 incr L_ComparePhi_1 Window C01672 2 0 incr L_ComparePhi_2 Window C01672 3 0 incr L_ComparePhi_3 Window C01672 4 0 incr L_ComparePhi_4 Window C01672 5 0 incr L_Comp...

Page 1099: ...gy saving mode toff Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22873d 5959h From version 17 00 00 onwards Time required until entering the energy saving mode TtP Time to Pause If the quick stop energy saving function is to be used this time must always be set to a greater value than the maximum time required for braking via the quick stop function Setting range min value unit max value 0 s 65535 Subcodes Lenze s...

Page 1100: ...is cancelled when the Pause End command has been received Quick stop diagnostics with C00159 0 bit 9 Display Energy saving mode Bit 2 Dimming the LEDs Most of the LEDs of the inverter are switched off or their lightling intensity is reduced Only a few LEDs remain active in order to check the vitality of the inverter e g the DRV RDY LED Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Decoupling the IOs The digital output ter...

Page 1101: ...and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C01752 Service par inverter charact function Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22823d 5927h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C01755 Service par inverter charact factor Data type INTEGER_16 Index 22820d 5924h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user P...

Page 1102: ...be written to by the user Parameter Name C01772 BU Osc Trigger channel selection Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22803d 5913h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C01773 BU Osc Trigger command Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22802d 5912h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C01774 BU Osc Tri...

Page 1103: ...w baud rate determination at the diagnostic interface X6 Selection list Lenze setting printed in bold 0 Ignore changes 1 Negotiate baud rate Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C01905 Diagnostics X6 Current baud rate Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 22670d 588Eh Current baud rate at the diagnostic interface X6 Display range min value unit max value...

Page 1104: ..._val3 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02212 LS_WriteParamList VFC V f base frequency Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22363d 575Bh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 7 5 Hz 2600 0 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02212 1 50 0 Hz LS_WriteParam...

Page 1105: ...1 8 kHz var drive opt 4 kHz min 22 16 kHz var drive opt 4 kHz min 23 16 kHz var drive opt 8 kHz min 31 8 kHz var min Pv 4 kHz min 32 16 kHz var min Pv 4 kHz min 33 16 kHz var min Pv 8 kHz min Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02214 1 2 8 kHz var drive opt LS_WriteParamList c18_val1 C02214 2 2 8 kHz var drive opt LS_WriteParamList c18_val2 C02214 3 2 8 kHz var drive opt LS_WriteParamList c18_val3 C02214...

Page 1106: ... in motor mode Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22358d 5756h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 A 655 35 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02217 1 47 00 A LS_WriteParamList c22_val1 C02217 2 47 00 A LS_WriteParamList c22_val2 C02217 3 47 00 A LS_WriteParamList c22_val3 C02217 4 47 00 A LS_WritePar...

Page 1107: ...e min value unit max value 0 00 600 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02220 1 15 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s1_val1 C02220 2 15 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s1_val2 C02220 3 15 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s1_val3 C02220 4 15 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s1_val4 C02220 5 6 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s2_val1 C02220 6 6 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s2_val2 C02220 7 6 00 LS_WriteParamList c70_s2_val3 C02220 8 6 00 LS_Writ...

Page 1108: ...lues 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 ms 3 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02222 1 0 00 ms LS_WriteParamList c72_val1 C02222 2 0 00 ms LS_WriteParamList c72_val2 C02222 3 0 00 ms LS_WriteParamList c72_val3 C02222 4 0 00 ms LS_WriteParamList c72_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Param...

Page 1109: ... PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02225 LS_WriteParamList Vp current controller Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22350d 574Eh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 V A 500 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02225 1 7 00 V A LS_WriteParamList c75_val1 C02225 2 7 00 V A L...

Page 1110: ... for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 0 ms 6000 0 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02228 1 256 0 ms LS_WriteParamList c78_val1 C02228 2 256 0 ms LS_WriteParamList c78_val2 C02228 3 256 0 ms LS_WriteParamList c78_val3 C02228 4 256 0 ms LS_WriteParamList c78_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10 Parameter Name C02229 LS_...

Page 1111: ...st c80_val3 C02230 4 0 Hz LS_WriteParamList c80_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02231 LS_WriteParamList Rated motor power Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22344d 5748h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 kW 500 00 Subcodes Lenze ...

Page 1112: ...tor stator leakage inductance Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22341d 5745h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 mH 650 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02234 1 3 50 mH LS_WriteParamList c85_val1 C02234 2 3 50 mH LS_WriteParamList c85_val2 C02234 3 3 50 mH LS_WriteParamList c85_val3 C02234 4 3 5...

Page 1113: ...WriteParamList Rated motor frequency Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22337d 5741h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 1 Hz 1000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02238 1 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList c89_val1 C02238 2 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList c89_val2 C02238 3 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList c89_val3 C02238 4 50 Hz L...

Page 1114: ...ing inductance Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22334d 573Eh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 0 mH 6500 0 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02241 1 81 0 mH LS_WriteParamList c92_val1 C02241 2 81 0 mH LS_WriteParamList c92_val2 C02241 3 81 0 mH LS_WriteParamList c92_val3 C02241 4 81 0 mH LS_WritePar...

Page 1115: ...ng Hold time Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 22330d 573Ah From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 000 s 999 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02245 1 998 999 s LS_WriteParamList c107_val1 C02245 2 998 999 s LS_WriteParamList c107_val2 C02245 3 998 999 s LS_WriteParamList c107_val3 C02245 4 998 999 s ...

Page 1116: ...ParamList Filter time oscill damping Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22325d 5735h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 2 ms 250 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02250 1 32 ms LS_WriteParamList c235_val1 C02250 2 32 ms LS_WriteParamList c235_val2 C02250 3 32 ms LS_WriteParamList c235_val3 C02250 4 32 ms ...

Page 1117: ... 22319d 572Fh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 kg cm 2 6000000 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02256 1 0 00 kg cm 2 LS_WriteParamList c273_val1 C02256 2 0 00 kg cm 2 LS_WriteParamList c273_val2 C02256 3 0 00 kg cm 2 LS_WriteParamList c273_val3 C02256 4 0 00 kg cm 2 LS_WriteParamList c2...

Page 1118: ... controller Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22313d 5729h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 0000 2 0000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02262 1 0 0010 LS_WriteParamList c577_val1 C02262 2 0 0010 LS_WriteParamList c577_val2 C02262 3 0 0010 LS_WriteParamList c577_val3 C02262 4 0 0010 LS_WriteParamLi...

Page 1119: ... MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02272 LS_WriteParamList Motor phase direction of rotation Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22303d 571Fh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Selection list 0 not inverted 1 inverted Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02272 1 0 Not inverted LS_WriteParamList c905_val1 C02272 2 0 Not inverted LS_WriteParamLis...

Page 1120: ..._val2 C02274 3 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList c910_s1_val3 C02274 4 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList c910_s1_val4 C02274 5 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList c910_s2_val1 C02274 6 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList c910_s2_val2 C02274 7 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList c910_s2_val3 C02274 8 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList c910_s2_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02275 LS_Write...

Page 1121: ...LS_WriteParamList c938_val3 C02278 4 30 00 LS_WriteParamList c938_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C02279 LS_WriteParamList Ultimate motor current Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22296d 5718h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 0 A...

Page 1122: ...th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 Hz 100 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02284 1 10 00 Hz LS_WriteParamList c971_s1_val1 C02284 2 10 00 Hz LS_WriteParamList c971_s1_val2 C02284 3 10 00 Hz LS_WriteParamList c971_s1_val3 C02284 4 10 00 Hz LS_WriteParamList c971_s1_val4 C02284 5 100 00 Hz LS_WriteParamList c971_s2_val1 C02284 6 100 00 Hz LS_Write...

Page 1123: ...troller Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 22288d 5710h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 000 Hz Hz 64 000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02287 1 0 500 Hz Hz LS_WriteParamList c975_val1 C02287 2 0 500 Hz Hz LS_WriteParamList c975_val2 C02287 3 0 500 Hz Hz LS_WriteParamList c975_val3 C02287 4 0 500 ...

Page 1124: ...VFC ECO Voltage reduction ramp Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22285d 570Dh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 0 s 5 0 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02290 1 0 8 s LS_WriteParamList c982_val1 C02290 2 0 8 s LS_WriteParamList c982_val2 C02290 3 0 8 s LS_WriteParamList c982_val3 C02290 4 0 8 s LS_Wr...

Page 1125: ...rter motor brake nAdd Data type INTEGER_16 Index 22282d 570Ah From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 rpm 1000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02293 1 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList c987_val1 C02293 2 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList c987_val2 C02293 3 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList c987_val3 C02293 4 80 rpm LS_WriteP...

Page 1126: ...5707h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Selection list 0 0 n Start 10 Hz 1 n 0 Start 10 Hz 2 n n Start 10 Hz 3 n n Start 10 Hz 4 n n Start Cx992 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02296 1 2 n n Start 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList c991_val1 C02296 2 2 n n Start 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList c991_val2 C02296 3 2 n n Start 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList c99...

Page 1127: ...s Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 100 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02299 1 25 00 LS_WriteParamList c994_val1 C02299 2 25 00 LS_WriteParamList c994_val2 C02299 3 25 00 LS_WriteParamList c994_val3 C02299 4 25 00 LS_WriteParamList c994_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor ...

Page 1128: ...r time rotor position Data type INTEGER_16 Index 22273d 5701h From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Setting range min value unit max value 0 00 100 00 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02302 1 5 00 LS_WriteParamList c997_val1 C02302 2 5 00 LS_WriteParamList c997_val2 C02302 3 5 00 LS_WriteParamList c997_val3 C02302 4 5 00 LS_WriteParamLis...

Page 1129: ... 0 255 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02305 1 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s1_val1 C02305 2 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s1_val2 C02305 3 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s1_val3 C02305 4 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s1_val4 C02305 5 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s2_val1 C02305 6 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s2_val2 C02305 7 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s2_val3 C02305 8 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s2_val4 C0230...

Page 1130: ...eParamList c2853_s12_val1 C02305 46 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s12_val2 C02305 47 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s12_val3 C02305 48 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s12_val4 C02305 49 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s13_val1 C02305 50 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s13_val2 C02305 51 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s13_val3 C02305 52 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s13_val4 C02305 53 100 LS_WriteParamList c2853_s14_val...

Page 1131: ...7 LS_WriteParamList PSM Activate Ppp saturation char Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 22268d 56FCh From version 12 00 00 onwards Parameter values 1st value 4th value for optional motor data change over Selection list 0 Off 1 On Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02307 1 0 Off LS_WriteParamList c2859_val1 C02307 2 0 Off LS_WriteParamList c2859_val C02307 3 0 Off LS_WriteParamList c2859_val C02307 4 0 Off LS_Wr...

Page 1132: ...Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02312 1 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList c2874_s1_val1 C02312 2 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList c2874_s1_val2 C02312 3 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList c2874_s1_val3 C02312 4 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList c2874_s1_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT P...

Page 1133: ...matic 1 ASM 2 PSM Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02315 1 0 Automatic LS_WriteParamList c1001_s1_val1 C02315 2 0 Automatic LS_WriteParamList c1001_s1_val2 C02315 3 0 Automatic LS_WriteParamList c1001_s1_val3 C02315 4 0 Automatic LS_WriteParamList c1001_s1_val4 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02556 Position controller Limitation Data type INT...

Page 1134: ...e Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 21995d 55EBh Parameter Name C02581 Holding brake Speed thresholds Data type INTEGER_16 Index 21994d 55EAh Speed setpoint threshold and hysteresis for automatic holding brake control Holding brake control Setting range min value unit max value 199 99 199 99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02581 1 5 00 Holding brake Switching threshold Switching threshold of the speed setpo...

Page 1135: ...red Bit 3 Horizontal application Direction of movement of the axis 0 The axis performs vertical movements Gravitational acceleration causes movements 1 The direction of the axis is horizontal or rotary The gravitational acceleration does not cause any movement Bit 4 Feedforward control C2581 From version 06 00 00 Selection of the feedforward control value 0 Automatic selection The torque saved at ...

Page 1136: ...9 4 0 ms Holding brake Ramp time FF ctrl From version 06 00 00 Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02593 Holding brake Activation time Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 21982d 55DEh Time parameter for the delay of trigger signals of the holding brake control Holding brake control Setting range min value unit max value 0 000 s 3600 000 Subcodes Lenz...

Page 1137: ...or is active before the holding brake releases Bit 3 Closing active 1 The brake closing time C02589 1 expires Bit 4 Forced release active 1 In case of automatic operation of the holding brake control the brake is directly released via the MCK input bMBrakeRelease TRUE Bit 5 Release active 1 The brake release time C02589 2 expires Bit 6 Setpoint synchronisation active 1 A speed setpoint at the MCK ...

Page 1138: ...o transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1000 Parameter Name C02610 MCK Accel decel times Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 21965d 55CDh Parameter Name C02611 MCK Limitations Data type INTEGER_16 Index 21964d 55CCh Speed setpoint limits for the determination of limited validity ranges Note Traversing with setpoints through resulting blocking zones is executed with the ramp set in C02610 2 Speed Min Max Setting...

Page 1139: ... version 12 00 00 Status bit HomPosAvailable Bit 2 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C02810 TP Edge selection Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 21765d 5505h ...

Page 1140: ...ion offset Data type INTEGER_32 Index 21763d 5503h From version 06 00 00 Touch probe detection Setting range min value unit max value 214748 3647 units 214748 3647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02812 1 0 0000 units Reserved C02812 2 0 0000 units Reserved C02812 3 0 0000 units TPDigIn3 Pos offset C02812 4 0 0000 units TPDigIn4 Pos offset C02812 5 0 0000 units TPDigIn5 Pos offset C02812 6 0 0000 unit...

Page 1141: ...0 Position encoder actual value 1 Pos DigIn1 2 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02815 1 0 Position encoder actual value Reserved C02815 2 0 Position encoder actual value Reserved C02815 3 0 Position encoder actual value TPDigIn3 Position source C02815 4 0 Position encoder actual value TPDigIn4 Position source C02815 5 0 Position encoder actual value TPDigIn5 Position source C02815 6 0 Position encoder...

Page 1142: ...h From version 06 00 00 Touch probe detection Display range min value unit max value 214748 3647 units 214748 3647 Subcodes Info C02817 1 Reserved C02817 2 Reserved C02817 3 TPDigIn3 TP position C02817 4 TPDigIn4 TP position C02817 5 TPDigIn5 TP position C02817 6 TPDigIn6 TP position C02817 7 TPDigIn7 TP position Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 10000 Param...

Page 1143: ...ms 8 2 00 ms 10 2 50 ms 12 3 00 ms 14 3 50 ms 16 4 00 ms 18 4 50 ms 20 5 00 ms 22 5 50 ms 24 6 00 ms 28 7 00 ms 32 8 00 ms 36 9 00 ms 40 10 0 ms 44 11 0 ms 48 12 0 ms 52 13 0 ms 56 14 0 ms 64 16 0 ms 72 18 0 ms 80 20 0 ms 88 22 0 ms 96 24 0 ms 104 26 0 ms 112 28 0 ms 120 30 0 ms 128 32 0 ms Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02830 1 1 0 25 ms DI1 DI7 Debounce time C02830 C02830 7 Read access Write acces...

Page 1144: ... value Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02841 CountInx Counter content Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 21734d 54E6h From version 02 00 00 Display of the current counter content of the digital count inputs Use DI1 6 as counting input Display range min value unit max value 0 Incr 2147483647 Subcodes Info C02841 1 CountIn1 Counter content C02841 ...

Page 1145: ...uency input Selection list 0 Loading with level 1 Loading with edge 2 Loading with level reset Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02844 1 0 Loading with level FreqIn12 PosIn function Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02845 FreqIn12 PosIn comparison value Data type INTEGER_32 Index 21730d 54E2h From version 06 00 00 Output of the encoder position ...

Page 1146: ...OT Scaling factor 1 Parameter Name C02853 PSM Lss saturation characteristic Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 21722d 54DAh Parameter Name C02855 PSM Imax Lss saturation characteristic Data type UNSIGNED_16 Index 21720d 54D8h From version 10 00 00 Current dependent stator leakage inductance Lss I Setting range min value unit max value Lenze setting 0 0 A 3000 0 3000 0 A Read access Write access CINH PLC S...

Page 1147: ...must be set to 1 0 Calculate parameter 1 Do not calculate parameter Automatic motor data identification Bit 7 If C2879 Bit1 0 C087 is warm From version 15 00 00 the too high slip with the activated option Slip calculation from motor nameplate data can be corrected for the ASM servo control by setting bit 7 to 1 1 Rated motor speed C00087 is assumed for a warm machine Slip calculation for SC Bit 8 ...

Page 1148: ...ol SLVC or servo control SC are used in the torque control with speed limitation mode the torque limitation via nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a is also active to limit the torque setpoint If you want to deactivate the torque limitation to retain the former function set bit 0 to 1 0 Torque limitation is active 1 Torque limitation is not active Bit 1 250ms IMP before DCB Bit 2 1000ms IMP bef...

Page 1149: ...rter characteristics inactive From version 12 00 00 In case of very low inductance motors e g synchronous motor with a rated frequency of 1000 Hz the inverter errorcharacteristic needs to be switched off asotherwise the current of the device might be switched off 0 Inverter error characteristic is active 1 Inverter error characteristic is not active Bit 10 SCPSM Extrapolation actual speed value in...

Page 1150: ...entification procedure Data type UNSIGNED_8 Index 21708d 54CCh From version 10 00 00 Selection of the identification procedure for motor parameter identification Automatic motor parameter identification Selection list Info 0 automatic Automatic selection of the optimum identification procedure For synchronous motors the extended identification procedure is always used For asynchronous motors with ...

Page 1151: ...rsing extends the respective traversing process towards the target position Bit 2 xx 03 MCK Overchange opt 0 error CK10 occurs Traversing profile with final speed 0 needs a reversing process after reaching the target position Parameterised final speed in profile parameters cannot be reached at the target approach final speed too high Position target cannot be approached if the initial speed of the...

Page 1152: ...08 Reserved Bit 8 xx 09 Reserved Bit 9 xx 10 Reserved Bit 10 xx 11 Reserved Bit 11 xx 12 Reserved Bit 12 xx 13 Reserved Bit 13 xx 14 Reserved Bit 14 xx 15 Reserved Bit 15 xx 16 Reserved Bit 16 xx 17 Reserved Bit 17 xx 18 Reserved Bit 18 xx 19 Reserved Bit 19 xx 20 Reserved Bit 20 xx 21 Reserved Bit 21 xx 22 Reserved Bit 22 xx 23 Reserved Bit 23 xx 24 Reserved Bit 24 xx 25 Reserved Bit 25 xx 26 Res...

Page 1153: ...ntification without motion Display range min value unit max value 0 00 ms 300 00 Subcodes Info C02871 1 PLI without motion Running time Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor 100 Parameter Name C02872 PLI without motion Adaptation of time duration Data type INTEGER_8 Index 21703d 54C7h From version 11 00 00 Pole position identification without motion Setting rang...

Page 1154: ...served Bit 2 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02874 1 0x0001 PLI without motion Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Parameter Name C02875 PLI without motion Adaptation of ...

Page 1155: ...Bit 0 SLVC Slip calculation for SLVC Bit 1 SC ASM Slip calculation for SC Bit 2 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved Subcodes Lenze setting Info C02879 1 0x0000 Slip calculation from equivalent circuit diagram Read access Write...

Page 1156: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C02996 C02998 Parameter Name C02996 FB display InputOutput2 Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 21579d 544Bh This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user Parameter Name C02998 FB displayinputoutput3 Data type UNSIGNED_32 Index 21577d 5449h This code is for device internal use only and must not be written to by the user ...

Page 1157: ...d motor power kW 0 25 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 2 2 0 37 0 55 0 75 1 1 1 5 C00082 Motor rotor resistance mOhm 11460 5480 3860 2820 2060 1438 740 16442 11580 8454 6150 4320 C00084 Motor stator resistance mOhm 10533 7133 4500 3127 2420 1277 667 21400 13500 9380 7260 3830 C00085 Motor stator leakage inductance mH 20 94 17 29 11 72 7 48 4 77 3 62 2 37 51 88 35 15 22 45 14 27 10 85 C00087 Rated motor spee...

Page 1158: ...power kW 2 2 3 4 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 C00082 Motor rotor resistance mOhm 2220 1938 1262 842 642 276 186 168 130 111 36 29 C00084 Motor stator resistance mOhm 2000 1620 1040 730 470 330 230 190 150 85 51 35 C00085 Motor stator leakage inductance mH 8 5 7 1 5 55 3 49 4 05 3 5 2 75 2 1 9 0 9 0 74 0 53 C00087 Rated motor speed rpm 1440 1430 1450 1445 1455 1460 1460 1470 1456 1465 1483 1480 C...

Page 1159: ...1111 LA_TabPos wMckActOperationMode 1112 LA_TabPos wActProfileNo 1113 LA_TabPos wActPosMode 1114 LA_TabPos nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a 1115 LA_TabPos nGPArithmetikOut_a 1116 LA_TabPos nGPMulDivOut_a 1117 LA_TabPos nGPSignalOut1_a 1118 LA_TabPos nGPSignalOut2_a 1119 LA_TabPos nGPSignalOut3_a 1120 LA_TabPos nGPSignalOut4_a 1121 LA_TabPos wGPCounter1Out 1122 LA_TabPos wFreeOut1 1123 LA_TabPos wFreeOut2 1124...

Page 1160: ...1 LP_CanIn4 wIn2 16362 LP_CanIn4 wIn3 16363 LP_CanIn4 wIn4 20000 LS_ParFix nPos100_a 20001 LS_ParFix nNeg100_a 20002 LS_ParFix nPos199_99_a 20003 LS_ParFix nNeg199_99_a 20004 LS_ParFix w65535 Selection list analog signals 20005 LS_ParFix wDriveCtrl 20010 LS_ParFree_a nC472_1_a 20011 LS_ParFree_a nC472_2_a 20012 LS_ParFree_a nC472_3_a 20013 LS_ParFree_a nC472_4_a 20014 LS_ParFree_a nC472_5_a 20015 ...

Page 1161: ...6 20114 LS_ParFree_2 wC477_27 20115 LS_ParFree_2 wC477_28 20116 LS_ParFree_2 wC477_29 20117 LS_ParFree_2 wC477_30 20118 LS_ParFree_2 wC477_31 20119 LS_ParFree_2 wC477_32 20120 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_1_v 20121 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_2_v 20122 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_3_v 20123 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_4_v 20124 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_5_v 20125 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_6_v 20126 LS_ParFree_v_2 nC478_7_v 20127 LS_ParF...

Page 1162: ...36035 L_AnalogSwitch_4 nOut_a 36036 L_AnalogSwitch_5 nOut_a 36037 L_Arithmetik_3 nOut_a 36038 L_Arithmetik_4 nOut_a Selection list analog signals 36039 L_Arithmetik_5 nOut_a 36045 L_GainOffset_3 nOut_a 36053 L_MulDiv_2 nOut_a 36054 L_Negation_2 nOut_a 36055 L_NLim_2 nOut_a 36056 L_NLim_2 wState 36057 L_OffsetGain_3 nOut_a 36058 L_PT1_2 nOut_a 36059 L_PT1_3 nOut_a 36064 L_SampleHold_1 nOut_a 36065 ...

Page 1163: ...Curve_3 nCurveValue_a 36162 L_MFail_1 nNOut_a 42000 LA_NCtrl_In wCANDriveControl 42001 LA_NCtrl_In wMCIDriveControl 42002 LA_NCtrl_In nTorqueMotLim_a 42003 LA_NCtrl_In nTorqueGenLim_a 42004 LA_NCtrl_In nPIDVpAdapt_a 42005 LA_NCtrl_In nPIDActValue_a 42006 LA_NCtrl_In nMainSetValue_a 42007 LA_NCtrl_In nAuxSetValue_a 42008 LA_NCtrl_In nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a 42009 LA_NCtrl_In nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a 42010 ...

Page 1164: ...n wPosProfileUnitsLW 42128 LA_TabPos_In wPosProfileUnitsHW 42200 LA_SwitchPos_In wCANDriveControl 42201 LA_SwitchPos_In wMCIDriveControl 42202 LA_SwitchPos_In nVoltageAdd_a 42203 LA_SwitchPos_In nBoost_a 42204 LA_SwitchPos_In nPWMAngleOffset 42205 LA_SwitchPos_In nTorqueMotLim_a 42206 LA_SwitchPos_In nTorqueGenLim_a 42207 LA_SwitchPos_In nMainSetValue_a 42208 LA_SwitchPos_In nAuxSetValue_a 42209 L...

Page 1165: ...nhActive 1103 LA_TabPos bQSPIsActive 1104 LA_TabPos bSpeedCcw 1105 LA_TabPos bSpeedActCompare 1106 LA_TabPos bImaxActive 1107 LA_TabPos bSpeedSetReached 1108 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleaseOut 1109 LA_TabPos bMBrakeReleased 1110 LA_TabPos bHomeDone 1111 LA_TabPos bHomePosAvailable 1112 LA_TabPos bProfileDone 1113 LA_TabPos bProfileBusy 1114 LA_TabPos bAccelerating 1115 LA_TabPos bConstantDuty 1116 LA_Tab...

Page 1166: ...B3 16033 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B4 16034 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B5 16035 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B6 16036 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B7 16037 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B8 16038 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B9 16039 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B10 16040 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B11 16041 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B12 16042 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B13 16043 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B14 Selection list digital signals 16044 LP_CanIn2 bIn1_B15 16045 LP_CanIn3 bIn1_B0 16046 LP_CanIn3 bIn1_B1 16047 LP_CanIn3 bIn1_B2 ...

Page 1167: ... LP_CanIn4 bIn1_B12 16413 LP_CanIn4 bIn1_B13 16414 LP_CanIn4 bIn1_B14 16415 LP_CanIn4 bIn1_B15 20000 LS_ParFix bTrue 20001 LS_ParFree_b bC470_1 Selection list digital signals 20002 LS_ParFree_b bC470_2 20003 LS_ParFree_b bC470_3 20004 LS_ParFree_b bC470_4 20005 LS_ParFree_b bC470_5 20006 LS_ParFree_b bC470_6 20007 LS_ParFree_b bC470_7 20008 LS_ParFree_b bC470_8 20009 LS_ParFree_b bC470_9 20010 LS_...

Page 1168: ...fetyIsActive 32112 LS_DriveInterface bCwCcw 32113 LS_DriveInterface bNActCompare 32200 LS_MotionControlKernel bPosCtrlOn_ 32201 LS_MotionControlKernel bSpeedCtrlIOn_ 32202 LS_MotionControlKernel bTorquemodeOn_ 32203 LS_MotionControlKernel bDcBrakeOn_ 32204 LS_MotionControlKernel bMBrakeReleaseOut 32205 LS_MotionControlKernel bMBrakeReleased 32206 LS_MotionControlKernel bDeltaPosOn_ 32207 LS_Motion...

Page 1169: ...vWordToBits_2 bBit12 36096 L_ConvWordToBits_2 bBit13 Selection list digital signals 36097 L_ConvWordToBits_2 bBit14 36098 L_ConvWordToBits_2 bBit15 36099 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit0 36100 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit1 36101 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit2 36102 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit3 36103 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit4 36104 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit5 36105 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit6 36106 L_ConvWordToBits_3 bBit7 3610...

Page 1170: ...GPLogicIn1 42026 LA_NCtrl_In bGPLogicIn2 42027 LA_NCtrl_In bGPLogicIn3 42028 LA_NCtrl_In bGPDFlipFlop_InD Selection list digital signals 42029 LA_NCtrl_In bGPDFlipFlop_InClk 42030 LA_NCtrl_In bGPDFlipFlop_InClr 42031 LA_NCtrl_In bMPotEnable 42032 LA_NCtrl_In bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp 42033 LA_NCtrl_In bPIDIOff 42034 LA_NCtrl_In bRLQCw 42035 LA_NCtrl_In bRLQCcw 42041 LA_NCtrl_In bFreeIn1 42042 LA_NCt...

Page 1171: ...08 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlInputSel1 Selection list digital signals 42209 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlInputSel2 42210 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlRfgIn 42211 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlJog1 42212 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlJog2 42213 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlSlowDown1 42214 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlStop1 42215 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlSlowDown2 42216 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlStop2 42217 LA_SwitchPos_In bJogCtrlSlow...

Page 1172: ..._ParFree_p dnC474_6_p 20006 LS_ParFree_p dnC474_7_p 20007 LS_ParFree_p dnC474_8_p 20008 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_1 20009 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_2 20010 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_3 20011 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_4 20012 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_5 20013 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_6 20014 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_7 20015 LS_ParFree32 dnC479_8 20016 LS_ParFreeUnit_1 dnC475_1 20017 LS_ParFreeUnit_1 dnC475_2 20018 LS_ParFreeUnit_1 dnC475_...

Page 1173: ...ut_3_p 36090 L_Odometer_1 dnPosOut_4_p 36091 L_Odometer_1 dnPosOut_5_p 36092 L_Odometer_1 dnPosOut_6_p Selection list angle signals 36093 L_Odometer_1 dnPosOut_7_p 36094 L_Odometer_1 dnPosOut_8_p 36095 L_Odometer_1 dnDeltaPos_12_p 36096 L_Odometer_1 dnDeltaPos_23_p 36097 L_Odometer_1 dnDeltaPos_34_p 36098 L_Odometer_1 dnDeltaPos_45_p 36099 L_Odometer_1 dnDeltaPos_56_p 36100 L_Odometer_1 dnDeltaPos...

Page 1174: ...o decimal positions 10 1 decimal position 100 2 decimal positions 1000 3 decimal positions 10000 4 decimal positions CINH Writing is only possible if the controller is inhibited CINH Code Name Type Index Data dec hex DS DA Data type Factor CINH C00001 Keypad UserLevel Selection list 24574 5FFE A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00002 Device commands Selection list 24573 5FFD A 33 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00003 Status of the ...

Page 1175: ...tilisation Ixt Linear value 24511 5FBF A 3 INTEGER_16 100 C00065 Supply voltage 24V Linear value 24510 5FBE E 1 INTEGER_16 10 C00066 Thermal motor load I xt Linear value 24509 5FBD E 1 INTEGER_16 100 C00070 Vp speed controller Linear value 24505 5FB9 A 3 UNSIGNED_16 100 C00071 Ti speed controller Linear value 24504 5FB8 A 3 UNSIGNED_16 10 C00072 SC Tdn speed controller Linear value 24503 5FB7 E 1 ...

Page 1176: ...amp smoothing Selection list 24441 5F79 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00136 Communication control words Bit coded 24439 5F77 A 2 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00137 Device status Selection list 24438 5F76 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00138 Internal control signals Bit coded 24437 5F75 A 3 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00142 Auto start option Bit coded 24433 5F71 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00144 Thermal switching frequency reduction Selection list 24431 5F6F...

Page 1177: ... C00225 L_PCTRL_1 MaxLimit Linear value 24350 5F1E E 1 INTEGER_16 100 C00226 L_PCTRL_1 MinLimit Linear value 24349 5F1D E 1 INTEGER_16 100 C00227 L_PCTRL_1 Acceleration time Linear value 24348 5F1C E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000 C00228 L_PCTRL_1 Deceleration time Linear value 24347 5F1B E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000 C00231 L_PCTRL_1 Operating range Linear value 24344 5F18 A 4 INTEGER_16 100 C00233 L_PCTRL_1 Root fun...

Page 1178: ...C00354 COBID Bit coded 24221 5E9D A 8 UNSIGNED_32 1 C00355 Active COBID Linear value 24220 5E9C A 8 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00356 CAN time settings Linear value 24219 5E9B A 6 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00357 CAN monitoring times Linear value 24218 5E9A A 4 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00358 CANx_OUT data length Linear value 24217 5E99 A 4 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00359 CAN status Selection list 24216 5E98 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00360 CAN telegram...

Page 1179: ...111 5E2F A 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00465 Keypad Time out welcome screen Selection list 24110 5E2E E 1 INTEGER_32 1 C00466 Keypad Default parameter Linear value 24109 5E2D E 1 INTEGER_32 1 C00467 Keypad Default welcome screen Selection list 24108 5E2C E 1 INTEGER_32 1 C00469 Keypad Fct STOP key Selection list 24106 5E2A E 1 INTEGER_32 1 CINH C00470 LS_ParFree_b Selection list 24105 5E29 A 32 UNSIGNED_8 1 ...

Page 1180: ...ection list 23995 5DBB A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00581 Resp to LS_SetError_x Selection list 23994 5DBA A 8 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00582 Resp to heatsink temp shutdown temp 5 C Selection list 23993 5DB9 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00584 Resp to current monitoring Selection list 23991 5DB7 A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00585 Resp to motor overtemp PTC Selection list 23990 5DB6 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00586 Resp open circuit HTL encoder Selecti...

Page 1181: ... L_OffsetGainPhiP 1 2 Gain Linear value 23901 5D5D A 2 INTEGER_32 1 C00677 L_GainOffsetP 1 3 Parameter Linear value 23898 5D5A A 6 INTEGER_16 100 C00678 L_GainOffsetPhiP 1 2 Parameter Linear value 23897 5D59 A 4 INTEGER_32 1 C00679 L_MulDiv_2 Parameter Linear value 23896 5D58 A 2 INTEGER_16 1 C00680 L_Compare_1 Fct Selection list 23895 5D57 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00681 L_Compare_1 Hysteresis Linear val...

Page 1182: ...Truth table Selection list 23752 5CC8 A 24 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00824 L_DigitalLogic5_1 Function Selection list 23751 5CC7 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00825 L_DigitalLogic5_1 Truth table Selection list 23750 5CC6 A 32 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00826 L_DigitalLogic5_2 Function Selection list 23749 5CC5 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00827 L_DigitalLogic5_2 Truth table Selection list 23748 5CC4 A 32 UNSIGNED_8 1 C00828 L_DigitalLogic_3 Func...

Page 1183: ...r value 23611 5C3B A 32 INTEGER_16 1 C00965 Max motor speed Linear value 23610 5C3A E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00966 VFC Time const slip comp Linear value 23609 5C39 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C00967 VFC Frequency interpol point n Linear value 23608 5C38 A 11 INTEGER_16 10 C00968 VFC Voltage interpol point n Linear value 23607 5C37 A 11 UNSIGNED_16 100 C00969 Motor parameters Linear value 23606 5C36 A 1 UNSIGNED_8...

Page 1184: ...0 L_SRFG_1 2 linear ramp time Linear value 23535 5BEF A 2 UNSIGNED_32 1000 C01041 L_SRFG_1 2 S ramp time Linear value 23534 5BEE A 2 UNSIGNED_32 1000 C01042 L_SRFG_1 2 limitations of output values Linear value 23533 5BED A 4 INTEGER_16 100 C01045 L_ConvAP 1 3 numerator denominator Linear value 23530 5BEA A 6 INTEGER_16 1 C01046 L_ConvPA 1 3 byDivision Linear value 23529 5BE9 A 3 INTEGER_8 1 C01047...

Page 1185: ...r value 23485 5BBD A 6 INTEGER_32 1000 C01091 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Cycle time Selection list 23484 5BBC A 6 UNSIGNED_16 1 C01092 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 FailState Linear value 23483 5BBB A 6 UNSIGNED_16 1 C01093 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Arithmetic mode Selection list 23482 5BBA A 6 UNSIGNED_8 1 C01094 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Numerator Linear value 23481 5BB9 A 6 INTEGER_16 1 C01095 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Denominat...

Page 1186: ... INTEGER_32 10000 C01230 Manual jog Setting Bit coded 23345 5B31 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C01231 MCK Manual jog speeds Linear value 23344 5B30 A 2 INTEGER_32 10000 C01232 MCK Manual jog accelerations Linear value 23343 5B2F A 2 INTEGER_32 10000 C01233 MCK Manual jog S ramp time Linear value 23342 5B2E A 1 UNSIGNED_16 1000 C01234 MCK Manual jog breakpoints Linear value 23341 5B2D A 4 INTEGER_32 10000 C0123...

Page 1187: ... C01702 Energy saving mode toff Linear value 22873 5959 A 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C01703 Energy saving mode ton Linear value 22872 5958 A 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C01704 Energy saving mode Function Bit coded 22871 5957 A 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 C01709 Energy saving mode Status Linear value 22866 5952 A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C01770 Filter time earth fault detect is running Linear value 22805 5915 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C01902 Diagnosti...

Page 1188: ...0 573A A 4 UNSIGNED_32 1000 C02246 LS_WriteParamList Setting of motor overload I xt Linear value 22329 5739 A 4 INTEGER_16 100 C02249 LS_WriteParamList Oscillation damping influence Linear value 22326 5736 A 4 UNSIGNED_16 100 C02250 LS_WriteParamList Filter time oscill damping Linear value 22325 5735 A 4 UNSIGNED_8 1 C02251 LS_WriteParamList Oscillation damping field weakening Linear value 22324 5...

Page 1189: ...S_WriteParamList Flying restart fct current Linear value 22276 5704 A 4 INTEGER_16 100 C02300 LS_WriteParamList SLPSM Controlled current setpoint Linear value 22275 5703 A 8 UNSIGNED_16 100 C02301 LS_WriteParamList SLPSM Switching speed Linear value 22274 5702 A 8 INTEGER_16 100 C02302 LS_WriteParamList SLPSM Filter time rotor position Linear value 22273 5701 A 4 INTEGER_16 100 C02303 LS_WritePara...

Page 1190: ... value 21732 54E4 A 2 INTEGER_16 100 C02844 FreqIn12 Function Selection list 21731 54E3 A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 C02845 FreqIn12 PosIn comparison value Linear value 21730 54E2 E 1 INTEGER_32 1 C02853 PSM Lss saturation characteristic Linear value 21722 54DA A 17 UNSIGNED_8 1 C02855 PSM Imax Lss saturation characteristic Linear value 21720 54D8 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10 C02859 PSM Activate Ppp saturation char Sel...

Page 1191: ...lement own drive solutions independent of the predefined technology applications by using the free interconnection For this purpose the FB Editor provides the following functions Copying pasting of interconnection elements also device independent Export import of the interconnection Comparison of two interconnections also online offline comparison Overview window and zoom functions Comments on the...

Page 1192: ...interconnection and classified as follows Further information on the individual modules can be obtained from the following subchapters M M n t è ç Switch off positioning Actuating drive speed Setpoint generator Process controller Motion Control Kernel Device control Motor control Signal inputs Signal outputs Module type Name Task Example Function block L_name General function block for free interc...

Page 1193: ...values when being executed The function blocks are classified alphabetically in a function library Each function block has a unique identifier and a processing number which defines the position at which the function block is calculated during runtime 16 2 Information on a function block in the FB Editor Tip A detailed description of all available function blocks can be found in the main chapter Fu...

Page 1194: ...module a double click on the module or the Parameter command in the Context menu of the module serve to open the parameterisation dialog or the parameter list for the module Example Parameterisation dialog for the FB L_DigitalDelay_2 16 1 1 3 What is a system block System blocks are a special variant of a function block They partly activate real hardware e g the digital and analog inputs outputs a...

Page 1195: ... and output port LP_CanOut1 16 1 1 5 What is an application block The application technology function set in C00005 is shown as application block in the I O level of the FB Editor The application block comprises the signal flow processing generated via function block interconnection for the selected application in each case e g actuating drive speed or switch off positioning The function block int...

Page 1196: ...significant characteristics of the corresponding input output e g the data type can be instantly recognised from its identifier An identifier consists of a data type entry an identifier the proper name of the input output an optional signal type specification Data type entry The data type entry provides information about the data type of the corresponding input output Identifier The identifier is ...

Page 1197: ...physical units With regard to the parameter setting configuration of the inverter it is very helpful to know the signal types and their scaling listed in the following table which are used to process physical values e g an angular velocity or position in the function block interconnection Signal type entry port symbol in the FB Editor Meaning Resolution Value range _a Analog scaled 16 bits 199 99 ...

Page 1198: ...or displays the wiring of the technology function selected in C00005 The interconnection of the I Os of the inverter depends on the control mode selected in C00007 The user interface of the FB Editor includes the following control and function elements Tip Go to the Engineer toolbar and click the icon to hide the Project View and the Message Window This increases the Workspace available for the FB...

Page 1199: ...n to execute the corresponding function Symbol Function Insert function block or system block Inserting a function block 1213 Inserting a system block 1215 Insert port block 1217 Adjusting online and offline interconnection 1236 Acknowledge error in the interconnection reload interconnection Correct interconnection Start online monitoring Interrupt online monitoring Close online monitoring Enlarge...

Page 1200: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 16 2 2 Search function Use the search function to get quickly to a certain module of the interconnection The list field of the search function contains all function blocks system blocks and port blocks of the interconnection When you select a module in the list field this module is zoomed in and selected at the same time the following example shows the LS_DigitalInp...

Page 1201: ...e entered search text The search text does not consider case sensitivity 16 2 3 Plane selection Go to the Level selection list field and select the interconnection level to be displayed I O interconnection level This level displays only the I O interconnection of the currently selected technology application for a better overview Details of the application are masked out in this level The intercon...

Page 1202: ... so called free inputs and outputs which you can use to transfer signals from the I O level to the application level and vice versa In the Lenze setting these connectors are hidden in the function block editor These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the Context menu of the application block Free interconnection level This level serves to implement an individual dri...

Page 1203: ...2 4 Editor view overview Use the list field at the top right to change from the Editor to the overview and vice versa The overview shows all function blocks used of the interconnection in the upper list field in the order of their processing The lower list field shows all used system blocks The processing order of the function blocks can be optimised manually or according to an automatically gener...

Page 1204: ...object you click on Example Context menu for a function block 16 2 6 Status bar The status bar of the FB Editor shows among other things information about the system load and the error status of the interconnection Symbol Meaning System load Here out of the available computing time of 610 μs 226 μs are required by the application Error status of the interconnection The interconnection has no error...

Page 1205: ...awing area and select the Overview Window If you execute this command again the overview window is hidden again The green frame in the overview window indicates the interconnection cutout that is currently displayed in the drawing area Use the mouse pointer to shift and resize the cutout to be displayed How to shift the cutout presented in the drawing area 1 Position the mouse pointer to the green...

Page 1206: ...atio of the frame is automatically adapted to the aspect ratio of the drawing area According to the size of the frame that is drawn also the presentation size of the objects in the drawing area changes Tip Go to the FB Editor toolbar and click the icon to adapt the view size so that all objects included in the interconnection are visible in the drawing area Automatic scroll AutoScroll function If ...

Page 1207: ...line connection to the inverter has been established the current values are displayed at the inputs and outputs of the objects Process scaled signals can be scaled in a user defined way for easy diagnostics in the FB Editor Change online display format 1210 Getting a better understanding for the operating mode of the application Make yourself familiar with the signal flow of the interconnection to...

Page 1208: ...e Search function you can use the context menu of inputs and outputs to follow connections and quickly reach certain signals How to navigate from one output to another connected input 1 Open the context menu right mouse button of the port symbol at the output The context menu for the port symbol contains all inputs which are connected to the output 2 Select input in the context menu to which you w...

Page 1209: ...ight mouse button of the port symbol at the output 2 Select output in the context menu Since an output can only be connected to an input the context menu contains only an output The output is displayed in the centre of the drawing area 16 3 2 Keyboard commands for navigation Keyboard command Function Picture Scroll up Picture Scroll down Shift picture Scroll to the left Shift picture Scroll to the...

Page 1210: ...data display format of block inputs outputs 1 Go to the context menu of the block and select the Online display format command Tip You can call the context menu of a block by clicking with the right mouse button on the header of the block The Display format dialog box is displayed 2 Select the inputs outputs from the list the display format of which is to be changed Note In the Global format setti...

Page 1211: ...x is displayed 4 Go to the Display format list field and select the User defined entry 5 Go to the Format template list field and select No template 6 Select the required scaling unit number of decimal positions and sign handling 7 Click OK to accept the settings and close the Edit display format dialog box The Display format dialog box now displays the text User defined for the changed inputs out...

Page 1212: ... Deleting objects Objects can be inserted in the interconnection via the FB Editor toolbar and the context menu of the drawing area The following subchapters provide detailed information on how to insert delete the different objects Tip Use the context menu of the drawing area to insert a function block system block port block or comment directly to the current position of the mouse pointer in the...

Page 1213: ...ist field A preview of the selected function block is displayed A detailed description of all available function blocks can be found in the main chapter Function library 1243 3 If required define Search criteria to narrow down the available function blocks Block name String which must be contained in the name of the function block 4 After changing the search criteria press the Find button to updat...

Page 1214: ...general processing functions Copy Insert Delete Related topics Deleting objects that are no longer required 1221 Changing connector visibilities 1222 Arranging objects in the drawing area 1223 Creating deleting connections 1224 Changing the processing order 1230 Command Function Centre Move the visible cutout of the drawing area so that the block is centred Connector visibilities Define visible in...

Page 1215: ...on The Insert Function Block dialog box appears 2 Unless it is already displayed select the System Blocks tab All system blocks available are displayed in the Search results list field A preview of the selected function block is displayed 3 If required define Search criteria to accordingly narrow down the system blocks available Block name String which must be contained in the name of the system b...

Page 1216: ...ens via which you can execute the following functions in addition to the general processing functions Copy Insert Delete Related topics Deleting objects that are no longer required 1221 Changing connector visibilities 1222 Arranging objects in the drawing area 1223 Creating deleting connections 1224 Command Function Centre Move the visible cutout of the drawing area so that the block is centred Co...

Page 1217: ...block into the interconnection 1 In the FB Editor toolbar click the icon The Insert port block dialog box appears All port blocks available are displayed in the Search results list field A preview of the selected port block is displayed 2 If required define search criteria to accordingly narrow down the port blocks available Block name String which must be contained in the name of the port block 3...

Page 1218: ...ons Copy Insert Delete Related topics Deleting objects that are no longer required 1221 Changing connector visibilities 1222 Arranging objects in the drawing area 1223 Creating deleting connections 1224 Command Function Centre Move the visible cutout of the drawing area so that the block is centred Connector visibilities Define visible inputs and outputs of the block Changing connector visibilitie...

Page 1219: ... to graphically arrange areas that belong together in terms of function or separate them from other areas 16 7 Example Graphical arrangement of FBs by means of two comments that overlap How to insert a new comment into the interconnection 1 Move the mouse pointer to the free position in the drawing area where the comment is to be inserted 2 Go to the Context menu right mouse key and select the New...

Page 1220: ... insert the comment After being inserted the corner points of the comment are shown 7 Optional Change size of the comment For this purpose click one of the corner points with the left mouse button and enlarge the comment to the required size with the mouse button pressed 8 Optional Drag comment For this purpose click the comment with the left mouse button and move the comment to the required posit...

Page 1221: ...can reinsert it any time into the interconnection How to delete objects that are no longer required 1 Select objects to be deleted You can select a single object by clicking the header of the object You can select objects that are placed together by drawing a frame around these objects while keeping the mouse button pressed If you click the header of further objects while pressing Ctrl these will ...

Page 1222: ...ock The interconnection becomes clearer How to define the visible inputs and outputs 1 Go to the context menu of the block and select the Connector visibilities command The Define Visible Inputs and Outputs for Function Blocks is displayed All visible connections have a checkmark In case of a block that is inserted anew all inputs and outputs are visible at first Inputs and outputs with a light gr...

Page 1223: ...agging How to drag an object 1 Click the header of the object and keep the button pressed 2 Keep the button pressed and drag the object to the required position in the drawing area Via Esc you can cancel this action How to drag several objects at the same time 1 Select the objects to be dragged You can select a single object by clicking the header of the object If you click the header of further o...

Page 1224: ... type can be connected From the Engineer V2 12 Analog scaled _a and Miscellaneous WORD signal types can also be interconnected From the Engineer V2 13 Analog scaled _a and Angular velocity _v signal types can also be interconnected An output represents a possible source in the interconnection An input represents a possible target in the interconnection Therefore it is always possible to start a ne...

Page 1225: ...e created by means of connection lines or port identifiers flags 16 8 Example 1 Connection via connection line 16 9 Example 2 Connection via flags Tip The commands Show as flag or Show as line in the context menu of a connection serve to change the representation of the connection at any time When an output is connected to several inputs via flags three points are displayed at the output instead o...

Page 1226: ...nection already ending in this input If you then move the mouse pointer away from the port symbol a new connection is drawn from this port symbol Via Esc you can cancel this action 2 Click the port symbol where the connection is to end Thereupon the corresponding connection is routed automatically if the connection is permissible Tip If you move the mouse pointer across the port symbol while drawi...

Page 1227: ...fiers How to create a connection with port identifiers 1 Click the port identifier The selected port is highlighted in light green 2 Drag the port segment to the required port while keeping the left mouse button pressed After releasing the mouse button the connection via port identifiers flags is created The corresponding port identifier consists of the block name and the name of the input output ...

Page 1228: ...hich the connection is to start The context menu for the port is displayed 2 Go to the context menu for the port and select the Add change connection command The Add change connection dialog box is displayed In a tree structure all inputs and outputs of the application are shown to which a connection is permissible You can enter an optional text into the Filter input field to reduce the selection ...

Page 1229: ...ection line with the right mouse button If you click further connection lines while pressing Ctrl they are added to an already existing selection multi selection All connection lines are highlighted in red 2 Press Del How to delete port identifiers flags 1 Select the port identifiers to be deleted Select a single port identifier by directly clicking on the port identifier with the left mouse butto...

Page 1230: ...ns of this order index it is defined in which order the individual function blocks are calculated at runtime The first function block inserted contains the order index 1 the next function block inserted contains the order index 2 etc The respective order index is displayed in the header of the function block in the rectangle after the block name 16 10 Example Function blocks with order index Note ...

Page 1231: ...sing In the first Order column the order index of each function block is listed 2 Unless already selected select the entry Manual selection in the Optimisation list field 3 Select the function block which is to receive a different position within the processing order If you click further function blocks while pressing Ctrl they are added to an already existing selection multi selection The Shift k...

Page 1232: ...Paste command is available if the clipboard is not empty and if it was copied from a device of the same product family Within this product family all device types e g 8400 xxxxLine Vxx xx are permitted After the Paste command has been selected a dialog box is displayed which serves to select which elements are to be inserted from the clipboard and how to solve name conflicts if any After inserting...

Page 1233: ... and the relative position of the inserted blocks to each other are maintained When copying across the devices you also insert the corresponding separate technical objects e g port definition The inserted elements are deleted from the list If the list is empty the dialog box is closed and the connections are inserted depending on the selected option 7 If there are still elements to be entered in t...

Page 1234: ...t shows the elements which can be added to the target interconnection and the elements which cannot be added In the Selection column you can check uncheck the elements to be added Connections are only inserted when the dialog box is closed which applies to all modules inserted so far They are displayed as lines or flags like in the original but re routed The symbols in the Toolbar serve to execute...

Page 1235: ...ection to a predefined control scheme 1 Go to the Application parameters tab 2 Select the required control scheme in the Control source list field Button Function Paste Add elements selected in the list to the target interconnection Only possible if at least one element in the list has been selected for insertion Insertion is also possible via the Enter button if at least one element is selected f...

Page 1236: ...th various options for the adjustment Tip The dialog box can also be opened via the symbol in the FB Editor toolbar Button Function Read interconnection from device Add the interconnection in the device to the FB Editor The interconnection existing in the FB Editor will be overwritten by this action Send interconnection to device Transfer the offline interconnection which is currently not visible ...

Page 1237: ...nting the interconnection The interconnection can be printed for documentation purposes optionally on one page on four pages or not scaled Tip By clicking the icon in the FB Editor toolbar you can get a print view before printing How to print the interconnection 1 In the FB Editor toolbar click the icon The Circuit print size dialog box is displayed 2 Select the desired size and press OK The stand...

Page 1238: ...onnections to be compared in the project view represented on the left and right In order to execute a comparison with an online device select Online in one of the two upper list fields Then all available online devices are displayed for selection If you select Online in one of the two upper list fields you can also compare the interconnections of two available online devices 3 Click Compare If the...

Page 1239: ... The symbols in the Toolbar serve to show or hide different details and export and print the shown list Symbol Function Only show differences Button can only be activated in expert mode Show blocks Show connections Show processing sequence Show properties for blocks and connections Function is only available in expert mode Show comments Function is only available in expert mode Show block paramete...

Page 1240: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Activate expert mode In the expert mode also non functional differences are shown Use filter Only show list entries which contain the text entered in the input field Function is only available in expert mode Export shown list as comma separated list csv Print Preview Print list Symbol Function ...

Page 1241: ...w to copy the complete interconnection into another project device 1 Select the application with the FB interconnection to be copied in the project view 2 Select the command Application data Copy FB interconnections 3 Go to project view and select the application which is to be inserted into the copied FB interconnection 4 Select the command Application data Add FB interconnection The command can ...

Page 1242: ...ext menu of the inverter and select the Export FB interconnection command 2 Enter the memory location and the file name for the interconnection to be exported in the Export FB interconnection dialog box 3 Click Save to export the interconnection and close the dialog box How to import the interconnection from a file to the project 1 Go to the Project view in the context menu of the inverter and sel...

Page 1243: ... converts a bipolar input signal into a unipolar output signal L_AddSub_1 3 μs adds subtracts analog input signals L_AnalogSwitch_1 L_AnalogSwitch_2 L_AnalogSwitch_3 L_AnalogSwitch_4 L_AnalogSwitch_5 2 μs switches between two analog input signals L_And_1 L_And_2 L_And_3 2 μs ANDs three binary signals L_And5_1 L_And5_2 2 μs ANDs five binary signals L_Arithmetik_1 L_Arithmetik_2 L_Arithmetik_3 L_Ari...

Page 1244: ...hese FBs are available from version 04 00 00 L_ConvWordsToDInt_1 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3 3 μs converts two inputs values of the type WORD into an output value of the type DINT L_ConvWordToBits_1 L_ConvWordToBits_2 L_ConvWordToBits_3 3 μs converts an input value of WORD type into 16 individual binary signals L_ConvX_1 L_ConvX_2 L_ConvX_3 0 μs scales an analog value These function bl...

Page 1245: ...ive train gearbox compensation This FB is available from version 11 00 00 L_Interpolator_1 5 μs can interpolate a position setpoint and or an analog value e g to compensate for larger bus transmission cycles or to continue signal characteristics if data telegrams are missing This FB is available from version 04 00 00 L_JogCtrlExtension_1 5 μs can be connected upstream to the L_NSet ramp generator ...

Page 1246: ... and a speed signal These FBs are available from version 04 00 00 L_PhaseIntK_1 L_PhaseIntK_2 5 μs integrates a speed to an angle L_PhiIntegrator_1 2 μs evaluates a speed with a gearbox factor and adds them in an integrator This FB is available from version 11 00 00 L_PosCtrlLin_1 L_PosCtrlLin_2 2 μs is a simple linear profile generator These function blocks are available from version 11 00 00 L_P...

Page 1247: ...haped ramps for limiting the temporal rise of analog signals These FBs are available from version 04 00 00 L_SwitchPoint_1 3 μs provides four position switch points i e digital switches the binary statuses FALSE TRUE of which depend on the actual position This FB is available from version 11 00 00 L_Transient_1 L_Transient_2 L_Transient_3 L_Transient_4 L_Transient_5 L_Transient_6 L_Transient_7 L_T...

Page 1248: ...a bipolar input signal into a unipolar output signal Inputs Outputs 17 1 2 L_Absolut_2 This FB converts a bipolar input signal into a unipolar output signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal B EVROXWB Q QBD Q2XWBD Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input sign...

Page 1249: ...dding inputs and one subtracting input The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 32767 Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 This input is added nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 This input is added nIn3_a INT Input signal 3 This input is subtracted Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal nOut_a nIn1_a nIn2_a ...

Page 1250: ..._ _ _ 17 1 4 L_AnalogSwitch_1 This FB changes over between two analog input signals The change over is controlled via a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output to nOut_a FALSE nIn1_a TRUE nIn2_a Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Outpu...

Page 1251: ..._ _ _ 17 1 5 L_AnalogSwitch_2 This FB changes over between two analog input signals The change over is controlled via a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output to nOut_a FALSE nIn1_a TRUE nIn2_a Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Outpu...

Page 1252: ..._ _ _ 17 1 6 L_AnalogSwitch_3 This FB changes over between two analog input signals The change over is controlled via a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output to nOut_a FALSE nIn1_a TRUE nIn2_a Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Outpu...

Page 1253: ..._ _ _ 17 1 7 L_AnalogSwitch_4 This FB changes over between two analog input signals The change over is controlled via a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output to nOut_a FALSE nIn1_a TRUE nIn2_a Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Outpu...

Page 1254: ..._ _ _ 17 1 8 L_AnalogSwitch_5 This FB changes over between two analog input signals The change over is controlled via a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output to nOut_a FALSE nIn1_a TRUE nIn2_a Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Outpu...

Page 1255: ...d_1 This FB implements AND operations for input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 1 Truth table of the FB L_And_1 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE T...

Page 1256: ...d_2 This FB implements AND operations for input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 2 Truth table of the FB L_And_2 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE T...

Page 1257: ...d_3 This FB implements AND operations for input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 3 Truth table of the FB L_And_3 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE T...

Page 1258: ...nals Inputs Outputs Function 17 4 Truth table of the FB L_And5_1 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn5 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn5 bIn4 bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TR...

Page 1259: ...nals Inputs Outputs Function 17 5 Truth table of the FB L_And5_2 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn5 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn5 bIn4 bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TR...

Page 1260: ...e nOut_a output are internally limited to 32767 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00338 Function selection 0 1 2 3 4 When the denominator...

Page 1261: ...e nOut_a output are internally limited to 32767 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00339 Function selection 0 1 2 3 4 When the denominator...

Page 1262: ...e nOut_a output are internally limited to 32767 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00650 1 Function selection 0 1 2 3 4 When the denominat...

Page 1263: ...e nOut_a output are internally limited to 32767 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00650 2 Function selection 0 1 2 3 4 When the denominat...

Page 1264: ...e nOut_a output are internally limited to 32767 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00650 3 Function selection 0 1 2 3 4 When the denominat...

Page 1265: ... intermediate results and the value provided at the dnOut_p output are internally limited to 2147483647 231 1 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 2147483647 Parameters Possible sett...

Page 1266: ... intermediate results and the value provided at the dnOut_p output are internally limited to 2147483647 231 1 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 2147483647 Parameters Possible sett...

Page 1267: ... intermediate results and the value provided at the dnOut_p output are internally limited to 2147483647 231 1 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 2147483647 Parameters Possible sett...

Page 1268: ...4 15000 rpm wGearNum WORD Gearbox factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wGearDenom WORD Gearbox factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 bResetPos BOOL Reset angle of rotation dnPos_p TRUE The angle of rotation dnPos_p is reset bCalcRef BOOL Selection of the calculation cycle FALSE Use diameter recalculation 0 C01050 1 TRUE Use diameter recalculation 1 C01050 2 bHoldD BO...

Page 1269: ...m Internal limitation to 10 m Unfiltered nDiameter_a INT Current diameter in 100 Maximum diameter wMaxDiameter filtered via PT1 element filter time constant can be set in C01051 1 nReziprDiameter_a INT Reciprocal value of the current diameter in 100 Minimum diameter wMinDiameter nNReel_v INT Current winding speed in increments ms Scaling 16384 15000 rpm bDMaxLimit BOOL Limit value monitoring TRUE ...

Page 1270: ...0 001 Rev 2 000 Diameter recalculation 1 Number of revolutions after which a diameter calculation is executed Setting is effective when bCalcRef TRUE Initialisation 0 100 C01051 1 0 010 s 3 000 Filter time constant for calculated diameter values Initialisation 1 000 s C01052 1 0 00 100 00 Permissible diameter change in opposite direction web break monitoring Only relevant when bUnidirect TRUE Refe...

Page 1271: ...om the division of the integrator values An absolute value generation and smoothing via a first order low pass is carried out The time constant of this filter can be set in C01051 1 The dwOutDiameter output is not filtered 17 1 22 3 Select change direction web break monitoring By setting bUnidirect to TRUE you only enable one change direction for diameter calculation and simultaneously activate th...

Page 1272: ...rmanently set to 1 of wMaxDiameter For parameter setting of further FBs the value in wMinDiameter with regard to wMaxDiameter is provided via the nDMin_a output 17 1 22 6 Converting diameter in 1 D For evaluating the material speed with 1 D speed controlled winder the reciprocal value of the reel diameter is provided via nReziprDiameter_a This value refers to the limitation value wMinDiameter 17 1...

Page 1273: ...is and window size can be parameterised Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C00680 Function selection 1 nIn1 nIn2 2 nIn1 nIn2 ...

Page 1274: ...ction compares two signals with regard to equality It can for instance provide the comparison actual speed equals setpoint speed nact nset Use C00682 to set the window within which the equality is to apply Use C00681 to set a hysteresis if the input signals are not stable and the output oscillates 17 6 Function 1 Switching performance 17 7 Function 1 Example C00681 Hysteresis C00682 Window TRUE FA...

Page 1275: ...for instance to implement the comparison actual speed is higher than a limit value nact nx for one direction of rotation 17 8 Function 2 Switching performance Functional sequence 1 If the value at nIn1_a exceeds the value nIn2_a bOut changes from FALSE to TRUE 2 Only if the signal at nIn1_a falls below the value of nIn2_a hysteresis again bOut changes back from TRUE to FALSE 17 9 Function 2 Exampl...

Page 1276: ...r instance to implement the comparison actual speed is lower than a limit value nact nx for one direction of rotation 17 10 Function 3 Switching performance Functional sequence 1 If the value at nIn1_a falls below the value at nIn2_a bOut changes from FALSE to TRUE 2 Only if the signal at nIn1_a exceeds the value of nIn2_a hysteresis again bOut changes back from TRUE to FALSE 17 11 Function 3 Exam...

Page 1277: ...nals before signal processing without sign Function 1 nIn1 nIn2 17 1 23 5 Function 5 nIn1 nIn2 This function serves to implement e g the comparison nact nx irrespective of the direction of rotation This function is similar to function 2 However the amount is generated by the input signals before signal processing without sign Function 2 nIn1 nIn2 17 1 23 6 Function 6 nIn1 nIn2 This function serves...

Page 1278: ...arameterised Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C00685 Function selection 1 nIn1 nIn2 2 nIn1 nIn2 3 nIn1 nIn2 4 nIn1 nIn2 5 n...

Page 1279: ...arameterised Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C00690 Function selection 1 nIn1 nIn2 2 nIn1 nIn2 3 nIn1 nIn2 4 nIn1 nIn2 5 n...

Page 1280: ...meterised Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C00693 1 Function selection 1 nIn1 nIn2 2 nIn1 nIn2 3 nIn1 nIn2 4 nIn1 nIn2 5 nI...

Page 1281: ...meterised Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1_a INT Input signal 1 nIn2_a INT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C00693 2 Function selection 1 nIn1 nIn2 2 nIn1 nIn2 3 nIn1 nIn2 4 nIn1 nIn2 5 nI...

Page 1282: ...nputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C01670 1 Function selection 1 dnIn1 dnIn2 2 dnIn1 dnIn2 3 dnIn1 dnIn2 4 dnIn1 dnIn2 5 d...

Page 1283: ...ion compares two signals with regard to equality It can for instance provide the comparison actual speed equals setpoint speed nact nset Use C01672 to set the window within which the equality is to apply Use C01671 to set a hysteresis if the input signals are not stable and the output oscillates 17 12 Function 1 Switching performance 17 13 Function 1 Example C001671 Hysteresis C001672 Window TRUE ...

Page 1284: ...nstance to implement the comparison actual speed is higher than a limit value nact nx for one direction of rotation 17 14 Function 2 Switching performance Functional sequence 1 If the value at dnIn1_p exceeds the value at dnIn2_p bOut changes from FALSE to TRUE 2 Only if the signal at dnIn1_p falls below the value of dnIn2_p hysteresis again bOut changes back from TRUE to FALSE 17 15 Function 2 Ex...

Page 1285: ...instance to implement the comparison actual speed is lower than a limit value nact nx for one direction of rotation 17 16 Function 3 Switching performance Functional sequence 1 If the value at dnIn1_p falls below the value at dnIn2_p bOut changes from FALSE to TRUE 2 Only if the signal at dnIn1_p exceeds the value of dnIn2_p hysteresis again bOut changes back from TRUE to FALSE 17 17 Function 3 Ex...

Page 1286: ...s before signal processing without sign Function 1 dnIn1 dnIn2 17 1 28 5 Function 5 dnIn1 dnIn2 This function serves to implement e g the comparison nact nx irrespective of the direction of rotation This function is similar to function 2 However the amount is generated by the input signals before signal processing without sign Function 2 dnIn1 dnIn2 17 1 28 6 Function 6 dnIn1 dnIn2 This function s...

Page 1287: ...ignator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C01670 2 Function selection 1 dnIn1 dnIn2 2 dnIn1 dnIn2 3 dnIn1 dnIn2 4 dnIn1 dnIn2 5 dnIn1 dnIn2 6 dnIn1 dnIn2 C01...

Page 1288: ...ignator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C01670 3 Function selection 1 dnIn1 dnIn2 2 dnIn1 dnIn2 3 dnIn1 dnIn2 4 dnIn1 dnIn2 5 dnIn1 dnIn2 6 dnIn1 dnIn2 C01...

Page 1289: ...ignator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C01670 4 Function selection 1 dnIn1 dnIn2 2 dnIn1 dnIn2 3 dnIn1 dnIn2 4 dnIn1 dnIn2 5 dnIn1 dnIn2 6 dnIn1 dnIn2 C01...

Page 1290: ...ignator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1_p DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2_p DINT Input signal 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Status signal Comparison statement is true TRUE The statement of the selected comparison mode is true Parameters Possible settings Info C01670 5 Function selection 1 dnIn1 dnIn2 2 dnIn1 dnIn2 3 dnIn1 dnIn2 4 dnIn1 dnIn2 5 dnIn1 dnIn2 6 dnIn1 dnIn2 C01...

Page 1291: ... an analog value into a position Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input value Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parameters Possible settings Info C01045 1 32767 32767 Counter Lenze setting 1 C01045 2 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting 1 Note Conver...

Page 1292: ... an analog value into a position Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input value Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parameters Possible settings Info C01045 3 32767 32767 Counter Lenze setting 1 C01045 4 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting 1 Note Conver...

Page 1293: ... an analog value into a position Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input value Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parameters Possible settings Info C01045 5 32767 32767 Counter Lenze setting 1 C01045 6 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting 1 Note Conver...

Page 1294: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 36 L_ConvBitsToWord_1 This FB converts 16 bit input values of the type BOOL into an output value of the type WORD Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bBit0 bBit15 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal B RQY LWV7R RUGB Z2XW E LW E LW E LW E LW E LW LW LW LW LW LW 25 ...

Page 1295: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 37 L_ConvBitsToWord_2 This FB converts 16 bit input values of the type BOOL into an output value of the type WORD Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bBit0 bBit15 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal B RQY LWV7R RUGB Z2XW E LW E LW E LW E LW E LW LW LW LW LW LW 25 ...

Page 1296: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 38 L_ConvBitsToWord_3 This FB converts 16 bit input values of the type BOOL into an output value of the type WORD Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bBit0 bBit15 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal B RQY LWV7R RUGB Z2XW E LW E LW E LW E LW E LW LW LW LW LW LW 25 ...

Page 1297: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 39 L_ConvDIntToWords_1 This FB converts an input value of the type DINT into two output values of the type WORD Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnInput_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOutLWord WORD Output signal Low Word wOutHWord WORD Output signal High Word B RQY QW7R RUGVB GQ QSXWBS Z2XW RUG...

Page 1298: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 40 L_ConvDIntToWords_2 This FB converts an input value of the type DINT into two output values of the type WORD Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnInput_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOutLWord WORD Output signal Low Word wOutHWord WORD Output signal High Word B RQY QW7R RUGVB GQ QSXWBS Z2XW RUG...

Page 1299: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 41 L_ConvDIntToWords_3 This FB converts an input value of the type DINT into two output values of the type WORD Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnInput_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOutLWord WORD Output signal Low Word wOutHWord WORD Output signal High Word B RQY QW7R RUGVB GQ QSXWBS Z2XW RUG...

Page 1300: ..._ 17 1 42 L_ConvPA_1 This FB converts a position into an analog value Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 100 16384 Parameters Possible settings Info C01046 1 0 31 Division factor Lenze setting 1 Note Conversion is remainder considered B ...

Page 1301: ..._ 17 1 43 L_ConvPA_2 This FB converts a position into an analog value Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 100 16384 Parameters Possible settings Info C01046 2 0 31 Division factor Lenze setting 1 Note Conversion is remainder considered B ...

Page 1302: ..._ 17 1 44 L_ConvPA_3 This FB converts a position into an analog value Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 100 16384 Parameters Possible settings Info C01046 3 0 31 Division factor Lenze setting 1 Note Conversion is remainder considered B ...

Page 1303: ...ion Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal bAct_b BOOL Conversion mode FALSE TRUE nNum INT Factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wDenom WORD Factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Note Conversion is remainder consider...

Page 1304: ...ion Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal bAct_b BOOL Conversion mode FALSE TRUE nNum INT Factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wDenom WORD Factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Note Conversion is remainder consider...

Page 1305: ...ion Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal bAct_b BOOL Conversion mode FALSE TRUE nNum INT Factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wDenom WORD Factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Note Conversion is remainder consider...

Page 1306: ...llowing processes Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wInLWord wInHWord WORD Input signal Low Word High Word Designator Data type Value meaning bDataValid BOOL FALSE Conversion is active dnOut_p is not valid TRUE Conversion is completed dnOut_p is valid consistent dnOut_p DINT Result of conversion in increments Parameters Possible settings Info C01294 1 Mod...

Page 1307: ...or denominator C01203 1 Encoder gearbox factor numerator C01203 2 Encoder gearbox factor denominator C01204 Feed constant dnOut_p incr Input value Unit C01202 1 C01202 2 C01203 2 C01203 1 65536 Incr rev C01204 Conversion mode C01294 wInHWord wInLWord Input value Unit dnOut_p Increments 0 dnOut_p HW LW no conversion 32 bit input value 32000 32000 65535 33536 1 16 bits LW 32767 No meaning 16 bit inp...

Page 1308: ...llowing processes Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wInLWord wInHWord WORD Input signal Low Word High Word Designator Data type Value meaning bDataValid BOOL FALSE Conversion is active dnOut_p is not valid TRUE Conversion is completed dnOut_p is valid consistent dnOut_p DINT Result of conversion in increments Parameters Possible settings Info C01294 2 Mod...

Page 1309: ..._2 1309 Lenze 8400 HighLine Reference manual DMS 12 0 EN 06 2017 TD23 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ For a detailed functional description see L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 ...

Page 1310: ...llowing processes Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wInLWord wInHWord WORD Input signal Low Word High Word Designator Data type Value meaning bDataValid BOOL FALSE Conversion is active dnOut_p is not valid TRUE Conversion is completed dnOut_p is valid consistent dnOut_p DINT Result of conversion in increments Parameters Possible settings Info C01294 3 Mod...

Page 1311: ..._3 1311 Lenze 8400 HighLine Reference manual DMS 12 0 EN 06 2017 TD23 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ For a detailed functional description see L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 ...

Page 1312: ... selected incr ms incr ms Conversion via parameterisable factors Input signal is passed through without conversion Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00940 1 32767 32767 Numerator Lenze setting 1 C00941 1 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting...

Page 1313: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Conversion formulae 17 19 Conversion formula for selection 1 incr ms 17 20 Conversion formula for selection 2 incr ms 17 21 Conversion formula for selection 3 Parameterisable factors Note Division is remainder considered wOut incr ms wIn C00011 rpm 65536 incr rev 100 60 s min 1000 ms s wOut wIn incr ms 100 60 s min 1000 ms s C00011 rpm 65536 incr rev wOut wIn C0...

Page 1314: ...ncr ms Conversion via parameterisable factors Input signal is passed through without conversion Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00940 2 32767 32767 Numerator Lenze setting 1 C00941 2 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting 1 C00942 2 Selecti...

Page 1315: ...ncr ms Conversion via parameterisable factors Input signal is passed through without conversion Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00940 3 32767 32767 Numerator Lenze setting 1 C00941 3 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting 1 C00942 3 Selecti...

Page 1316: ...ncr ms Conversion via parameterisable factors Input signal is passed through without conversion Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00940 4 32767 32767 Numerator Lenze setting 1 C00941 4 32767 32767 Denominator Lenze setting 1 C00942 4 Selecti...

Page 1317: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 55 L_ConvWordsToDInt_1 This FB converts two input values of the type WORD into one output value of the type DINT Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInLWord WORD Input signal Low Word wInHWord WORD Input signal High Word Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal B RQY RUGV7R QWB Z Q RUG GQ2XWBS 25...

Page 1318: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 56 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2 This FB converts two input values of the type WORD into one output value of the type DINT Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInLWord WORD Input signal Low Word wInHWord WORD Input signal High Word Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal B RQY RUGV7R QWB Z Q RUG GQ2XWBS 25...

Page 1319: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 57 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3 This FB converts two input values of the type WORD into one output value of the type DINT Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInLWord WORD Input signal Low Word wInHWord WORD Input signal High Word Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal B RQY RUGV7R QWB Z Q RUG GQ2XWBS 25...

Page 1320: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 58 L_ConvWordToBits_1 This FB converts an input value of WORD type into 16 individual binary signals Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInput WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bBit0 bBit15 BOOL Output signal B RQY RUG7R LWVB E LW Z QSXW LW LW LW LW LW 25 E LW E LW E LW E LW ...

Page 1321: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 59 L_ConvWordToBits_2 This FB converts an input value of WORD type into 16 individual binary signals Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInput WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bBit0 bBit15 BOOL Output signal B RQY RUG7R LWVB E LW Z QSXW LW LW LW LW LW 25 E LW E LW E LW E LW ...

Page 1322: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 60 L_ConvWordToBits_3 This FB converts an input value of WORD type into 16 individual binary signals Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInput WORD Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bBit0 bBit15 BOOL Output signal B RQY RUG7R LWVB E LW Z QSXW LW LW LW LW LW 25 E LW E LW E LW E LW ...

Page 1323: ...nputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn INT Input signal bInvers BOOL Invert sign of the output signal FALSE TRUE nNum INT Factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wDenom WORD Factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 100 16384 Note Conversion is remainder consid...

Page 1324: ...nputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn INT Input signal bInvers BOOL Invert sign of the output signal FALSE TRUE nNum INT Factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wDenom WORD Factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 100 16384 Note Conversion is remainder consid...

Page 1325: ...nputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn INT Input signal bInvers BOOL Invert sign of the output signal FALSE TRUE nNum INT Factor numerator Internal limitation to 32767 1 1 32767 wDenom WORD Factor denominator Internal limitation to 1 32767 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 100 16384 Note Conversion is remainder consid...

Page 1326: ...d input The input has the highest priority TRUE Accept starting value wLdVal wLdVal WORD Starting value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most significant bit determines the sign wCmpVal WORD Comparison value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most significant bit determines the sign Designator Data type Value m...

Page 1327: ... in C01101 1 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE Function Auto reset If the statement of the comparison mode selected in C01101 1 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE for 1 ms and the counter is reset to the wLdVal starting value Function Manual reset If the statement of the comparison mode selected in C01101 1 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE and the counter stops Edges at ...

Page 1328: ... static state 1 is not permissible at this input bLoad BOOL Load input The input has the highest priority TRUE Accept starting value wLdVal wLdVal WORD Starting value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most significant bit determines the sign wCmpVal WORD Comparison value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most s...

Page 1329: ... to TRUE Function Auto reset If the statement of the comparison mode selected in C01101 2 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE for 1 ms and the counter is reset to the wLdVal starting value Function Manual reset If the statement of the comparison mode selected in C01101 2 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE and the counter stops Edges at bClkUp and bClkDown are ignored The counter mus...

Page 1330: ... static state 1 is not permissible at this input bLoad BOOL Load input The input has the highest priority TRUE Accept starting value wLdVal wLdVal WORD Starting value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most significant bit determines the sign wCmpVal WORD Comparison value Assigned value is internally interpreted as INT data type 32767 32767 i e the most s...

Page 1331: ... to TRUE Function Auto reset If the statement of the comparison mode selected in C01101 3 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE for 1 ms and the counter is reset to the wLdVal starting value Function Manual reset If the statement of the comparison mode selected in C01101 3 is true the bCompare output is set to TRUE and the counter stops Edges at bClkUp and bClkDown are ignored The counter mus...

Page 1332: ...Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input value x 16384 100 A limitation of the input value can be set in C00961 1 upper limit and C00961 2 lower limit Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output value y 16384 100 Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 bLimit BOOL Limitation active status signal TRUE The output value is limited to 199 99 Par...

Page 1333: ...oint will be output to nOut_a If the nIn_a input value lies between two X interpolation points the nOut_a output value will be interpolated linearly 17 22 Linear interpolation between two interpolation points C00963 1 32 32767 32767 X values for characteristic function Subcodes 1 32 correspond to interpolation point values X1 X32 16384 100 Lenze setting 0 Function 3 nOut_a f table C00964 1 32 3276...

Page 1334: ...ding order of the X values represents the end of the characteristic in our example X5 X4 Starting at the last valid pairs of variates extrapolation is performed on both sides until the end of the X value range 199 99 Special cases Step changes discontinuities can be displayed by using the same parameter setting for two consecutive X values A step change is only valid if it has a valid pair of vari...

Page 1335: ...polation point X2 X1 and a line is drawn through both interpolation points 17 24 Example Characteristic with only one defined interpolation point and X1 0 If only one interpolation point X1 is defined in the positive range a line is extrapolated 17 25 Example Characteristic with only one defined interpolation point and X1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 32 X 21300 130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y 6554 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 1336: ... Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input value x 16384 100 A limitation of the input value can be set in C01026 1 upper limit and C01026 2 lower limit Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output value y 16384 100 Internal limitation to 32767 199 99 bLimit BOOL Limitation active status signal TRUE The output value is limited to 199 99 Parameter...

Page 1337: ... X values for characteristic function Subcodes 1 32 correspond to interpolation point values X1 X32 16384 100 Lenze setting 0 See description of L_Curve_1 Function 3 nOut_a f table C01029 1 32 32767 32767 Y values for characteristic function Subcodes 1 32 correspond to interpolation point values Y1 Y32 16384 100 Lenze setting 0 See description of L_Curve_1 Function 3 nOut_a f table For a detailed ...

Page 1338: ...ristic Inputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input value x 16384 100 A limitation of the input value can be set in C01031 1 upper limit and C01031 2 lower limit When using the FB for tensile force characteristic from V12 00 00 Maximum tensile force setpoint in The following inputs are only relevant when the FB is used for tensile force characteristic nCurveCtrl_a INT ...

Page 1339: ... Parameters Possible settings Info C00959 3 199 99 199 99 Output value Read only C01030 1 Function selection 0 Out 0 FB deactivated Lenze setting 1 Out In 2 Out f In In preparation 3 Out f table See description of L_Curve_1 Function 3 nOut_a f table 4 Out f characteristic Use of the L_Curve_3 for tensile force characteristic C01031 1 199 99 199 99 Upper limit for input value Lenze setting 199 99 C...

Page 1340: ...tant evaluation 100 and a second range where the tensile force is adapted to the diameter The part of the characteristic that depends on the diameter can be generated for a linear tensile force profile a linear torque profile or based on a specified characteristic The respective selection is made in C01035 1 Linear tensile force profile nD0_a serves to define at which diameter the tensile force de...

Page 1341: ... the slope of the torque curve via dnCurveCtrl_n When nCurveCtrl_a 100 the tensile force remains unchanged When nCurveCtrl_a 0 the tensile force is reduced up to D0 DMax Characteristic for a linear torque profile C01035 1 2 Characteristic Tensile force Diameter Function for D D0 D Current diameter nDiameter_a D0 Initial point for diameter dependency nD0_a HW Tensile force valuation nCurveCtrl_a Ex...

Page 1342: ... diameter range of D0 DMax The values are to be set as raw values 16384 100 nD0_a serves to define the start of the table range D0 nCurveCtrl_a serves to change the slope of the characteristic When nCurveCtrl_a 0 the slope of the characteristic remains unchanged Tensile force profile according to defined characteristic C01035 3 6 Characteristic Tensile force Diameter Function for D D0 Table functi...

Page 1343: ... Function If the bClr input FALSE a signal edge at the bClk input switches the static input signal bD to the bOut output where it is retained Designator Data type Information possible settings bD BOOL Data input bClk BOOL Clock input Only FALSE TRUE edges are evaluated bClr BOOL Reset input TRUE The bOut output is set to FALSE The bNegOut output is set to TRUE Designator Data type Value meaning bO...

Page 1344: ...UE The output signal is kept in this status independent of the other input signals 17 1 71 L_DFlipFlop_2 The FB saves binary signals DFlipFlop in a clock controlled way Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bD BOOL Data input bClk BOOL Clock input Only FALSE TRUE edges are evaluated bClr BOOL Reset input TRUE The bOut output is set to FALSE The bNegOut output is set to ...

Page 1345: ... BOOL Ramp down ramp function generator to 0 quick stop function This input can for instance be connected to the status signal quick stop active TRUE Ramp down the ramp function generator to 0 The drive is brought to a standstill with the deceleration time set in C01076 2 bRfgStop BOOL Stop ramp function generator TRUE Stop ramp function generator The last status is output to nOut_v The speed angl...

Page 1346: ...ion set in C00011 It is a maximum value which limits the acceleration of the ramp function generator Lenze setting 1 000 s C01076 2 0 000 s 999 900 Deceleration time for quick stop of the slave drive Relating to the reference speed constant acceleration and deceleration set in C00011 It is a maximum value which limits the deceleration of the ramp function generator Lenze setting 0 000 s C01077 1 1...

Page 1347: ...sation window set in C01079 1 the bSync output is set to TRUE At the same time the FB switches the profile generator to inactive and outputs the nIn_v input speed to nOut_v 17 26 Example Synchronisation C01077 1 serves to set a maximum speed which limits the speed of the slave C01081 1 Sync direction TP function Selection of the direction of rotation for synchronising With high offset values and l...

Page 1348: ...he FB may travel oversynchronously for reducing the angular difference i e nOut_v is higher than nIn_v 17 28 Speed time diagram C00011 Reference speed C01076 1 Acceleration deceleration time Effective target speed Required time v t 0 1 v t 0 1 C01077 1 Maximum speed Identical surface below the speed profile that represents the covered path nOut_v nIn_v t nIn_v t 0 0 Note Set the maximum speed in C...

Page 1349: ...top function removes the drive from the interconnection and leads it to standstill Quick stop is activated by setting bRfg0 to TRUE C01076 2 is used to set the delay time in s which refers as the acceleration deceleration time to the reference speed C00011 The angle setpoint created internally on the basis of the input signal nIn_v is saved After bRfg0 is reset to FALSE the angle setpoint is appro...

Page 1350: ...er bRfgStop is reset to FALSE the angle setpoint is approached via the ramp function generator again 17 31 Example Stop function 17 1 72 4 Reset angle setpoint By setting bReset to TRUE the internally created angle setpoint is set to 0 and the ramp function generator is activated 17 1 72 5 Detecting the angular difference In C01078 1 a limit value for monitoring the angular difference between the ...

Page 1351: ...ator can be shifted Since this is only possible to a limited extent due to construction conditions in this case the better solution is selecting a virtual angular offset In order to reach angle synchronicity the difference between created setpoint and actual angle must be zero Behaviour without offset If the actual angle starts with an offset 0 a higher difference between setpoint angle and actual...

Page 1352: ...e to the acceleration of the slave from the input of the touch probe pulse Thus the time to synchronicity is shorter The offset refers to the master value selection and is scaled with an encoder revolution 65536 increments The offset can be determined empirically but it is sensible to calculate the required acceleration distance and select this value as offset Difference between setpoint angle and...

Page 1353: ...the FB has to reach its target with a too high offset 17 34 Example 2 With offset selection and reduced input speed Difference between setpoint angle and actual angle ϕDIFF Offset inc Reduced input speed t0 touch probe event t1 reaching synchronicity at original input speed t2 synchronicity reached j t TRUE FALSE bSync t v t jSET jACT t 0 t 2 t 1 nIn_v Note With a very low input speed the accelera...

Page 1354: ...E Synchronisation enabled bActTPReceived BOOL Input for detecting an actual value touch probe or zero pulse FALSE TRUE Actual value touch probe or zero pulse received bSetTPReceived BOOL Input for status signal Touch probe detected FALSE TRUE Touch probe or zero pulse received dnActTPPos_p DINT Input for accepting the position measured via touch probe at bActTPReceived dnSetTPPos_p DINT Input for ...

Page 1355: ...et angle integrators TRUE Positional deviation dnPosSetOut_p and dnDeltaPos_p are set to 0 nNAct_v INT Actual value in increments ms for calculating the actual position Scaling 16384 15000 rpm If this input is connected or assigned to an output the following error created from integration of this input and difference with the set position is used for the following error compensation in case of mar...

Page 1356: ... angle controller overflow occurs from a limit value of 2130706432 increments TRUE Angle controller overflow occurred Parameters Possible settings Info C01067 2 Invert gearbox nSet_v 0 not inverted 1 inverted 2 Automatically from MCK C01069 1 0 Incr ms 32767 Ramp SpeedTrim Lenze setting 10 incr ms From version 12 00 00 onwards this setting has a resolution increased by the factor 100 A value of 32...

Page 1357: ... downstream polynomial Bit 2 External angle correction 0 Internal angle correction 1 External angle correction From version 13 00 00 Bit 3 Reserved Bit 7 C01074 1 0 16384 Divisor for actual value zero pulse Number of signals to be received at least until synchronisation gets active Initialisation 0 1 Note The settings 0 and 1 are functionally identical If 0 or 1 is set at least one pulse is requir...

Page 1358: ...ent synchronisation only with enable via the bZeroPulse input When bZeroPulse is set to TRUE a permanent zero pulse touch probe synchronisation is executed Correction is executed over the shortest possible path 10 One time synchronisation An angular difference is compensated over the shortest possible path 11 One time synchronisation An angle difference is compensated in CW direction 12 One time s...

Page 1359: ... and gearbox factor Stretching factor The stretch factor is required for the speed synchronism via master value cascade mode It defines the ratio the slave drive is to be running with regard to its master value The stretch factor evaluates the setpoint at the nSet_v input The stretch factor must be selected via the wGainNum and wGainDenom inputs in the form of numerators and denominators The resul...

Page 1360: ...tGearTrim_v and nSetGearTrim_a Scaling nSetGearTrim_v 16384 15000 rpm Scaling nSetGearTrim_a 16384 100 reference speed C00011 17 1 73 3 Processing correction values Speed trimming Speed trimming enables the connection of correction values e g from a higher level control loop This permits an acceleration or deceleration of the drive The correction value can either be transmitted as an analog value ...

Page 1361: ...set in C01072 1 Angular offset The dnPosOffset_p input serves to define a permanent angular offset for the setpoint of the drive An adjustment takes place via the following error dnDeltaPos_p output and via the speed change at the nSpeedSetOut_v output Example A angular offset of 90 is to be set on the load side with a gearbox ratio of 3 8147 Speed proportional angle adjustment The speed proportio...

Page 1362: ...nchronisation inactive Lenze setting 1 Permanent synchronisation without enable via the bZeroPulse input Correction is executed over the shortest possible path The synchronisation only takes place after 2 setpoint pulses have been received at the bSetTPReceived input required pulse order set actual set See illustration 17 37 1363 2 Permanentsynchronisationonlywithenableviathe bZeroPulse input When...

Page 1363: ...es 1 2 10 11 12 17 38 Synchronisation process in mode 13 Synchronisation mode C01075 1 1 2 10 11 12 Divisor for actual value zero pulse C01074 1 0 or 1 Divisor for setpoint zero pulse C01074 2 0 or 1 TRUE FALSE bAck t v t t TRUE FALSE bSetTPReceived t TRUE FALSE bActTPReceived Synchronisation mode C01075 1 13 Divisor for actual value zero pulse C01074 1 0 or 1 Divisor for setpoint zero pulse C0107...

Page 1364: ... correspond to reality 17 39 Example Compensation process setting Info Bit 1 Angle correction with polynomial If this bit is set Lenze setting the compensating movement is rounded by polynomial The angle error to be compensated is limited to 1073741823 increments due to the system This applies in general when the L_DFSET_1 carries out the compensation The maximum compensating speed can be set in C...

Page 1365: ...cannot follow its setpoint angle Possible causes The centrifugal mass is too high for the set acceleration or deceleration time The torque limit has been reached load torque drive torque Remedy Unload drive or increase torque limit at the servo controller if the power limits of the inverter have not yet been reached The following error is derived from the angular difference of the setpoint angle i...

Page 1366: ...This FB applies a time delay to binary signals ON and OFF deceleration can be parameterised separately Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal time delayed input signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00720 1 0 000 s 3600 000 ON deceleration Lenze setting 0 000 s C00720 2 0 000 ...

Page 1367: ...n 1 A FALSE TRUE edge at bIn starts the internal timing element for the ON delay 2 After the defined ON delay the input signal bIn is output at bOut 3 A TRUE FALSE edge at bIn starts the internal timing element for the OFF delay 4 After the defined OFF delay the input signal bIn is output at bOut ON delay OFF delay Internal timing element for ON delay retriggerable Internal timing element for OFF ...

Page 1368: ...elay to binary signals ON and OFF deceleration can be parameterised separately Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal time delayed input signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00721 1 0 000 s 3600 000 ON deceleration Lenze setting 0 000 s C00721 2 0 000 s 3600 000 OFF decelerat...

Page 1369: ...elay to binary signals ON and OFF deceleration can be parameterised separately Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal time delayed input signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00721 3 0 000 s 3600 000 ON deceleration Lenze setting 0 000 s C00721 4 0 000 s 3600 000 OFF decelerat...

Page 1370: ...nary values independent from the input signals can be output Output of a constant binary value AND operation of the inputs OR operation of the inputs Output depending on the combination of the input signals Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 BOOL Input signal 1 bIn2 BOOL Input signal 2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal 3 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output ...

Page 1371: ... truth table bOut2 f truth table bOut3 f truth table The output value depends on the truth table parameterised in C00821 1 24 bOut2 and bOut3 are available from version 16 00 00 onwards C00821 1 24 Truth table for function 4 bOut f truth table Each of the eight possible input combinations can be assigned to the output value FALSE or TRUE For an application example see the following section 0 FALSE...

Page 1372: ...nary values independent from the input signals can be output Output of a constant binary value AND operation of the inputs OR operation of the inputs Output depending on the combination of the input signals Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 BOOL Input signal 1 bIn2 BOOL Input signal 2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal 3 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output ...

Page 1373: ... truth table bOut2 f truth table bOut3 f truth table The output value depends on the truth table parameterised in C00823 1 24 bOut2 and bOut3 are available from version 16 00 00 onwards C00823 1 24 Truth table for function 4 bOut f truth table Each of the eight possible input combinations can be assigned to the output value FALSE or TRUE For an application example see the following section 0 FALSE...

Page 1374: ...nary values independent from the input signals can be output Output of a constant binary value AND operation of the inputs OR operation of the inputs Output depending on the combination of the input signals Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 BOOL Input signal 1 bIn2 BOOL Input signal 2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal 3 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output ...

Page 1375: ... truth table bOut2 f truth table bOut3 f truth table The output value depends on the truth table parameterised in C00829 1 24 bOut2 and bOut3 are available from version 16 00 00 onwards C00829 1 24 Truth table for function 4 bOut f truth table Each of the eight possible input combinations can be assigned to the output value FALSE or TRUE For an application example see the following section 0 FALSE...

Page 1376: ...ination of the input signals Inputs Outputs Parameters Truth table for C00824 4 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn5 BOOL Input signal 1 5 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00824 Function selection 0 0 Constant value FALSE 1 1 Constant value TRUE 2 bOut f truth table The output value depends on the parameterised tr...

Page 1377: ...l combination bln1 TRUE bln2 FALSE bln3 TRUE bIn4 TRUE and bIn5 TRUE the output signal bOut is to be TRUE C00825 30 must be set to TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE C00825 3 FALSE or TRUE C00825 FALSE or TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE C00825 30 FALSE or TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE C00825 31 FALSE or TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE C00825 32 FALSE or TRUE bIn5 bIn4 bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 Output signal bOu...

Page 1378: ...ination of the input signals Inputs Outputs Parameters Truth table for C00826 4 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn5 BOOL Input signal 1 5 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00826 Function selection 0 0 Constant value FALSE 1 1 Constant value TRUE 2 bOut f truth table The output value depends on the parameterised tr...

Page 1379: ...l combination bln1 TRUE bln2 FALSE bln3 TRUE bIn4 TRUE and bIn5 TRUE the output signal bOut is to be TRUE C00827 30 must be set to TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE C00827 3 FALSE or TRUE C00827 FALSE or TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE C00827 30 FALSE or TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE C00827 31 FALSE or TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE C00827 32 FALSE or TRUE bIn5 bIn4 bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 Output signal bOu...

Page 1380: ...ing nOut_a INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00251 10 ms 5000 Time constant Tn Lenze setting 1000 ms C00252 320 00 320 00 Gain factor Vp Lenze setting 1 00 C00253 Note The most significant bit determines the sign of the value the remaining bits determine the numerical value Selection of sensitivity Depending on the selection the number of indicated higher order bits is evaluated...

Page 1381: ...type Information possible settings bSelect1 bSelect8 BOOL Binary coded selection of the fixed value to be output See truth table displayed in the FB above Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output of the selected fixed value wSelect WORD Current selection 0 15 Parameters Possible settings Info C00660 1 16 199 99 199 99 Fixed value 0 15 Lenze setting 0 00 B L 6HWBDB Q2XWBD E6HOHFW Z6HOHF...

Page 1382: ...ata type Information possible settings bSelect1 bSelect8 BOOL Binary coded selection of the fixed value to be output See truth table displayed in the FB above Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output of the selected fixed value wSelect WORD Current selection 0 15 Parameters Possible settings Info C00661 1 16 0 65535 Fixed values 0 15 Lenze setting 0 B L 6HWBZB Z2XW E6HOHFW Z6HOHFW E6HOH...

Page 1383: ...ata type Information possible settings bSelect1 bSelect8 BOOL Binary coded selection of the fixed value to be output See truth table displayed in the FB above Designator Data type Value meaning wOut WORD Output of the selected fixed value wSelect WORD Current selection 0 15 Parameters Possible settings Info C00662 1 16 0 65535 Fixed values 0 15 Lenze setting 0 B L 6HWBZB Z2XW E6HOHFW Z6HOHFW E6HOH...

Page 1384: ...he internal calculations addition and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via FB inputs The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 nGain_a INT Gain factor Sc...

Page 1385: ...he internal calculations addition and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via FB inputs The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 nGain_a INT Gain factor Sc...

Page 1386: ...he internal calculations addition and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via FB inputs The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 nGain_a INT Gain factor Sc...

Page 1387: ...on and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via parameters The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT...

Page 1388: ...on and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via parameters The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT...

Page 1389: ...on and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via parameters The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT...

Page 1390: ... without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via parameters The value provided at the dnOut_p output is internally limited to 231 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parame...

Page 1391: ... without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Gain and offset are selected via parameters The value provided at the dnOut_p output is internally limited to 231 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parame...

Page 1392: ...gearboxes or long transmission shafts Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nTorque_a INT Torque demand 16384 100 dnPhiIn_p DINT Angle setpoint 65536 increments 1 motor revolution Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Corrected angle setpoint 65536 increments 1 motor revolution Parameters Possible settings Info C01047 1 16383 16383 Offset Static tor...

Page 1393: ...es in loaded and unloaded status In order to compensate errors caused by elasticity the actual torque at the nTorque_a input is applied This torque is a measure for the current load The multiplication by an elasticity factor results in an angle compensation value which is added to the setpoint angle correctly signed depending on the direction of the torque This serves to correct the false position...

Page 1394: ...ctivated bSpeedAct0 BOOL Input for detecting the Current speed is zero status This status signal needs to be transmitted by the setpoint source to ensure trouble free operation TRUE Current speed is zero Designator Data type Value meaning dnPhOut_p DINT Output of the dnPhIn_p position setpoint which if applicable has been interpolated and completed nPhdOut_v INT Output of the nPhdIn_v angular velo...

Page 1395: ... C00950 1 Signal interpolation of the dnPhIn_p and nNIn_a input signals Lenze setting Off Signal interpolation 1395 0 Off 1 On C00950 2 Signal monitoring of the dnPhIn_p input signal Lenze setting Off Signal monitoring 1396 0 Off 1 On C00951 1 65535 Number of interpolation steps Corresponds to the receive cycle of the data telegrams in ms Lenze setting 1 C00952 0 65535 Limit value for missing data...

Page 1396: ...am has been received The evaluation of the bSpeedAct0 status signal gives information about which reason applies This status signal needs to be transmitted by the setpoint source to ensure trouble free operation bSpeedAct0 FALSE means that the speed is not zero so an error is assumed The signal characteristic of the dnPhIn_p input signal is completed the current slope is retained bSpeedAct0 TRUE m...

Page 1397: ...d signal at nNIn_a is provided almost 1 1 at the nNOut_a output In case of a telegram error a correction value can be added to the signal This correction value results from the subtraction of the integrated speed signal from the position value applied at dnPhiIn_p If for example a data telegram should fail the input values remain constant for one program cycle During the next cycle the correct pos...

Page 1398: ...bInputSel1 and bInputSel2 are both set to FALSE the two control signals are output one to one at the bJog1Out and bJog2Out outputs To achieve the desired behaviour starting at high speed pre switch off at low speed both inputs must be set to TRUE Fixed setpoint 2 must be less than fixed setpoint 3 Otherwise the drive will start at a low speed and accelerate after the pre switch off If in addition ...

Page 1399: ...eeds in the setpoint generator Connect this output to the bJog2 input of the L_NSet FB Input Function Response in the L_NSet FB bInputSel1 bInputSel2 FALSE FALSE Pre switch off inactive No response The bRfgIn input signal is directly provided at the bRfgOut output The bJogIn1 and bJogIn2 input signals are directly output at the bJog1Out and bJog2Out outputs TRUE FALSE The bSlowDown1 and bStop1 inp...

Page 1400: ...ose upper and lower limit can be set via parameters Inputs Outputs Parameters Tip Always set the lower limit lower than the upper limit otherwise value 0 is provided at the nOut_a output Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Scaling 16384 100 Parameters Possible settings Info C00630 1 ...

Page 1401: ...ose upper and lower limit can be set via parameters Inputs Outputs Parameters Tip Always set the lower limit lower than the upper limit otherwise value 0 is provided at the nOut_a output Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Scaling 16384 100 Parameters Possible settings Info C00630 3 ...

Page 1402: ...per and lower limit can be set via parameters Inputs Outputs Parameters Tip Always set the lower limit lower than the upper limit otherwise value 0 is provided at the dnOut_p output Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00631 1 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Lower limit ...

Page 1403: ...per and lower limit can be set via parameters Inputs Outputs Parameters Tip Always set the lower limit lower than the upper limit otherwise value 0 is provided at the dnOut_p output Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00631 3 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Lower limit ...

Page 1404: ...per and lower limit can be set via parameters Inputs Outputs Parameters Tip Always set the lower limit lower than the upper limit otherwise value 0 is provided at the dnOut_p output Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00631 5 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Lower limit ...

Page 1405: ...ttings nAdapt_a INT Dynamic adaptation of the proportional gain of the DC bus voltage controller The resulting proportional gain results from Scaling 16384 100 nConst_a INT nDCSet_a INT Voltage setpoint on which the DC bus voltage is to be kept Scaling 16384 1000 V nNset_a INT Speed setpoint in Scaling 16384 100 reference speed C00011 bFault BOOL Activating the mains failure control TRUE Activate ...

Page 1406: ...ntrol is active bNCtrlIReset BOOL Control signal for resetting the I component of the speed controller in the motor control Connect this output with the bSpeedCtrlIOn input of the SB LS_MotionControlKernel if this is connected upstream to the motor control TRUE Reset I component of the speed controller of the motor control Parameters Possible settings Info C01469 1 0 001 31 000 Vp Lenze setting 1 ...

Page 1407: ...n function 2 In1 In2 has to be set for the FB L_Compare_3 in C00690 For specifying the operating threshold the SB LS_ParFree_a_2 is used This system block can output 16 parameterisable analog signals In the shown example the operating threshold has to be set in the free parameter C00476 1 17 43 Interconnection example 1 Evaluation of the DC bus voltage with a comparator cutout Use of an external m...

Page 1408: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Combination of the above shown proceedings The combination of the proceedings can be simply realised via an OR operation 17 45 Interconnection example 3 Mains failure control of different sources ...

Page 1409: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 102 2 Signal flow for mains failure control The following illustration shows the basic signal flow cutout for a mains failure control 17 46 Signal flow detail Note The following interconnection example is not functional yet For an error free function connect e g the FB L_NSet_1 with further signals ...

Page 1410: ...point on which the DC bus voltage is to be kept The voltage setpoint has to be set in the free parameter C00476 2 nNset_a Speed setpoint path output nNOut_a bFault Activating the mains failure control Procedure of the mains failure control 1407 bReset Reset mains failure control The free bFreeIn2 input of the application block used in the example can be e g connected to a digital input on I O leve...

Page 1411: ...ation is the value at nSet_a This input is appropriately connected to the actual speed value nMotorSpeedAct_a of the SB LS_MotorInterface The speed deceleration ramp and hence the braking torque results from the moment of inertia of the load machine s the power loss of the drive system and the set parameter setting Stopping cancelling the mains failure control When bFault is reset to FALSE an inte...

Page 1412: ... you can raise the operating threshold OUon and the reset threshold OUoff by 10 V via bit 14 in C02864 1 The operating thresholds for undervoltage LU and overvoltage OU depend on the setting in C00173 4 Set the voltage setpoint in C00476 2 the DC bus voltage is to be controlled to Scaling 100 1000 V Recommended setting approx 700 V C00476 2 70 17 1 102 5 Commissioning the mains failure control Com...

Page 1413: ...lure control via detection of the DC bus voltage level Set the deceleration time measured under point 2 in C01470 3 In case of mains failure control via an external system Set the time in which the drive is to be continued to be brought to a standstill under control at short term mains recovery in C01470 3 4 Switch off the supply voltage mains or DC bus The following profile is to be shown on the ...

Page 1414: ...nection example via the free parameter C00476 2 3 Increasing the deceleration time or reducing the braking torque is only possible to a limited extent Increasing the acceleration time in C01470 2 reduces the initial braking torque and simultaneously increases the deceleration time Increasing the Vdc controller reset time in C01470 1 reduces the braking torque and simultaneously increases the decel...

Page 1415: ...the drive is continued to be braked in a controlled way This function is only stopped by setting bReset to TRUE If the speed is above the restart threshold after mains recovery the drive changes to its setpoint nNSet_a The function is switched inactive when nThreshold_a 0 A reset takes place by setting bReset to TRUE and is required after every mains switching In this case the bActive output is se...

Page 1416: ...wn With switching to TRUE the value applied to nIn_a is automatically transferred to the motor potentiometer FALSE The value applied to nIn_a is output at nOut_a nln_a INT When bEnable FALSE the analog nIn_ is input signal switched to the nOut_a output bUp BOOL Approaching of the upper speed limit value set in C00800 TRUE The nOut_a output signal runs to its upper limit value nHighLimit If the bDo...

Page 1417: ...otentiometer returns to 0 within the deceleration time Tif 2 The motor potentiometer runs to the lower limit value C00801 within the deceleration time Tif 3 The motor potentiometer output immediately changes to 0 Important for the emergency stop function 4 The motor potentiometer output immediately changes to the lower limit value C00801 5 The motor potentiometer runs to the upper limit value C008...

Page 1418: ...mit with the Ti times set This process is independent of the control signals at bUp and bDown When the nOut_a output signal is inside the limits set the output signal changes according to the control signals at bUp and bDown 17 49 Example Control of the motor potentiometer nOut_a t t TRUE FALSE bUp t TRUE FALSE bDown nHighLimit nLowLimit 0 wTir wTir wTif wTir bUp bDown bInact Function FALSE FALSE ...

Page 1419: ...eactivated by setting bInAct to TRUE the nOut_a output signal responds according to the function selected via Function 17 50 Example Deactivation of the motor potentiometer when the Function 1 has been selected When the motor potentiometer is deactivated nOut_a is reduced to 0 with the deceleration time wTif If it is activated again nOut_a is increased again to nLowLimit with the acceleration time...

Page 1420: ...alue of the factor is determined by a quotient consisting of numerator and denominator The value output at nOut_a is limited to 199 99 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1 INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Product value result of the multiplication Internal limitation to 32767 Pa...

Page 1421: ...alue of the factor is determined by a quotient consisting of numerator and denominator The value output at nOut_a is limited to 199 99 Division is not remainder considered Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn1 INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Product value result of the multiplication Internal limitation to 32767 Pa...

Page 1422: ...als dnIn1_p dnIn8_p at the output dnOut_p The selection is made by means of the signal at the input wInSelect Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wInSelect WORD Input signal 1 8 The values 1 8 select the input signal to be applied to the output Values from 1 8 set the dnOut_p output to 0 dnIn1_p DINT dnIn8_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p...

Page 1423: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 107 L_Negation_1 This FB converts the sign of the input signal i e the input signal is multiplied by the value 1 and is then output With the value 32768 at the nIn_a input the value 32767 is provided at the nOut_a output Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal B1HJDWL...

Page 1424: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 108 L_Negation_2 This FB converts the sign of the input signal i e the input signal is multiplied by the value 1 and is then output With the value 32768 at the nIn_a input the value 32767 is provided at the nOut_a output Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal B1HJDWL...

Page 1425: ...vated The input signal is output one to one at the nOut_a output TRUE The FB has been activated Zone masking of the input signal is carried out according to the parameterised blocking zones nIn_a INT Input signal Identifier data type Value meaning wState WORD Bit coded status word Bits that are not listed are reserved for future extensions Bit 0 No blocking zone active Bit 1 Blocking zone 1 active...

Page 1426: ... parameterisable blocking zones in our example L_NLim_1 The parameterised blocking zones have the same effect on negative input signals A blocking zone is deactivated by entering identical limit values in our example blocking zone 3 Parameters Possible settings Info C00807 1 3 0 00 199 99 Max skip frequency 1 3 Lenze setting 0 00 C00808 1 3 0 00 199 99 Min skip frequency 1 3 Lenze setting 0 00 Par...

Page 1427: ... zones form a new zone In this case the status display wState output will also just display one zone the lower one of the two original zones Abutting blocking zones If two blocking zones abut e g 20 30 and 30 40 the limit value between the two zones in this example 30 is also passed through The same applies to a limit range of 0 xx At the zero crossing of the nIn_a input signal a value of 0 is als...

Page 1428: ...vated The input signal is output one to one at the nOut_a output TRUE The FB has been activated Zone masking of the input signal is carried out according to the parameterised blocking zones nIn_a INT Input signal Identifier data type Value meaning wState WORD Bit coded status word Bits that are not listed are reserved for future extensions Bit 0 No blocking zone active Bit 1 Blocking zone 1 active...

Page 1429: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Parameters Parameters Possible settings Info C00809 1 3 0 00 199 99 Max skip frequency 1 3 Lenze setting 0 00 C00810 1 3 0 00 199 99 Min skip frequency 1 3 Lenze setting 0 00 For a detailed functional description see L_NLim_1 ...

Page 1430: ...1 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs 17 1 112 L_Not_2 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Result of the NOT operation negated input signal B1RWB E Q E2XW Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Res...

Page 1431: ...3 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs 17 1 114 L_Not_4 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Result of the NOT operation negated input signal B1RWB E Q E2XW Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Res...

Page 1432: ...5 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs 17 1 116 L_Not_6 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Result of the NOT operation negated input signal B1RWB E Q E2XW Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Res...

Page 1433: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 117 L_Not_7 This FB negates a BOOL data type signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning bIn BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Result of the NOT operation negated input signal B1RWB E Q E2XW ...

Page 1434: ... with the following functions Ramp function generator With linear ramps for main and additional setpoint path With S shaped ramp PT1 rounding Setting and holding Internal limitation of the input signal 3 adjustable blocking zones Arithmetic function 15 fixed setpoints JOG setpoints 15 acceleration and deceleration times Q QK9DOBD E5IJ6WRS E5IJ Q6HWBD E RDG E1 GG QY Q1 GGBD E WHUQDO 1 E5IJ T r Z6WD...

Page 1435: ...overriding fixed setpoints JOG setpoints for the main setpoint Selection inputs are binary coded bTI1 bTI8 BOOL Selection inputs for alternative acceleration deceleration times for the main setpoint Selection inputs are binary coded nSet_a INT Starting value which is loaded into the main setpoint integrator by setting bLoad to TRUE bLoad BOOL Control of both ramp function generators in special sit...

Page 1436: ... 900 Deceleration time Tif for the main setpoint Lenze setting 0 000 s C00039 1 15 199 99 199 99 Fixed setpoints JOG setpoints Lenze setting 0 00 C00101 1 15 0 000 s 999 900 Alternative acceleration times Tir for the main setpoint Lenze setting 0 000 s C00103 1 15 0 000 s 999 900 Alternative deceleration times Tif for the main setpoint Lenze setting 0 000 s C00134 Activates ramp rounding with PT1 ...

Page 1437: ... not be constant Lenze setting 0 00 C00634 Status bit coded Bits that are not listed are reserved for future extensions Bit 0 No blocking zone active Bit 1 Blocking zone 1 active Bit 2 Blocking zone 2 active Bit 3 Blocking zone 3 active Bit 4 Jog in blocking zone Bit 5 MaxLimit active Bit 6 MinLimit active C00635 199 99 199 99 nMaxLimit Maximum speed setpoint for speed setpoint limitation Lenze se...

Page 1438: ...s are binary coded and can be called using the bJog1 bJog8 selection inputs so that 15 options are available The number of selection inputs to be assigned depends on the number of JOG setpoints required Selection inputs Main setpoint Main setpoint bJog8 bJog4 bJog2 bJog1 FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE nNset_a FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE C00039 1 FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE C00039 2 FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE C00039 3 F...

Page 1439: ...5 MaxLimit default setting 199 99 C00636 MinLimit default setting 199 99 17 1 118 5 Skip frequency function If the speed setpoints in speed variable drives are linearly increasing for instance the frequency speed range is divided into a number of equal time segments Therefore there may be speeds during acceleration time which must be bridged very fast e g natural resonant frequencies The skip freq...

Page 1440: ...le by the ramp function generator The example below shows the parameter setting of two blocking zones 17 52 Zone masking by means of parameterisable blocking zones The parameterised blocking zones have the same effect on negative input signals A blocking zone is deactivated by entering identical limit values in our example blocking zone 3 Parameters Blocking zone 1 Blocking zone 2 Blocking zone 3 ...

Page 1441: ...p As described above the acceleration phase starts after the blocking zones have been passed through The ramp function generator integrated in the L_Nset function block limits the progression of the speed For this reason the time values set for the integrated ramp function generator should be as low as possible whereas the setpoint for the L_NSet function block should be generated by a ramp functi...

Page 1442: ...nerator runs to 0 along its deceleration ramp Furthermore it is possible to load the ramp function generator online with a defined value For this purpose bLoad must be set to TRUE As long as this input is set the value at nSet_a is transferred to the ramp function generator and provided at the output Selection inputs Used Acceleration time Used Deceleration time bTI8 bTI4 bTI2 bTI1 FALSE FALSE FAL...

Page 1443: ...E The ramp function generator follows the input value via the set ramps FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE Stop the ramp function generator The value at the output of the ramp function generator is held FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE Ramp down the ramp function generator The ramp function generator runs to 0 within the set deceleration time FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE Load ramp function generator onl...

Page 1444: ...he following arithmetic combination of main setpoint and additional setpoint can be selected in C00190 17 1 118 9 Application example for the additional load function The motor control of the drive is provided with a function for automatically carrying along ramp function generators for jerk free setpoint connection For speed controlled drive tasks the LS_MotorInterface SB outputs the current actu...

Page 1445: ...values will be overwritten Otherwise the measurement will stop Inputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnInPosition_p DINT Position measurement input Input is only evaluated if C01022 0 Pos input has been set nInSpeed_v INT Speed measurement input The speed is internally integrated into a position Input is only evaluated if C01022 1 V input has been set bTriggerPulse BOOL Detect ...

Page 1446: ...os_12_p Distance between dnPosOut_1_p and dnPosOut_1_p dnDeltaPos_23_p Distance between dnPosOut_2_p and dnPosOut_3_p dnDeltaPos_34_p Distance between dnPosOut_3_p and dnPosOut_4_p dnDeltaPos_18_p Distance between dnPosOut_1_p and dnPosOut_8_p wLastMeasure WORD Memory location number 1 8 of the last measurement Parameters Possible settings Info C01020 Memory length Lenze setting 7 measurements 1 1...

Page 1447: ...internal calculations addition and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via FB inputs The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 nOffset_a INT Offset Scaling ...

Page 1448: ...internal calculations addition and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via FB inputs The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 nOffset_a INT Offset Scaling ...

Page 1449: ...internal calculations addition and subtraction are carried out with 32 bits without overflow underflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via FB inputs The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Scaling 16384 100 nOffset_a INT Offset Scaling ...

Page 1450: ...erflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via parameters The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00670 ...

Page 1451: ...erflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via parameters The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00671 ...

Page 1452: ...erflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via parameters The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to 199 99 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 199 99 Parameters Possible settings Info C00672 ...

Page 1453: ...flow underflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via parameters The value provided at the dnOut_p output is internally limited to 231 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parameters Possible...

Page 1454: ...flow underflow Division is not remainder considered Offset and gain are selected via parameters The value provided at the dnOut_p output is internally limited to 231 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal Internal limitation to 231 1 2147483647 Parameters Possible...

Page 1455: ...r_1 This FB implements the OR operation of input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 54 Truth table of the FB L_Or_1 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE ...

Page 1456: ...r_2 This FB implements the OR operation of input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 55 Truth table of the FB L_Or_2 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE ...

Page 1457: ...r_3 This FB implements the OR operation of input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 56 Truth table of the L_Or_3 FB Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE ...

Page 1458: ...r_4 This FB implements the OR operation of input signals Inputs Outputs Function 17 57 Truth table of the L_Or_4 FB Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn2 bIn3 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE ...

Page 1459: ...nals Inputs Outputs Function 17 58 Truth table of the FB L_Or5_1 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn5 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn5 bIn4 bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FAL...

Page 1460: ...nals Inputs Outputs Function 17 59 Truth table of the FB L_Or5_2 Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn1 bIn5 BOOL Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output signal Inputs Output bIn5 bIn4 bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FAL...

Page 1461: ...tion of the controller output Factorisation of the output signal Vp adaptation Integral action component can be switched off Comparison function Actual value setpoint Inputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nAdapt_a INT Percentage adaptation of the gain Vp set in C00222 and the reset time Tn set in C00223 Then the adapted reset time is as follows Internal limitation to 199 99 Cha...

Page 1462: ... online Display parameter C00833 77 TRUE The I component of the process controller is set to zero nInfluence_a INT Limitation of the influencing factor in percent nInfluence_a serves to limit the influencing factor of the PID controller contained in the FB to a required value 199 99 199 99 Scaling 16384 100 Internal limitation to 199 99 Display parameter C00830 64 bEnableInfluenceRamp BOOL Activat...

Page 1463: ... factor nInfluence_a There is no connection with the additive input nNSet_a Scaling 16384 100 Display parameter C00245 nInfluenceOut_a INT Current influencing factor ramp status on the PID output value Scaling 16384 100 Parameters Possible settings Info C00222 0 1 0 1 500 0 Gain Vp Lenze setting 1 0 C00223 20 ms 6000 Reset time Tn Lenze setting 400 ms C00224 0 0 0 1 5 0 Differential component Kd L...

Page 1464: ...a is not considered 3 nNSet_PID nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values The input nSet_a is not considered 4 nNSet nSet_PID nSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values The arriving nNSet_a setpoint is additively linked to the value output by the PID element 5 nNSet nSet_PID nSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values The setpoint nNSet_a is output at the output nOut_a The PID output ...

Page 1465: ... Example With the parameterised controller gain Vp 2 0 and nAdapt_a 75 the resulting gain factor is as follows Integral action component I component The I component can be selected via the input nISet_a With a TRUE signal at bISet the assigned value is accepted in the PID controller Setting the adjustment time Tn to the maximum value of 6000 ms deactivates the I component The I component of the co...

Page 1466: ...ation can be set individually C00227 Acceleration time tir C00228 Deceleration time tif The tir tif values are converted into the required Ti times according to the following formula The ramp function generator is immediately set to 0 by setting bInAct to TRUE 17 1 134 3 Operating range of the PID process controller The value range of the input signal nSet_a and thus the operating range of the PID...

Page 1467: ...th the parameters Influence acceleration time C00243 and Influence deceleration time C00244 17 1 134 5 Comparison function Actual value setpoint If setpoint and actual value are identical and there is no system deviation the bSetEqAct status output is set to TRUE The hysteresis of the comparison function has a fixed value of 1 From version 06 00 00 onwards the symmetrical window around the setpoin...

Page 1468: ...n be done online Display parameter C00833 76 Note This input is not interconnected in the LA_NCtrl application block TRUE The current output value is frozen The internal control algorithm is stopped However a setpoint selected via input nNSet_a is still provided in operating modes 0 1 4 5 bIOff BOOL Switch off the I component of the process controller Changes can be done online Display parameter C...

Page 1469: ...Adaptive position value for the actual position bEn BOOL Activate addition of the adaptive position value FALSE 1 The speed signal at nIn_v is integrated by the angle integrator 2 The result of the angle integrator is subtracted from the angle signal at dnSet_p and output at dnOut_p afterwards TRUE The adaptive position value selected via dnAdd_p is added 1 The speed signal at nIn_v is integrated ...

Page 1470: ...Adaptive position value for the actual position bEn BOOL Activate addition of the adaptive position value FALSE 1 The speed signal at nIn_v is integrated by the angle integrator 2 The result of the angle integrator is subtracted from the angle signal at dnSet_p and output at dnOut_p afterwards TRUE The adaptive position value selected via dnAdd_p is added 1 The speed signal at nIn_v is integrated ...

Page 1471: ...e at dnSet_p and bStatus is reset to FALSE dnSet_p DINT Starting value for angle integrator Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Angle output signal 65536 incr 1 encoder revolution Overflow is possible display via bStatus bStatus BOOL Status signal Overflow occurred distance processed Status signal can be reset via bLoad TRUE Overflow has occurred or distance is processed Parameters Pos...

Page 1472: ...at dnSet_p and then immediately continues to integrate the bStatus output is set to FALSE A positive signal at nIn_v is incremented the counter content is increased with every function call A negative signal at nIn_v is decremented the counter content is reduced with every function call dnOut_p outputs the counter content of the bipolar integrator If the counter content exceeds a value of 32767 en...

Page 1473: ...LSE A positive signal at nIn_v is incremented the counter content is increased with every function call A negative signal at nIn_v is decremented the counter content is reduced with every function call dnOut_p outputs the counter content of the bipolar integrator If the positive counter content is higher than the comparison value set in C01151 x the comparison value will be subtracted from the cou...

Page 1474: ... detected according to the following formula Example You want to determine the counter content of the integrator at a certain speed at the input and a certain integration time t Given values nIn_v 1000 rpm integer value 1092 Integration time t 10 s Starting value of the integrator 0 Solution Conversion of the input signal at nIn_v Calculation of the output value t integration time 16384 15000 rpm ...

Page 1475: ...e at dnSet_p and bStatus is reset to FALSE dnSet_p DINT Starting value for angle integrator Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Angle output signal 65536 incr 1 encoder revolution Overflow is possible display via bStatus bStatus BOOL Status signal Overflow occurred distance processed Status signal can be reset via bLoad TRUE Overflow has occurred or distance is processed Parameters Pos...

Page 1476: ...2017 TD23 1476 17 Function library 17 1 Function blocks L_PhaseIntK_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ For a detailed functional description see L_PhaseIntK_1 ...

Page 1477: ...put angular difference wGearNum WORD Gearbox factor numerator wGearDenom WORD Gearbox factor denominator When wGearDenom 0 it is internally calculated with 1 dnTPPosition_p DINT Initialisation value bTPReceived BOOL Initialise integrator FALSE TRUE Initialise integrator bReset BOOL Reset integrator TRUE Reset integrator The integrator is not integrated bLoad BOOL Load integrator TRUE Load integrat...

Page 1478: ... value 32 bits bOvfl32 BOOL Status signal overflow 32 bits TRUE Overflow nOut16 INT Integrator value 16 bits bOvfl16 BOOL Status signal overflow 16 bits TRUE Overflow bInitDone BOOL Status signal Initialisation completed TRUE Integrator is initialised nSpeedGearAdd_v INT Resulting speed with additive speed nSet_v gearbox factor nSpeedAdd_v nSpeedGear_v INT Resulting speed without additive speed nS...

Page 1479: ...factors wGearNum and wGearDenom Evaluation of the gearbox factor is remainder considered A positive or negative overflow of the integrator is signalised by a TRUE signal for a task cycle at the bOvfl16 output for the nOut16 output or at the bOvfl32 output for the dnOut32_p output 17 65 Signal characteristic nOut16 nOut16 nSet_v wGearNum wGearDenom dnOut32_p dnOut32_p nSet_v wGearNum wGearDenom 1 2...

Page 1480: ...d dnLoadVal_p is made After initialisation is completed the bInitDone output is set to TRUE in the next call cycle In case of a renewed initialisation without a previous reset bReset TRUE the bInitDone output is set to FALSE for a task cycle Reset integrator When bReset is set to TRUE the integrator is set to 0 No calculations are made The Boolean outputs are set to FALSE The bReset input has the ...

Page 1481: ...ible if the bEnable input is set to TRUE FALSE No positioning positioning is aborted The speed at the nNOut_v output is braked to standstill via the deceleration ramp set in C01060 1 nNOut_v 0 At the same time the dnPosOut_p output is stopped FALSE TRUE Positioning is executed continued In case of an activated limit stop C01058 1 TRUE a renewed positive edge for a following positioning procedure i...

Page 1482: ...is FB or with another FB which outputs the actual position of the drive bEnable BOOL Activate deactivate positioning function This input has the highest priority FALSE Positioning function deactivated For behaviour see C01059 1 TRUE Positioning function activated Designator Data type Value meaning bInTarget BOOL Status signal Target position reached TRUE Target position reached nNOut_v INT Speed o...

Page 1483: ... dnAct_p The outputs dnPosOut_p and nNOut_v follow the value at the dnAct_p input actual position 2 dnOut_p nNOut_v follow dnSet_p The outputs dnPosOut_p and nNOut_v follow the value at the dnSet_p input setpoint 3 dnOut_p nNOut_v follow dnAct_p without limitation The outputs dnPosOut_p and nNOut_v follow the value at the dnAct_p input actual position but without limitation C01060 1 0 010 s 130 00...

Page 1484: ...ible if the bEnable input is set to TRUE FALSE No positioning positioning is aborted The speed at the nNOut_v output is braked to standstill via the deceleration ramp set in C01060 4 nNOut_v 0 At the same time the dnPosOut_p output is stopped FALSE TRUE Positioning is executed continued In case of an activated limit stop C01058 2 TRUE a renewed positive edge for a following positioning procedure i...

Page 1485: ...is FB or with another FB which outputs the actual position of the drive bEnable BOOL Activate deactivate positioning function This input has the highest priority FALSE Positioning function deactivated For behaviour see C01059 2 TRUE Positioning function activated Designator Data type Value meaning bInTarget BOOL Status signal Target position reached TRUE Target position reached nNOut_v INT Speed o...

Page 1486: ... dnAct_p The outputs dnPosOut_p and nNOut_v follow the value at the dnAct_p input actual position 2 dnOut_p nNOut_v follow dnSet_p The outputs dnPosOut_p and nNOut_v follow the value at the dnSet_p input setpoint 3 dnOut_p nNOut_v follow dnAct_p without limitation The outputs dnPosOut_p and nNOut_v follow the value at the dnAct_p input actual position but without limitation C01060 4 0 010 s 130 00...

Page 1487: ...nterface_1 1487 Lenze 8400 HighLine Reference manual DMS 12 0 EN 06 2017 TD23 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 142 L_PosiShaftCtrlInterface_1 FB in preparation ...

Page 1488: ...erruptible control Inputs Designator Data type Information possible settings nVpAdapt_a INT Proportional evaluation of the controller gain Vp Scaling 16384 100 Internal limitation to 0 16384 0 100 nSet_a INT Controller setpoint bLoadAct BOOL Accept actual controller value TRUE The actual controller value nAct_a is taken over into the ramp generator the low pass and the rate action nAct_a INT Actua...

Page 1489: ...f the rate action Internal limitation to 16384 100 Parameters Possible settings Info C01053 1 0 000 s 30 000 Acceleration deceleration time of the setpoint ramp generator Lenze setting 0 000 s C01053 2 0 000 s 30 000 Filter time constant for actual controller value Lenze setting 0 000 s C01053 3 0 000 s 30 000 Rate time for actual controller value Lenze setting 0 000 s C01053 4 0 000 s 30 000 Cont...

Page 1490: ... time Tn is set under C01053 4 The I component of the controller can be deactivated by setting the input bIOff to TRUE The I component can be switched on and off online Differential component Kd D component The differential component Kd is set under C01053 5 The setting 0 0 s deactivates the D component Lenze setting In this way the PID controller becomes a PI controller or P controller if the I c...

Page 1491: ...l value This keeps the system deviation equal to zero and I component of the controller Low pass and rate action in the actual value path In order to filter signal interferences more effectively you can activate a low pass in the actual value path The filter time constant for the low pass is set in C01053 2 The rate time constant in the feedback path can be set in C01053 3 This serves to compensat...

Page 1492: ...t T can be set under C00249 The gain is defined with Vp 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function 17 66 Filter time constant T of the first order delay element Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00249 0 ms 5000 Filter time constant The filter is not active with a setting o...

Page 1493: ... can be set in C00250 1 The gain is defined with Vp 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function 17 67 Filter time constant T of the first order delay element Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00250 1 0 ms 5000 Filter time constant The filter is not active with a setting of ...

Page 1494: ... can be set in C00250 2 The gain is defined with Vp 1 Inputs Outputs Parameters Function 17 68 Filter time constant T of the first order delay element Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning nOut INT Output signal Parameters Possible settings Info C00250 2 0 ms 5000 Filter time constant The filter is not active with a setting of ...

Page 1495: ...ible settings bCw BOOL Input TRUE CW rotation bCCw BOOL Input TRUE CCW rotation Designator Data type Value meaning bQSP BOOL Output signal for quick stop QSP bCwCcw BOOL Output signal for CW CCW rotation TRUE CCW rotation Inputs Outputs Notes bCw bCCw bCwCcw bQSP TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE The inputs have this status only if a TRUE signal is being applied to both inputs at the moment of switch on See al...

Page 1496: ...input signal at bSet serves to set the bOut output permanently An input signal at bReset serves to reset the output Additional inverted output bNegOut Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bSet BOOL Setting input TRUE The bOut output is set to TRUE The bNegOut output is set to FALSE bReset BOOL Reset input TRUE The bOut output is set to FALSE The bNegOut output is set t...

Page 1497: ...input signal at bSet serves to set the bOut output permanently An input signal at bReset serves to reset the output Additional inverted output bNegOut Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bSet BOOL Setting input TRUE The bOut output is set to TRUE The bNegOut output is set to FALSE bReset BOOL Reset input TRUE The bOut output is set to FALSE The bNegOut output is set t...

Page 1498: ...ut_a A signal change at nIn_a does not cause a change at nOut_a Behaviour after mains switching The last loaded value is permanently stored after switching of the supply voltage and reloaded after restart In order that the saved value is not immediately overwritten with the current input signal at nIn after restart bLoad must be set to FALSE at restart Designator Data type Information possible set...

Page 1499: ...ut_a A signal change at nIn_a does not cause a change at nOut_a Behaviour after mains switching The last loaded value is permanently stored after switching of the supply voltage and reloaded after restart In order that the saved value is not immediately overwritten with the current input signal at nIn after restart bLoad must be set to FALSE at restart Designator Data type Information possible set...

Page 1500: ...ffset and gain of the source signals are adjustable Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning nOut1_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 nOut2_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 nOut3_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 nOut4_a INT Output signal Internal limitation to 32767 Parameters Possible settings Info C00410 1 C00410 4 See selection list ana...

Page 1501: ...s of all function blocks provided in the device Inversion of the output signals can be set Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning bOut1 bOut4 BOOL Output signal FALSE TRUE Parameters Possible settings Info C00411 1 C00411 4 See selection list digital signals Selection of the signal sources for bOut1 bOut4 C00412 Value is bit coded Inversion Bit set inversion active Bit 0 bOut1 inver...

Page 1502: ..._ _ 17 1 154 L_SignalSwitch_1 This FB switches between two input signals of the WORD data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn1 WORD Input signal 1 wIn2 WORD Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at wOut FALSE wIn1 TRUE wIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning wOut ...

Page 1503: ..._ _ 17 1 155 L_SignalSwitch_2 This FB switches between two input signals of the WORD data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn1 WORD Input signal 1 wIn2 WORD Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at wOut FALSE wIn1 TRUE wIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning wOut ...

Page 1504: ..._ _ 17 1 156 L_SignalSwitch_3 This FB switches between two input signals of the WORD data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn1 WORD Input signal 1 wIn2 WORD Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at wOut FALSE wIn1 TRUE wIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning wOut ...

Page 1505: ..._ _ 17 1 157 L_SignalSwitch_4 This FB switches between two input signals of the WORD data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings wIn1 WORD Input signal 1 wIn2 WORD Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at wOut FALSE wIn1 TRUE wIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning wOut ...

Page 1506: ...7 1 158 L_SignalSwitch32_1 This FB switches between two input signals of the DINT data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1 DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2 DINT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at dnOut FALSE dnIn1 TRUE dnIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning dnO...

Page 1507: ...7 1 159 L_SignalSwitch32_2 This FB switches between two input signals of the DINT data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1 DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2 DINT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at dnOut FALSE dnIn1 TRUE dnIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning dnO...

Page 1508: ...7 1 160 L_SignalSwitch32_3 This FB switches between two input signals of the DINT data type The switch over is controlled by means of a boolean input signal Inputs Outputs Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn1 DINT Input signal 1 dnIn2 DINT Input signal 2 bSet BOOL Selection of the input signal for the output at dnOut FALSE dnIn1 TRUE dnIn2 Designator Data type Value meaning dnO...

Page 1509: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 1 161 L_SQrt_1 This FB outputs the square root of the DINT input value Inputs Outputs Function Designator Data type Information possible settings dnIn_p DINT Input signal Designator Data type Value meaning dnOut_p DINT Output signal B64UWB GQ QBS GQ2XWBS dnOut_p dnIn_p ...

Page 1510: ...t the dy dt slope of the nOut_a output signal is output Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal nSet_a INT Starting value for the ramp function generator Will be accepted if bLoad TRUE bLoad BOOL Initialise ramp function generator FALSE With the set acceleration deceleration time the ramp function generator switches over from the value lo...

Page 1511: ...ad TRUE the ramp function generator remains inhibited Acceleration Deceleration time and S ramp time The acceleration deceleration time and the S ramp time for jerk free acceleration can be set separately Acceleration Deceleration time Time until the nOut_a output value has reached the nIn_a input value S ramp time Time until the ramp function generator operates at maximum acceleration 17 70 Signa...

Page 1512: ...t the dy dt slope of the nOut_a output signal is output Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nIn_a INT Input signal nSet_a INT Starting value for the ramp function generator Will be accepted if bLoad TRUE bLoad BOOL Initialise ramp function generator FALSE With the set acceleration deceleration time the ramp function generator switches over from the value lo...

Page 1513: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ C01042 3 from version 05 00 00 199 99 s 199 99 Pos limit Initialisation 100 00 C01042 4 from version 05 00 00 199 99 s 199 99 Neg limit Initialisation 100 00 For a detailed functional description see L_SRFG_1 Parameters Possible settings Info ...

Page 1514: ...cams can be realised as well Inputs Designator Data type Information possible settings bDisable BOOL Deactivate position switch points This input has the highest priority TRUE Position switch points are deactivated Outputs bOut1 bOut4 FALSE dnActPos_p DINT Actual position in increments nActSpeed_v INT Actual speed in increments ms Scaling 16384 15000 rpm dnSwitchPointx_p DINT Position switch point...

Page 1515: ...tive values are permissible Designator Data type Value meaning bOut1 bOut4 BOOL Switching output 1 4 TRUE The actual position is inside the defined switching window nState INT Status 1 FB is not active 2 OK 3 The data form resulting from the switching points are not plausible dnSwitchPoint_p dn2ndPoint_Size_p parameterised hysteresis Parameters Possible settings Info C01062 1 4 0 μs 65535 Dead tim...

Page 1516: ...From this input and the current speed the FB calculates a preliminary stop i e the bOut switching output is set correspondingly earlier 17 72 Dead time compensation C01068 1 From version 12 00 00 Setting is bit coded Inversion of outputs Lenze setting 0x0000 Bit 0 Inversion of output 1 Bit 1 Inversion of output 2 Bit 2 Inversion of output 3 Bit 3 Inversion of output 4 Bit 4 Reserved Bit 15 Paramet...

Page 1517: ...steresis Setting a hysteresis in C01063 x serves to prevent a permanent state change of the bOut switching output that may be caused by actual position value changes due to a mechanical irregularity at the axis 17 73 Switching hysteresis Tip Please note that a delay time set in C01062 x shifts the switching points including the hysteresis C01063 1 Hysteresis CenterMode FALSE CenterMode TRUE bOut1 ...

Page 1518: ...s set to TRUE and reset to FALSE after the set switching time has elapsed 17 74 Position time based cams here without switching hysteresis and dead time compensation If the switching range is left before the running time has expired the bOut switching output is reset to FALSE 17 75 Position time based cams Behaviour when the switching range is left before the running time has expired Tip Please no...

Page 1519: ...able pulses Rising signal edges falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01138 1 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01138 1 Function Selection ...

Page 1520: ...as been set at the bIn input If an additional FALSE TRUE edge occurs at the bIn input the pulse duration starts again from the beginning i e the bOut output can be retriggered 17 1 165 2 Function 1 Evaluate falling signal edges 17 77 Switching performance for function selection 1 Low edge Functional sequence 1 A TRUE FALSE edge at the bIn inputs sets the bOut output to TRUE 2 After the parameteris...

Page 1521: ...s 17 78 Switching performance for function selection 2 High and low edge Functional sequence 1 A signal change FALSE TRUE edge or TRUE FALSE edge at the bIn input sets the bOut output to TRUE 2 After the parameterised pulse duration has elapsed the bOut output is reset to FALSE unless another signal change has taken place at the bIn input In case of another signal change at the input bIn the pulse...

Page 1522: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01138 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01138 2 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1523: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01138 3 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01138 3 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1524: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01138 4 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01138 4 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1525: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01140 1 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01140 1 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1526: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01140 2 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01140 2 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1527: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01140 3 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01140 3 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1528: ...es falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated Inputs Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings bIn BOOL Input for edge evaluation The function depends on the selection of edge evaluation in C01140 4 Designator Data type Value meaning bOut BOOL Output retriggerable Parameters Possible settings Info C01140 4 Function Selection of edge evaluation 0 High edg...

Page 1529: ... 344 LS_DisFree Display of 8 arbitrary 16 bit signals of the application on display codes LS_DisFree_a Display of 8 arbitrary analog signals of the application on display codes LS_DisFree_b Display of 16 arbitrary digital signals of the application on a bit coded display code LS_DisFree_p Display of 8 arbitrary position signals of the application on display codes LS_DriveInterface Interface to dri...

Page 1530: ...dWrite_6 Reading Writing of local parameters These SBs are available from version 04 00 00 LS_PulseGenerator Output of 9 fixed frequencies and 1 parameterisable frequency LS_RetainData Selection and saving of retain data This SB is available from version 11 00 00 LS_SetError_1 Parameterisable responses to user defined events are tripped Diagnostics error management 623 LS_SetError_2 LS_SyncManagem...

Page 1531: ...LS_DeviceMonitor Motor control status signals 17 2 6 LS_DigitalInput Interface to the digital input terminals 17 2 7 LS_DigitalOutput Interface to the digital output terminals For a detailed description see the main chapter I O terminals Internal interfaces System block LS_AnalogInput 355 For a detailed description see the main chapter I O terminals Internal interfaces System block LS_AnalogInput ...

Page 1532: ... For a detailed description see the main chapter I O terminals Internal interfaces System block LS_DigitalOutput 346 Designator Data type Information possible settings wDis1 wDis8 WORD From version 11 00 00 onwards wC481_1 wC481_8_a Inputs for any 16 bit signals of the application Note From version 11 00 00 the inputs are named according to the display parameter for an easier allocation Parameters...

Page 1533: ...11 00 00 onwards nC482_1_a nC482_8_a Inputs for arbitrary analog signals of the application Note From version 11 00 00 the inputs are named according to the display parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible settings Info C00482 1 8 199 99 199 99 Display of the analog signals which are applied at the nDis1_a nDis8_a inputs C00484 1 4 C00487 1 4 From version 06 00 00 onwards Display of ...

Page 1534: ...aling and an individual unit from keypad version 02 01 Configuration of the display parameters C00487 1 4 17 79 Formula for scaling the display Example 1 Input variable nDis1_a 100 Offset 1 C00484 1 0 Display factor 1 C00485 1 123 45 Text 1 C00486 1 parts Example 2 Input variable nDis2_a 40 Offset 2 C00484 2 35 Display factor 2 C00485 2 20 Text 2 C00486 2 kg Parameters Possible settings Info C0048...

Page 1535: ...rmation possible settings bDis1 bDis16 BOOL From version 11 00 00 onwards bC480_B0 bC480_B16 Inputs for arbitrary digital signals of the application Note From version 11 00 00 the inputs are named according to the display parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible settings Info C00480 0x0000 0xFFFF Display of the digital signals as hexadecimal values which are applied at the bDis1 bDis...

Page 1536: ...ignator Data type Information possible settings dnDis1_p dnDis8_p DINT From version 11 00 00 onwards dnC483_1_p dnC483_8_p Inputs for arbitrary position signals of the application Note From version 11 00 00 the inputs are named according to the display parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible settings Info C00483 1 8 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Display of the position signals which ar...

Page 1537: ... 1 1 Request quick stop bSetDCBrake BOOL C00727 2 1 Request DC injection braking nTorqueMotLim INT Torque limit in motor mode set in C00728 1 Lenze setting 100 00 nTorqueGenLim INT Torque limit in generator mode set in C00728 2 Lenze setting 100 00 bSetSpeedCcw BOOL C00727 3 1 Request reversal nMainSetValue INT Setpoint speed set in C00728 3 Lenze setting 0 00 bJogSpeed1 BOOL C00727 4 1 Request fi...

Page 1538: ...nal motor control Parameters Possible settings Info C00727 1 8 0 1 Keypad digital values Execution of control commands for keypad operation See the Outputs table for the meaning of the individual subcodes C00728 1 3 199 99 199 99 Analog values keypad Selection of various setpoints for operation via keypad See the Outputs table for the meaning of the individual subcodes For a detailed description s...

Page 1539: ...ion From version 11 00 00 another LS_ParFix_2 system block is available which can be used e g in the application level Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning bTrue BOOL 1 TRUE nPos100_a INT 16384 100 nNeg100_a INT 16384 100 nPos199_99_a INT 32767 199 99 nNeg199_99_a INT 32767 199 99 w65535 WORD 65535 0xFFFF wDriveCtrl WORD 9 0x0009 Bit 0 SwitchOn TRUE Bit 3 EnableOperation TRUE All others FALS...

Page 1540: ... bit signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning wPar1 wPar32 WORD From version 11 00 00 onwards wC471_1 wC471_32 Output of the 16 bit signals parameterised in C00471 1 32 The wPar9 wPar32 outputs are only available from version 04 00 00 Note From version 11 00 00 the outputs are named according to the respective setting parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible sett...

Page 1541: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 2 18 LS_ParFree_2 This system block outputs 32 parameterisable 16 bit signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning wC477_1 wC477_32 WORD Output of the 16 bit signals parameterised in C00477 1 32 Parameters Possible settings Info C00477 1 32 0x0000 0xFFFF Setting of the 16 bit signals to be output Z B Z B Z B Z B Z B 6B3DU UHHB ...

Page 1542: ...s Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning nPar1_a nPar16_a INT From version 11 00 00 onwards nC472_1_a nC472_16_a Output of the analog signals parameterised in C00472 1 16 The nPar9_a nPar16_a outputs are only available from version 04 00 00 Note From version 11 00 00 the outputs are named according to the respective setting parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible sett...

Page 1543: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 2 20 LS_ParFree_a_2 This system block outputs 16 parameterisable analog signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning nC476_1_a nC476_16_a INT Output of the analog signals parameterised in C00476 1 16 Parameters Possible settings Info C00476 1 16 199 99 199 99 Selection of analog signals to be output 6B3DU UHHBDB Q B BD Q BD B Q BD B Q BD...

Page 1544: ...igital signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning bPar1 bPar32 BOOL From version 11 00 00 onwards bC470_1 bC470_32 Output of the signal levels FALSE TRUE parameterised in C00470 1 32 Note From version 11 00 00 the outputs are named according to the respective setting parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible settings Info C00470 1 32 Selection of signal levels to be...

Page 1545: ...on signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning dnPar1_p dnPar8_p DINT From version 11 00 00 onwards dnC474_1_p dnC474_8_p Output of the position signals parameterised in C00474 1 8 Note From version 11 00 00 the outputs are named according to the respective setting parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible settings Info C00474 1 8 2147483647 Incr 2147483647 Setting o...

Page 1546: ...e speed signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nPar1_v nPar8_v INT From version 11 00 00 onwards nC473_1_v nC473_8_v Output of the speed signals parameterised in C00473 1 8 Note From version 11 00 00 the outputs are named according to the respective setting parameter for an easier allocation Parameters Possible settings Info C00473 1 8 32767 Incr ms 32767 Sel...

Page 1547: ... _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 2 24 LS_ParFree_v_2 This system block outputs 8 parameterisable speed signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Information possible settings nC478_1_v nC478_8_v INT Output of the speed signals parameterised in C00478 1 8 Parameters Possible settings Info C00478 1 8 32767 Incr ms 32767 Selection of speed signals to be output Q B BY Q BY B Q BY B Q BY B Q BY B Q BY B...

Page 1548: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 17 2 25 LS_ParFree32 This system block outputs 8 parameterisable 32 bit signals Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning dnC479_1 dnC479_8 DINT Output of the 32 bit signals parameterised in C00479 1 8 Parameters Possible settings Info C00479 1 8 2147483647 2147483647 Setting of the 32 bit signals to be output GQ B GQ B GQ B GQ B GQ B GQ B GQ B GQ ...

Page 1549: ...crements The bDataValid status signal indicates that the internal position conversion is completed and the output data are consistent Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning bDataValid BOOL Status signal Position conversion completed data consistent TRUE The conversion of the positions from unit to increments is completed dnC475_1 dnC475_16 DINT Output of the position signals paramet...

Page 1550: ...crements The bDataValid status signal indicates that the internal position conversion is completed and the output data are consistent Outputs Parameters Designator Data type Value meaning bDataValid BOOL Status signal Position conversion completed data consistent TRUE The conversion of the positions from unit to increments is completed dnC475_17 dnC475_32 DINT Output of the position signals parame...

Page 1551: ... C01091 0 ms One time reading writing of the parameter value which has been addressed via thewParIndex and wParSubindex inputs If cycle time C01091 0 ms Cyclic reading writing of the parameter value which has been addressed via the wParIndex and wParSubindex inputs TRUE FALSE Deactivate cyclic reading writing again bReadWrite BOOL Selection Read or write request FALSE Read request TRUE Write reque...

Page 1552: ... write request has not been completed yet 3 An error has occurred if bFail TRUE bFail BOOL Error status TRUE An error has occurred group signal See display parameter C01092 for details wOutHWord wOutLWord WORD Value which was read DataHigh DataLow portion after read request Parameters Possible settings Info C01090 1 6 from version 06 00 00 0 000 16000 000 Parameter to be read or written For a sett...

Page 1553: ...Invalid code 33813 No element of the selection list 33815 Writing of the parameter not permitted 33816 Writing of the parameter only permitted if controller is inhibited 33829 Invalid subcode 33865 No parameter with subcodes C01093 1 6 from version 06 00 00 Arithmetic mode Lenze setting 0 No arithmetic Arithmetic function 0 No arithmetic 1 In16Bit LW 32767 2 In16Bit HW LW 0 65535 3 In32Bit HW_LW 2...

Page 1554: ...rnal conversion If arithmetic modes 1 3 are selected in C01093 the input value read parameter value is internally converted via parameterisable factors Division is not remainder considered 17 80 Internal conversion with write access 17 81 Internal conversion with read access Arithmetic mode wInHWord wInLWord Internal conversion 0 No arithmetic Lenze setting INTEGER_32 4 bytes with sign No same beh...

Page 1555: ...er the inverter switch on Outputs Designator Data type Value meaning b100Hz BOOL Rectangular signal 100 Hz b10Hz BOOL Rectangular signal 10 Hz b2Hz BOOL Rectangular signal 2 Hz b1Hz BOOL Rectangular signal 1 Hz b1HzFlash BOOL 80 ms pulse repetition rate every second b2HzFlash BOOL 80 ms pulse repetition rate every 0 5 seconds bSingleFlash1 BOOL 80 ms pulse repetition rate every 1 25 seconds bSingl...

Page 1556: ...utput is always 1 ms higher than set in C00400 1 or C00400 2 If 0 ms is set a level with a length of 1 ms is created length for instance and if 1000 ms is set a level with a length of 1001 ms is created Parameters Possible settings Info C00400 1 0 ms 60000 Length of the low level break 1 ms For output bSquareWave Lenze setting 1000 ms C00400 2 0 ms 60000 Length of the high level 1 ms For output bS...

Page 1557: ...eter values This input has priority over the bSetRetain inputs Typical application Initialisation of the outputs retain values FALSE The input or retain values are output depending on the bSetRetain input TRUE The outputs selected in C01130 4 and the respective retain values are set to the parameter values and held as long as bLoadParams is TRUE If the parameter values change during this time the ...

Page 1558: ...pective bSetRetain input to TRUE Lenze setting 0x0000 Subcode 4 Parameter selection Selectwhichparametervaluesare to be stored in the retain memory when setting bLoadParams to TRUE Lenze setting 0x0000 Subcodes 1 3 Subcode 4 Bit 0 wIn1 C01131 1 Bit 1 wIn2 C01131 2 Bit 2 wIn3 C01131 3 Bit 3 wIn4 C01131 4 Bit 4 dnIn1 C01132 1 Bit 5 dnIn2 C01132 2 Bit 6 dnIn3 C01132 3 Bit 7 dnIn4 C01132 4 Bit 8 bIn1 ...

Page 1559: ...time base 17 2 34 LS_TouchProbe Interface for touch probe detection 17 2 35 LS_WriteParamList Writing to a configurable list which contains up to 32 local parameters For a detailed description see the main chapter Diagnostics error management LS_SetError_1 system block 680 For a detailed description see the main chapter Diagnostics error management LS_SetError_2 system block 681 For a detailed des...

Page 1560: ...s of AC Drive Profile The fieldbuses EtherNet IP and system bus CANopen are supported 17 3 3 Technology application Table positioning This technology application serves to solve position controlled drive tasks which are normally controlled by a higher level control via a fieldbus e g transport facilities rotary tables storage and retrieval units feed drives metering units hoists 17 3 4 Switch off ...

Page 1561: ...bject RPDO2 in the FB Editor 17 4 3 Port block LP_CanIn3 The LP_CanIn3 port block maps process data object RPDO3 in the FB Editor 17 4 4 Port block LP_CanIn4 The LP_CanIn4 port block maps process data object RPDO4 in the FB Editor 17 4 5 Port block LP_CanOut1 The LP_CanOut1 port block maps process data object TPDO1 in the FB Editor For a detailed description see RPDO1 Port block LP_CanIn1 717 For ...

Page 1562: ...CanOut2 The LP_CanOut2 port block maps process data object TPDO2 in the FB Editor 17 4 7 Port block LP_CanOut3 The LP_CanOut3 port block maps process data object TPDO3 in the FB Editor 17 4 8 Port block LP_CanOut4 The LP_CanOut4 port block maps process data object TPDO4 in the FB Editor For a detailed description see TPDO2 LP_CanOut2 port block 726 For a detailed description see TPDO3 LP_CanOut3 p...

Page 1563: ...og terminals 347 For electrical data see the hardware manual User defined terminal assignment 365 Angle controller overflow 1365 Angle correction in case of transmission errors 1397 AOutx Decoupling value C00442 895 Appl Reference frequency C11 C00059 826 Reference speed C00011 817 Application C00005 812 Application block LA_NCtrl 377 406 Application block LA_SwitchPos 467 Application notes 26 App...

Page 1564: ...1047 1483 1486 C1062 1047 1515 C1063 1047 1515 C1064 1048 1515 C1065 1048 1515 C1066 1048 C1067 1049 1270 1356 1478 C1068 1049 1516 C1069 1050 1356 C107 836 C1070 1050 1356 1357 C1071 1050 1356 C1072 1050 1356 C1073 1051 C1074 1051 1357 C1075 1051 1358 C1076 1052 1346 C1077 1052 1346 C1078 1052 1346 C1079 1053 1346 C1080 1053 1346 C1081 1053 1347 C1082 800 1053 C1083 1054 C1084 1054 C1085 1054 C10...

Page 1565: ...C1247 1084 C1248 1085 C1251 1086 C1252 1086 C129 839 C1294 1087 1306 1307 1308 1310 C1295 1087 C1296 438 444 447 458 459 521 522 526 527 1087 C1297 1088 C1298 593 1089 C1299 1089 C13 818 1436 C130 840 C1300 1090 C1301 1091 C1302 1091 C1303 1092 C1304 1092 C1305 1092 C1306 1093 C1307 1093 C1308 1093 C1309 1094 C131 840 C133 840 C134 840 1436 C1350 1094 C1351 1094 C1352 1095 C1353 1096 C136 840 C137...

Page 1566: ... C199 859 C2 809 C20 820 C200 860 C201 860 C203 860 C204 860 C205 861 C206 861 C21 820 C210 861 C219 861 C22 820 C220 861 1436 C2200 1103 C221 862 1437 C2210 1104 C2212 1104 C2213 1104 C2214 1105 C2215 1105 C2216 1106 C2217 1106 C2218 1106 C2219 1107 C222 862 1463 C2220 1107 C2221 1107 C2222 1108 C2223 1108 C2224 1109 C2225 1109 C2226 1109 C2227 1110 C2228 1110 C2229 1110 C223 862 1463 C2230 1111 ...

Page 1567: ...C2314 1133 C2315 1133 C233 864 1464 C234 864 C235 864 C236 864 C24 821 C241 864 1437 C242 865 1464 C243 865 1464 C244 865 1464 C245 865 1464 C246 866 1464 C247 866 1464 C249 866 1492 C25 821 C250 866 1493 1494 C251 866 1380 C252 867 1380 C253 867 1380 C254 867 C2556 1133 C2580 1133 C2581 1134 C2582 1134 C2589 1136 C2593 1136 C26 821 C2607 1137 C2610 1137 C2611 1138 C265 867 C2652 1139 C27 822 C270...

Page 1568: ...C322 872 C323 873 C324 873 C33 822 C338 874 1260 C339 874 1261 C34 823 C341 874 C342 875 C343 876 C344 876 C345 877 C347 877 C349 878 C350 878 C351 879 C352 879 C353 879 C354 880 C355 880 C356 881 C357 881 C358 881 C359 882 C36 823 C360 882 C364 883 C366 883 C367 884 C368 884 C369 885 C370 885 C371 886 C372 886 C381 886 C385 886 C386 887 C387 887 C39 823 1436 C400 887 1556 C401 888 C407 888 C408 8...

Page 1569: ...11 C495 911 C496 912 C497 912 C5 812 C50 824 C505 912 C506 913 C507 913 C508 914 C509 915 C51 824 C510 916 C516 916 C517 916 C52 824 C53 825 C54 825 C55 825 C56 825 C560 917 C561 918 C563 918 C565 919 C566 919 C567 919 C569 919 C57 826 C570 920 C571 920 C572 920 C574 921 C575 921 C576 921 C577 921 C578 921 C579 922 C58 826 C580 922 C581 922 C582 923 C584 923 C585 923 C586 923 C588 924 C59 826 C590...

Page 1570: ... C686 951 1278 C687 951 1278 C690 951 1279 C691 951 1279 C692 951 1279 C693 952 1280 1281 C694 952 1280 1281 C695 952 1280 1281 C696 952 1450 C697 953 1451 C698 953 1452 C699 953 1420 C7 814 C70 827 C700 953 C701 955 C705 957 C706 957 C71 828 C710 957 C711 959 C712 961 C715 962 C716 962 C717 962 C72 828 C720 962 1366 C721 962 1368 1369 C725 963 C726 963 C727 963 1538 C728 964 1538 C729 964 C73 828...

Page 1571: ...1019 C88 832 C89 832 C890 1020 C90 832 C905 1021 C909 1021 C91 833 C910 1021 C915 1022 C916 1022 C917 1022 C918 1022 C919 1023 C92 833 C920 1023 C922 1023 C93 833 C937 1023 C938 1024 C939 1024 C940 1024 1312 1314 1315 1316 C941 1024 1312 1314 1315 1316 C942 1025 1312 1314 1315 1316 C95 833 C950 1025 1395 C951 1025 1395 C952 1026 1395 C953 1026 1395 C959 1026 1332 1336 1339 C960 1026 1332 C961 1027...

Page 1572: ...6 CE5 CAN RPDO4 error message 668 Change of the operating mode 512 CI01 Module missing incompatible error message 668 Ck01 Pos HW limit switch error message 673 Ck02 Neg HW limit switch error message 673 Ck03 Pos SW limit position error message 673 Ck04 Neg SW limit position error message 674 Ck05 Following error 1 error message 675 Ck06 Following error 1 error message 675 Ck07 Travel range limit ...

Page 1573: ...ror message 671 dF26 Appl watchdog error message 672 dF50 Retain error error message 672 dF51 CuCcr error error message 672 dF52 BuCcr error error message 673 dH09 EEPROM power section error message 677 dH10 Fan failure error message 677 dH68 Adjustment data error CU error message 677 dH69 Adjustment data error BU error message 677 dH70 ControlUnit is unequal to BaseUnit error message 677 DI 1 2 6...

Page 1574: ...3 00066 662 xx 0123 00071 662 xx 0123 00074 663 xx 0123 00090 663 xx 0123 00093 663 xx 0123 00094 663 xx 0123 00095 663 xx 0123 00096 664 xx 0123 00097 664 xx 0123 00098 664 xx 0123 00099 664 xx 0123 00105 664 xx 0123 00145 665 xx 0123 00200 665 xx 0123 00201 665 xx 0123 00205 665 xx 0123 00207 665 xx 0125 00001 666 xx 0125 00002 666 xx 0127 00002 666 xx 0127 00015 666 xx 0131 00000 666 xx 0131 00...

Page 1575: ...detect is running C01770 1102 Filter time constant C00497 912 Firmware C00201 860 Firmware product type C00200 860 Firmware update 113 Firmware version C00099 834 Firmware version C00100 834 Fixed setpoint x L_NSet_1 n Fix C00039 823 Flying restart function 264 Activation C00990 1034 Current C00994 1035 Integration time C00993 1035 Process C00991 1034 Restart on the fly fd_add C00989 1034 Start fr...

Page 1576: ...tion from reference project 1242 Integrated error detection 748 Internal control signals C00138 842 Inversion of gearbox stages C01067 1049 Inverter motor brake 289 nAdd C00987 1033 PT1 filter time C00988 1033 J Jerk limitation 591 K Keypad 33 35 Default manual jog C00453 899 Default parameter C00466 903 Default welcome screen C00467 903 Display of internal process factors 1534 Fct STOP key C00469...

Page 1577: ...2 1304 L_ConvPP_3 1305 L_ConvUnitsToIncr 1306 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1 1306 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2 1308 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3 1310 L_ConvW 1312 L_ConvW conversion method C00942 1025 L_ConvW denominator C00941 1024 L_ConvW numerator C00940 1024 L_ConvW_1 1312 L_ConvW_2 1314 L_ConvW_3 1315 L_ConvW_4 1316 L_ConvWordsToDInt 1317 L_ConvWordsToDInt_1 1317 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2 1318 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3 1319 L_ConvWo...

Page 1578: ...0662 947 L_GainOffset 1384 L_GainOffset_1 1384 L_GainOffset_2 1385 L_GainOffset_3 1386 L_GainOffsetP 1387 L_GainOffsetP 1 3 Parameter C00677 949 L_GainOffsetP_1 1387 L_GainOffsetP_2 1388 L_GainOffsetP_3 1389 L_GainOffsetPhiP 1390 L_GainOffsetPhiP 1 2 Parameter C00678 949 L_GainOffsetPhiP_1 1390 L_GainOffsetPhiP_2 1391 L_GearComp 1392 L_GearComp_1 1392 Num_Denom C01048 1043 Offset C01047 1043 L_Int...

Page 1579: ...n_3 1449 L_OffsetGainP 1450 L_OffsetGainP_1 1450 Gain C00670 948 Offset C00696 952 L_OffsetGainP_2 1451 Gain C00671 948 Offset C00697 953 L_OffsetGainP_3 1452 Gain C00672 948 Offset C00698 953 L_OffsetGainPhiP 1453 L_OffsetGainPhiP 1 2 Gain C00674 948 Offset C00673 948 L_OffsetGainPhiP_1 1453 L_OffsetGainPhiP_2 1454 L_Or 1455 L_Or_1 1455 L_Or_2 1456 L_Or_3 1457 L_Or_4 1458 L_Or5 1459 L_Or5_1 1459 ...

Page 1580: ...s C01066 1048 L_Transient 1519 L_Transient 1 4 Function C01138 1064 Pulse duration C01139 1065 L_Transient 5 8 Function C01140 1065 L_Transient 5 8 pulse duration C01141 1065 L_Transient_1 1519 L_Transient_2 1522 L_Transient_3 1523 L_Transient_4 1524 L_Transient_5 1525 L_Transient_6 1526 L_Transient_7 1527 L_Transient_8 1528 LA_NCtrl 377 406 Analog connection list C00700 953 Application block 377 ...

Page 1581: ...LS_ParFree_v_2 1547 LS_ParFree_v_2 C00478 907 LS_ParFree32 1548 LS_ParFree32 C00479 907 LS_ParFreeUnit 1549 LS_ParFreeUnit_1_2 C00475 906 LS_ParFreeUnit_2 1550 LS_ParReadWrite 1551 LS_ParReadWrite 1 6 Arithmetic mode C01093 1057 Configuration C01098 1058 Cycle time C01091 1056 Denominator C01095 1058 FailState C01092 1057 Index C01090 1056 Numerator C01094 1058 LS_ParReadWrite_1 1551 LS_ParReadWri...

Page 1582: ...5 Slip comp C02216 1106 SLPSM Controlled current setpoint C02300 1127 Filter cutoff frequency C02302 1128 Filter time rotor position C02303 1128 PLL gain C02304 1129 Switching speed C02301 1128 SLVC Cross current controller gain C02292 1125 Field current controller gain C02291 1124 Speed limitation C02273 1119 Speed sensor selection C02260 1117 Switching frequency C02214 1105 Ti current controller...

Page 1583: ...089 MCTRL Actual speed value C00051 824 Optimisations C02864 1146 Special settings C02865 1148 Special settings C02866 1149 Speed setpoint C00050 824 Status C01000 1036 Memory module 39 Binding ID 47 Min max speed 535 Mode Position calculation C01294 1087 Position calculation C01296 1087 Modulo measuring system 532 Moment of inertia from load C00919 1023 Moment of inertia motor C00273 868 Monitori...

Page 1584: ...ion with increased rated power 262 Operation with safety module 514 Optical tracking 111 Optimising the response to setpoint changes SC 245 Optimising the response to setpoint changes SLVC 202 Option Lock bFail at TroubleQSP 129 Original application control source C00008 815 oS1 Maximum speed limit reached error message 660 oS2 Max motor speed error message 661 Oscillation damping 272 Oscillation ...

Page 1585: ...04 835 R Ramp function generator L_DFRFG 1345 Rated device current C00098 834 Rated device currents C00920 1023 Rated device voltage C00970 1029 Rated heat amount of brake resist C00131 840 Rated motor current C00088 832 Rated motor frequency C00089 832 Rated motor power C00081 831 Rated motor speed C00087 832 Rated motor torque C00097 833 Rated motor voltage C00090 832 Rated power brake resistor ...

Page 1586: ...otor control 153 Selection of switching frequency 258 Selection of the control type 149 Sensibility Setpoint feedforward control C00653 946 Sensorless control for synchronous machines SLPSM 151 Sensorless vector control SLVC 151 192 Serial number C00204 860 Servo control SC 151 231 Setpoint holding C01239 1078 Setpoint synchronisation ramp 535 Setting of compatibility C02868 1151 Setting of motor ...

Page 1587: ...ler C00071 828 Time settings C00181 856 Torque C00056 825 Torque control with speed limitation SC 237 Torque control with speed limitation SLVC 196 Torque feedforward control SC 245 Torque feedforward control SLVC 202 Torque limitation 169 Touch probe detection 357 TP Edge selection C02810 1139 Pos window end C02814 1141 Pos window start C02813 1140 Position offset C02812 1140 Position source C028...

Page 1588: ..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Vmin boost C00016 818 Voltage interpol point n C00968 1029 Vp V f sensor C00972 1030 VFC ECO Minimum voltage V f C00977 1031 Ti CosPhi controller C00976 1031 Voltage reduction C00978 1031 Voltage reduction ramp C00982 1032 Vp CosPhi controller C00975 1030 Vmin boost 166 Vp current controller C00075 829 Vp speed controller C00070 827 ...

Page 1589: ... were created to the best of our knowledge and belief to give you the best possible support for handling our product If you have suggestions for improvement please e mail us to feedback docu Lenze de Thank you for your support Your Lenze documentation team ...

Page 1590: ...06 2017 TD23 Lenze Drives GmbH Breslauer Straße 3 D 32699 Extertal Germany 49 5154 82 0 49 5154 82 2800 lenze lenze com www lenze com Service Lenze Service GmbH Breslauer Straße 3 D 32699 Extertal Germany 008000 24 46877 24 h helpline 49 5154 82 1112 service lenze com ...

Lenze L-force 8400 Series, Reference Manual, Page: 129 / 1590

Search results

Summary of Contents for L-force 8400 Series

Reviews: